巴利语辭典

诸大德合编

Avedha: {'def': '(adj.) [a + vedha, grd. of vidh (vyadh) to pierce, Sk. avedhya] not to be hurt or disturbed, inviolable, unshakable, imperturbable Sn.322 (°dhamma = akampanasabhāva SnA 331). (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avekalla: {'def': '(°-) adj.) [a + vekalla] without deficiency, in °buddhi complete knowledge J.VI,297. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avekkhana: {'def': '【中】看着，考虑。(p45)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】看著，考虑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Avekkhati: {'def': '(ava + ikkh + a), 看着，考虑。 avekkhi, 【过】。 avekkhita, 【过分】。(p45)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[B.Sk. avīkṣate. The regular Pāli form however is apekkhati, to which the BSk. av° corresponds] to look at, to consider, to see It.33 (v.l. ap°); Dh.28, 50, J.IV,6; DhA.I,259 (= passati). (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ava+ikkh(梵īks)见+a)( B.Sk. avīksate. The regular Pāli form however is apekkhati),看著，考虑。avekkhi,【过】。avekkhita,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Avekkhipati: {'def': '[avaṁ + khipati, avaṁ here in form ave corresp. to avaḥ, cp. pure for puraḥ etc.] to jump, hop, lit. to throw (a foot) down J.IV,251 (= pacchimapāde khipati C.). (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avelā: {'def': '【阴】不合适的时间。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】不合适的时间。(p45)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Avera: {'def': '(adj.) [a + vera] peaceable, mild, friendly Sn.150 (= veravirahita KhA 248); Sdhp.338. -- °ṁ (nt.) friendliness, kindness D.I,247 (°citta); Dh.5 (= khantimetta DhA I 51). (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】友善的。【中】仁慈。(p45)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】友善的。【中】仁慈。verinesu averino﹐(我们)在仇怨中没有怨仇。(averino ‹ a-verin, a.m.Nom.pl. 修饰「我们」(省略)。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Averin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) = avera Dh.197, 258. (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Averī: {'def': '【形】无敌意的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】无敌意的。(p45)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Avhaya: {'def': '【阳】名字，点名。【形】 (在【合】中) 名叫。(p45)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹avhayati; cp. Sk. āhvaya “betting”),【阳】名字，点名，受邀。【形】(在【合】中) 名叫。avhāyaṁ, ppr.m.Nom.sg. ‹ ā-hū /ā-hvā, avhāti, avhayati, avheti「称呼，叫，邀请」。巴利语中h常与其后子音「倒置」(-vh- ‹ -hv-)；又，ā- 遇连续子音时，弱化为a- (「二音长法则」)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. avhayati; cp. Sk. āhvaya “betting”] calling, name; adj. (-°) called, having the name of Sn.684 (isi°), 686 (Asit°), 689 (kanhasiri°), 1133 (Sace°, cp. Nd² 624). (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avhayati: {'def': '﹐avheti (a+vhe+a)(Sk. āhvayati, ā + hū or hvā)-- 1.唤起(invoke)，呼吁(appeal to)(avhayāma imper.)。2.呼叫(= pakkosati); (avhettha pret.). 3.点名，叫(= āmanteti ālapati)。【过分】avhāta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(a + vhe + a)。(p45)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Avheti [Sk. āhvayati, ā + hū or hvā] -- 1. to call upon, invoke, appeal to D.I,244 (avhayāma imper.); PvA.164. -- 2. to call, call up, summon M 1.17; J.II,10, 252 (= pakkosati); V,220 (avhayesi); VI,18, 192, 273 (avhettha pret.); Vv 33¹ (avheti). -- 3. to give a name, to call, to address SnA 487 (= āmanteti ālapati). -- pp. avhāta (q. v.). (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avheti: {'def': '参考 avhāti。(p45)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '呼叫，称呼，演说召唤。参考 avhāti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Avhāna: {'def': '【中】名字，点名。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. avhayati, Sk. āhvāna in diff. meaning] ‹-› 1. begging, calling, asking Sn.710; Vism.68 (°ânabhinandanā). -- 2. addressing, naming SnA 605 (= nāma). (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】名字，点名。(p45)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Avhāta: {'def': '[pp. of avhayati] called, summoned J.III,165 = (an° = anāhuta ayāctia) = Pv.I,12³, cp. PvA.64. The id. p. at Th.2, 129 reads ayācita. (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(avhāti 的【过分】), 已呼叫，已命名。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(avhāti 的【过分】), 已呼叫，已命名。(p45)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Avhāti: {'def': '(a+vhā+a), 呼叫，称呼，演说召唤。avhayi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(a + vhā + a), 呼叫，称呼，演说召唤。 avhayi, 【过】。(p45)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Avhāyana: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. āhvayana] calling to, asking, invocation, imploration D.I,11 (Sir-avhāyane, v. l. avhayana; expl^d. at DA.I,97 with reading Sirivhāyana as “ehi Siri mayhaṁ sire patiṭṭhāhī ti evaṁ sire Siriyā avhayanaṁ”), 244, 245 (v. l. avhāna). (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avhāyika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. avhaya] calling, giving a name; (m.) one who gives a name J.I,401 = III,234. (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avibhūta: {'def': '【形】不清楚的，不明显的。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(a+vibhūta),【形】不清楚的，不明显的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aviccaṁ: {'def': 'at J.V,434 read aviviccaṁ [a + viviccaṁ] i. e. not secretly, openly. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avicāreti: {'def': '[a + vicāreti] not to examine VvA.336. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aviddasu: {'def': '【阳】愚人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】愚人。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [a + viddasu] ignorant, foolish Sn.762 (= bāla SnA. 509); Dh.268 = Nd² 514 (= aviññū DhA.III,395); PvA.18 (so read for avindasu). (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avidita: {'def': '【形】未知的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】未知的。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Avidūra: {'def': '【形】接近的，不远的, 【中】附近。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】接近的，不远的,【中】附近。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [a + vidūra] not far, near; usually in Loc. °e as adv. near Sn. 147. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aviggaha: {'def': '【阳】无身体的，即是：爱神。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】无身体的，即是：爱神。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aviha: {'def': '[BSk. avṛha, abṛha] 無煩 [天].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '[BSk. avṛha, abṛha] 無煩 [天].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '[of uncertain etym.] the world of the Aviha’s, i.e. the 12th of the 16 Brahmā-words, cp. Kindred Sayings 48 n. 3; Cpd. 139. -- S.I,35, 60; A.I,279; Pug.17. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aviheṭhaka: {'def': '【形】不伤害的，不骚扰的。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [a + viheṭhaka] not harassing, not hurting D.III,166 (but cp. SnA 318 avihesaka in same context); Miln.219. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】不伤害的，不骚扰的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aviheṭhana: {'def': '【中】非伤害。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】非伤害。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Avihita: {'def': '【形】未做的，未准备的。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】未做的，未准备的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Avihiŋsā: {'def': '【阴】人性，不残酷。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Avihiṁsa: {'def': '(Avihesa) (f.) [a + vihiṁsā] absence of cruelty, mercy, humanity, friendliness, love D.III,213, 215, 240 (avihesā); Sn.292 (= sakaruṇabhāva SnA 318); It.82 (°vitakka). (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avihiṁsā: {'def': '【阴】人性，不残酷，无害。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Avihā: {'def': '无烦天。Imesu pana paṭhamatalavāsino appakena kālena attano ṭhānaṁ na vijahantīti avihā.(在第一层天的住者，只有少时自己的住处，为‘无烦天’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Avijahati: {'def': '(a+vi+hā+a, hā 重叠，前 hā 被改成 ja), 不放弃，不离开。【过】avijahi。【现分】avijahanta。【独】avijahitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Avijjamāna: {'def': '【形】不存在的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】不存在的。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Avijjaṇḍa-kosa: {'def': '【阳】无明(蛋)壳。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Avijjā: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. avidyā; fr. a + vid] ignorance; the main root of evil and of continual rebirth (see paṭicca-samuppāda, cp. S.II,6, 9, 12; Sn.p. 141 & many other passages). See on term Cpd. 83 n. 3, 187 sq, 262 sq. & for further detail vijjā. avijjā is termed an anusaya (D.III,254, 282; S.IV,205, 208 sq., 212); it is one of the āsavā (Vin.III,4; D.I,84; III,216; It.49; Dhs.1100, 1109), of the oghā (D.III,230, 276; Dhs.390, 1061, 1162), of the nīvaraṇāni (S.II,23; A.I,223; It.8; Dhs.1162, 1486), of the saṁyojanāni (D.III,254; Dhs.1131, 1460). See for various characterisatons the foll. passages: Vin.I,1; III,3; D.III,212, 230, 234, 274; M.I,54, 67, 144; S.II,4, 26, 263; III,47, 162; IV,256; V,52; A.I,8, 285; II,132, 158, 247; III,84 sq., 414; IV,228; It.34 (yā kāc’imā duggatiyo asmiṁ loke paramhi ca avijjāmūlakā sabbā icchā-lobha-sammussayā), 57, 81; Sn.199, 277, 729 (jāti-maraṇa-saṁsāraṁ ye vajanti punappunaṁ . . . avijjāy’eva sā gati), 730, 1026, 1033 (avijjāya nivuto loko); Dh.243; Nd² 99; Pug.21; Dhs.390, 1061, 1162; DhA.III,350; IV,161 (°paligha). (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '无明', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '无明。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '(梵avidyā; ‹a无+vid知),【阴】无明、无知(ignorance)。avijjogha,【阳】无明流，无知的风潮。《无碍解道注释》(PsA.CS:p.1.109)︰Avijjāti Suttantapariyāyena dukkhādīsu catūsu ṭhānesu aññāṇaṁ, Abhidhammapariyāyena pubbantādīhi saddhiṁ aṭṭhasu. Vuttañhetaṁ-- “Tattha katamā avijjā? 1Dukkhe aññāṇaṁ, 2dukkhasamudaye aññāṇaṁ, 3dukkhanirodhe aññāṇaṁ, 4dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya aññāṇaṁ, 5pubbante aññāṇaṁ, 6aparante aññāṇaṁ, 7pubbantāparante aññāṇaṁ, 8idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu aññāṇan”ti (Dhammasaṅgaṇī(Dhs.)《法集论》(PTS:#1100, CS:#1106；《分别论》Vbh.136, CS.#226).(什么是‘无明’：经教以无知苦等四谛。论教以八事的无知。这么说—什么是无明？1无知苦，2无知苦集，3无知苦灭，4无知趣向苦灭之道，5无知过去，6无知未来，7无知过去未来，8无知此缘性、缘起诸法。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】无明，无知。~jogha,【阳】无明流，无知的风潮。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Avijānaṁ: {'def': '[a + vijānaṁ] not knowing, ignorant Ḍḥ.38, 60; It.103. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avikampamāna: {'def': '(adj.) [a + vi + kampamāna, ppr. med. of kamp] not hesitating, not wavering, not doubting J.IV,310 (= anosakkamāna C.; Kern takes it at this passage as a + vikalpamāna, see Toev. s.v., but unnecessarily); VI,176 (= nirāsaṅka C.); J.VI,273. (Page 84)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avikampin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. a + vi + kamp] unmoved, not shaking, steady Vv 50²² (= acala VvA.215). (Page 84)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avikampī: {'def': '【阳】平静的人，不动摇的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】平静的人，不动摇的人。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Avikkhepa: {'def': '[a + vikkhepa] calmness, balance, equanimity D.III,213; A.I,83; Ps.I,94; II,228; Dhs.11, 15, 570. (Page 84)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】平静，心理平衡。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】平静，心理平衡。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Avikopin: {'def': '(adj.) [a + vikopin; fr. vi + kup] not agitated, not moving, unshaken, undisturbed J.VI,226 (acchejja +). (Page 84)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avilambitaŋ: {'def': '【副】很快地，不延迟地。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Avilambitaṁ: {'def': '【副】很快地，不延迟地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Avinibbhoga: {'def': '【形】不明了的，不可分开的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ad.) [a + vinibbhoga] not to be distinguished, indistinct J.III,428 (°sadda). (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】不明了的，不可分开的。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Avinibbhujaṁ: {'def': '(adj.) [ppr. of a + vinibbhujati] unable to distinguish or to know J v.121 (= atīrento C.). (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avinicchayaññū: {'def': '(adj.) [a + vinicchaya + ñū] not knowing how to decide J.V,367. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avinipāta-dhamma: {'def': '【中】不堕法(不再犯会堕入恶趣的法)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Avināsaka: {'def': '(°ika) (adj.) [a + vināsa + ka] not causing destruction A.III,38 (°ika); J.V,116 (= anāsaka C.). (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avināsana: {'def': '(adj.) [a + vināsana] imperishable Dpvs.IV,16. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avinīta: {'def': '【形】未经训练的，没有受过教育的。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】未经训练的，没有受过教育的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Avipariṇāma: {'def': '[a + viparināma] absence of change, steadfastness, endurance D.I,18; III,31, 33 (°dhamma); DA.I,113 (= jarā-vasena vipariṇāmassa abhāvato). (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avippavāsa: {'def': '【阳】非分离，不分离。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】出现，注意，非分离。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [a + vippavāsa] thoughtfulness, mindfulness, attention; adj. not neglectful, mindful, attentive, eager Vin.V,216; Sn.1142 (cp. Nd² 101: anussatiyā bhāvento); DA.I,104 (appamādo vuccati satiyā avippavāso); DhA.IV,26 (appamāda = satiyā avippavāsa). (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avippaṭisāra: {'def': '[a + vippaṭisāra] absence of regret or remorse A.III,46. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】不悔。A.10.2./V, 2.︰“Sīlavato, bhikkhave, sīlasampannassa na cetanāya karaṇīyaṁ--‘Avippaṭisāro me uppajjatū’ti. Dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, yaṁ sīlavato sīlasampannassa avippaṭisāro uppajjati.(诸比丘！持戒、具戒者，不应思「愿我得不悔」。诸比丘！持戒、具戒者自然得不悔。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Avirodha: {'def': '【阳】缺少敌对。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[a + virodha] absence of obstruction, gentleness M.II,105 = Th.1, 875. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】缺少敌对。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Avirodhana: {'def': '(nt.) = avirodha J.III,320, 412; V,378. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aviruddha: {'def': '(adj.) [a + viruddha] not contrary, unobstructed, free, without difficulties Dh.406; Sn.365, 704, 854. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】不相反的，友好的。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】不相反的，友好的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Avirūhnā: {'def': '【反】不成长，非生长。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Avirūḷha: {'def': '【形】不生长的，不扩延的。 avirūḷhi, 【阴】 1. 非生长，2. 再生的止息。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】不生长的，不扩延的。avirūḷhi,【阴】1.非生长，2.再生的止息。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Avirūḷhi: {'def': '(f.) [a + virūḷhi] absence or cesssation of growth Sn.235; DhA.I,245 (°dhamma). (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avisaggatā: {'def': '(f.) [a + visaggatā, v.l. viy°, thus as a + viyagga, Sk. vyagra = ākula] state of being undisturbed, harmony, balance J.VI,224 (C. avisaggata). Cp. avyagga. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avisare: {'def': 'at J.V,117 according to Kern, Toev. s.v. corrupted from avisaye, i. e. towards a wrong or unworthy object [a + visaya, loc], C. differently: avisare = avisaritvā atikkamitva; v.l. adhisare. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avisaŋvāda: {'def': '【阳】事实。 avisaŋvādaka, avisaŋvādī, 【形】讲实话的人。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Avisaṁvāda: {'def': '【阳】事实。avisaṁvādaka, avisaṁvādī,【形】讲实话的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Avisaṁvādaka: {'def': '(adj.) [a + visaṁvada + ka] not deceiving, not lying D.I,4; III,170; Pug.57; DA.I,73. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avisaṁvādanatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. a + visaṁvāda] honesty, faithfulness, uprightness D.III,190. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avisaṁvādeti: {'def': '[a + visaṁ + Caus. of vad] to keep one’s word, to be honest, to be true J.V,124. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avissaji: {'def': 'at J.VI,79 is with Kern, Toev. s. v. better to be read avassaji (see avassajati). (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avissajjiya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of a + vissajjati] not to be given away, inalienable (cp. avebhaṅgiya) Vin.I,305 (°ika for °iya); II,170 (five such objects in detail); V,216 (+ avebh°); J.VI,568. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avissāsaniya: {'def': '(adj.) [a + visāsana + iya, ika] not to be trusted, untrustworthy J.III,474. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avisāhaṭa: {'def': '(adj.) [a + visāhaṭa] imperturbed Dhs.15, 24, 287, 570. (°mānasata). (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(a + visāhaṭa),【形】不散乱的，镇静的(imperturbed) avisāhaṭamānasata, 不散乱心性。DhsA.#11.︰Uddhacca-vicikicchā- vaseneva ca cittaṁ visāhaṭaṁ nāma hoti, ito cito ca harīyati. Ayaṁ pana evaṁ avisāhaṭassa mānasassa bhāvoti avisāhaṭamānasatā.(处於掉举、疑的心烦，为‘散乱’，从此被带著堆积。然而不散乱的心存在，为‘不散乱心性’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Avitakka: {'def': '(adj.) [a + vitakka] free from thought D.III,219, 274; Th.2, 75 (“where reasonings cease” trsl.); Dhs.161 (“free from the working of conception” trsl.), 504 etc. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avivayha: {'def': '【形】1.难忍。2.不适合结婚的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】 1. 难忍。 2. 不适合结婚的。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Avivāda: {'def': '[a + vivāda] absence of contesting or disputing, agreement, harmony D.III,245; Sn.896 (°bhūma SnA 557 or °bhumma Nd¹ 308, expl^d. as Nibbāna). (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aviññāta: {'def': '【形】不知道的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】不知道的。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aviññāṇaka: {'def': '【形】无识的，无感觉的。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】无识的，无感觉的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [a + viññāṇa + ka] senscless, without feeling or consciousness, unfeeling DhA.I,6 (saviññāṇaka +). (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aviññū: {'def': '(adj.) = aviddasu. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avosita: {'def': '[reading uncertain, cp. avyosita] only in neg. an° unfulfilled, undone Th.1, 101. (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avuṭṭhi: {'def': '(a+vuṭṭhi)﹐【阴】无雨。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Avuṭṭhika: {'def': '【形】无雨的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】无雨的。(p45)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Avyagga: {'def': '(ad) [a + vyagga, Sc. vyagra] not bewildered, not confused S.V,66. Cp. avisaggatā. (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avyatha: {'def': '(adj.) [a + vyatha, cp. Sk. vyathā misfortune] not miserable, fortunate J.III,466 (= akilamāna C.). (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avyatta: {'def': '【形】1.不显示的。2.未学习的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】 1. 不显示的。 2. 未学习的。(p45)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Avyattatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. avyatta] state or condition of not being manifest or visible, concealment, hiding DhA.II,38. (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avyaya: {'def': '【中】无格式变化词，无损失。 avyayena, 【副】没有任何的开支。 avyayībhāva, 【阳】复合词中之一个词素是无格式变化词。(p45)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[a + vyaya | absence of loss or change, safety D. I.72 (Instr. °ena safely); Miln.393 (as abbaya T.). (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(=abyaya),【中】无格式变化词，无损失。avyayena,【副】没有任何的开支。avyayībhāva,【阳】复合词中之一个词素是无格式变化词。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Avyosita: {'def': '(adj.) [a + vyosita, Sk. vyavasita] not having reached perfection, imperfect Th.1, 784 (aby°). (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avyāharati: {'def': '[a + vy + āharati] not to bring or procure J.V,80. (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avyākata: {'def': '【形】不指定的。(p45)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(=abyākata)(‹ pp. of a-vyākaroti)﹐【形】不解说的，无法断言的，无记的。DhsA.p.261.︰catubbidhaṁ abyākataṁ--vipākaṁ kiriyaṁ rūpaṁ nibbānanti.(四种无记︰果报、唯作、色、涅盘。) AA.7.51./IV,38.︰abyākatavatthūsūti ekaṁsādivasena akathitavatthūsu(无记事︰不可论究而明确之事。)十四无记：梵caturdawāvyākrta，乃十四种之不记答(avyākata无记，无法断言)，为佛四记答中之舍置记答。巴利文经典只有十无记，缺三、四、七、八。十四种，即：(一)世间常，sassato loko；this world is eternal.(二)世间无常，asassata loko；this world is not eternal.(三)世间亦常亦无常，(梵 wāwvataw cāwāwvataw ca；this world is both eternal and not eternal)(四)世间非常非无常，(梵 naiva wāwvato nāwāwvataw ca；this world is neither eternal nor not eternal)(五)世间有边，antavā loko；this world is finite.(六)世间无边，anantavā loko；this world is infinite.(七)世间亦有边亦无边，(梵 antavāṁw cānantavāṁw ca；this world is both finite and infinite )(八)世间非有边非无边，(梵 naivāntavāṁ nānantavāṁ；this world is neither finite nor infinite. )(九)如来死后有，hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā；after death a tathāgata exists.(‘如来’在此指‘有情’(satto),cf. (AA.7.51./IV,37.))(十)如来死后无，na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā；after death a tathāgata does not exist.(十一)如来死后亦有亦非有，hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā；after death a tathāgata both exists and does not exist.(十二)如来死后非有非非有，neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā；after death a tathāgata neither exists nor does not exist.(十三)命身一(命即身)，taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīraṁ；the soul and the body are the same.(十四)命身异(命身异)，aṅṅaṁ jīvaṁ aṅṅaṁ sarīraṁ；the soul is one thing and the body another.「世间常」等十四无记，「无记」(avyākata，无法断言)，前十二句问「有、无」，后二问「一、异」。此类问题佛陀一概不答。原因有三：(一)虚妄无实。(二)诸法既非「有常」，亦非「断灭」。(三)无益之戏论。巴利三藏讲「十无记」，没有3世间常无常，4世间非常非无常，7世有边无边，8世非有边非无边。另参考《箭喻经》(T1.804上~)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Avyāpajjha: {'def': '¹ (abyābajjha) (nt.) [a + vyapajjha or bajjha, a confusion between the roots bādh or pad] (act.) kindness of heart; (pass.) freedom from suffering (Ep. of Nibbāna) Vin.I,183 (avyāpajjh°âdhimutta); It.31 (abyābajjh’ārāma). (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2(abyābajjha) (a无+vyāpajjha逆向行(【未被】),【形】无压迫的(free from oppression or injury)，无伤害的(not hurting)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1(abyābajjha) (a无+vyapajjha or bajjha),【中】仁慈的心(kindness of heart﹐pass.)，解脱苦(freedom from suffering ﹐ep.of Nibbāna) 。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】无压迫的，无苦楚的。(p45)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (abyābajjha) adj.) [either a + *vyāpadya or more likely a + *vyābādhya] free from oppression or injury; not hurting, kind D.II,242 (avera +), 276; M.I,90; It.16 = 52 (sukhaṁ); Miln.410 (avera +). (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avyāpanna: {'def': '(adj.) [a + vyāpanna] free from desire to injure, free from malice, friendly, benevolent D.III,82,83 (°citta); A.II,220 (id.); Pug.68 (id.). -- Same in B.Sk. e.g. Divy 105, 302. (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avyāpāda: {'def': '【阳】没有恶意。(p45)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】没有恶意(absence of desire to injure, freedom from malice)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[a + vyāpāda] absence of desire to injure, freedom from malice D.III,215, 229, 240; It.82 (all MSS. have aby°); Dhs.33, 36, 277, 313, 1056. (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avyāseka: {'def': '(adj.) [a + vy + āseka] untouched, unimpaired D.I,182 (°sukha = kilesa vyāseka-virahitattā avyāseka DA.I,183); Pug.59. (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avyāvaṭa: {'def': '【形】不占领的，不烦恼的。(p45)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(=abyāvaṭa),【形】不占领的，不烦恼的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [a + vyāvaṭa = Sk vyāpṛta] not occupied, i. e. careless, neglectful, not worrying Vin.III,136; Nd² 72 (abyāvaṭa for appossukka Sn.43); J.III,65; VI,188. Miln.177 (abyā°). (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avyāyata: {'def': '(adj.) [a + vyāyata of yam] at random, without discrimination, careless J.I,496 (= avyatta C.). (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avyāyika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. avyaya] not liable to loss or change, imperishable J.V,508 (= avigacchanaka C.). (Page 86)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avāgata: {'def': '[ava + ā + gacchati] only in phrase dhammā avāgat-amhā, we are fallen from righteousness, J.V,82. (C. explains apāgata). (Page 84)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avākaroti: {'def': '[either ava + ā + karoti or avaṁ + karoti, the latter more probable. It is not necessary to take it with Kern, Toev. s. v. as Sk. apākṛṇoti, apa + ā + kṛ] 1. to revoke, undo, rescind, not fulfill, spoil, destroy J.III,339 (avākayirā = avakareyya chindeyya C.); V,495, 500; VI, 280. -- 2. to give back, restore J.VI,577 (= deti C.). (Page 84)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avākirati: {'def': 'wrong by Hardy VvA.Index for avakirati (q. v.). (Page 84)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avāpurati: {'def': '(ava + ā + pur + a), 打开。 avāpuri, 【过】。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[same as apāpurati] to open (a door) J.I,63; VI,373. (Page 84)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ava+ā+pur+a), 打开。avāpuri,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Avāpuraṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [same as apāpuraṇa] a key S.III,132; A.IV,374. (Page 84)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】钥匙。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】钥匙。(p44)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Avāvaṭa: {'def': '(adj.) [a + vāvaṭa] unobstructed, unhindered, free. Of a woman, not married J.V,213 (= apetâvaraṇā, which read for °bharaṇā, apariggahitā C.). (Page 84)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avāṭuka: {'def': 'see apāṭuka. (Page 84)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Avīci: {'def': 'f. [BSk. 〃] 阿鼻, 無間 [地獄].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '无间地狱。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '【形】无间的，无波的, 【阴】大地狱之一。(p45)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'f. [BSk. 〃] 阿鼻[地獄], 無間[地獄].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '【形】无间的，无波的,【阴】无间地狱，八大地狱之一。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[B.Sk. avīci a + vīci (?) no intermission, or no pleasure (?), unknown, but very likely popular etym.] 1. avīciniraya, one of the (great) hells (see niraya), described in vivid colours at many passages of the Pāli canon, e.g. at Vin.II,203 = It.86; Nd¹ 18, 347, 405 = Nd² 304 IIID; Ps.I,83; Dhs.1281; J.I,71, 96; III,182; IV,159; DhA.I,148; PvA.52; SnA 290; Sdhp.37, 194; Pgdp 5 sq.; etc etc. -- 2. disintegration, decay Vism.449 (a. jarā nāma). (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'is the name of one of the most frightful hells (niraya , q.v.).', 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

Avīta: {'def': '【形】未解脱的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】未解脱的。(p45)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Avītikkama: {'def': '【阳】非违反，非犯罪。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】非违反，非犯罪。(p45)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Avī°: {'def': 'in general see vī°. (Page 85)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aya: {'def': '1﹐【阳】【中】铁。ayakapāla,【阳】铁制的盖子或平锅。see Ayo.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】收入。【阳】【中】铁。 ~kapāla, 【阳】铁制的盖子或平锅。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2(‹i, go),【阳】1.收入(income, in aya-potthaka receipt book)。2.入口(inlet (for water, aya-mukha))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ see ayo. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (fr. i, go) 1. income, in aya-potthaka receipt book J.I,2. -- 2. inlet (for water, aya-mukha) D.I,74; A.II,166, IV.287. (Page 75)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ayana: {'def': '(‹eti‹i (梵i)), 【阳】【中】路径。ekāyano maggo, 一条道路。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic ayana, fr. i] (a) “going”, road. -- (b) going to, goal S.V,167 (ekāyano maggo leading to one goal, a direct way), 185 (id.); DA.I,313; Dāvs.IV,40. ‹-› See also eka°. (Page 75)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】路径。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ayasa: {'def': '(nt.) [a + yasa, cp. Sk. ayaśaḥ] ill repute, disgrace Miln.139, 272; Dāvs.I,8. (Page 75)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】【中】坏名望，耻辱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】【中】坏名望，耻辱。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ayathā: {'def': '【无】错误的。（出现在【合】例如 ayathābhāva = 非现实）。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【无】错误的。(出现在【合】例如 ayathābhāva = 非现实)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ayaŋ: {'def': '(ima 的【主，单】)【阳】【阴】这个人。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ayaṁ: {'def': '(ima 的【主.单】)【阳】【阴】这个人(demonstr. pron. “this, he”)。【阳】︰m.s.Nom. ayaṁ; m.s.Acc. imaṁ; m.s.Gen.Dat. imassa & assa; m.s.Instr. iminā & (peculiarly or perhaps for amunā) aminā; m.s.Abl. asmā, imasmā, asmā；m.s.Loc. imasmiṁ, imamhi, asmiṁ。m.p.Nom. ime; m.p.Acc. ime(Sk. imān); m.p.Gen. imesaṁ & esaṁ (Sk. esāṁ) & esānaṁ ; m.p.Instr. imehi, imebhi; m.p.Loc. imesu(Sk. esu)。【中】︰n.s.Nom. idaṁ, imaṁ.; n.s.Acc. idaṁ, imaṁ.。n.p.Nom. imāni; n.p.Acc. imāni(其余同阳性)。【阴】︰f.s.Nom. ayaṁ (Sk. iyaṁ); f.s.Acc. imaṁ(Sk. īmāṁ); f.s.Instr. Abl. imāya(Sk. anayā); f.s.Dat.Gen. imāya, imissā, assā(Sk. asyāh), assāya, imissā, imissāya ; f.s.Loc. imāya, imissā, assā(Sk. asyāh), imissā, imissāya。f.p.Nom. imā (Sk. imāh), imāyo; f.p.Acc. imā, imāyo; f.p.Instr.Abl. imāhi, imābhi; f.p.Dat.Gen. āsaṁ (= etāsaṁ C.), imāsaṁ.; f.p.Loc. imāsu。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pron.) [Sk. ayaṁ etc., pron. base Idg. *i (cp. Sk. iha), f. *ī. Cp. Gr. i]n, min; Lat. is (f. ea, nt. id); Goth is, nt. ita; Ohg. er (= he), nt. ez (= it); Lith. jìs (he), f. jì (she).] demonstr. pron. “this, he”; f. ayaṁ; nt. idaṁ & imaṁ “this, it” etc. This pron. combines in its inflection two stems, viz. as° (ayaṁ in Nom. m. & f.) & im° (id° in Nom. nt.).

I. Forms. A. (sg.) Nom. m. ayaṁ Sn.235; J.I,168, 279; f. ayaṁ [Sk. iyaṁ] Kh VII.12; J.II,128, 133; nt. idaṁ Sn.224; J.III,53; & imaṁ Miln.46. Acc. m. imaṁ J.II,160; f. imaṁ [Sk. īmāṁ] Sn.545, 1002; J.I,280. Gen. Dat. m. imassa J.I,222, 279 & assa Sn.234, 1100; Kh VII.12 (Dat.); J.II,158; f. imissā J.I,179 & assā [Sk. asyāḥ] J.I,290; DhA.III,172. Instr. m. nt. iminā J.I,279; PvA.80 & (peculiarly or perhaps for amunā) aminā Sn.137; f. imāya [Sk. anayā] J.I,267. The Instr. anena [Sk. anena] is not proved in Pāli. Abl. asmā Sn.185; Dh.220; & imasmā (not proved). Loc. m. nt. imasmiṁ Kh III,; J.II,159 & asmiṁ Sn.634; Dh.242; f. imissā PvA.79 (or imissaṁ?) & imāyaṁ (no ref.). -- B. (pl.) Nom. m. ime J.I,221; Pv.I,8³; f. imā [Sk. imāḥ] Sn.897 & imāyo Sn.1122; nt. imāni [= Sk.] Vin.I,84. Acc. m. ime [Sk. imān] J.I,266; II,416; f. imā [Sk. imāḥ] Sn.429; J.II,160. Gen. imesaṁ J.II,160 & esaṁ [Sk. eṣāṁ] M.II,86, & esānaṁ M.II,154; III,259; f. also āsaṁ J.I,302 (= etāsaṁ C.) & imāsaṁ. Instr. m. nt imehi J.VI,364; f. imāhi. Loc. m. nt. imesu [Sk. eṣu] J.I,307.

II. Meanings (1) ayaṁ refers to what is immediately in front of the speaker (the subject in question) or before his eyes or in his present time & situation, thus often to be trsl^d. by “before our eyes”, “the present”, “this here”, “just this” (& not the other) (opp. para), viz. atthi imasmiṁ kāye “in this our visible body” Kh III,; yath’âyaṁ padīpo “like this lamp here” Sn.235; ayaṁ dakkhiṇā dinnā “the gift which is just given before our eyes” Kh VII.12; ime pādā imaṁ sīsaṁ ayaṁ kāyo Pv.I,8³; asmiṁ loke paramhi ca “in this world & the other” Sn.634, asmā lokā paraṁ lokaṁ kathaṁ pecca na socati Sn.185; cp. also Dh.220, 410; J.I,168; III,53. -- (2) It refers to what immediately precedes the present of the speaker, or to what has just been mentioned in the sentence; viz. yaṁ kiñci vittaṁ . . . idam pi Buddhe ratanaṁ “whatever . . . that” Sn.224; ime divase these days (just gone) J.II,416; cp. also Vin.I,84; Sn.429; J.II,128, 160. -- (3) It refers to what immediately follows either in time or in thought or in connection: dve ime antā “these are the two extremes, viz.” Vin.I,10; ayaṁ eva ariyo maggo “this then is the way” ibid.; cp. J.I,280. ‹-› (4) With a touch of (often sarcastic) characterisation it establishes a closer personal relation between the speaker & the object in question & is to be trsl^d. by “like that, such (like), that there, yonder, yon”, e. g. imassa vānarindassa “of that fellow, the monkey” J.I,279; cp. J.I, 222, 307; II 160 (imesaṁ sattānaṁ “creatures like us”). So also repeated as ayañ ca ayañ ca “this and this”, “so and so” J.II,3; idañ c’idañ ca “such & such a thing” J.II,5. -- (5) In combⁿ with a pron. rel. it expresses either a generalisation (whoever, whatever) or a specialisation (= that is to say, what there is of, i. e. Ger. und zwar), e. g. yâyaṁ taṇhā Vin.I,10; yo ca ayaṁ . . . yo ca ayaṁ “I mean this . . . and I mean” ibid.; ye kec’ime Sn.381; yadidaṁ “i. e.” Miln.25; yatha-y-idaṁ “in order that” (w. pot.) Sn.1092. See also seyyathīdaṁ. -- (6) The Gen. of all genders functions in general as a possessive pron. of the 3^rd = his, her, its (lit. of him etc.) and thus resembles the use of tassa, e. g. āsava’ssa na vijjanti “his are no intoxications” Sn.1100; sīlaṁ assā bhindāpessāmi “I shall cause her character to be defamed” J.I,290; assa bhariyā “his wife” J.II,158 etc. freq. (Page 75)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ayira: {'def': '(& Ayyira) (n.-adj.) [Vedic ārya, Metathesis for ariya as diaeretic form of ārya, of which the contracted (assimilation) form is ayya. See also ariya] (n.) ariyan, nobleman, gentleman (opp. servant); (adj.) arīyan, wellborn, belonging to the ruling race, noble, aristocratic, gentlemanly J.V,257; Vv 39⁶. -- f. ayirā lady, mistress (of a servant) J.II,349 (v. l. oyyakā); Voc. ayire my lady J.V,138 (= ayye C.). (Page 75)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '参考 ayya(绅士，统治者，主人，贵族)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'ayiraka, 参考 ayya, ayyaka。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ayiraka: {'def': '【阳】祖父。参考 ayyaka(祖父)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '= ayira; cp. ariyaka & ayyaka; D.III,190 (v. l. BB yy); J.II,313. (Page 75)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ayo: {'def': '& Aya (nt.) [Sk. ayaḥ nt. iron & ore, Idg. *ajes-, cp. Av. ayah, Lat. aes, Goth. aiz, Ohg. ēr (= Ger. Erz.), Ags. ār (= E. ore).] iron. The Nom. ayo found only in set of 5 metals forming an alloy of gold (jātarūpa), viz. ayo, loha (copper), tipu (tin), sīsa (lead), sajjha (silver) A.III,16 = S.V,92; of obl. cases only the Instr. ayasā occurs Dh.240 (= ayato DhA.III,344); Pv.I,10¹³ (paṭikujjita, of Niraya). -- Iron is the material used kat)e)coxήn in the outfit & construction of Purgatory or Niraya (see niraya & Avīci & cp. Vism.56 sq.). -- In comp^n. both ayo° & aya° occur as bases.

I. ayo°: --kapāla an iron pot A.IV,70 (v. l. °guhala); Nd² 304 ^{III, D 2} (of Niraya). --kūṭa an iron hammer PvA.284. --khīla an iron stake S.V,444; M.III,183 = Nd² 304 ^{III, C}; SnA 479. --guḷa an iron ball S.V,283; Dh.308; It.43 = 90; Th.2, 489; DA.I,84. --ghana an iron club Ud.93; VvA.20. --ghara an iron house J.IV,492. --paṭala an iron roof or ceiling (of Niraya) PvA.52. --pākāra an iron fence Pv.I,10¹³ = Nd² 304 ^{III, D 1}. --maya made of iron Sn.669 (kūṭa); J.IV,492 (nāvā); Pv.I,10¹⁴ (bhūmi of N.); PvA.43, 52. --muggara an iron club PvA.55. --saṅku an iron spike S.IV,168; Sn.667.

II. aya°: --kapāla = ayo° DhA.I,148 (v. l. ayo°). -kāra a worker in iron Miln.331. --kūṭa = ayo° J.I,108; DhA.II,69 (v. l.). --naṅgala an iron plough DhA.I,223; III,67. --paṭṭaka an iron plate or sheet (cp. loha°) J.V,359. --paṭhavi an iron floor (of Avīci) DhA.I,148. --saṅghāṭaka an iron (door) post DhA.IV,104. --sūla an iron stake Sn.667; DhA.I,148. (Page 75)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '铁 (【合】中 aya 变成 ayo) ayokūṭa,【阳】铁槌。ayokhīla,【中】铁柱，铁桩。ayoguḷa,【阳】铁球。ayoghana,【中】铁棒。ayomaya,【形】铁制的。ayoyāna,【新巴】火车。ayosaṅku,【阳】长铁钉。Dhp.v.308.：Seyyo ayoguḷo bhutto, tattho aggisikhūpamo, yañ ce bhuñjeyya dussīlo, raṭṭhapiṇḍamasaññato.(以其犯戒、无抑制，而食於国内行乞〔所得〕之饭丸，不如食似火焰之铁丸。《中阿含14经》罗云经：「宁噉铁丸，其热如火；不以犯戒，受世信施。」(T1.436.3))', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '铁 (【合】中 aya 变成 ayo) ~kūṭa, 【阳】铁槌。 ~khīla, 【中】铁柱，铁桩。 ~guḷa, 【阳】铁球。 ~ghana, 【中】铁棒。 ~maya, 【形】铁制的。 ~saṅku, 【阳】长铁钉。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ayogga: {'def': '【形】不适当的，不适合的。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】不适当的，不适合的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ayojjha: {'def': '【形】克服不了的。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. ayodhya] not to be conquered or subdued M.II,24. (Page 75)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】克服不了的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ayoniso: {'def': '【副】不从根源地，欠思考地。cf. yoniso(从根源地)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【副】不合适地，欠思考地。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ayutta: {'def': '【形】不适当的。【中】不公平。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】不适当的。【中】不公平。nāyuttaṁ, 并非如此。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ayya: {'def': '【阳】绅士，统治者，主人。【形】贵族。 ~putta, 【阳】主人的儿子。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(n.-adj.) [contracted form for the diaeretic ariya (q. v. for etym.). See also ayira] (a) (n.) gentleman, sire, lord, master J.III,167 = PvA.65; DhA.I,8 (ayyā pl. the worthy gentlemen, the worthies), 13 (amhākaṁ ayyo our worthy Sir); II,95. -- (b) (adj.) worthy, gentlemanly, honourable Vin.II,191; DhA.II,94 sq. -- The Voc. is used as a polite form of address (cp. Ger. “Sie” and E. address “Esq.”) like E. Sir, milord or simply “you” with the implication of a pluralis majestatis; thus Voc. proper ayya J.I,221, 279, 308; pl. Nom. as Voc. ayyā in addressing several J.II,128, 415; Nom. sg. as Voc. (for all genders & numbers) ayyo Vin.II,215; J.III,126, 127. -- f. ayyā lady, mistress M.II,96 (= mother of a prince); DhA.I,398; Voc. ayye my lady J.V,138.

--putta lit. son of an Ariyan, i. e. an aristocratic (young) man gentleman (cp. in meaning kulaputta); thus (a) son of my master (lit.) said by a servant J.III,167; (b) lord, master, “governor” J.I,62 (by a servant); DA.I,257 (= sāmi, opp. dāsi-putta); PvA.145 (by a wife to her husband); DhA.II,110; (c) prince (see W.Z.K.M. XII., 1898, 75 sq. & Epigraphia Indica III,137 sq.) J.VI,146. (Page 75)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sk. arya, ārya), 【阳】【三】【形】绅士，统治者，主人，贵族(gentleman, sire, lord, master J.III.167 = PvA.65; DhA.I,8 (ayyā pl. the worthy gentlemen, the worthies))。【形】值得尊敬的(worthy, gentlemanly, honourable)。【单.呼】ayya, ayyo。【复.主】ayyā, ayyo。【主.单】ayyo(for all genders & numbers)。ayyaputta,【阳】主人的儿子(lit. son of an Ariyan, i. e. an aristocratic (young) man gentleman (cp. in meaning kulaputta); thus (a) son of my master (lit.) said by a servant； (b) lord, master, “governor”(by a servant); = sāmi, opp. dāsi-putta; by a wife to her husband; (c) prince。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ayyaka: {'def': '[demin. of ayya] grandfather, (so also BSk., e. g. M Vastu II.426; III,264) J.III,155; IV,146; VI,196; Pv.I,84; Miln.284. ayyaka-payyakā grandfather & great grandfather, forefathers, ancestors J.I,2; PvA.107 (= pitāmahā). -- f. ayyakā grandmother, granny Vin.II,169; S.I,97; J.II,349 (here used for “lady”, as v. l. BB); & ayyikā Th.2, 159; Vism.379. (Page 75)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】祖父。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】祖父。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ayyakā: {'def': 'ayyikā,【阴】祖母。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'ayyikā, 【阴】祖母。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ayyā: {'def': '【阴】女主人，淑女。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】1.女主人、淑女、大姐(lady, mistress)。2.母后(mother of a prince; M II.96, DhA I.398)。s.Gen. ayyāya。ayye,【阴.单.呼】大姐、姐姐、姊姊(my lady；相对於bhante)。【阴.复.呼】ayyā,ayyāyo, ayye(cf. Sadd. 105, 652)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Añcati: {'def': 'J.I,417, read añchati (see next). (Page 13)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Añchati: {'def': '(= ākaḍḍhati, which latter is also the Sk.gloss (ākārsayati) to the Jain Prk.aṁchāvei = añchati)拉、拖(to pull, drag, pull along)，转辘轳者(to turn on a lathe)。M I.56 (vv.ll.p.532 acch° & añj°); Th 1, 750 (añcāmi T., v.l.aññāmi).Añchati should also be read at J I 417 for udakaṁ añcanti (in expln.of udañcanī pulling the water up from a well, q.v.), where it corresponds to udakaṁ ākkaḍḍhati in the same sentence.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[in meaning = ākaḍḍhati, which latter is also the Sk. gloss (ākārṣayati) to the Jain Prk. aṁchāvei = añchati: see Morris, J. P. T. S. 1893, 60] to pull, drag, pull along, to turn on a lathe D.II,291 (bhamakāro dīghaṁ a., where K has note: añjanto ti pi acchanto ti pi pātho) = M.I,56 (vv. ll. p. 532 acch° & añj°); Th.1, 750 (añcāmi T., v.l. aññāmi). Añchati should also be read at J I 417 for udakaṁ añcanti (in expl^n. of udañcanī pulling the water up from a well, q. v.), where it corresponds to udakaṁ ākkaḍḍhati in the same sentence. (Page 13)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Añhamāna: {'def': '[Sk. aśnāna, ppr. med. of aśnāti, aś to eat] eating, taking food; enjoying: only SS at Sn.240; all MSS at 239 have asamāna. SnA 284 expl^s. by āhārayamāna. (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Añhati: {'def': '﹐=asati没有正念。【现分】añhamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Añja: {'def': '(adv.) [orig. imper. of añjati¹; cp. Sk. anjasā (Instr.) quickly, Goth. anaks suddenly, lit. with a pull or jerk] pull on! go on! gee up! J.I,192. (Page 13)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Añjali: {'def': '【阴】合十。 ~kamma,【中】合十的动作。~karaṇīya,【形】值得合十的。~puṭa,【阳】合掌为了保留东西在内。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. añjali, fr. añjati¹] extending, stretching forth, gesture of lifting up the hands as a token of reverence (cp. E. to “tender” one’s respect), putting the ten fingers together and raising them to the head (VvA.7: dasanakha-samodhāna-samujjalaṁ añjaliṁ paggayha). Only in stock phrases (a.) añjaliṁ paṇāmeti to bend forth the outstretched hands Vin.II,188; D.I,118; Sn.352; Sn.p. 79. (b.) °ṁ paggaṇhāti to perform the a. salutation J.I,54; DhA.IV,212; VvA.7, 312 (sirasmiṁ on one’s head); PvA.93. (c.) °ṁ karoti id. PvA.178; cp. katañjali (adj.) with raised hands Sn.1023; J.I,17; PvA.50, and añjalikata id. Pv.II,12²⁰. Cp. pañjali

--kamma respectful salutation, as above A.I,123; II,180; IV,130; Vv 78⁸, 83¹⁶; DhA.I,32. --karaṇīya (adj.) that is worthy of being thus honoured D.III,5; A.II,34; III,36; IV,13 sq.; It.88. (Page 13)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】合掌(印度致敬礼之一种)，合十，叉手(古译)。añjalikamma,【中】合十的动作。añjalikaraṇīya,【形】值得合十的。añjalipuṭa,【阳】合掌为了保留东西在内。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Añjalikā: {'def': '(f.) [= añjali] the raising of the hands as a sign of respectful salutation Vv 1⁵ (expl^d at VvA.24 as dasanakha-samodhāna samujjalaṁ añjaliṁ sirasi paggaṇhantī guṇa-visiṭṭhānaṁ apacayānaṁ akāsiṁ). (Page 13)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Añjana: {'def': '【中】洗眼液。 ~nāḷi, 【阴】洗眼液的管，化妆箱。 ~vaṇṇa,【形】洗眼液的颜色（即是黑色）。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [from añjati²] ointment, esp. a collyrium for the eyes, made of antimony, adj. anointed, smeary; glossy, black (cp. kaṇha II. and kāla¹ note). -- 1. Vin.I,203 (five kinds viz. kāḷ°, ras°, sot°, geruka, kapalla); D.I,7, 12; DA.I,98 (khār°); 284; DhA.III,354 (akkhi° eye-salve). -- 2. glossy, jet-black J.I,194; II,369; V,416. The reading añjana at A.IV,468 is wrong, it should be corrected into thanamajjanamattaṁ. See also pacc°. In meaning collyrium box at Th.2, 413 (= añjana-nāḷi ThA.267); DhA.II,25.

--akkhiha with anointed eyes Th.1, 960. --upapisana perfume to mix with ointment Vin.I,203; II,112. --cuṇṇa aromatic powder DhsA.13. --nāḷi an ointment tube, collyrium box ThA.267. --rukkha N. of a tree (“black” tree) J.I,331. --vaṇṇa of the colour of collyrium, i. e. shiny, glossy, dark, black D.II,18 (lomāni); J.I,138 (kesā), 194; II,369; PvA.258 (vana). (Page 13)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(from añjati2),【中】眼药水(ointment, esp. a collyrium for the eyes, made of antimony)。añjananāḷi,【阴】洗眼液的管，化妆箱。añjanavaṇṇa,【形】洗眼液的顔色(即是黑色)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Añjanisalākā: {'def': '(f.) a stick to put the ointment on with Vin.I,203; II,135; J.III,419. (Page 13)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Añjanī: {'def': '(f.) [fr. añjana] a box for ointment, a collyrium pot Vin.I,203, 204; II,135; IV,168; M.II,65 = Th.1, 773. (Page 13)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Añjasa: {'def': '[Sk. āñjasa (?). Cp. ārjava = P. ajjava, see añjati¹ & añjaya] straight, straightforward (of a road) D.I,235; J.I,5; Th.2, 99; Vv 50²⁰ (cp. VvA.215); VvA.84 (= akuṭila); Mhvs 25, 5; Miln.217; Sdhp.328, 595. Cp. pañjasa. (Page 13)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】小道，道路。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】小道，道路。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Añjati: {'def': '¹ [= Sk. ṛñjati, ṛjyati to stretch, pull along, draw out, erect; cp. Sk. ṛju straight, caus. irajyati; Gr. o)rέgw; Lat. rego, rectus = erect. See also P. uju, añchati, ajjita, ānañja-ānejja]. See añja, añjaya, añjali, añjasa. (Page 13)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² & Añjeti [= Sk. añjayati, Caus. of anakti to smear etc.; cp. Sk. añji ointment, ājya butter; Lat. unguo to anoint, unguentum ointment; Ohg. ancho = Ger. Anke butter] to smear, anoint, paint S.II,281; J.IV,219 (akkhīni añjetvā, v. l. BB añcitvā). Caus. II, añjāpeti DhA.I,21. ‹-› pp. añjita (q. v.). (Page 13)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(añju + a), 涂油于（尤指宗教仪式），滴洗眼液。 aṅji, 【过】。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2 & Añjeti(añju+a)(= Sk. añjayati, Caus. of anakti to smear etc.; cp. Sk. añji ointment, ājya butter), 涂油(to smear, anoint, paint)，滴洗眼液。añji,【过】。akkhīni añjetvā, v. l. BB añcitvā). Caus. II. añjāpeti DhA.I,21. pp. añjita (q. v.).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Añjaya: {'def': '(adj.) [from añjati¹] straight J.III,12 (vv. ll. ajjava & and ājjava better?) expl^d by C. as ujuka, akuṭila. See also ajjava. Should we assume misreading for añjasa? (Page 13)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Añjeti: {'def': '(añju + e), 涂油于（尤指宗教仪式），滴洗眼液。 aṅjesi, 【过】。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(añju+e), 涂油(尤指宗教仪式)，滴洗眼液。aṅjesi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Añjita: {'def': '[Sk. aṅkta & añjayita, pp. of añjeti] smeared, anointed J.I,77 (su-añjitāni akkhīni); IV,421 (añjit’akkha). (Page 13)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(añjati 或 añjeti 的【过分】)。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(añjati 或 añjeti 的【过分】) 涂油，滴洗眼液。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Añña: {'def': '(sk. anya),【形】其他的，另外的，别的。aññena, adj. 另一处的、其他的、不同的, sg. Inst. =› adv. 。aññena … aññena 到处(这边那边)。aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīraṁ(命与身相异)。ānyatra', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pron.) [Vedic anya, with compar. suff. ya; Goth. anpar; Ohg. andar; formation with n analagous to those with l in Gr. a)λlos (a)λjos), Lat. alius (cp. alter), Goth. aljis Ags. elles = E. else. From demonstr. base *eno, see na¹ and cp. a³] another etc. -- A. By itself: 1. other, not the same, different, another, somebody else (opp. oneself) Vin.III,144 (aññena, scil. maggena, gacchati to take a different route); Sn.459, 789, 904; Dh.158 (opp. attānaṁ), 165; J.I,151 (opp. attano); II,333 (aññaṁ vyākaroti give a diff. answer). -- 2. another one, a second; nt. else, further Sn.1052 (= uttariṁ nt. Nd² 17); else J.I,294. aññaṁ kiñci (indef.) anything else J.I,151. yo añño every other, whoever else J.I,256. -- 3. aññe (pl.) (the) others, the rest Sn.189, 663, 911; Dh.43, 252, 355; J.I,254. -- B. del. in correlation: 1. copulative. añña . . añña the one . . the other (. . the third etc.); this, that & the other; some . . some Vin.I,15; Miln.40; etc. ‹-› 2. reciprocative añño aññaṁ, aññamaññaṁ, aññoññaṁ one another, each other, mutually, reciprocally (in ordinary construction & declension of a noun or adj. in sg.; cp. Gr. a)llήlwn, allήlous in pl.). (a.) añño aññaṁ Dh.165. (b.) aññamañña (cp. BSk. añyamañya M Vastu II,436), as pron.: n’ālaṁ aññamaññassa sukhāya vā dukkhāya vā D.I,56 = S III 211. n’aññamaññassa dukkhaṁ iccheyya do not wish evil to each other Sn.148. daṇḍehi aññamaññaṁ upakkamanti (approach each other) M.I,86 = Nd² 199. °ṁ agāravo viharati A.III,247. dve janā °ṁ ghātayiṁsu (slew each other) J.I,254. aññamaññaṁ hasanti J.V,111; °ṁ musale hantvā J.V,267. °ṁ daṇḍâbhigāṭena PvA.58; or adj.: aññamaññaṁ veraṁ bandhiṁsu (established mutual enmity) J.II,353; °ṁ piyasaṁvāsaṁ vasiṁsu J.II,153; aññamaññaṁ accayaṁ desetvā (their mutual mistake) DhA.I,57; or adv. dve pi aññamaññaṁ paṭibaddha citta ahesuṁ (in love with each other) J.III,188; or °-: aññamañña-paccaya mutually dependent, interrelated Ps.II,49, 58. ‹-› (c.) aññoñña (°-) J.V,251 (°nissita); Dāvs.V,45 (°bhinna). -- 3. disjunctive añña . . añña one . . the other, this one . . . that one, different, different from aññaṁ jīvaṁ . . aññaṁ sarīraṁ one is the soul . . the other is the body, i. e. the soul is different from the body D.I,157; M.I,430; A.V,193; aññā va saññā bhavissati añño attā D.I,187. Thus also in phrase aññena aññaṁ opposite, the contrary, differently, contradictory (lit. other from that which is other) Vin.II,85 (paṭicarati make counter-charges); D.I,57 (vyākāsi gave the opposite or contradictory reply); Miln.171 (aññaṁ kayiramānaṁ aññena sambharati). ‹-› anañña (1) not another, i. e. the same, self-same, identical M.I,256 (= ayaṁ). -- (2) not anotber, i. e. alone, by oneself, oneself only Sn.65 (°posin; opp. paraṁ) = Nd 4, cp. Nd² 36. -- (3) not another, i. e. no more, only, alone Sn.p. 106 (dve va gatiyo bhavanti anaññā: and no other or no more, only two). See also under cpds.

--ādisa different J.VI,212, °tā difference PvA.243. --khantika acquiescing in diff. views, following another faith (see khantika) D.I,187; M.I,487. --titthiya an adherent of another sect, a non-Buddhist.; D.III,115; M.I,494, 512; P II,21, 32 sq., 119; III,116 sq.; IV,51, 228; V,6, 27 sq.; A.I,65, 240; II,176; IV,35 sq.; Vin.I,60; J.I,93; II,415. --diṭṭhika having diff. views (comb^d. with añña-khantika) D.I,187; M.I,487. --neyya (an°) not to be guided by somebody else, i. e. independent in one’s views, having attained the right knowledge by oneself (opp. para°) Sn.55, 213, 364. --mano (an°) (adj.) not setting one’s heart upon others Vv 11⁵ (see VvA.58). --vāda holding other views, an° (adj.) Dpvs.IV,24. --vādaka one who gives a diff. account of things, one who distorts a matter, a prevaricator Vin.IV,36. --vihita being occupied with something else, distracted, absent-minded Vin.IV,269; DhA.III,352, 381; °tā distraction, absentmindedness DhA.I,181. --saraṇa (an°) not betaking oneself to others for refuge, i. e. of independent, sure knowledge S.III,42 =.V,154. --sita dependent or relying on others Sn.825. (Page 13)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】完美的知识，阿罗汉圣位。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】其他的，另外的，别的。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aññadatthu: {'def': '【无】1.一定。2.至少。3.另一方面。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】 1. 一定。 2. 至少。 3. 另一方面。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adv.) [lit. aññad atthu let there be anything else, i. e. be it what it will, there is nothing else, all, everything, surely] part. of affirmation = surely, all-round, absolutely (ekaṁsa-vacane nipāto DA.I,111) only, at any rate D.I,91; II,284; Sn.828 (na h’aññadatth’atthi pasaṁsa-lābhā, expl^d. SnA 541 as na hi ettha pasaṁsa-lābhato añño attho atthi, cp. also Nd¹ 168); Miln.133; VvA.58; PvA.97, 114.

--dasa sure-seeing, seeing everything, all pervading D.I,18; III,135, 185; A.II,24; III,202; IV,89, 105; It.15. (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aññadā: {'def': '(adv.) [añña + dā, cp. kadā, tadā, yadā] at another time, else, once S.IV,285; J.V,12; DhA.IV,125. (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【副】另一天，下次。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【副】另一天，下次。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aññamañña: {'def': 'aññoñña,【形】相互的。aññamaññaṁ,【副】互相地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'aññoñña,【形】相互的。 aññamaññaŋ, 【副】互相地。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aññatama: {'def': '(pron. adj.) [añña + superl. suff. tama; see also aññatara] one out of many, the one or the other of, a certain, any Mhvs 38, 14. (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】其中之一，未知的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】其中之一，未知的。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aññatara: {'def': '(añña的比较级),【形】两个之一、多个中的一个。ke ca dhammassa aññātāro.(谁是法的知者)。aññataraññatarena, 某个、各式各样的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】某一个，无名的。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pron. adj.) [Sk. anyatara, añña + compar. suff. tara, cp. Lat. alter, Goth. anpar etc.] one of a certain number, a certain, somebody, some; often used (like eka) as indef. article “a”. Very frequent, e. g. Sn.35, 210; It.103; Dh.137, 157; J.I,221, 253; II,132 etc. devaññatara a certain god, i. e. any kind of god S.IV,180 = A.IV,461. (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aññathatta: {'def': '【中】变动，变心。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(aññathā+tta),【中】变动(change)，变心(change of mind)，误会。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [aññathā + tta] 1. change, alteration S.III,37; IV,40; A.I,153; III,66; Kvu 227 (= jarā C, cp. Kvu trsl. 55 n. 2); Miln.209. -- 2. difference J.I,147; It.11. -- 3. erroneous supposition, mistake Vin.II,2; S.III,91; IV,329. -- 4. fickleness, change of mind, doubt, wavering, M.I,448, 457 (+ domanassa); J.I,33 (cittaṁ); PvA.195 (cittassa). (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aññathā: {'def': '【副】另外，别样。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【副】另外，别样。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adv.) [añña + thā] in a different manner, otherwise, differently S.I,24; Sn.588, 757; DhsA.163; PvA.125, 133. anaññathā without mistake Vv 44¹⁸; anaññatha (nt.) certainty, truth Ps.II,104 (= tatha).

--bhāva (1) a different existence A.II,10; It.9 = 94; Sn.729, 740, 752; (2) a state of difference; i. e. change, alteration, unstableness D.I,36; S.II,274; III,8, 16, 42; Vbh.379. --bhāvin based on difference S.III,225 sq.; IV,23 sq., 66 sq.; an° free from difference Vin.I,36. (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aññatitthiya: {'def': '【阳】外教徒，外道，异学。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】外教徒。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aññatra: {'def': '(adv.) [anya + tra, see also aññattha] elsewhere, somewhere else J.V,252; Pv IV.1⁶². In comp^n. also = añña°, e. g. aññatra-yoga (adj.) following another discipline D.I,187; M.I,487. -- As prep. c. Abl. (and Instr.) but, besides, except, e. g. a. iminā tapo- pakkamena D.I,168; kiṁ karaṇīyaṁ a. dhammacariyāya S.I,101; ko nu aññatram-ariyehi who else but the Nobles Sn.886 (= ṭhapetvā saññā-mattena SnA 555). --kiṁ aññatra what but, i. e. what else is the cause but, or: this is due to; but for D.I,90 (vusitavā-mānī k. a. avusitattā); S.I,29 (k. k. a. adassanā except from blindness); Sn.206 (id.). (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aññattha: {'def': '(adv.) [from añña = aññatra, adv. of place, cp. kattha, ettha] somewhere or anywhere else, elsewhere (either place where or whereto) J.I,291; II,154; DhsA.163; DhA.I,212; III,351; PvA.45; Mhvs 4, 37; 22, 14. (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'aññatra(sk. anyatra),【副】别的地方，其他的地方，则否，除了(=ṭhapetvā)。S.1.50./I,35.︰“Na aññatra Bhagavatā, nāññatra tava sāsanā”(非在世尊(法)之外，非在您的教导外。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'aññatra, 【副】别的地方，其他的地方。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aññavihita: {'def': '【形】分心，被别的占据了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】分心，被别的占据了。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aññavādaka: {'def': '【阳】转移其它话题，作异语。Pāci.IV,37(CS:Pāci.pg.55)︰Aññavādako nāma saṅghamajjhe vatthusmiṁ vā āpattiyā vā anuyuñjīyamāno taṁ na kathetukāmo taṁ na ugghāṭetukāmo aññenaññaṁ paṭicarati-- “Ko āpanno, kiṁ āpanno, kismiṁ āpanno, kathaṁ āpanno, kaṁ bhaṇatha, kiṁ bhaṇathā”ti. Eso aññavādako nāma.(回答其它话题︰在僧伽事当中，犯罪的询问，不欲讨论，不尽力於此，而顾左右而言他(，说)︰「谁犯罪？犯什么罪？在什么地方犯罪？什么是犯罪？你对谁说？你说什么？」这是回答其它话题。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aññenaññam: {'def': '(=aññena aññaṁ)﹐矛盾，相异。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aññoñña: {'def': 'see añña B 2 c. (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aññā: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. ājñā, = ā + jñā, cp. ājānāti] knowledge, recognition, perfect knowledge, philosophic insight, knowledge par excellence, viz. Arahantship, saving knowledge, gnosis (cp. on term Compend. 176 n. 3 and Psalms of Brethren introd. XXXIII,) M.I,445; S.I,4 (sammad°), 24 (aññāya nibbuta); II,221; V,69, 129 (diṭṭh’eva dhamme), 133, 237; A.III,82, 143, 192; V,108; It.39 sq., 53, 104; Dh.75, 96; Kh VII,11; Miln.334. -- aññaṁ vyākaroti to manifest ones Arahantship (by a discourse or by mere exclamation) Vin.I,183; S.II,51 sq., 120; IV,139; V,222; J.I,140; II,333. See also arahatta.

--atthika desirous of higher knowledge Pv IV.1¹⁴. --ārādhana the attainment of full insight M.I,479. --indriya the faculty of perfect knowledge or of knowledge made perfect D.III,219; S.V,204; It.53; Pug.2; Dhs.362, 505, 552; Nett 15, 54, 60. --citta the thought of gnosis, the intention of gaining Arahantship S.II,267; A.III,437. --paṭivedha comprehension of insight Vin.II,238. --vimokkha deliverance by the highest insight Sn.1105, 1107 (Nd² 19: vuccati arahatta-vimokkho). (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵 ājñā),【阴】完全智(完美的知识)，阿罗汉圣位。añña-Koṇḍañña,阿若憍陈如(阿若：已证得阿罗汉圣位)、拘隣若。憍陈如为佛陀最先所度五比丘中，最初悟道、梵行第一比丘(T2.831)。M.70./I,480-1.：“Nāhaṁ, bhikkhave, ādikeneva aññārādhanaṁ vadāmi; api ca, bhikkhave, anupubbasikkhā anupubbakiriyā anupubbapaṭipadā aññārādhanā hoti.”(诸比丘！我不说：「唯以最初的(学习)即有完全智之成就。」再者，诸比丘！由次第学、次第作、次第实践，而有完全智之成就。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aññā-Koṇḍañña: {'def': '開悟の憍陳如, 阿若憍陳如 [五比丘の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '（比库名）安雅衮丹雅，（古音译：）阿若憍陈如', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '開悟的憍陳如, 阿若憍陳如 [五比丘之ー].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Aññāta: {'def': '2 (na+ñāta)不知道的、不认识的(unknown)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】1.(ā+ñāta) 知道的，懂的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1(pp. of ājānāti),已知道的、已认识(known, recognised )。anaññāta﹐不知道的(what is not known)。anaññātaññassāmī’t’indriya﹐我应该知道尚未知道的根。aññātamānin﹐拥有完美知识的骄傲。aññāya saṇṭhahiṁsu,确立於完全智(《中阿含经》译：遵奉持者)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of ājānāti, q. v.] known, recognised Sn.699. an° what is not known, in phrase anaññāta-ññassāmī’t’indriya the faculty of him (who believes): “I shall know what is not known (yet)” D.III,219; S.V,204; It.53; Pug.2; Dhs.296 (cp. Dhs.trsl. 86); Nett 15, 54, 60, 191.

--mānin one who prides himself in having perfect knowledge, one who imagines to be in possession of right insight A.III,175 sq.; Th.1, 953. (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [a + ñāta] unknown, see ñāta. (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】 1. (ā + ñāta:) 知道的，懂的。 2. (na + ñāta:) 不知道的，不认识的。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aññātaka: {'def': '2 (adj.) [demin. of aññāta2] 【形】不知道的(unknown)。不可认出的(unrecognisable)。aññātakavesa,【阳】僞装、假装(in disguise)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1 (a + ñātaka, cp. Sk. ajñāti),【形】非亲属的(not a kinsman)。aññātikāya﹐非亲戚，亲戚之外的人。亲戚包括：父亲七世者，父、祖、高祖、曾祖，乃至七世。父亲者，伯(父之伯，於己为伯祖)、叔(父之兄弟，於己为母舅bu2ku7)、兄(父之叔，於己为叔祖)、弟(父之弟，於己为叔)、儿(父之子，於己为兄弟)、孙(父之孙，乃兄弟之子，於己为侄男)。母亲七世者，舅(外祖母之兄弟，於己为舅公)、姨(母之姨，乃外祖母之姊妹，於己为姨婆) 、兄弟(母之兄弟，於己为舅)、儿(母之女，於己为姊妹)、孙(母之孙女，乃兄弟之女，於己为侄女)。(参见《善见律毘婆沙》卷第十四﹐大正24.774上)。亲戚：台语chin7 cian4，可作「亲诚chin ciann5」。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [a + ñātaka, cp. Sk. ajñāti] he who is not a kinsman DhA.I,222. (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】 1. 非亲属的。 2. 不知道的。 3. 不可认出的。 ~vesa,【阳】伪装，假装。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (adj.) [Demin. of aññāta²] unknown, unrecognisable, only in phrase °vesena in unknown form, in disguise J.I,14; III,116; V,102. (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aññātar: {'def': '[n. ag. to ājānāti] one who knows, a knower of D.II,286; M.I,169; S.I,106 (dhammassa); Kvu 561. (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aññātukāma: {'def': '(adj.) [ā + jñātuṁ + kāma] desirous of gaining right knowledge A.III,192. See ājānāti. (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aññātāvin: {'def': '(adj. -n.) [from ājānāti] one who has complete insight DhsA.291.

--indriya (°tāv’indr.) the faculty of one whose knowledge is made perfect Dhs.555 (cp. Dhs.trsl. 150) and same loci as under aññindriya (see aññā). (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aññātāvī: {'def': 'aññātu,【阳】知道的人，有见识的人。 aññātukāma,【形】想知道的。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'aññātu,【阳】知道的人，有见识的人。aññātukāma,【形】想知道的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aññāya: {'def': '【独】已懂了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[ger. of ājānāti, q. v. for detail] reeognising, knowing, in the conviction of S.I,24; A.III,41; Dh.275, 411. (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【独】已懂了。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aññāṇa: {'def': '【中】无知，愚昧。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [a + ñāṇa] ignorance; see ñāṇa 3 e. (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】无知，具知。aññāṇupekkhāya﹐具知的舍。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aññāṇaka: {'def': '(nt.) [Demin. of aññāṇa] ignorance Vin.IV,144. (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aññāṇin: {'def': '(adj.) [a + ñāṇin] ignorant, not knowing DhA.III,106. (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aŋsa: {'def': '【阳】【中】 1. 一部份，一边。 2. 肩。 ~kūṭa, 【中】肩部。 ~bandhana, 【中】肩带。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aŋsu: {'def': '【阳】光线，纤维。 ~ka, 【中】布料。 ~mālī, 【阳】太阳。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aḍḍa: {'def': '【阳】仲裁。Sp.Pāci.IV,906︰Ettha ca aḍḍoti vohārikavinicchayo vuccati, yaṁ pabbajitā “adhikaraṇan”tipi vadanti.(仲裁︰法官裁判。凡是涉及出家人的诉讼之语。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aḍḍha: {'def': '1,【形】丰富的，富有的。aḍḍhatā,【阴】财富。aḍḍhakula﹐富贵家庭。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2,【形】半(=addha)。【阳】一半。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (adj.) [Sk. āḍhya fr. ṛddha pp. of ṛdh, ṛdhnote & ṛdhyate (see ijjhati) to thrive cp. Gr. a)λqomai thrive, Lat. alo to nourish. Cp. also Vedic iḍā refreshment & P. iddhi power. See also āḷhiya] rich, opulent, wealthy, well-to-do; usually in comb^n. with mahaddhana & mahābhoga of great wealth & resources (foll. by pahūta-jātarūparajata pahūta vittūpakaraṇa etc.). Thus at D.I,115, 134, 137; III,163; Pug.52; DhA.I,3; VvA.322; PvA.3, 78 etc. In other comb^n. Vv 31⁴ (°kula); Nd² 615 (Sakka = aḍḍho mahaddhano dhanavā); DA.I,281 (= issara); DhA.II,37 (°kula); Sdhp.270 (satasākh°), 312 (guṇ°), 540 sq. (id.), 561. (Page 17)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (& addha) [etym. uncertain, Sk. ardha] one half, half; usually in comp^n. (see below), like diyaḍḍha 1 1/2 (°sata 150) PvA.155 (see as to meaning Stede, Peta Vatthu p. 107). Note. aḍḍha is never used by itself, for “half” in absolute position upaḍḍha (q. v.) is always used.

--akkhika with furtive glance (“half an eye”) DhA.IV,98. --aṭṭha half of eight, i. e. four (cp. aṭṭhaḍḍha) S.II,222 (°ratana); J.VI,354 (°pāda quadruped; v. l. for aṭṭhaḍḍha). --aḷhaka 1/2 an aḷhaka (measure) DhA.III,367. --uḍḍha [cp. Mahārāṣṭrī form cauṭṭha = Sk. caturtha] three and a half J.I,82; IV,180; V,417, 420; DhA.I,87; Mhvs 12, 53. --ocitaka half plucked off J.I,120. --karīsa (-matta) half a k. in extent VvA.64 (cp. aṭṭha-karīsa). --kahāpaṇa 1/2 kahāpaṇa A.V,83. --kāsika (or °ya) worth half a thousand kāsiyas (i. e. of Benares monetary standard) Vin.I,281 (kambala, a woollen garment of that value; cp. Vin Texts II.195); II,150 (bimbohanāni, pillows; so read for aḍḍhakāyikāni in T.); J.V,447 (a°-kāsigaṇikā for a-°kāsiya° a courtezan who charges that price, in phrase a°-k°-gaṇikā viya na bahunnaṁ piyā manāpā). --kumbha a half (-filled) pitcher Sn.721. --kusi (tt. of tailoring) a short intermediate cross-seam Vin.I,287. --kosa half a room, a small room J.VI,81 (= a° kosantara C.). --gāvuta half a league J VI 55. --cūḷa (°vāhā vīhi) 1/2 a measure (of rice) Miln.102, perhaps misread for aḍḍhāḷha (āḷha = āḷhaka, cp. A.III,52), a half āḷha of rice. --tiya the third (unit) less half, i. e. two and a half VvA.66 (māsā); J.I,49, 206, 255 (°sata 250). Cp. next. --teyya = °tiya 2 1/2 Vin.IV,117; J.II,129 (°sata); DA.I,173 (v. l. BB for °tiya); DhA.I,95 (°sata), 279; PvA.20 (°sahassa). --telasa [cp. BSk. ardhatrayodaśa] twelve and a half Vin I 243, 247; D.II,6 (°bhikkhusatāni, cp. tayo B 1 b); DhA.III,369. --daṇḍaka a short stick M.I,87 = A.I,47; II,122 = Nd² 604 = Miln.197. --duka see °ruka. --nāḷika (-matta) half a nāḷi-measure full J.VI,366. --pallaṅka half a divan Vin.II,280. --bhāga half a share, one half Vv 13⁶ (= upaḍḍhabhāga VvA.61); Pv.I,11⁵. --maṇḍala semi-circle, semi circular sewing Vin.I,287. --māna half a māna measure J.I,468 (m. = aṭṭhannaṁ nāḷinaṁ nāmaṁ C.). --māsa half a month, a half month, a fortnight Vin.III,254 (ūnak°); A.V,85; J.III,218; VvA.66. Freq. in Acc. as adv. for a fortnight, e. g. Vin.IV,117; VvA.67; PvA.55. --māsaka half a bean (as weight or measure of value, see māsaka) J.I,111. --māsika halfmonthly Pug.55. --muṇḍaka shaven over half the head (sign of loss of freedom) Mhvs 6, 42. --yoga a certain kind of house (usually with pāsāda) Vin.I,58 = 96, 107, 139, 239, 284; II,146. Acc. to Vin T. I.174 “a gold coloured Bengal house” (Bdhgh), an interpretation which is not correct: we have to read supaṇṇa vaṅkageha “like a Garuḷa bird’s crooked wing”, i. e. where the roof is bent on one side. --yojana half a yojana (in distance) J.V,410; DA.I,35 (in expl^n. of addhāna-magga); DhA.I,147; II,74. --rattā midnight A.III,40Q (°aṁ adv. at m.); Vv 81¹⁶ (°rattāyaṁ adv. = aḍḍharattiyaṁ VvA.315); J.I,264 (samaye); IV,159 (id.). --ratti = °rattā VvA.255, 315 (= majjhimayāma-samaya); PvA.155. --ruka (v. l. °duka) a certain fashion of wearing the hair Vin.II,134; Bdhgh expl^n. on p. 319: aḍhadukan ti udare lomarāji-ṭhapanaṁ “leaving a stripe of hair on the stomach”. --vivata (dvāra) half open J.V,293. (Page 16)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】丰富的，富有的。【阳】一半。 ~tā,【阴】财富。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aḍḍhadaṇḍaka: {'def': '半支杖，一支短杖。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '半支杖，一支短杖。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aḍḍhaka: {'def': '(adj.) wealthy, rich, influential J.IV,495; Pv.II,8² (= mahāvibhava PvA.107). (Page 17)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aḍḍhamāsa: {'def': '【阳】半个月。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(aḍḍha半+māsa月),【阳】半个月。lohaḍḍhamāsa﹐【阳】半个铜钱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aḍḍharatta: {'def': '【中】半夜，午夜。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】半夜，午夜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aḍḍhatelasa: {'def': 'aḍḍhateḷasa (aḍḍha半+telasa十三) 十二点五。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aḍḍhatiya: {'def': 'aḍḍhateyya,【形】两个半。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'aḍḍhateyya,【形】两个半。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aḍḍhatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. to aḍḍha] riches, wealth, opulence Sdhp.316. (Page 17)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aḍḍhayoga: {'def': '【阳】屋顶如老鹰翼形的一种屋子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】屋顶如老鹰翼形的一种屋子。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aḍḍhuḍḍha: {'def': '【阳】三个半。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】三个半。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aḷa: {'def': 'Ala, 1.螃蟹的螯(the claw of a crab, aḷachinno kakkaṭako)。2.指甲(the nails (of finger or toe))。aḷachinna, 剪指甲。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[etym. unknown] 1. the claw of a crab M.I,234; S.I,123; J.I,223, 505 (°chinno kakkaṭako; T. spells ala°); II,342; III,295; -- 2. the nails (of finger or toe) (?) in °chinna one whose nails are cut off Vin.I,91. (Page 80)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aḷhaka: {'def': 'in udak’aḷhaka VvA.155 read āḷhaka. (Page 80)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aḷāra: {'def': '(adj.) [Is it the same as uḷāra?] only used with ref. to the eyelashes, & usually expl^d. by visāla, i.e. extended, wide, but also by bahala, i.e. thick. The meaning & etym. is as yet uncertain. Kern, (Toev. s.v.) transl^s. by “bent, crooked, arched”. °akkhin with wide eyes (eyelashes?) J.I,306 (= visāla-netta C.); °pamha with thick eye-lashes Vv 35⁷ (= bahala-saṁyata-pakhuma C.; v.l. °pamukha); °bhamuka having thick eyebrows or °lashes J.VI,503 (so read for °pamukha; C. expl^s by visāl-akkhigaṇḍa). Cp. āḷāra. (Page 80)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(adj.) [Is it the same as uḷāra?] 眼睫毛(only used with ref. to the eyelashes)。°akkhin with wide eyes (eyelashes?) J.I,306 (= visāla-netta C.); °pamha with thick eye-lashes Vv 357 (= bahala-saṁyata-pakhuma C.; v.l. °pamukha); °bhamuka having thick eyebrows or °lashes J.VI,503 (so read for °pamukha; C. expls by visāl-akkhigaṇḍa). Cp. āḷāra.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṁsa: {'def': '2,【阳】【中】角落、边缘(point, corner, edge)。caturaṁsa, 四角落、四边。chaḷaṁsa, 六边。aṭṭhaṁsa, 八边。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1(Vedic aṁsa),【阳】【中】1.肩，肩膀，台语：肩胛头。2.一部份，一边。II.【阳】切割面。aṁsakūṭa﹐【中】肩部(shoulder prominence, the shoulder)。aṁsavaṭṭaka,【中】肩带(a shoulder strap)。aṁse karoti, 放在肩上(to put on the shoulder)。aṁsa=koṭṭhāsa(DA I.312),【阳】部份，一分。mettāsa= mettaṁsa(sharing friendship (with) It.22)。atīt’aṁse,从前，以前的。ekena aṁsena …ekena aṁsena﹐一边…一边。ekaṁsa 【形】一边。paccaṁsena﹐依照每人的分享。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [Vedic aṁsa; cp. Gr. w]μos, Lat. umerus, Goth ams, Arm. us] (a) the shoulder A v. 110; Sn.609. aṁse karoti to put on the shoulder, to shoulder J.I,9. (b.) a part (lit. side) (cp. °āsa in koṭṭhāsa and explⁿ of aṁsa as koṭṭhāsa at DA.I,312, also v. l. mettāsa for mettaṁsa at It.22). -- atīt’aṁse in former times, formerly D.II,224; Th.2, 314. mettaṁsa sharing friendship (with) A.IV,151 = It.22 = J.IV,71 (in which connection Miln.402 reads ahiṁsā). -- Disjunctive ekena aṁsena . . . ekena aṁsena on the one hand (side) . . . on the other, partly . . . partly A.I,61. From this: ekaṁsa (adj.) on the one hand (only), i. e. incomplete (opp. ubhayaṁsa) or (as not admitting of a counterpart) definite, certain, without doubt (opp. dvidhā): see ekaṁsa. -- paccaṁsena according to each one’s share A.III,38. puṭaṁsena with a knapsack for provisions D.I,117; A II 183; cp. DA.I,288, with v. l. puṭosena at both passages.

--kūṭa “shoulder prominence”, the shoulder Vin.III,127; DhA.III,214; IV,136; VvA.121. -- vaṭṭaka a shoulder strap (mostly comb^d with kāyabandhana; vv. ll. °vaddhaka, °bandhaka) Vin.I,204 (T. °bandhaka); II,114 (ddh); IV,170 (ddh); Vv 33⁴⁰ (T. °bandhana, C. v. l. °vaṭṭaka); DhA.III,452. (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [see next] point, corner, edge; freg. in combⁿ with numerals, e. g. catur° four-cornered, chaḷ°, aṭṭh°, soḷas° etc. (q. v.) all at Dhs.617 (cp. DhsA.317). In connection with a Vimāna: āyat° with wide or protruding capitals (of its pillars) Vv 84¹⁵; as part of a carriagepole Vv 64² (= kubbara-phale patiṭṭhitā heṭṭhima-aṁsā VvA.265). (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṁsi: {'def': '(= aṁsa2)(Vedic awri, awra, awani)﹐【阴】角落，边缘。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic aśri, aśra, aśani; Gr. a)/kros pointed, a)/kris, also o)cuζ sharp: Lat. ācer sharp. Further connections in Walde Lat. Wtb. under ācer] a corner, edge (= aṁsa²) Vv 78² (= aṁsa-bhāga VvA.303). (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṁsu: {'def': '(梵aṁwu (Halāyudha) a ray of light),【阳】光线，线(a thread)。aṁsaka,【中】布料。aṁsumālī,【阳】太阳。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. aṁśu (Halāyudha) a ray of light] a thread Vin.III,224. --mālin, sun Sāsv 1. (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṅavi: {'def': '【阴】森林。aṅavimukha,【中】森林的外边缘。aṅavisaṅkhobha,【阳】野蛮部落中的骚动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】森林。 ~mukha,【中】森林的外边缘。 ~saṅkhobha,【阳】野蛮部落中的骚动。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aṅga: {'def': '要素、成分。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '【中】 1. 成分。2. 肢。 3. 质量。~paccaṅga,【中】大小肢。~rāga,【阳】涂身的化妆品。~vijjā,【阴】手相或命相。(p3)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】1.成分。2.肢。3.特质。aṅgapaccaṅga,【中】大小肢。aṅgarāga,【阳】涂身的化妆品。aṅgavijjā,【阴】手相。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '（古国名）盎嘎，（古音译：）鸯伽，鸯迦', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic aṅga, anc cp. Lat. angulus = angle, corner etc., ungulus finger-ring = Sk. aṅgulīya. See also aṅka, aṅguṭṭha & aṅgula] (1) (lit.) a constituent part of the body, a limb, member; also of objects: part, member (see cpd. °sambhāra); uttam°aṅga the reproductive organ J.V,197; also as “head” at ThA.209. Usually in cpds. (see below, esp. °paccaṅga), as sabbaṅga-kalyāṇī perfect in all limbs Pv.III,3⁵ (= sobhaṇa-sabbaṅga-paccaṅgī PvA.189) and in redupl^n. aṅga-m-aṅgāni limb by limb, with all limbs (see also below aṅga + paccaṅga) Vin.III,119; Vv 38² (°ehi naccamāna); Pv.II,12¹⁰, ¹³, ¹⁸ (sunakho te khādati). -- (2) (fig.) a constituent part of a whole or system or collection, e. g. uposath° the vows of the fast J.I,50; bhavaṅga the constituents or the condition of becoming (see bhava & cp. Cpd. 265 sq.); bojjhaṅga (q. v.). Esp. with numerals: cattāri aṅgāni 4 constituents A.II,79 (viz. sīla, samādhi, paññā. vimutti and rūpa, vedanā, saññā, bhava), aṭṭhaṅgika (q. v.) magga the Path with its eight constituents or the eightfold Path (KhA 85: aṭṭh’aṅgāni assā ti) navaṅga Buddha-sāsana see nava. -- (3) a constituent part as characteristic, prominent or distinguishing, a mark, attribute, sign, quality D.I,113 sq., 117 (iminā p° aṅgena by this quality, or: in this respect, cp. below 4; DA.I,281 expl^s tena kāra‹-› ṇena). In a special sense striking (abnormal) sign or mark on the body D.I,9, from which a prophesy is made (: hattha-pādādisu yena kenaci evarūpena aṅgena samannāgato dīghāyu . . hotī ti . . aṅgasatthan = chiromantics DA.I,92). Thus in comb^n. with samannāgata & sampanna always meaning endowed with “good”, superior, remarkable “qualities”, e. g. J.I,3 (sabbaṅga-sampanna nagaraṁ a city possessing all marks of perfection); II,207. ‹-› In enum^n. with var. numerals: tīhi aṅgehi s. A.I,115; cattāri sotapannassa a- D.III,227 = A.IV,405 sq.; pañcaṅga-vippahīno (i. e. giving up the 5 hindrances, see nīvaraṇa) and pañcaṅga-samannāgato (i. e. endowed with the 5 good qualities, viz. the sīla-kkhandha, see kkhandha II.A d) S.I,99 = A.I,161; V,15, 29. Similarly the 5 attributes of a brahmin (viz. sujāta of pure birth, ajjhāyaka a student of the Vedas, abhirūpa handsome, sīlava of good conduct, paṇḍita clever) D.I,119, 120. Eight qualities of a king D.I,137. Ten qualities of an Arahant (cp. dasa¹ B 2) S.III,83; Kh IV.10 = KhA 88; cp. M.I,446 (dasah’aṅgehi samannāgato rañño assājāniyo). -- (4) (modally) part, share, interest, concern; ajjhattikaṁ aṅgaṁ my own part or interest (opp. bāhiraṁ the interest in the outside world). A.I,16 sq. = S.V,101 sq.; It.9. rañño aṅgaṁ an asset or profit for the king M.I,446. Thus adv. tadaṅga (see also ta° I.a) as a matter of fact, in this respect, for sure, certainly and tadaṅgena by these means, through this, therefore M.I,492; A.IV,411; Sdhp.455, 456; iminā p° aṅgena for that reason M.II,168. -- In comp^n. with verbs aṅgi° (aṅgī°): angigata having limbs or ports, divided DA.I,313; cp. samaṅgi (-bhūta).

--jāta “the distinguishing member”, i. e. sign of male or female (see above 3); membrum virile and muliebre Vin.I,191 (of cows); III,20, 37, 205; J.II,359; Miln.124. --paccaṅga one limb or the other, limbs great and small M.I,81; J VI--20, used (a) collectively: the condition of perfect limbs, or adj. with perfect limbs, having all limbs Pv.II,12¹² (= paripuṇṇa-sabbaṅga-paccaṅgavatī PvA.158); SnA 383; DhA.I,390; ThA.288; Sdhp.83 fig. rathassa aṅgapaccaṅgan M.I,395; sabbaṅga-paccaṅgāni all limbs Miln.148. -- (b) distributively (cp. similar redupl. formations like chiddâvachidda, seṭṭhânu-seṭṭhi, khaṇḍākhaṇḍa, cuṇṇavicuṇṇa) limb after limb, one limb after the other (like aṅgamaṅgāni above 1), piecemeal M.I,133 (°e daseyya), 366; J.I,20; IV,324 (chinditvā). --paccaṅgatā the condition or state of perfect limbs, i. e. a perfect body VvA.134 (suvisuddh°). --paccaṅgin having all limbs (perfect) D.I,34 (sabbaṅga-peccaṅgī); PvA.189. --rāga painting or rouging the body Vin.II,107 (+ mukha°). --laṭṭhi sprout, offshoot ThA.226. --vāta gout Vin.I,205. --vijjā the art of prognosticating from marks on the body, chiromantics, palmistry etc. (cp. above 3) D.I,9 (see expl. at DA.I,93); J.I,290 (°āya cheka clever in fortune-telling); °ânubhāva the power of knowing the art of signs on the body J.II,200; V,284; °pāṭhaka one who in versed in palmistry etc. J.II,21, 250; V,458. --vekalla bodily deformity DhA.II,26. --sattha the science of prognosticating from certain bodily marks DA.I,92. --sambhāra the combination of parts Miln.28 = S.I,135; Miln.41. --hetuka a species of wild birds, living in forests J.VI,538. (Page 6)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṅgada: {'def': '【中】臂镯。(p3)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】臂镯(a bracelet )。cittaṅgada,【形】各式各样的臂镯(with manifold bracelets)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. aṅgada; prob. aṅga + da that which is given to the limbs] a bracelet J.V,9, 410 (citt°, adj. with manifold bracelets). (Page 7)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṅgadin: {'def': '(adj.) [to aṅgada] wearing a bracelet J.V,9. (Page 7)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṅgajāta: {'def': '【中】男性生殖器(直译：生支)，女性阴部(sign of male or female (see above 3); membrum virile and muliebre)。Pārā.III,38.︰“Pañcahi bhikkhave, ākārehi aṅgajātaṁ kammaniyaṁ hoti-- rāgena, vaccena, passāvena, vātena, uccāliṅgapāṇakadaṭṭhena.(五事生支勃起︰欲念、大便、小便、风、毛虫吃咬而生支勃起。)(阿罗汉不再因欲念而生支勃起)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】外生殖器，阴部。(p3)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aṅganā: {'def': '【阴】女人，妇女。(p3)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】女人，妇女。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṅgaṇa: {'def': '¹ (nt.) [cp. Sk. aṅgaṇa & °na; to aṅga?] an open space, a clearing, Vin.II,218; J.I,109 (= manussānan sañcaraṇa-ṭṭhāne anāvaṭe bhūmibhāge C.); II,243, 290, 357; Dāvs.I,27. -- cetiy° an open space before a Chaitya Miln.366, DA.I,191, 197; VvA.254. rāj° the empty space before the king’s palace, the royal square J.I,124, 152; II,2; DhA.II,45.

--ṭṭhāna a clearing (in a wood or park) J.I,249, 421. --pariyanta the end or border of a clearing J.II,200. (Page 6)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1 (cp. Sk. aṅgaṇa & aṅgana),【中】空地，院子(an open space)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2,【中】斑点(a speck or freckle)，心意的污染。M.5./I,27.︰pāpakānaṁ kho etaṁ, āvuso, akusalānaṁ icchāvacarānaṁ adhivacanaṁ, yadidaṁ aṅgaṇan”ti.恶、不善、欲行境，都是所谓‘秽’的同义词。)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 1. 空地，院子。 2. 心意的污染。(p3)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [prob. to anj, thus a variant of añjana, q. v.]; a speck or freckle (on the face) A.V,92, 94 sq. (+ raja). Usually in neg. anaṅgana (adj.) free from fleck or blemish, clear, (of the mind) (opp. sângana Sn.279); D.I,76; M.I,24 sq.; 100 (+ raja); A.II,211; Sn.517 (+ vigata‹-› raja = aṅgaṇānan abhāvā malānañ ca vigamā . . . SnA 427), 622 = Dh.125 (= nikkilesa DhA.III,34); Dh.236, 351; Pug.60; Nett 87. (Page 6)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṅgika: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. aṅga] consisting of parts, -- fold; only in comp^n. with num. like aṭṭh°, duv° (see dve), catur°, pañc° etc., q. v. (Page 7)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṅgin: {'def': '(adj.) limbed, having limbs or parts, -- fold, see catur° & pacc° (under aṅga-paccaṅgin). -- f. aṅginī having sprouts or shoots (of a tree) Th.2, 297 (= ThA.226). (Page 7)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṅgula: {'def': '【中】一寸，一指宽。【形】（【合】）很多指宽的数量。(p3)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】一寸，一指宽。【形】(【合】)很多指宽的数量。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic aṅgula, lit. “limblet” see aṅga for etym.] 1. a finger or toe M.I,395 (vaṅk’ aṅgulaṇ karoti to bend the fingers, v. l. aṅguliṇ); A.III,6 (id.); J V 70 (goṇ° adj. with ox toes, expl^d. by C. as with toes like an ox’s tail; vv. ll. °aṅguṭṭha and °aṅgulī). -- 2. a finger as measure, i. e. a finger-breadth, an inch Vin.II,294, 306 (dvaṅgula 2 inches wide); Mhvs 19, 11 (aṭṭh°); DhA.III,127 (ek°).

--aṭṭhi (? cp. aṅga-laṭṭhi) fingers (or toes) and bones DA.I,93. --aṅguli fingers and toes DhA.III,214. --antarikā the interstices between the fingers Vin.III,39; Miln.180; DhA.III,214. (Page 7)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṅguleyyaka: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. aṅgulīyaka that which belongs to the finger, Mhg. vingerlîn = ring; E. bracelet, Fr. bras; thimble thumb etc.] an ornament for the finger, a finger-ring J.II,444 (= nikkha). (Page 7)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṅguli: {'def': '【阴】手指，脚趾。aṅgulipabba,【中】指节。aṅgulimuddā,【阴】图章戒指，戒指。SA.5.2.︰Dvaṅgulapaññāyāti parittapaññāya. Yasmā vā dvīhi aṅgulehi kappāsavaṭṭiṁ gahetvā suttaṁ kantanti, tasmā itthī “dvaṅgulapaññā”ti vuccati.(二指智：小智。用两指取棉布，编织纺纱，因此，女人称为‘二指智’。) S.5.2.：“Yaṁ taṁ isīhi pattabbaṁ, ṭhānaṁ durabhisambhavaṁ; Na taṁ dvaṅgulapaññāya, sakkā pappotumitthiyā”ti.(仙人应至处，是处难到达，二指智之女，不能到彼处。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】手指，脚趾。 ~pabba,【中】指节。 ~muddā,【阴】图章戒指，戒指。(p3)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aṅgulika: {'def': '(nt.) [=aṅgulī] a finger J.III,13 (pañc°); V,204 (vaṭṭ° = pavāḷ° aṅkurasadisā vaṭṭaṅgulī p. 207). See also pañcaṅgulika. (Page 7)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṅgulimāla: {'def': 'm. アングリマーラ(巴利文的片假名發音), 央掘摩羅, 指鬘〔從兇賊變成佛弟子〕.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'm. アングリマーラ, 央掘摩羅, 指鬘〔兇賊から仏弟子となる〕.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Aṅgulī: {'def': '& Aṅguli (thus always in cpds.) (f.) [Vedic aṅgulī & °i; see aṅga] a finger A.IV,127; Sn.610; J.III,416; IV,474; V,215 (vaṭṭ° with rounded fingers); Miln.395; DhA.II,59; IV,210; SnA 229.

--patodaka nudging with the fingers Vin.III,84 = IV.110; D.I,91 = A.IV,343. --pada finger-mark A.IV,127 = S.III,154. --poṭha snapping or cracking the fingers J.V,67. --muddikā a signet ring Vin.II,106; J.IV,498; V,439, 467. --saṅghaṭṭana° = poṭha DA.I,256. (Page 7)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṅgulīyaka: {'def': 'Aṅguleyyaka,【中】戒指。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'Aṅguleyyaka,【中】戒指。(p3)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aṅguttara-nikāya: {'def': 'm. 増支部, 增一阿含經〔五部, 四阿含之一〕.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'm. 増支部, 增一阿含経〔五部, 四阿含の一〕.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Aṅguttaraṭṭhakathā: {'def': 'f. 増支部義疏 = Manorathapūraṇī (AA. ).', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'f. 増支部義疏 = Manorathapūraṇī (AA.).', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Aṅguṭṭha: {'def': '【阳】拇指(日语：亲指,oyayubi)，拇趾。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】拇指，拇趾。(p3)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. aṅguṣṭha, see etym. under aṅga] 1. the thumb Vin.III,34; Miln.123; PvA.198. -- 2. the great toe J.II,92; Mhvs 35, 43.

--pada thumb-mark A.IV,127 = S.III,154. --sineha love drawn from the thumb, i. e. extraordinary love Pv III,5², cp. PvA.198. (Page 7)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṅguṭṭhaka: {'def': '= aṅguṭṭha J.IV,378; V,281; pād° the great toe S.V,270. (Page 7)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṅgāra: {'def': '【阳】【中】火炭，炭渣。在灰烬中继续燃烧的一块煤炭。 ~kaṭātha,~kapalla,【阳】装煤渣或灰烬的平锅。 ~kāsu,【阴】一个充满煤渣或灰烬的坑。 ~maŋsa,【中】火炭上烤的肉。°~aṅgika,【形】（【合】）拥有很多成分的。例如： duvaṅgika = 两部分。由二个部份所组成。(p3)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m. nt.) [Vedic aṅgāra] charcoal, burning coal, embers A.III,97, 380, 407; J.I,73; III,54, 55; V,488; Sn.668; Sdhp.32. kul° the charcoal of the family, a squanderer S.IV,324 (see under kula).

--kaṭāha a pot for holding burning coal, a charcoal pan DA.I,261. --kapalla an earthenware pan for ashes DhA.I,260; Dhs.A 333; VvA.142. --kammakara a charcoal burner J.VI,209. --kāsu a charcoal pit M.I,74, 365; Th.2, 491; J.I,233; Sn.396; ThA.288; DhA.I,442; Sdhp.208. --pacchi a basket for ashes DhA.IV,191. --pabbata the mountain of live embers, the glowing mount (in Niraya) A.I,141; Miln.303; PvA.221 (°āropaṇa); Sdhp.208. --maṁsa roast meat Mhvs 10, 16. --masi ashes DhA.III,309. --rāsi a heap of burning coal J.III,55. (Page 7)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】【中】火炭，炭渣。在灰烬中继续燃烧的一块煤炭。aṅgārakaṭātha, aṅgārakapalla,【阳】装煤渣或灰烬的平锅。aṅgārakāsu,【阴】一个充满煤渣或灰烬的火坑。aṅgāramaṁsa,【中】火炭上烤的肉。aṅgāraṅgika,【形】(【合】)拥有很多成分的。例如：duvaṅgika = 两部分。由二个部份所组成。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṅgāraka: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. aṅgaraka] like charcoal, of red colour, N. of the planet Mars DA.I,95; cp. J.I,73. (Page 7)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐【形】炭火的，赤色的。【阳】火星(Mars)，有译作：势惑劳，盎哦罗迦。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṅgārika: {'def': 'a charcoal-burner J.VI,206 (= aṅgāra-kammakara p. 209). (Page 7)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṅgārin: {'def': '(adj.) [to aṅgāra] (burning) like coal, of brightred colour, crimson Th.1, 527 = J.I,87 (dumā trees in full bloom). (Page 7)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṅgīrasa: {'def': '【阳】辉煌者，佛陀。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】辉煌者，佛陀。(p3)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aṅka: {'def': '【阳】1.(人坐著时)大腿的朝上部分。2.特徵，记号。3.数位。aṅke nisinno, 坐大腿上。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 1. （人坐着时）大腿的朝上部分。 2. 特征，记号。3. 数字。(p3)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [Vedic aṅka hook, bent etc., anc, cp. aṅkura & aṅkusa. Gr. a]gkw/n elbow, a]/gkura = anchor; Lat. uncus nail; Ohg. angul = E. angle] (a.) a hook J.V,322 = VI,218 (v. l. BB aṅga). -- (b.) the lap (i. e. the bent position) or the hollow above the hips where infants are carried by Hindoo mothers or nurses (aṅkena vahati) Vin.II,114; D.II,19 (aṅke pariharati to hold on one’s lap or carry on one’s hips), 20 (nisīdāpeti seat on one’s lap); M.II,97 (aṅkena vahitvā); Th.1, 299; J.I,262 (aṅke nisinna); II,127, 236; VI,513; DhA.I,170 (aṅkena vahitvā) PvA.17 (nisīdāpeti). (Page 6)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ = aṅga, sign, mark, brand Miln.79; °karana branding J.IV,366, 375. See also aṅketi. (Page 6)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṅketi: {'def': '(aki + e), 划线标出，打烙印，写上号数。 aṅkesi, 【过】。 aṅketvā,【独】。(p3)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[denom. fr. aṅka¹] to mark out, brand J.I,451 lakkhaṇena); II,399. -- pp. aṅkita, q. v. (Page 6)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(aki +e), 划线标出，打烙印，写上号数。aṅkesi,【过】。aṅketvā,【独】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṅkita: {'def': 'Aṅketi 的【过分】，已划线标出，已打烙印。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of aṅketi] marked, branded J.I,231 (cakkaṅkitā Satthu padā); II,185 (°kaṇṇaka with perforated ears). (Page 6)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Aṅketi 的【过分】。(p3)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aṅkola: {'def': '[dial. for aṅkura] a species of tree Alangium Hexapetalum J.VI,535. Cp. next. (Page 6)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṅkolaka: {'def': '= aṅkola J.IV,440; V,420. (Page 6)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṅkura: {'def': '[cp. Sk. aṅkura, to aṅka a bend = a tendril etc.] a shoot, a sprout (lit. or fig.) J.II,105; VI,331 (Buddh °a nascent Buddha), 486; Dhs.617 (°vaṇṇa); Miln.50, 251 269; Sdhp.273; Mhvs 15, 43. (Page 6)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Sk. aṅkura),【阳】幼苗，嫩芽(台语：蘡inn2、芽ge5)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】幼苗，嫩芽。(p3)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aṅkusa: {'def': '【阳】采果子或驯象用的带钩棍子，钩杆。(p3)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】采果子或驯象用的带鈎棍子，鈎杆。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic aṅkuśa; to anc, see aṅka²] a hook, a pole with a hook, used (1) for plucking fruit off trees, a crook J.I,9 (°pacchi hook & basket); V,89 = VI,520 (pacchikhanitti°), 529 (= phalānaṁ gaṇhanatthaṁ aṅkusaṁ). ‹-› (2) to drive an elephant, a goad (cp patoda & tutta) Vin.II,196 (+ kasā); J.VI,489; ThA.173 (ovādaṁ aṅkusaṁ katvā, fig. guide); Sdhp.147 (daṇḍ°). -- (3) N. of a certain method of inference in Logic (naya), consisting in inferring certain mental states of a general character from respective traits where they are to be found Nett 2, 4, 127; Nett A 208; -- acc° beyond the reach of the goad D.II,266 (nāga). See also aṅkusaka.

--gayha (the art) how to grasp and handle an eleph.‹-› driver’s hook M.II,94 (sippa). --gaha an eleph.-driver Dh.326. (Page 6)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṅkusaka: {'def': '[see aṅka², cp. aṅkusa] 1. a crook for plucking fruit J.III,22. -- 2. an eleph.-driver’s hook J.III,431.

--yattha a crooked stick, alpenstock, staff (of an ascetic) J.II,68 (+ pacchi). (Page 6)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṅu: {'def': '【阳】微粒，原子。【形】微小的，微细的，原子的。 ~matta,【形】很小型的，细小，小小的。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aṅḍaja: {'def': '【形】卵生的。【阳】 1. 鸟。 2. 蛇。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aṅḍūpaka: {'def': '【中】 1 (一) 圈， (一) 卷。 2. 垫。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aṇa: {'def': '[Sk. ṛṇa; see etym. under iṇa, of which aṇa is a doublet. See also āṇaṇya] debt, only in neg. anaṇa (adj.) free from debt Vin.I,6 = S.I,137, 234 = D.II,39; Th.2, 364 (i. e. without a new birth); A.II,69; J.V,481; ThA.245. (Page 17)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵rṇa),【形】负债，负财物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṇha: {'def': '(Sk. ahna, day, see ahan),【阳】日，天，只有在复合词，例如：aparaṇha, pubbaṇha, majjhaṇha, sāyaṇha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. ahna, day, see ahan] day, only as --° in apar°, pubb°, majjh°, sāy°, q. v. (Page 17)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】日，天，只有在复合词，例如： pubbaṇha。(p8)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aṇu: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. aṇu; as to etym. see Walde Lat. Wtb. under ulna. See also āṇi] small, minute, atomic, subtle (opp. thūla, q. v.) D.I,223; S.I,136; V,96 (°bīja); Sn.299 (anuto aṇuṁ gradually); J.III,12 (= appamattaka); IV,203; Dhs.230, 617 (= kisa); ThA.173; Miln.361. Note aṇu is freq. spelt anu, thus usually in cpd. °matta.

--thūla (aṇuṁthūla) fine and coarse, small & large Dh.31 (= mahantañ ca khuddakañ ca DhA.I,282), 409 = Sn.633; J.IV,192; DhA.IV,184. --matta of small size, atomic, least Sn.431; Vbh.244, 247 (cp. M.III,134; A.II,22); Dpvs.IV,20. The spelling is anumatta at D.I,63 = It.118; Dh.284; DA.I,181; Sdhp.347. --sahagata accompanied by a minimum of, i. e. residuum Kvu 81, cp. Kvu trsl. 66 n. 3. (Page 17)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵aṇu),【阳】微粒，原子，极微，音译：阿拏(ㄋㄚˊ)。【形】微小的，微细的，原子的。aṇumatta,【形】很小型的，细小，小小的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṇuka: {'def': '(adj.) = aṇu Sn.146, KhA 246. (Page 17)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṇḍa: {'def': '(nt.) [Etym. unknown. Cp. Sk. aṇḍa] 1. an egg Vin.III,3; S.II,258; M.I,104; A.IV,125 sq. -- 2. (pl.) the testicles Vin.III,106. -- 3. (in camm°) a water-bag J.I,249 (see Morris J. P. T. S. 1884, 69).

--kosa shell of eggs Vin.III,3 = M.I,104; A.IV,126, 176. --cheda(ka) one who castrates, a gelder J.IV,364, 366. --ja 1. born from eggs S.III,241 (of snakes); M.I,73; J.II,53 =.V,85; Miln.267. -- 2. a bird J..V,189. --bhārin bearing his testicles S.II,258 = Vin.III,100. --sambhava the product of an egg, i. e. a bird Th.1, 599. --hāraka one who takes or exstirpates the testicles M.I,383. (Page 17)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Aṅḍaka,【中】 1. 蛋。 2. 睾丸。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Aṅḍaka,【中】1.蛋。2.睾丸。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṇḍaja: {'def': '【形】卵生的(有情类生从卵出生)。【阳】1.鸟。2.蛇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṇḍaka: {'def': '² (adj.) [Sk.? prob. an inorganic form; the diaeresis of caṇḍaka into c° aṇḍaka seems very plausible. As to meaning cp. DhsA.396 and see Dhs.trsl. 349, also Morris J. P. T. S. 1893, 6, who, not satisfactorily, tries to establish a relation to ard, as in aṭṭa³] only used of vācā, speech: harsh, rough, insolent M.I,286; A.V,265, 283, 293 (gloss kaṇṭakā); J.III,260; Dhs.1343, cp. DhsA.396. (Page 17)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) = aṇḍa, egg DhA.I,60; III,137 (sakuṇ°). (Page 17)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṇḍūpaka: {'def': '【中】1.(一) 圈，(一) 卷。2.垫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṇṇa: {'def': '【阳】水。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(food, cereal). See passages under aparaṇṇa & pubbaṇṇa. (Page 17)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】水。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṇṇava: {'def': '【阳】大海，海洋。(p8)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Sk. arṇa & arṇava),【阳】1.大水流(a great flood (= ogha瀑流))，大海、海洋(the sea or ocean)。2.河流(a stream, river)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. arṇa & arṇava to ṛ, ṛṇoti to move, Idg. *er to be in quick motion, cp. Gr. o)ρnumi; Lat. orior; Goth. rinnan = E. run; Ohg. runs, river, flow.] 1. a great flood (= ogha), the sea or ocean (often as mah°, cp. BSk. mahārṇava, e. g. Jtm 31⁷⁵) M.I,134; S.I,214; IV,157 (mahā udak°); Sn.173 (fig. for saṁsāra see SnA 214), 183, 184; J.I,119 (°kucchi), 227 (id.); V,159 (mah°); Mhvs 5, 60; 19, 16 (mah°). -- 2. a stream, river J.III, 521; V,255. (Page 17)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṭala: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. aṭṭa & aṭṭālaka stronghold] solid, firm, strong, only in phrase aṭaliyo upāhanā strong sandals M.II,155 (vv. ll. paṭaliye & agaliyo) = S.I,226 (vv. ll. āṭaliyo & āṭaliko). At the latter passage Bdhgh. expl^s. gaṇaṅgaṇ-ûpāhanā, Mrs. Rh. D. (Kindred Sayings I.291) trsls. “buskined shoes”. (Page 15)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṭana: {'def': '【中】漫游。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】漫游。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aṭani: {'def': '【阴】床的构架。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】床的构架。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṭanī: {'def': '(f.) a support a stand inserted under the leg of a bedstead Vin.IV,168; Sām. Pās. on Pāc. 14 (quoted Min. Pāt. 86 and Vin.IV,357); DhA.I,234; J.II,387, 425, 484 supports of a seat. Morris J. P. T. S. 1884, 69 compares Marāthi aḍaṇī a three-legged stand. See also Vin Texts II,53. (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṭavī: {'def': '(Sk. aṭavī: Non-Aryan),【阴】1.森林、木头(forest, woods)。2.住森林的人(inhabitant of the forest, wild tribe J.VI,55 (= aṭavicorā C.))。aṭavīrakkhika, 森林保护者(guardian of the forest J.II,335)。aṭavīsaṅkhepa at A.I,178 = III,66 is prob. faulty reading for v. l. °saṅkopa “inroad of savage tribes”.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. aṭavī: Non-Aryan, prob. Dravidian] 1. forest, woods J.I,306; II,117; III,220; DhA.I,13; PvA.277. ‹-› 2. inhabitant of the forest, man of the woods, wild tribe J.VI,55 (= aṭavicorā C.).

--rakkhika guardian of the forest J.II,335. --saṅkhepa at A.I,178 = III,66 is prob. faulty reading for v. l. °saṅkopa “inroad of savage tribes”. (Page 15)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṭaṇaka: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. aṭana, to aṭ] roaming about, wild J.V,105 (°gāvī). (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṭaṭa: {'def': '[BSk. aṭaṭa (e. g. Divy 67), prob. to aṭ roam about. On this notion cp. description of roaming about in Niraya at Nd¹ 405 bottom] N. of a certain purgatory or Niraya A.V,173 = Sn.p. 126. (Page 14)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】1.一个小地狱的名。2.一个大数位。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 一个小地狱的名。 2. 一个大数字。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aṭaṭa niraya: {'def': '阿嗒嗒地狱。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Aṭṭa: {'def': '【中】 1. 讼案。 2. 了望塔，岗楼。 3. 脚手架。【形】 (来自 aṭṭita:) 伤心的，苦恼的。 ~kāra,【阳】诉讼当事人。 ~ssara,【阳】痛哭。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '³ [Sk. ārta, pp. of ardati, ṛd to dissolve, afflict etc.; cp. Sk. ārdra (= P. adda and alla); Gr. a)ρdw to moisten, a)ρda dirt. See also aṭṭīyati & aṭṭita] distressed, tormented, afflicted; molested, plagued, hurt Sn.694 (+ vyasanagata; SnA 489 ātura); Th.2, 439 (= aṭṭita ThA.270), 441 (= pīḷita ThA.271); J.IV,293 (= ātura C.); Vv 80⁹ (= attita upadduta VvA.311). Often --°: iṇaṭṭa oppressed by debt M.I,463; Miln.32; chāt° tormented by hunger VvA.76; vedan° afflicted by pain Vin.II,61; III,100; J.I,293; sūcik° (read for sūcikaṭṭha) pained by stitch Pv III,2³.

--ssara cry of distress Vin.III,105; S.II,255; J.I,265; II,117; Miln.357; PvA.285. (Page 15)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [cp. Sk. artha, see also attha 5 b] lawsuit, case, cause Vin.IV,224; J.II,2, 75; IV,129 (°ṁ vinicchināti to judge a cause), 150 (°ṁ tīreti to see a suit through); VI,336. (Page 15)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [cp. see aṭṭaka] a platform to be used as a watchtower Vin.I,140; DA.I,209. (Page 15)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】1.讼案(lawsuit)。2.了望塔，岗楼。3.脚手架。【形】(来自 aṭṭita:) 伤心的，苦恼的。aṭṭakāra,【阳】诉讼当事人。aṭṭakārikā(=akārikā, Sp. IV,Pāci.907),【阴】女诉讼当事人。aṭṭassara,【阳】痛哭。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṭṭaka: {'def': '[Demin. of aṭṭa¹] a platform to be used as a watchhouse on piles, or in a tree Vin.I,173; II,416; III,322, 372; DA.I,209. (Page 15)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṭṭha: {'def': '【形】八。aṭṭhama, aṭṭhamaka,【形】第八。aṭṭhamī,【阴】农历初八。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [Vedic aṣṭau, old dual, Idg. *octou, pointing to a system of counting by tetrads (see also nava); Av. ašta, Gr. o]ktw/, Lat. octo, Goth. ahtau = Ohg. ahto, Ger. acht, E. eight] num. card, eight, decl. like pl. of adj. in-a. A. The number in objective significance, based on natural phenomena: see cpds. °aṅgula, °nakha, °pada, °pāda. B. The number in subjective significance. -- (1) As mark of respectability and honour, based on the idea of the double square: (a) in meaning “a couple” aṭṭha matakukkuṭe aṭṭha jīva-k. gahetvā (with 8 dead & 8 live cocks; eight instead of 2 because gift intended for a king) DhA.I,213. saṅghassa a salākabhattaṁ dāpesi VvA.75 = DhA.III,104. a. piṇḍapātāni adadaṁ Vv 34⁸. a. vattha-yugāni (a double pair as offering) PvA.232, a therā PvA.32. -- The highest respectability is expressed by 8 X 8 = 64, and in this sense is freq. applied to gifts, where the giver gives a higher potency of a pair (2³). Thus a “royal” gift goes under the name of sabb-aṭṭhakaṁ dānaṁ (8 elephants, 8 horses, 8 slaves etc.) where each of 8 constituents is presented in 8 exemplars DhA.II,45, 46, 71. In the same sense aṭṭh’aṭṭha kahāpaṇā (as gift) DhA.II,41; aṭṭh-aṭṭhakā dibbākaññā Vv 67³ (= catusaṭṭhi VvA.290); aṭṭhaṭṭhaka Dpvs VI,56. Quite conspicuous is the meaning of a “couple” in the phrase satt-aṭṭha 7 or 8 = a couple, e. g. sattaṭṭha divasā, a weck or so J.I,86; J.II,101; VvA.264 (saṁvaccharā years). -- (b.) used as definite measure of quantity & distance, where it also implies the respectability of the gift, 8 being the lowest unit of items that may be given decently. Thus freq. as aṭṭha kahāpaṇā J.I,483; IV,138; VvA.76; Miln.291. -- In distances: a. karīsā DhA.II,80; IV,217; PvA.258; a. usabhā J.IV,142. ‹-› (c.) in comb^n. with 100 and 1000 it assumes the meaning of “a great many”, hundreds, thousands. Thus aṭṭha sataṁ 800, Sn.227. As denotation of wealt (cp. below under 18 and 80): a-°sata-sahassa-vibhava DhA.IV,7. But aṭṭhasata at S.IV,232 means 108 (3 X 36), probably also at J.V,377. -- aṭṭha sahassaṁ 8000 J.V,39 (nāgā). The same meaning applies to 80 as well as to its use as unit in comb^n. with any other decimal (18, 28, 38 etc.): (a) 80 (asīti) a great many. Here belong the 80 smaller signs of a Mahāpurisa (see anuvyañjana), besides the 32 main signs (see dvattiṁsa) VvA.213 etc. Freq. as measure of riches, e. g. 80 waggon loads Pv.II,7⁵; asīti-koṭivibhava DhA.III,129; PvA.196; asīti hatth’ubbedho rāsi (of gold) VvA.66, etc. See further references under asīti. -- (b) The foll. are examples of 8 with other decimals: 18 aṭṭhādasa (only M.III,239: manopavicārā) & aṭṭhārasa (this the later form) VvA.213 (avenika-buddhadhammā: Bhagavant’s qualities); as measure J.VI,432 (18 hands high, of a fence); of a great mass or multitue: aṭṭhārasa koṭiyo or °koṭi, 18 koṭis J.I,92 (of gold), 227; IV,378 (°dhana, riches); DhA.II,43 (of people); Miln.20 (id.); a. akkhohini-saṅkhāsenā J.VI,395. a. vatthū Vin.II,204. -- 28 aṭṭhavīsati nakkhattāni Nd¹ 382; paṭisallāṇaguṇā Miln.140. -- 38 aṭṭhatiṁsā Miln.359 (rājaparisā). -- 48 aṭṭhacattārīsaṁ vassāni Sn.289. -- 68 aṭṭhasaṭṭhi Th.1, 1217 °sitā savitakkā, where id. p. at S.I,187 however reads atha saṭṭhi-tasitā vitakkā); J.I,64 (turiya-satasahassāni) ‹-› 98 aṭṭhanavuti (cp. 98 the age of Eli, 1 Sam. IV.15) Sn.311 (rogā, a higher set than the original 3 diseases, cp. navuti). -- (2) As number of symmetry or of an intrinsic, harmonious, symmetrical set, aṭṭha denotes, like dasa (q. v.) a comprehensive unity. See esp. the cpds. for this application. °aṁsa and °aṅgika. Closely related to nos. 2 and 4 aṭṭha is in the geometrical progression of 2. 4. 8. 16. 32. where each subsequent number shows a higher symmetry or involves a greater importance (cp. 8 X 8 under 1 a) -- J.V,409 (a. maṅgalena samannāgata, of Indra’s chariot: with the 8 lucky signs); VvA.193 (aṭṭhahi akkhaṇehi vajjitaṁ manussabhāvaṁ: the 8 unlucky signs). In progression: J.IV,3 (aṭṭha petiyo, following after 4, then foll. by 8, 16, 32); PvA.75 (a. kapparukkhā at each point of the compass, 32 in all). Further: 8 expressions of bad language DhA.IV,3. --aṁsa with eight edges, octagonal, octahedral, implying perfect or divine symmetry (see above B. 2), of a diamond D.I,76 = M.III,121 (maṇi veḷuriyo a.); Miln.282 (maṇiratanaṁ subhaṁ jātimantaṁ a.) of the pillars of a heavenly palace (Vimāna) J.VI,127 = 173 = Vv 78² (a. sukatā thambhā); Vv 84¹⁵ (āyataṁsa = āyatā hutvā aṭṭha-soḷasadvattiṁsādi-aṁsavanto VvA.339). Of a ball of string Pv IV.3²⁸ (gulaparimaṇḍala, cp. PvA.254). Of geometrical figures in general Dhs.617. --aṅga (of) eight parts, eightfold, consisting of eight ingredients or constituents (see also next and above B 2 on significance of aṭṭha in this connection), in comp^n. with °upeta characterised by the eight parts (i. e. the observance of the first eight of the commandments or vows, see sīla & cp. aṅga 2), of uposatha, the fast-day A.I,215; Sn.402 (SnA. 378 expl^s. ekam pi divasaṁ apariccajanto aṭṭhaṅgupetaṁ uposathaṁ upavassa); cp. aṭṭhaṅguposathin (adj.) Mhvs 36, 84. In BSk. always in phrase aṣṭānga-samanvāgata upavāsa, e. g. Divy 398; Sp. Av. Ś I.338, 399; also vrata Av. Ś I.170. In the same sense aṭṭhaṅgupeta pāṭihāriyapakkha (q. v.) Sn.402, where Vv 15⁶ has °susamāgata (expl^d. at VvA.72 by pānāṭipātā veramaṇī-ādīhi aṭṭhah’ aṅgehi samannāgata). °samannāgata endowed with the eight qualities (see aṅga 3), of rājā, a king D.I,137 sq., of brahmassara, the supreme or most excellent voice (of the Buddha) D.II,211; J.I,95; VvA.217. Also in Buddh. Sk. aṣṭāngopeta svara of the voice of the Buddha, e. g. Sp. Av. Ś I.149. --aṅgika having eight constituents, being made up of eight (intrinsic) parts, embracing eight items (see above B 2); of the uposatha (as in prec. aṭṭhaṅg’uposatha) Sn.401; of the “Eightfold Noble Path” (ariyo a. maggo). (Also in BSk. as aṣṭāṅgika mārga, e. g. Lal. Vist. 540, cp. aṣṭāṅgamārgadeśika of the Buddha, Divy 124, 265); D.I,156, 157, 165; M.I,118; It.18; Sn.1130 (magga uttama); Dh.191, 273; Th.2, 158, 171; Kh IV.; Vin.I,10; Nd² 485; DA.I,313; DhA.III,402. --aṅgula eight finger-breadths thick, eight inches thick, i. e. very thick, of double thickness J.II,91 (in contrast to caturaṅgula); Mhvs 29, 11 (with sattaṅgula). --aḍḍha (v. l. aḍḍhaṭṭha) half of eight, i. e. four (°pāda) J.VI,354, see also aḍḍha¹. --nakha having eight nails or claws J.VI,354 (: ekekasmiṁ pāde dvinnaṁ dvinnaṁ khurānaṁ vasena C.). --nava eight or nine DhA.III,179. --pada 1. a chequered board for gambling or playing drafts etc., lit. having eight squares, i. e. on each side (DA.I,85: ekekāya pantiyā aṭṭha aṭṭha padāni assā ti), cp. dasapada D.I,6. -- 2. eightfold, folded or plaited in eight, cross-plaited (of hair) Th.1, 772 (aṭṭhāpada-katā kesā); J.II,5 (°ṭṭhapana = cross-plaiting). --padaka a small square (1/8), i. e. a patch Vin.I,297; II,150. --pāda an octopod, a kind of (fabulous) spider (or deer?) J.V,377; VI,538; cp. Sk. aṣṭapāda = śarabha a fabulous eight-legged animal. --maṅgala having eight anspicious signs J.V,409 (expl^d. here to mean a horse with white hair on the face, tail, mane, and breast, and above each of the four hoofs). --vaṅka with eight facets, lit. eight-crooked, i. e. polished on eight sides, of a jewel J.VI,388. --vidha eightfold Dhs.219. (Page 15)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】八。 ~ma, ~maka,【形】第八。 ~mī,【阴】农历初八。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '﹐【阳】意义。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² see attha. (Page 16)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṭṭhaka: {'def': '【中】八人一夥。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】八人一伙。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. aṣṭaka] -- 1. eightfold Vin.I,196 = Ud.59 (°vaggikāni); VvA.75 = DhA.III,104 (°bhatta). -- 2. °ā (f.) the eight day of the lunar month (cp. aṭṭhamī), in phrase rattīsu antar’aṭṭhakāsu in the nights between the eighths, i. e. the 8^th day before and after the full moon Vin.I,31, 288 (see Vin Texst I.130ⁿ); M.I,79; A.I,136; Miln.396; J.I,390. -- 3. °ṁ (nt.) an octad Vv 67² (aṭṭh° eight octads = 64); VvA.289, 290. On sabbaṭṭhaka see aṭṭha B 1 a. See also antara. (Page 16)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṭṭhakathā: {'def': '【阴】说明，解说，注释。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '巴利三藏的注释书。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '【阴】说明，解说，注释。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṭṭhama: {'def': '(num. ord.) [Sk. aṣṭama, see aṭṭha¹] the eighth Sn.107, 230 (cp. KhA 187), 437. -- f. °ī the eighth day of the lunar half month (cp. aṭṭhakā) A.I,144; Sn.402; Vv 16⁶ (in all three pass. as pakkhassa cātuddasī pañcadasī ca aṭṭhamī); A.I,142; Sn.570 (ito atthami, scil. divase, Loc.). (Page 16)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṭṭhamaka: {'def': '= aṭṭhama the eighth. -- 1. lit. Miln.291 (att° self-eighth). -- 2. as tt. the eighth of eight persons who strive after the highest perfection, reckoned from the first or Arahant. Hence the eighth is he who stands on the lowest step of the Path and is called a sotāpanna (q. v.) Kvu 243--251 (cp. Kvu trsl. 146 sq.); Nett 19, 49, 50; Ps.II,193 (+ sotāpanna). (Page 16)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṭṭhapada: {'def': '【中】棋盘。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】棋盘。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aṭṭhasata: {'def': '﹐一百零八。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṭṭhaŋsa: {'def': '【形】八边形的。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aṭṭhaṁsa: {'def': '【形】八边形的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṭṭhaṅgika: {'def': '【形】有八个成份，八支部。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】有八个成份，八支部。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aṭṭhi: {'def': '2,【中】1.骨。2.硬种子(the stone of a fruit J.II,104.)。aṭṭhikaṅkala,【阳】骷髅、骸骨。aṭṭhikalyāṇa,【中】美牙。aṭṭhimaya,【形】骨造的。aṭṭhimiñjā,【阴】骨髓。aṭṭhisaṅkhalikā,【阴】aṭṭhisaṅghāṭa,【阳】骷髅(骨聚)。“Nābhijānāmi itthī vā puriso ito gato, api ca aṭṭhisaṅghāto gacchatesa mahāpathe”ti.(我不知是男是女，从此(路)走去；但(见)一堆(白)骨，行在这条大路。)(gacchatesa = gacchati esa)(Vism.21) Vism.253-4.︰Aṭṭhīti ṭhapetvā dvattiṁsa dantaṭṭhīni avasesāni catusaṭṭhi hatthaṭṭhīni, catusaṭṭhi pādaṭṭhīni, catusaṭṭhi maṁsanissitāni mudu-aṭṭhīni, dve paṇhikaṭṭhīni, ekekasmiṁ pāde dve dve gopphakaṭṭhīni, dve jaṅghaṭṭhīni, ekaṁ jaṇṇukaṭṭhi, ekaṁ ūruṭṭhi, dve kaṭiṭṭhīni, aṭṭhārasa piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīni, catuvīsati phāsukaṭṭhīni, cuddasa uraṭṭhīni ekaṁ hadayaṭṭhi, dve akkhakaṭṭhīni, dve koṭṭaṭṭhīni, dve bāhuṭṭhīni, dve dve aggabāhuṭṭhīni, satta gīvaṭṭhīni, dve hanukaṭṭhīni, ekaṁ nāsikaṭṭhi, dve akkhiṭṭhīni, dve kaṇṇaṭṭhīni, ekaṁ nalāṭaṭṭhi. Ekaṁ muddhaṭṭhi, nava sīsakapālaṭṭhīnīti evaṁ timattāni aṭṭhisatāni.(「骨」──是除了三十二颗齿骨之外，其他的六十四根手骨，六十四根足骨，六十四根筋肉依止的软骨，二根踵骨，每一足各有二根的踝骨，各有二根胫骨(胫骨与腓骨)，各有一膝盖骨，各一大腿骨，二臀骨(髋骨)，十八根脊椎骨，二十四根肋骨，十四根胸骨(肋软骨)，一心骨(胸骨)，二锁骨，二肩(胛)骨，二臂骨(上膊骨)，各二前膊骨(桡骨与尺骨)，七颈骨(颈椎)，二腭骨，一鼻骨(鼻腔)，二眼骨(眼窝)，二耳骨(听腔)，一额骨(前头骨)，一头骨(后头骨)，九头盖骨(颅顶骨、颞顬骨等)，即如是有三百骨。)(Vism.153-4) (cf.《修行道地经》卷第一T15.187.1)；《根本说一切有部毘奈耶杂事》卷第十一(T24.255.1-2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (nt.) [Sk. asthi = Av. asti, Gr. o]ζteon, o]ζtrakon, a]strάgalos; Lat. os (*oss); also Gr. o]/zos branch Goth. asts] ‹-› 1. a bone A.I,50; IV,129; Sn.194 (°nahāru bones & tendons); Dh.149, 150; J.I,70; III,26, 184; VI,448 (°vedhin); DhA.III,109 (300 bones of the human body, as also at Suśruta III,5); KhA 49; PvA.68 (°camma-nahāru), 215 (gosīs°); Sdhp.46, 103. -- 2. the stone of a fruit J.II,104.

--kaṅkala [Sk. °kaṅkāla] a skeleton M.I,364; cp. °saṅkhalika. --kadali a special kind of the plantain tree (Musa Sapientum) J.V,406. --kalyāṇa beauty of bones DhA.I,387. --camma bones and skin J.II,339; DhA.III,43; PvA.68 --taca id. J.II,295. --maya made of bone Vin.II,115. --miñjā marrow A.IV,129; DhA.I,181; III,361; KhA 52. --yaka (T. aṭṭhīyaka) bones & liver S.I,206. --saṅkhalikā [B. Sk. °śakalā Sp. Av. Ś I.274 sq., see also aṭṭhika°] a chain of bones, i. e. a skeleton DhA.III,479; PvA.152. --saṅghāṭa conjunction of bones, i. e. skeleton Vism.21; DhA.II,28; PvA.206. --sañcaya a heap of bones It.17 = Bdhd 87. --saññā the idea of bones (cp. aṭṭhika°) Th.1, 18. --saṇṭhāna a skeleton Sdhp.101. (Page 16)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 1. 骨。 2. 硬种子。 ~kaṅkala,【阳】骷髅。 ~kalyāṇa,【中】美牙。~maya,【形】骨造的。 ~miñjā,【阴】骨髓。 ~saṅkhalikā,【阴】 ~saṅghāṭa,【阳】骷髅。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aṭṭhi-: {'def': '1 (= attha (aṭṭha) in compn. with kar & bhū, as freq. in Sk. and P. with i for a, like citti-kata (for citta°), aṅgi-bhūta (for aṅga°); cp. the freq. combn. (with similar meaning) manasi-kata (besides manasā-k.), also upadhikaroti and others. This combn. is restricted to the pp. and der. (aṭṭhikata & aṭṭhikatvā)), 意义，目标(aṭṭhikatvā︰做目标to make something one’s attha, i. e. Nearly always in stock phrase aṭṭhikatvā manasikatvā)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṭṭhika: {'def': '² at PvA.180 (sūcik°) to be read aṭṭita (q. v.) for aṭṭika. (Page 16)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1 (fr. aṭṭhi), 【中】1.骨(=aṭṭhi, a bone )。2.(果核或果壳内的)仁，石头(= aṭṭhi , kernel, stone；tālaṭṭhi)。aṭṭhisaṅkhalikā(f.), 骨链(a chain of bones, a skeleton A.III,324 see also under kaṭaṭṭhika)。aṭṭhisaññā, 骨想(the idea of a skeleton)。身体的骨头︰手骨(hatthaṭṭhika, hattha m.)、足骨(pādaṭṭhika, pāda m. n.)、足踝骨(gopphakaṭṭhika, gopphaka n.)、小腿骨(jaṅghaṭṭhika, jaṅghā f.)、大腿骨(ūruṭṭhika, ūru m.)、髋骨(kaṭiṭṭhika, kaṭi f.)、肋骨(phāsukaṭṭhika= phāsukā, f.)、脊椎骨(piṭṭhiṭṭhika, piṭṭhi n.)、肩骨(khandhaṭṭhika, khandha m.)、颈骨(gīvaṭṭhika, gīvā f.)、颚骨(hanukaṭṭhika, hanuka f.)、牙齿(dantaṭṭhika, danta m.)、头颅(sīsakaṭāha m.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [fr. aṭṭhi] 1. = aṭṭhi 1 a bone M.III,92; J.I,265, 428; VI,404; PvA.41. -- 2 = aṭṭhi 2 kernel, stone DhA.II,53 (tāl°); Mhvs 15, 42.

--saṅkhalikā a chain of bones, a skeleton A.III,324 see also under kaṭaṭṭhika. --saññā the idea of a skeleton S.V,129 sq.; A.II,17; Dhs.264. (Page 16)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṭṭhilla: {'def': 'at Vin.II,266 is expl^d. by Bdhgh on p. 327 by gojaṅghaṭṭika, perhaps more likely = Sk. aṣṭhīlā a round pebble or stone. (Page 16)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṭṭhita: {'def': '【形】不坚定的。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ see ṭhita. (Page 16)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [ā + ṭhita] undertaken, arrived at, looked after, considered J.II,247 (= adhiṭṭhita C.). (Page 16)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ see atthika. (Page 16)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】不坚定的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṭṭhi°: {'def': '¹ [= attha (aṭṭha) in comp^n. with kar & bhū, as freq. in Sk. and P. with i for a, like citti-kata (for citta°), aṅgi-bhūta (for aṅga°); cp. the freq. comb^n. (with similar meaning) manasi-kata (besides manasā-k.), also upadhikaroti and others. This comb^n. is restricted to the pp and der. (°kata & °katvā). Other expl^ns. by Morris J. P. T. S. 1886, 107; Windisch, M. & B. 100], in comb^n. with katvā: to make something one’s attha, i. e. object, to find out the essence or profitableness or value of anything, to recognise the nature of, to realise, understand, know. Nearly always in stock phrase aṭṭhikatvā manasikatvā D.II,204; M.I,325, 445; S.I,112 sq. = 189, 220; V,76; A.II,116; III,163; J.I,189; V,151 (: attano atthikabhāvaṁ katvā atthiko hutvā sakkaccaṁ suṇeyya C.); Ud.80 (: adhikicca, ayaṁ no attho adhigantabbo evaṁ sallakkhetvā tāya desanāya atthikā hutvā C.); Sdhp.220 (°katvāna). (Page 16)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṭṭhāna: {'def': '【中】 1. 不对的地方或不正确的地方。 2. 不可能。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】1.不对的地方或不正确的地方。2.不可能。aṭṭhānametaṁ, 这是不可能。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [ā + ṭṭhāna] stand, post; name of the rubbing-post which, well cut & with incised rows of squares, was let into the ground of a bathing-place, serving as a rubber to people bathing Vin.II,105, 106 (read aṭṭhāne with BB; cp. Vin.II,315). (Page 16)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṭṭhānametaṁ: {'def': '(aṭṭhāna不可能+m+etaṁ这)﹐这个不可能。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṭṭhārasa: {'def': '【形】十八。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】十八。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aṭṭhāsi: {'def': '3.sg.aor. of tiṭṭhāti(站著)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṭṭhīkatvā: {'def': '【独】很留心，很注意，兴趣。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【独】很留心，很注意，兴趣。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aṭṭita: {'def': '(& occasionally addita, e. g. Pv.II,6²; Th.2, 77, 89; Th.1, 406) [Sk. ardita, pp. of ardayati, Caus. of ardati, see aṭṭa³] pained, distressed, grieved, terrified Th.1, 157; J.II,436; IV,85 (v. l. addhita); V,84; VvA.311; ThA.270; Mhvs 1, 25; 6, 21; Dpvs.I,66; II,23; XIII,9; Sdhp.205. ‹-› See remarks of Morris J. P. T. S. 1886, 104, & 1887. 47. (Page 15)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已苦恼，已伤心，已悲痛。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【过分】已苦恼，已伤心，已悲痛。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṭṭiyana: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. ardana, to aṭṭiyati] fright, terror, amazement DhA.II,179. (Page 15)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṭṭiyati: {'def': '& Aṭṭiyati [denom. fr. aṭṭa³, q. v.] to be in trouble or anxiety, to be worried, to be incommodated, usually comb^d. with harāyati, e. g. D.I,213 (+ jigucchati); S.I,131; M.I,423; Pv.I,10² (= aṭṭā dukkhitā PvA.48), freq. in ppr. aṭṭiyamāna harayāmāna (+ jigucchamāna) Vin.II,292; J.I,66, 292; It.43; Nd² 566; Ps.I,159. ‹-› Spelling sometimes addiyāmi, e. g. Th.2, 140. -- pp. aṭṭita & addita. (Page 15)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṭṭāka: {'def': '【阳】高站台或脚手架。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】高站台或脚手架。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṭṭāla: {'def': '[from aṭṭa] a watch-tower, a room at the top of a house, or above a gate (koṭṭhaka) Th.1, 863; J.III,160; V,373; Miln.1, 330; DhA.III,488. (Page 15)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṭṭālaka: {'def': '[Sk. aṭṭālaka] = aṭṭāla; J.II,94, 220, 224; VI,390, 433; Miln.66, 81. (Page 15)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aṭṭāna: {'def': 'at Vin.II,106 is obscure, should it not rather be read with Bdhgh as aṭṭhāna? (cp. Bdhgh on p. 315). (Page 15)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】沐浴者用来搓澡的一种被切成四方形的柱。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】沐浴者用来搓澡的一种被切成四方形的柱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṭṭīyana: {'def': '【中】 ~nā,【阴】嫌恶，令人厌恶，非常讨厌。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】aṭṭīyanā,【阴】嫌恶，令人厌恶，非常讨厌。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aṭṭīyati: {'def': '(aṭṭ+i+ya), 苦恼，烦恼。aṭṭīyi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(aṭṭ + i + ya), 苦恼，烦恼。 aṭṭīyi, 【过】。(p7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

B: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第二十三个辅音字母。发音是带音的 b，汉语没有这个辅音，请参考英语或马来语的发音。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第二十三个辅音字母。发音是带音的 b，汉语没有这个辅音，请参考英语或马来语的发音。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ba: {'def': '(indecl.) the sound (& letter) b, often substituted for or replaced by p (& ph): so is e. g. in Bdhgh’s view pahuta the word bahuta, with p for b (KhA 207), cp. bakkula, badara, badālatā, baddhacara, bandhuka 2, bala, balīyati, bahuka, bahūta, billa, bella; also paribandha for paripantha; phāla2. Also substituted for v, cp. bajjayitvā v.l. vajjetvā DAI, 4, and see under Nibb-. (Page 481)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Babbaja: {'def': '【中】须芒草(Andropogon Muricatus，参考 Usīra) 的芬香根。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】须芒草 (参考 Usīra) 的芬香根。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic balbaja, doubtful whether it belongs to Lat. bulbus; for the initial b. very often p. is found: see pabbaja] a sort of coarse grass or reed, used to make slippers, etc. Vin.I,190; D.II,55; S.II,92; III,137; IV,158; A.II,211; Dh.345; DhA.IV,55. --pādukā a slipper out of b. grass DhA.III,451. --lāyaka cutter or reaper of grass S.III,155; A.III,365. (Page 482)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Babbu: {'def': 'babbuka,【阳】猫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'babbuka, 【阳】猫。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(& °ka) Epic [Sk. babhruka a kind of ichneumon; Vedic babhru brown, cp. Lat. fiber=beaver, further connection “bear,” see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fiber] a cat J.I,480 (=biḷāra C.)=DhA.II,152. Babbhara [onomat., cp. Sk. balbalā-karoti to stammer or stutter, barbara=Gr. baρbaros stuttering, people of an unknown tongue, balbūtha Np. “stammerer”; also Lat. balbas, Ger. plappern, E. blab; babbhara is a redupl. formation fr. *bhara-bhara=barbara, cp. J.P.T.S. 1889, 209; Geiger, P.Gr. § 20] imitation of a confused rumbling noise M.I,128. -- Cp. also P. mammana and sarasara. (Page 482)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Badalatā: {'def': '【阴】盘陀罗多(一种有甜味的藤)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】槃陀罗多（一种甘美的藤）。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Badara: {'def': '【中】枣子(jujube fruit)。badaramissa,【形】混合枣子的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】枣子。 ~missa, 【形】混合枣子的。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m. & nt.) [cp. Ved. badara & badarī] the fruit of the jujube tree (Zizyphus jujuba), not unlike a crabapple in appearance & taste, very astringent, used for medicine A.I,130=Pug.32; A.III,76; Vin.IV,76; J.III,21; DhsA.320 (cited among examples of acrid flavours); VvA.186. Spelling padara for b° at J.IV,363; VI,529. --aṭṭhi kernel of the j. SnA 247. --paṇḍu light yellow (fresh) jujube-fruit A.I,181 (so read for bhadara°). --missa mixture or addition of the juice of jujube-fruits Vin.IV,76. --yūsa juice of the j. fruit VvA.185. (Page 481)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Badarī: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. badarī] the jujube tree J.II,260. (Page 481)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】枣树（多年生小乔木 (Ziziphus jujuba)）。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】枣树(多年生小乔木 (jujube tree；Ziziphus jujuba))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Baddha: {'def': '(bandhati 的【过分】), 已限制，已诱捕，已抓住，已使牢固，已装配。 ~ñjalika, 【形】合十的。 ~rāva, 【阳】陷入陷阱的啼叫，被捕捉的呜咽。 ~vera, 【中】（心胸等）狭小的敌意。【形】有如此的敌意。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (nt.) [fr. bandhati] a leather strap, a thong Vin.I,287 (T. bandha perhaps right, cp. ābandhana 3); PvA.127. (Page 481)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of bandhati] 1. bound, in bondage M.I,275; S.I,133; IV,91; Sn.957 (interpreted as “baddhacara” by Nd1 464); Dh.324. -- 2. snared, trapped J.II,153; III,184; IV,251, 414. -- 3. made firm, settled, fastened, bound (to a cert. place) KhA 60 (°pitta, opp. abaddha°). -- 4. contracted, acquired Vin.III,96. -- 5. bound to, addicted or attached to Sn.773 (bhavasāta°, cp. Nd1 30). -- 6. put together, kneaded, made into cakes (of meal) J.III,343; V,46; VI,524. -- 7. bound together, linked, clustered DhA.I,304 kaṇṇika° (of thoughts). -- 9. set, made up (of the mind) DhA.I,11 (mānasaṁ te b.). ‹-› Cp. ati°, anu°, a°, ni°, paṭi°, vini°, sam°. --añjalika keeping the hands reverently extended Dāvs III,30. --rāva the cry of the bound (or trapped) J.IV,279, 415 (v. l. bandhana°). --vera having contracted an enmity, hostile, bearing a grudge DhA.I,324. (Page 481)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bandhati 的【过分】), 已限制，已诱捕，已抓住，已使牢固，已装配。baddhajalika,【形】合十的。baddharāva,【阳】陷入陷阱的啼叫，被捕捉的呜咽。baddhavera,【中】(心胸等)狭小的敌意。【形】有如此的敌意。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Baddhacara: {'def': 'see paddhacara. (Page 481)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Badhira: {'def': '【形】聋的，聋子。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】聋的，聋子。andhabadhira﹐无知的聋子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Vedic badhira, on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fatuus, comparing Goth. baups and M. Irish bodar] deaf Vin.I,91, 322; Th.1, 501= Miln.367; J.I,76 (jāti°); V,387; VI,7; DhA.I,312. See also mūga. --dhātuka deaf by nature J.II,63; IV,146; DhA.I,346. (Page 481)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Badālatā: {'def': '(f.) [etym. uncertain, may it be *padālatā, pa+ n. ag. of dal Caus., lit. “destroyer”?] a creeper (with thorns Kern, Toev. s. v.) D.III,87=Vism.418; Bdhgh says (see Dial. III,84) “a beautiful creeper of sweet taste.” (Page 481)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bahala: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Class. Sk. bahala & Ved. bahula] dense, thick Vin.II,112; J.I,467 (°palāpa-tumba a measure thickly filled with chaff); II,91; Miln.282; Vism.257 (°pūva, where KhA 56 omits bahala), 263 (opp. tanuka); KhA 62 (°kuthita-lākhā thickly boiled, where in id. p. Vism.261 has accha-lākhā, i. e. clear); DhA.IV,68; VvA.162 (=aḷāra). --subahala very thick Miln.258 (rajojalla). (Page 484)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】厚的，密集的。bahalatta,【中】厚度。bahalabahala﹐浓浓地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】厚的，密集的。 ~tta, 【中】厚度。(p236)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bahalatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. above] thickness, swollen condition, swelling J.I,147. (Page 484)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bahati: {'def': '¹ [bṛh1] to pull, see ab°, ub°, nib°, & cp. udabbahe, pavāḷha. (Page 484)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ [a Pali root, to be postulated as der. fr. bahi in sense of “to keep out”] only in Caus. formations: to keep outside, lit. to make stay outside or away. See bāhā 2; bāheti, paribāhati. (Page 484)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [baṁh doublet of bṛh2] to strengthen, increase, see brūhana (upa°); otherwise only in pp. bāḷha (q. v.). The Dhtp (344, cp. Dhtm 506) explns “baha braha brūha: vuddhiyaṁ.” (Page 484)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bahi: {'def': '【无】，外部，外面。bahigata,【形】出去的。bahinagara,【中】外部的城市，城外。bahinikkhamana,【中】外出。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】外部的，外部，外面。 ~gata, 【形】出去的。 ~nagara, 【中】外部的城市，城外。 ~nikkhamana, 【中】外出。(p236)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adv.) [cp. Vedic bahis & bahir; the s(ḥ) is restored in doubling of cons. in compn like bahig-gata Vv 5015, in bahiddhā and in lengthening of i as bahī J.V,65] outside: 1. (adv.) J.I,361 (°dvāre-gāma a village outside the city gates); Pv.I,102; DhA.III,118; PvA.24, 61. ‹-› 2. (prep.) with Acc. (direction to) J.I,298 (°gāmaṁ); with Loc. (place where) °dvāra-koṭṭhake outside the gate M.II,92; A.III,31; °nagare outside the city J.II,2; PvA.39. 47; °vihāre outside the monastery DhA.I,315. --gata gone outside (i. e. into worldly affairs, or according to VvA.213 engaged with the bahiddh’ārammaṇāni) Vv 5015 (abahiggata-mānasa with his mind not gone outside himself). --nikkhamana going outside of (Abl.), leaving Vism.500 (mātukucchito bahinikkhamanaṁ mūlakaṁ dukkhaṁ). (Page 484)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bahiddhā: {'def': '【无】外面，外部的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adv.) [fr. bahi, cp. Vedic bahirdhā, formation in °dhā, like ekadhā, sattadhā etc. of numerals] outside (adv. & prep.) D.I,16; II,110; S.I,169; III,47, 103; IV,205; V,157; Vin.III,113 (°rūpa opp. ajjhatta-rūpa : Sn.203; VbhA.260 (kāye); DhA.I,211 (c. gen); III,378 (sāsanato b.); DhsA.189. --ajjhatta° inside & outside, personal-external see ajjhatta. -- The bahiddh’ārammaṇāni (objects of thought concerning that which is external) are the outward sense-objects in the same meaning as bāhirāni āyatanāni are distinguished fr. ajjhattikāni āyatanāni (see āyatana 3 and ārammaṇa 3). They are discussed at Vism.430 sq.; cp. Dhs.1049. -- The phrase “ito bahiddhā” refers to those outside the teaching of the Buddha (“outside this our doctrine”), e. g. at D.I,157; S.I,133; A.IV,25; Dhs.1005. (Page 484)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】外面，外部的。(p236)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bahu: {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic bahu, doubtful whether to Gr. paxQs; fr. bṛh2 to strengthen, cp. upabrūhana, paribbūḷha] much, many, large, abundant; plenty; in compn also: very, greatly (°-) Instr. sg. bahunā Dh.166; Nom. pl. bahavo Vin.III,90; Dh.307, & bahū Dh.53; J.IV,366; V,40; VI,472; Bu 2, 47; Pv IV.14; Mhvs 35, 98; PvA.67; nt. pl. bahūni Sn.665, 885; Gen. Dat. bahunnaṁ S.I,196; Sn.503, 957, & bahūnaṁ J.V,446; Kvu 528 (where id. p. M.I,447 reads bahunnaṁ); Instr. bahūhi PvA.241; Loc. bahūsu PvA.58. -- nt. Nom. bahu Dh.258; bahuṁ PvA.166, & bahud in compn bahud-eva (d may be euphonic) J.I,170; Bu 20, 32. As nt. n. bahuṁ a large quantity A.II,183 (opp. appaṁ); Abl. bahumhā J.V,387. As adv. bahu so much Pv.II,1311. -- Compar. bahutara greater, more, in greater number A.I,36 (pl. bahutarā, opp. appakā); II,183; S.V,457, 466; J.II,293; VI,472; Pv.II,117; Miln.84; PvA.38, 76. -- In composition with words beginning with a vowel (in sandhi) bahu as a rule appears as bavh° (for bahv°, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 49, 1), but the hiatus form bahu is also found, as in bahu-itthiyo J.I,398 (besides bahutthika); bahuamaccā J.I,125; bahu-āyāsa (see below). Besides we have the contracted form bahû as in bahûpakāra, etc.). --ābādha (bavh°) great suffering or illness, adj. full of sickness, ailing much M.II,94; A.I,107; II,75, 85; Miln.65; Sdhp.89 (cp. 77). --āyāsa (bahu°) great trouble Th.2, 343. -- (i)tthika (bahutthika) having many women Vin.II,256; S.II,264. --ûdaka containing much water J.III,430 (f. bahūdikā & bahodikā). --ûpakāra of great service, very helpful, very useful S.IV,295; V,32; M.III,253; It.9; Vin.V,191; J.I,121; Pv IV.156; PvA.114. --odaka (bavh°)=°ûdaka Th.1, 390. --kata (a.) benevolent, doing service Vin.IV,57, 212. (b) much moved or impressed by (Instr.), paying much attention to Vin.I,247. --karaṇīya having much to do, busy D.II,76; Vin.I,71; S.II,215; A.III,116; DA.I,237. --kāra (a) favour Dāvs.IV,39 (b) doing much, of great service, very helpful M.I,43, 170; A.I,123, 132; II,126; S.V,67; Pv.II,1219; J.IV,422; Miln.264. --kāratta service, usefulness KhA 91. --kicca having many duties, very busy Vin.I,71; D.I,106; II,76; S.II,215; A.III,116; DA.I,237. --khāra a kind of alkali (product of vegetable ash) J.VI,454. --jañña see bāhu°. --jana a mass of people, a great multitude, a crowd, a great many people D.I,4; It.78; J.VI,358; Pug.30, 57; Pv.II,77; PvA.30. At some passages interpreted by Bdhgh as “the unconverted, the masses,” e. g. D.I,47, expld at DA.I,143 by “assutavā andha-bāla puthujjana”; Dh.320 (bahujjana), expld at DhA.IV,3 by “lokiya-mahājana.” --jāgara very watchful Dh.29 (=mahante sativepulle jāgariye ṭhita DhA.I,262); Sn.972 (cp. Nd1 501). --jāta growing much, abundant J.VI,536. --ṭhāna (-cintin) of far-reaching knowledge, whose thoughts embrace many subjects J.III,306; IV,467; V,176. --dhana with many riches PvA.97. --patta having obtained much, loaded with gifts Vin.IV,243. --pada many-footed, a certain order of creatures, such as centipedes, etc. Vin.II,110; III,52; A.II,34; It.87. --(p)phala rich in fruit Sn.1134, cp. Nd2 456. --(b)bīhi t.t.g., name of cpds. with adj. sense, indicating possession. --bhaṇḍa having an abundance of goods, well-to-do Vin.III,138; KhA 241. --bhāṇika=°bhāṇin PvA.283. --bhāṇitā garrulousness PvA 283. --bhāṇin garrulous A.III,254, 257; Dh.227. --bhāva largeness, richness, abundance DhA.II,175. --bherava very terrible A.II,55. --maccha rich in fish J.III,430. --mata much esteemed, venerable Cp. VI,7; PvA.117. --manta very tricky DhA.II,4 (v. l. māya). --māna respect, esteem, veneration J.I,90; PvA.50, 155, 274. --māya full of deceit, full of tricks J.V,357 (cp. °manta). --vacana (tt.g.) the plural number J.IV,173; PvA.163. --vāraka the tree Cordia myxa Abhp 558. --vighāta fraught with great pain Th.2, 450. --vidha various, multiform Cp. XV.7; Pgdp 37. --sacca see bāhu°. --(s)suta having great knowledge, very learned, welltaught D.I,93, 137; III,252, 282; J.I,199; IV,244; A.I,24; II,22, 147, 170, 178; III,114; Sn.58 (see Nd2 457); It.60, 80; Th.1, 1026; Dh.208; Vin.II,95; J.I,93; Miln.19; ThA.274, 281; SnA 109, 110. --(s)sutaka of great knowledge (ironical) D.I,107 (see Dial. I.132). (Page 484)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】很多，多数，充分，丰富的。【复】许多人。 ~ka, 【形】多数。 ~karaṇīya, ~kicca, 【形】有很多事要做，忙碌的。 ~kāra, 【形】很耐用的，非常有用的。 ~kkhattuŋ, 【副】很多次。 ~jana, 【阳】众多的人。 ~jāgara, 【形】非常觉醒的。 ~dhana, 【形】有许多财富的。 ~ppada,【形】多脚的，给很多的。 ~bbīhi, 【语】关系复合词。 ~bhaṇḍa, 【形】有丰富货物的。 ~bhāṇī, 【形】饶舌的，多讲话的。 ~bhāva, 【阳】丰富。 ~mata, 【形】很受尊敬的，被多数人接受的。 ~māna, 【阳】 ~mānana,【中】尊敬。 ~mānita, 【形】非常尊敬的。 ~vacana, 【中】复数。 ~vidha,【形】多方面的，各种形式的。 ~ssuta, 【形】非常有学问的。(p236)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '﹐bahu-﹐bavh-﹐bahv-﹐(Vedic bahu, doubtful whether to),【形】很多，多数，充分，丰富的(much, many, large, abundant; plenty; very, greatly) Instr. sg. bahunā; Nom. pl. bahavo & bahū; nt. pl. bahūni; Gen. Dat. bahunnaṁ & bahūnaṁ, bahunnaṁ; Instr. bahūhi; Loc. Bahūsu; nt. Nom. bahu; bahuṁ & bahud (i.e. bahud-eva) ; nt. n. bahuṁ a large quantity (opp. appaṁ); Abl. bahumhā. 【副】很多(so much)。compar. bahutara greater, more, in greater number (pl. bahutarā, opp. appakā)。【复】许多人。bahuka,【形】多数。bahukaraṇīya, bahukicca,【形】有很多事要做，忙碌的。bahukāra,【形】很耐用的，非常有用的。bahukkhattuṁ,【副】很多次。bahujana,【阳】衆多的人。bahujāgara,【形】非常觉醒的。bahudhana,【形】有许多财富的。bahuppada,【形】多脚的，给很多的。bahubbīhi,【语】关系复合词。bahubhaṇḍa,【形】有丰富货物的。bahubhāṇī,【形】饶舌的，多讲话的。bahubhāva,【阳】丰富。bahumata,【形】很受尊敬的，被多数人接受的。bahumāna,【阳】bahumānana,【中】尊敬。bahumānita,【形】非常尊敬的。bahuvacana,【中】复数。bahuvidha,【形】多方面的，各种形式的。bahussuta,【形】非常有学问的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bahudhā: {'def': '(adv.) [fr. bahu, cp. Vedic bahudhā] in many ways or forms S.V,264 (hoti he becomes many), 288; M.I,34; Sn.966; Pv IV.152 (=bahūhi pakārehi PvA.241); Mhvs 31, 73; Dāvs.V,68. (Page 485)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【副】以许多方式。(p236)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【副】以许多方式。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bahuka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bahu] great, much, many, abundant J. III,368 (b. jano most people, the majority of p.); V,388; IV,536; Mhvs 36, 49; PvA.25 (gloss for pahūta Pv.I,52); DhA.II,175. -- nt. bahukaṁ plenty, abundance A.II,7=Pug.63; Vism.403 (opp. thokaṁ). Compar. bahukataraṁ more J.II,88 (v. l. bahutaraṁ). (Page 485)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bahukkhattuṁ: {'def': '(adv.) [bahu+khattuṁ, like sattakkhattuṁ, ti° etc.] many times Miln.215. (Page 485)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bahula: {'def': '【形】丰富的，时常发生的。 ~tā, 【阴】 ~tta, 【中】丰富。 ~laŋ,【副】大概，时常。 ~līkata, 【形】时常练习的。 ~līkaraṇa, ~līkamma,【中】 ~līkāra, 【阳】继续练习，热心训练。(p236)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [usually --°, as °- only in cpd. °ājīva] much, abundant, nt. abundance (°-); full of, rich in, fig. given to, intent on, devoted to D.II,73; S.I,199, 202; A.III,86 (pariyatti°), 432 (āloka°); IV,35; It.27, 30; J.IV,5 (vināsa°), 22; PvA.80 (chārik’ aṅgāra°). --sayana° as much as “particular in one’s choice of resting place” Miln.365 nt. bahulaṁ (-°) in the fullness of, full of S.III,40 (nibbidā°). The compn form with karoti (& kamma) is bahulī° (q. v.). Cp. bāhulla. --ājīva living in abundance (opp. Lūkh’ājīvin) D.III,44, 47. (Page 485)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(nt.) [=preceding] N. of a lucky die J.VI,281. (Page 485)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】丰富的，时常发生的。bahulatā,【阴】bahulatta,【中】丰富。bahulaṁ,【副】大概，时常。bahulīkata,【形】时常练习的。bahulīkaraṇa, bahulīkamma,【中】bahulīkāra,【阳】继续练习，热心训练。Bahulīkarotīti kathaṁ bahulīkaroti? āvajjanto bahulīkaroti, jānanto bahulīkaroti, passanto bahulīkaroti, paccavekkhanto bahulīkaroti, cittaṁ adhiṭṭhahanto bahulīkaroti, saddhāya adhimuccanto bahulīkaroti, vīriyaṁ paggaṇhanto bahulīkaroti, satiṁ upaṭṭhāpento bahulīkaroti, cittaṁ samādahanto bahulīkaroti, paññāya pajānanto bahulīkaroti, abhiññeyyaṁ abhijānanto bahulīkaroti, pariññeyyaṁ parijānanto bahulīkaroti, pahātabbaṁ pajahanto bahulīkaroti, bhāvetabbaṁ bhāvento bahulīkaroti, sacchikātabbaṁ sacchikaronto bahulīkaroti.(多作(bahulīkaroti)者，如何而多作？正在倾心多作，知多作，见多作，观察多作，心决定多作，信解多作，提起精进多作，念近住多作，心集中多作，慧知多作，证知应证知多作，遍知应遍知多作，断应断多作，多作应多作而多作，现证应现证多作。) (Ps.CS:p.285；PTS.II,94.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bahulīkaroti: {'def': '(bahula+ī+kar行+o), 认真地著手进行，增加。【过】bahulīkari。【过分】bahulīkata。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(bahula + ī + kar + o), 认真地着手进行，增加。【过】 ~kari。【过分】 ~kata。(p236)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bahulī°: {'def': '[rare in Ep. Sk.; when found, diff. in meaning] in compn with kar=bahula (adj.)+kar, lit. “to make much of,” i. e. to practise, in foll. words: °kata (pp.) practised (frequently), usually combd with bhāvita S.II,264; IV,200, 322; V,259; A.I,6; Vism.267 (=punappunaṁ kata); °katatta (nt.) practice D.II,214; °kamma continuous practice, an act often repeated M.I,301; DhsA.406 (=punappuna-karaṇa); °karoti to take up seriously, to practise, devote oneself to (Acc.) M.I,454; A.I,275; III,79; S.IV,322; DhA.III,356 (sevati+); VbhA.291; °kāra zealous exercise, practice M.III,25 sq. (tab-bahulī° to this end). (Page 485)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bahuso: {'def': '(adv.) [cp. Sk. bahuśaḥ] repeatedly PvA.107. (Page 485)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【副】大概，时常，重复地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【副】大概，时常，重复地。(p236)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bahussutaka: {'def': 'Bahulika m. [BSk. Bahuśruta, Bāhuśrutīya] 多聞部 [部派名].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Bahutta: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. bahutvaṁ] multiplicity, manifoldedness VbhA.320 (cetanā°). (Page 485)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】多种，多数。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】多种，多数。(p236)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bahūpakara: {'def': '【形】非常有帮助的。(p236)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】非常有帮助的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bahūta: {'def': '(adj.) [for pahūta=Sk. prabhūta] abundant, much Th.2, 406 (°ratana, so read for bahuta°), 435 (for bahutadhana); J.III,425 (bahūtam ajjaṁ “plenty of food”; ajja=Sk. ādya, with Kern, Toev. s. v. bahūta for T. bahūtamajjā, which introd. story takes as bahūtaṁ =balaṁ ajja, with ajjā metri causâ. C. expls however as mataka-bhattaṁ); VI,173 (°tagarā mahī); Pv.II,75 (v. l. for pahūta, cp. pahūtika). (Page 485)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bahūtaso: {'def': '(adv.) [der. fr. bahūta, cp. Sk. prabhūtaśaḥ] in abundance J.III,484 (where C. expln with bahūtaso is faulty and should perhaps be read pahūtaso); VI,538. (Page 485)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bajjha: {'def': 'see bandhati. (Page 481)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bajjhati: {'def': '(bandhati 的【被】), 被限制，被逮捕，被捕捉(在陷阱等中)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'Pass. of bandhati (q. v.). (Page 481)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bandhati 的【被】), 被限制，被逮捕，被捕捉（在陷阱等中）。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Baka: {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. baka] 1. a crane, heron Cp. III,102; J.I,205 (°suṇikā), 221, 476; II,234; III,252. -- 2. N. of a dweller in the Brahma world M.I,326; S.I,142. (Page 481)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】鹤，苍鹭。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】鹤(crane)，苍鹭 (heron)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bakkula: {'def': '（Bākula）（比库名）拔古喇，（古音译：）薄拘罗，薄俱罗', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '[=vyākula? Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 94] a demon, uttering horrible cries, a form assumed by the Yakkha Ajakalāpaka, to terrify the Buddha Ud.5 (see also ākulī, where pākula is proposed for bakkula). (Page 481)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bakula: {'def': '[cp. Class. Sk. bakula, N. of the tree Mimusops elengi, and its (fragrant) flower] in milāta°-puppha is v. l. KhA 60 (see App. p. 870 Pj.) for °ākuli°, which latter is also read at Vism.260. (Page 481)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bala: {'def': '【中】力量，能力，精力，武力，军队。balakoṭṭhaka,【中】要塞，堡垒。balakkara,【阳】暴力，用力。balagga,【阳】集合。balada,【形】出力的，授予权力。baladāna,【中】出力。balappatta,【形】取得政权的，执政的，当权的，变强壮的。balavantu,【形】有力的。balavahana,【中】军人和兵车。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [cp. *Sk. bala: Halāyudha 5, 23; & P. balākā] a species of carrion crow J.V,268; also in cpd. Bal’aṅkapāda having crow’s feet, i. e. spreading feet (perhaps for balāka°?) J.VI,548 (C. explns by pattharita-pāda, read patthārita°). (Page 483)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [Vedic bala, most likely to Lat. de-bilis “without strength” (cp. E. debility, P. dubbala), and Gr. bέltistos (superl.)=Sk. baliṣṭha the strongest. The Dhātupāṭha (273) defines b. with pāṇane. At DhsA.124 bala is understood as “na kampati”] 1. strength, power, force D.II,73; A.I,244; Th.1, 188; Dh.109 (one of the 4 blessings, viz. āyu, vaṇṇa, sukha, bala; cp. DhA.II,239); Pv.I,512 (=kāya-bala PvA.30); I,76; VvA.4 (iddhi°); PvA.71 (id.), 82 (kamma°). -- Of cases used as adv. balasā (Instr.) is mentioned by Trenckner at Miln.430 (notes), cp. Prk. balasā (Pischel, Gr. § 364). yathā balaṁ according to one’s power, i. e. as much as possible PvA.1, 54. The compn form of bala in conn. with kṛ is balī°, e. g. dubbalīkaraṇa making weak M.III,4; Pug.59, 68; °karaṇin id. D.III,183. -- adj. bala strong J.V,268, abala weak Sn.770, 1120, dubbala id. S.I,222; J.II,154; Nd1 12; PvA.55; compar. °tara M.I,244, nt. n. abalaṁ weakness S.I,222. -- 2. an army, military force Mhvs 25, 57; SnA 357. See cpds. below. -- Eight balāni or strong points are 1. of young children (ruṇṇa-balaṁ). -- 2. of womanhood (kodha°). -- 3. of robbers (āvudha°). -- 4. of kings (issariya°), -- 5. of fools (ujjhatti°). -- 6. of wise men (nijjhatti°). -- 7. of the deeply learned (paṭisaṅkhāna°). -- 8. of samaṇas & brāhmaṇas (khanti°) A.IV,223 (where used as adj. --° strong in . . .); cp. Sn.212, 623. -- Five balāni of women are: rūpabalaṁ, bhoga°, ñāti°, putta°, sīla° S.IV,246--8. The five-fold force (balaṁ pañca-vidhaṁ) of a king J.V,120, 121 consists of bāhābalaṁ strength of arms, bhoga° of wealth, amacca° of counsellors, abhijacca° of high birth, paññā° the force of wisdom; in the religious sense five balāni or powers are commonly enumd: saddhābalaṁ, viriya°, sati°, samādhi°, paññā° A.III,12; D.II,120; M.II,12, III,296; S.III,96, 153; IV,366, V,219, 249; Ps.II,56, 86, 166, 174, 223; II,84, 133, 168 etc. They correspond to the 5 indriyāni and are developed with them. S.V,219, 220; Nett 31; they are cultivated to destroy the five uddhambhāgiyāni saṁyojanāni S.V,251. They are freq. referred to in instructions of the Buddha about the constituents of the “Dhamma,” culminating in the eightfold Path, viz. cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, samappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, pañcindriyani, p. balāni, sattabojjhaṅgāni, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo e. g. S.III,96; Ps.II,56; Nd1 13=360 =Nd2 420; Nd2 s. v. satipaṭṭhāna; and passim. [Cp. BSk. catvāra ṛddhipādāḥ pañc’endriyāni p. balāni, sapta bodhyaṅgāni etc. Divy 208.] Two balāni are specially mentioned A.I,52 (paṭisaṅkhānabalaṁ and bhāvanā°), also D.III,213, followed here by the other “pair” satibalaṁ and samādhi°. There are four balāni of the ariyasāvaka, by which he overcomes the five fears (pañca bhayāni q. v.); the four are paññābalaṁ, viriya°, anavajja° saṅgāha° A.IV,363 sq., as given at A.II,141, also the foll. 3 groups of cattāri balāni:‹-› (1) saddhābalaṁ, viriya°, sati°, samādhi°, cp. D.III,229. -- (2) sati° samādhi, anavajja°, saṅgāha°. (3) paṭisaṅkhāna°, bhāvanā°, anavajja°, saṅgāha°. -- For 4 balāni see also D.III,229 note, and for paṭisaṅkhānabala (power of computation) see Dhs. trsl. 1353. The ten balāni of the Tathāgata consist of his perfect comprehension in ten fields of knowledge A.V,32 sq.; M.I,69; Nd2 466; Miln.105, 285; VbhA.397. -- In a similar setting 10 powers are given as consisting in the knowledge of the Paṭiccasamuppāda at S.II,27, 28. ‹-› The balāni of the sāvaka are distinct from those of the Tathāgatha: Kvu 228 sq. -- There are seven balāni D.III,253, and seven khīṇāsava-balāni 283 i. e. saddhābalaṁ, viriya°, sati°, samādhi°, paññā°, hiri° and ottappa°. The same group is repeated in the Abhidhamma; Dhs.58, 95, 102; DhsA.126. The Ps. also enumerates seven khīṇāsavabalāni I.35; and sixty-eight balāni II.168 sq. --agga front of an army, troops in array D.I,6; Vin.IV,107, cp. DA.I,85. --ânīka (adj.) with strong array Sn.623; Dh.399 (cp. DhA.IV,164). --kāya a body of troops, an army cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 52 note; (also in BSk. e. g. Divy 63, 315) A.I,109; IV,107, 110; S.I,58; J.I,437 (°ṁ saṁharati to draw up troops); II,76; III,319; V,124; VI,224, 451; DhA.I,393; PugA 249. --koṭṭhaka fortress, camp J.I,179; Mhvs 25, 29. --(k)kāra application of force, violence J.I,476; II,421; III,447; Instr. °ena by force PvA.68, 113. --gumba a serried troop J.II,406. --cakka wheel of power, of sovereignty Dpvs VI,2. --ṭṭha a military official, palace guard, royal messenger Miln.234, 241, 264, 314; Mhvs 34, 17. --da strength-giving S.I,32; Sn.297. --dāyin id. A.II,64. --deva “God of strength” N. of the elder brother of Kaṇha J.IV,82; Nd1 89, 92 (Vāsudeva+); Vism.233 (id). --(p)patta grown-strong DhsA.118 (v. l. phala°). --vāhana troops, an army J.II,319, IV.170, 433; VI,391, 458. --vīra a hero in strength Vv 531, cp. VvA.231. --sata for palāsata, q. v. (cp. J.P.T.S. 1908, 108 note). (Page 482)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】力量，能力，精力，武力，军队。 ~kaya, 【阳】军队。 ~koṭṭhaka,【中】要塞，堡垒。 ~kkara, 【阳】暴力，用力。 ~da, 【形】出力的，授予权力。 ~dāna, 【中】出力。 ~ppatta, 【形】取得政权的，执政的，当权的，变强壮的。 ~vantu, 【形】有力的。 ~vahana, 【中】军人和兵车。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Balaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bala] strong; only in kisa° of meagre strength, weakly M.I,226; and dub° weak M.I,435. Cp. balika. (Page 483)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Balakaya: {'def': 'Balakāya,【阳】军队。A.7.63./IV,107.：rañño paccantime nagare bahubalakāyo paṭivasati, seyyathidaṁ–hatthārohā assārohā rathikā dhanuggahā celakā calakā piṇḍadāyakā uggā rājaputtā pakkhandino mahānāgā sūrā cammayodhino dāsakaputtā. (王之国境城镇，许多军队居住，这即是：象兵、骑兵、车兵、弓射手、旗手、参谋、粮食部队、威猛的王子、突击队、大龙队、勇士、胸甲兵、奴仆子。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Balasata: {'def': 'see palasata. (Page 483)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Balati: {'def': '[fr. bal, as in bala] to live KhA 124 (in def. of bālā as “balanti anantī ti bālā”). (Page 483)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Balatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. bala, cp. balatā] strength, only in cpd. dubbalatta weakness J.II,154. (Page 483)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Balatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. bala] strength, lit. strength-quality M.I,325. (Page 483)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Balavant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bala] strong, powerful, sturdy M.I,244 (purisa) S.I,222; J.II,406; DhA.II,208; VvA.35; PvA.94. Comparative balavatara Miln.131; f. °a(n)tarī Sdhp.452. In compn balava°, e. g. °gavā sturdy oxen M.I,226; °vippaṭisāra deep remorse PvA.14, °balava very strong J.II,406. --balavaṁ as nt. adv. “exceedingly,” in cpd. Balav’âbalavaṁ very (loud and) strong Vin.II,1 (=suṭṭhu balavaṁ C.), and °paccūse very early in the morning Vism.93, and °paccūsa-samaye id. J.I,92; DhA.I,26. (Page 483)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Balavatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. balavant; cp. Epic Sk. balavattā] strength, force (also in military sense) J.II,369 (ārakkhassa b.); Miln.101 (kusalassa & akusalassa kammassa b.). (Page 483)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Balaṭṭha: {'def': 'balattha,【阳】军人，军队的成员。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'balattha, 【阳】军人，军队的成员。(p236)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bali: {'def': '【阳】供品，收入，税。 ~kamma, 供奉。 ~paṭiggāhaka, 【形】受供，收入。 ~puṭṭha, 【阳】乌鸦。 ~haraṇa, 【中】税收。(p236)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cp. Vedic bali; regarding etym. Grassmann connects it with bhr),【阳】1.供品(religious offering, oblation)。2.收入，税(tax, revenue)。3.一位阿修罗的名字(Asura D.II,259.)。A.5.41./III,45.：(pañcabaliṁ五种献供)：ñātibaliṁ, atithibaliṁ, pubbapetabaliṁ, rājabaliṁ, devatābaliṁ.(亲族献供、客人献供、祖先献供、国王献供、向天献供)。balikamma, 供奉(offering of food to bhūtas, devas & others)。baliṅkatā, 献供者(one who offers (the five) oblations)。balipaṭiggāhaka,【形】受供，收入，值得供养(receiving offerings, worthy of oblations)。balipuṭṭha(Sk. balipusṭa),【阳】乌鸦(a crow)。balisādhaka, 税务员(tax collector, tax gatherer)。baliharaṇa,【中】税收(taking oblations A.V,79 (balivanasaṇḍa))。balikaraṇa, 献供(oblation, offering of food)。balikāraka, 献供(offering oblations J.I,384.)。balipīḷita, (crushed with taxes J.V,98.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic bali; regarding etym. Grassmann connects it with bhṛ] 1. religious offering, oblation D.II,74 (dhammika); A.IV,17, 19; Sn.223; Mhvs 36, 88 (particularly to subordinate divinities, cp. Mhvs. trsln 263); DhA.II,14 (v. l. °kamma). --pañca° the fivefold offering, i. e. ñāti°, atithi°, pubbapeta°, rāja°, devatā°, offering to kinsfolk, guests, the departed, the king, the gods; A.II,68; III,45. -- 2. tax, revenue (cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 166 & Fick, Sociale Gliederung 75) D.I,135, 142; J.I,199 (daṇḍa° fines & taxes), 339; DhA.I,251 (daṇḍa°). -- 3. Np. of an Asura D.II,259. --kamma offering of food to bhūtas, devas & others J.I,169, 260; II,149, 215; IV,246 (offering to tutelary genii of a city. In this passage the sacrifice of a human being is recommended); V,99, 473; SnA 138; Mhbv 28. --karaṇa oblation, offering of food PvA.81; VvA.8 (°pīṭha, reading doubtful, v. l. valli°). --kāraka offering oblations J.I,384. --°ṅkatā one who offers (the five) oblations A.II,68. --paṭiggāhaka receiving offerings, worthy of oblations J.II,17 (yakkha; interpreted by Fick, Sociale Gliederung 79 as “tax-collector,” hardly justified); f. °ikā A.III,77 (devatā), 260 (id.), cp. BSk. balipratigrāhikā devatā Divy 1. --pīḷita crushed with taxes J.V,98. --puṭṭha a crow (cp. Sk. balipuṣṭa “fed by oblations”) Abhp 638. --vadda (cp. Sk. balivarda, after the Pali?) an ox, esp. an ox yoked to the plough or used in ploughing (on similes with b. see J.P.T.S. 1907, 349) S.I,115, 170; IV,163 sq., 282 sq.; A.II,108 sq.; Sn.p. 13 (cp. SnA 137); Dh.152=Th.1, 1025; J.I,57; V,104 (Sāliyo b. phālena pahaṭo); Vism.284 (in simile of their escape from the ploughman); DhA.I,24 (dhuraṁ vahanto balivaddassa, v. l. balibaddassa); VvA.258 (vv. ll. °baddha & °bandha). The spelling balibadda occurs at Vin.IV,312. --sādhaka tax collector, tax gatherer J.IV,366; V,103 sq. --haraṇa taking oblations A.V,79 (°vanasaṇḍa). (Page 483)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Balika: {'def': '(fr. bala) ,【形】强壮的(strong; only in der. balikataraṁ (compar.) adv. in a stronger degree, more intensely; & dubbalika weak.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bala] strong; only in der. balikataraṁ (compar.) adv. in a stronger degree, more intensely, more Miln.84; & dubbalika weak ThA.211. Cp. balaka. (Page 483)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Balin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bala] strong Th.1, 12 (paññā°); Vv 647; Dh.280; J.III,484; VI,147. (Page 483)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. bala),【形】有力的，强壮的(strong)。paññābalī, 慧力。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Balisa: {'def': '& Baḷisa (m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. baḍiśa] a fish-hook S.II,226=IV.158 (āmisa-gataṁ b.); Nd2 374 (kāma°, v. l. palisa); J.I,482 sq.; III,283; IV,195; V,273 sq., 389; VI,416; Miln.412; SnA 114 (in expln of gaḷa Sn.61); ThA.280, 292; VbhA.196 (in comparison); Sdhp.610. On use in similes cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 115. --maṁsikā (f.) “flesh-hooking,” a kind of torture M.I,87; III,164; A.I,47; II,122; Nd1 154; Nd2 604; Miln.197. --yaṭṭhi angling rod DhA.III,397. Balī° =bala° in combn with bhū & kṛ, see bala. (Page 483)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '& Baḷisa (cp.Sk.baḍiwa)【阳】【中】鈎、钩(a fish-hook)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Balivadda: {'def': '【阳】牛。(p236)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'balibadda(cp. Sk. balivarda),【阳】(装备好的耕)牛(an ox, esp. an ox yoked to the plough or used in ploughing)。DhA.I,24 (dhuraṁ vahanto balivaddassa, v. l. balibaddassa))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Balya: {'def': '¹ (nt.) [der. fr. bala] belonging to strength, only in cpd. dub° weakness M.I,364; Pug.66; also spelt dubballa M.I,13. -- Abl. dubbalyā as adv. groundlessly, without strong evidence Vin.IV,241 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1886, 129). (Page 484)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2(C. bālya) (fr. bāla, cp. P. & Sk. bālya)愚蠢(foolishness, stupidity)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1 (der. fr. bala) ,【中】强壮(belonging to strength)。dubalya(=dubballa), 无力(Abl. dubbalyā as adv. groundlessly, without strong evidence)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [fr. bāla, cp. P. & Sk. bālya] foolishness, stupidity Dh.63 (v. l. bālya); J.III,278 (C. bālya); DhA.II,30. (Page 484)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Balākā: {'def': '【阴】褐鹤。(p236)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】褐鹤。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic balākā, perhaps to Lat. fulica, Gr. falariζ a water fowl, Ohg. pelicha=Ger. belche] a crane Th.1, 307; J.II,363; III,226; Miln.128 (°ānaṁ megha-saddena gabbhâvakkanti hoti); Vism.126 (in simile, megha-mukhe b. viya); DA.I,91 (v. l. baka). (Page 483)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Balī: {'def': '【形】有力的，强壮的。(p236)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Balīyati: {'def': '[denom. fr. bala, cp. BSk. balīyati MVastu I.275] to have strength, to grow strong, to gain power, to overpower Sn.770 (=sahati parisahati abhibhavati Nd1 12, cp. 361); J.IV,84 (vv. ll. khalī° & paliyy°; C. expls by avattharati)=Pv.II,61 (=balavanto honti vaḍḍhanti abhibhavanti PvA.94); J.VI,224 (3rd pl. balīyare; C. abhibhavati, kuppati, of the border provinces); Nett 6 (vv. ll. bali°, pali°; C. abhibhavati). (Page 484)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bandha: {'def': '(‹bandh, cp. Vedic bandhana),【阳】bandhana,【中】束缚，脚镣，执著，关押，补缀。D.12./ I,224.︰purāṇaṁ bandhanaṁ chinditvā aññaṁ navaṁ bandhanaṁ karoti﹐切断旧的系缚，制造新的系缚。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Vedic bandha, fr. bandh] 1. bond, fetter It.56 (abandho Mārassa, not a victim of M.); Nd1 328 (taṇhā°, diṭṭhi°); ThA.241. -- 2. one who binds or ties together, in assa° horsekeeper, groom J.II,98; V,441, 449; DhA.I,392. -- 3. a sort of binding: maṇḍala° with a circular b. (parasol) Vin.IV,338, salāka° with a notched b. ibid. -- 4. a halter, tether Dpvs.I,76. -- Cp. vinibandha. (Page 481)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 Bandhana, 【中】束缚，脚镣，执着，关押。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bandhaka: {'def': 'as v. l. of vaṭṭaka see aṁsa°. (Page 481)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bandhakī: {'def': '(f.) [fr. bandhaka, cp. Epic Sp. bandhukī a low woman=pāṁśukā & svairinī Halāy 2, 341] an unchaste woman (lit. binder) Vin.IV,224 (pl. bandhakiniyo), 265 (id.); J.V,425, 431 (va°). (Page 481)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. bandhaka, cp. Epic Sp. bandhukī a low woman=pāṁwukā & svairinī) ,【阴】贱女(an unchaste woman (lit. binder) Vin.IV,224 (pl. bandhakiniyo)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bandhana: {'def': '【中】捆绑，束缚，用…绑…。 ~nāgāra, 【中】监狱。 ~nāgārika, 【阳】囚犯，狱卒。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. bandh, cp. Vedic bandhana] 1. binding, bond, fetter Vin.I,21; D.I,226, 245 (pañca kāmaguṇā); III,176; M.II,44; S.I,8, 24 (Māra°), 35, 40; IV,201 sq. (5 fold) to bind the king of the Devas or Asuras, 291; Sn.532, 948; Th.1, 414; 2, 356 (Māra°) Dh.345 sq.; J.II,139, 140; III,59=PvA.4; V,285; Nd2 304III, B (var. bonds, andhu°, rajju° etc. cp. Nd1 433); DA.I,121 (with ref. to kāmā). -- 2. binding, tying, band, ligature; tie (also fig.) Vin.I,204 (°suttaka thread for tying) II.135 (kāya° waistband); II,117 (°rajju for robes); S.III,155 (vetta° ligatures of bamboo; cp. V,51); Sn.44 (gihi°, cp. Nd2 228: puttā ca dāsī ca); DhA.I,4 (ghara° tie of the house); KhA 51 (paṭṭa°). -- 3. holding together, composition, constitution Vin.I,96 (sarīra°), cp. III,28. -- fig. composition (of literature) J.II,224 (gāthā°). -- 4. joining together, union, company DhA.II,160 (gaṇa° joining in companies). -- 5. handle Vin.II,135. -- 6. piecing together Vin.I,254 (°mattena when it, i. e. the stuff, has only been pieced together, see Vin. Texts II.153 n.). -- 7. strap (?) doubtful reading in aṁsa° (q. v.) Vv 3340, where we should prefer to read with v. l. °vaṭṭaka. -- 8. doubtful in meaning in cpd. paṁca-vidha-bandhana “the fivefold fixing,” as one of the torments in Niraya. It is a sort of crucifixion (see for detail pañca 3) Nd2 304III, C=Nd1 404; J.I,174; PvA.221; VbhA.278. In this connection it may mean “set,” cp. mūla°. -- On use of bandhana in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 115. Cp. vini°. --âgāra “fetter-house,” prison D.I,72; M.I,75; Vin.III,151; J.III,326; DhA.II,152; VvA.66; PvA.153. --âgārika prison-keeper, head-jailer A.II,207. (Page 482)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹bandh),【中】捆绑(用…绑…binding)，束缚(bond)，结(fetter)。bandhanāgāra,【中】监狱。bandhanāgārika,【阳】囚犯，狱卒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bandhanīya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of bandhati] 1. to be bound or fettered Miln.186. -- 2. apt to bind, binding, constraining D.II,337 (cp. Dial. II.361); Th.2, 356. (Page 482)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bandhati: {'def': '(bandh绑+a), 绑，结合，联合，系，关押，捕获，组成。【过】bandhi。【过分】baddha。【现分】bandhanta。【独】bandhitvā, bandhiya。【不】bandhituṁ。【义】bandhitabba, bandhanīya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic badhnāti, later Sk. bandhati, Idg. *bhendh, cp. Lat. offendimentum i. e. band; Goth. bindan=Ohg, bintan, E. bind; Sk. bandhu relation; Gr. penqerόs father-in-law, peίsma bond, etc.] to bind etc. -- 1. Forms: Imper. bandha D.II,350; pl. bandhantu J.I,153. Pot. bandheyya S.IV,198; Vin.III,45; Fut. bandhayissati Mhvs 24. 6; Aor. abandhi J.III,232, & bandhi J.I,292; DhA.I,182. Ger. bandhitvā Vin.I,46; S.IV,200; J.I,253, 428, & bandhiya Th.2, 81. Inf. bandhituṁ Th.2, 299. Caus. bandheti (see above Fut.) & bandhāpeti (see below). -- II. Meanings-1. to bind S.IV,200 (rajjuyā). fig. combine, unite DhA.II,189 (gharāvāsena b. to give in marriage). -- 2. to tie on, bind or put on to (Loc.) DhA.I,182 (dasante). fig. to apply to, put to, settle on DhA.II,12 (mānasaṁ paradāre). -- 3. to fix, prepare, get up, put together J.IV,290 (ukkā); also in phrase cakk’âticakkaṁ mañc’âtimañcaṁ b. to put wheels upon wheels & couches upon couches J.II,331. IV.81; DhA.IV,61. fig. to start, undertake, begin, make, in phrases āghātaṁ b. to bear malice DhA.II,21; and veraṁ b. to make enmity against (Loc.) J.II,353. -- 4. to acquire, get J.III,232 (atthaṁ b.= nibbatteti C.). -- 5. to compose Miln.272 (suttaṁ); J.II,33; V,39. -- Caus. II. bandhāpeti to cause to be bound (or fettered) Vin.IV,224, 316 (opp. mocāpeti); Nd2 304III, B (bandhanena); PvA.4, 113. -- Pass. bajjhati Nd2 74 (for bujjhati, as in palābujjhati to be obstructed: see palibuddhati). I. Forms Ind. 3rd pl. bajjhare Th.1, 137; pret. 3rd pl. abajjhare J.I,428. Imper. bajjhantu S.IV,309; A.V,284. Pot. bajjheyya S.II,228. Aor. bajjhi J.II,37; IV,414. Ger. bajjha J.IV,441, 498, & bajjhitvā J.II,153; IV,259; V,442. ‹-› II. Meanings.-1. to be bound, to be imprisoned Sn.508 (cp. SnA 418); J.IV,278. -- 2. to be caught (in a sling or trap) J.III,330; IV,414. -- 3. to incur a penalty (with Loc., e. g. bahudaṇḍe) J.IV,116. -- 4. to be captivated by, struck or taken by, either with Loc. J.I,368 (bajjhitvā & bandhitvā in Pass. sense); V,465; or with Instr. J.I,428; IV,259. -- pp. baddha (q. v.). -- Cp. ati°, anu°, ā, o°, paṭi°, sam°. (Page 481)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bandh + a), 绑，结合，联合，系，关押，捕获，组成。【过】bandhi。【过分】 baddha。【现分】 bandhanta。【独】 ~dhitvā, ~dhiya。【不】 ~dhituŋ。【潜】 ~dhitabba, ~dhanīya。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bandhava: {'def': '【阳】同族者，亲戚，关系。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Class. Sk. bāndhava] 1. kinsman, member of a clan or family, relative A.III,44; Sn.60 (pl. bandhavāni in poetry; cp. Nd2 455); Dh.288 (pl. bandhavā); J.II,316; V,81; DA.I,243. -- 2. (-°) one who is connected with or belongs to Sn.140 (manta°, wellacquainted with Mantras; cp. SnA 192; vedabandhū veda-paṭisaraṇā ti vuttaṁ hoti); J.V,335 (bodhaneyya°); cp. bandhu 3. (Page 482)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】同族者，亲戚关系。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bandhu: {'def': '[Vedic bandhu, see bandhati & cp. bandhava] 1. a relation, relative, kinsman; pl. bandhū J.IV,301; PvA.86 (=ñātī) & bandhavo Nd2 455 (where Nd1 11 in id. p. reads bandhū). -- Ādicca° kinsman of the Sun, an Ep. of the Buddha Vin.II,296; A.II,17; Sn.54, 915, 1128, cp. Nd2 152b; Vv 2413; 7810, cp. VvA.116. ‹-› Four kinds of relations enumd at Nd1 11. viz. ñāti°, gotta°, manta° (where Nd2 455 reads mitta°), sippa°. -- 2. Ep. of Brahmā, as ancestor of the brahmins DA.I,254: see below °pāda. -- 3. (°-) connected with, related to, dealing with [cp. Vedic amṛta-bandhu RV X.725] S.I,123 (pamatta°); 128; Sn.241, 315, 430, 911; J.IV,525; Miln.65 (kamma°); SnA 192 (veda°.). -- f. bandhunī J.VI,47 (said of the town of Mithilā (rāja°); expld by C. as “rāja-ñātakeh’eva puṇṇā”). --pāda the foot of Brahma, from which the Śūdras are said to have originated (cp. Sk. pādaja), in cpd. Bandhupād’apacca “offering from the foot of our kinsman,” applied as contemptuous epithet to the Samaṇas by a Brahmin D.I,90; M.I,334; S.IV,117. (Page 482)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】同族者，亲戚关系。参考 Bandhava。bandhujīvaka,【阳】朱槿(China-rose plant﹐亚洲的一种开红花的扶桑 (Hibiscus rosa-sinensis))。bandhumantu,【形】有亲戚的，很多族亲。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '参考 Bandhava。 ~jīvaka, 【阳】朱槿（亚洲开美丽花的一种扶桑(Hibiscus rosa-sinensis)）。 ~mantu, 【形】有亲戚的，很多族亲。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bandhujīvaka: {'def': '[cp. Class. Sk. bandhujīva] the plant Pentapetes phœnicea M.II,14 (°puppha); D.II,111 (id.); J.IV,279; Vism.174; DhsA.14; VvA.43, 161. (Page 482)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bandhuka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bandhu] 1. the plant Pentapetes phœnicea J.IV,279 (°puppha, evidently only a contraction of bandhu-jīvaka, cp. C. bandhujīvaka‹-› puppha; although Sk. bandhūka is given as syn. of bandhujīva at Halāyudha 2, 53). -- 2. in bandhukaroga M.II,121 prob. to be read paṇḍuka°, as v. l. BB; see paṇḍuroga. (Page 482)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bandhumant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bandhu, cp. Vedic bandhumant] having relatives, rich in kinsmen; only as Np. m bandhumā N. of father of the Buddha Vipassin D.II,11=Vism.433; f. bandhumatī N. of mother of the Buddha Vipassin ibid.; also N. of a town D.II,12 (capital of king Bandhumā); SnA 190=J.IV,388 (where the latter has Vettavatī), and a river SnA 190= J.IV,388 (: Vettavatī). (Page 482)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bandhuvant: {'def': '(adj.) [bandhu+vant] having relatives, rich in relatives J.VI,357. (Page 482)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bandhāpeti: {'def': '(bandhati 的【使】), 使被限制，使被束缚。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(bandhati‘绑’的【使】), 使被限制，使被束缚。【过】bandhāpesi。【过分】bandhāpita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bardo: {'def': '﹐【藏】中阴，意思是「介於两者之间」。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Barihin: {'def': '[cp. Sk. barhin] a peacock J.IV,497. (Page 482)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Barihisa: {'def': '【中】亚香茅(参考 Kusa)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】亚香茅（参考 Kusa）。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic barhis] the sacrificial grass D.I,141; M.I,344; A.II,207; Pug.56. (Page 482)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Battiŋsati: {'def': '【阴】三十二。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Battiṁsa: {'def': '(num. card.) [for dvat-tiṁsa] thirty-two J.III,207. (Page 481)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Battiṁsati: {'def': '(=dvattiṁsati),【阴】三十二。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bavhābādha: {'def': '【形】满身疾病的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】满身疾病的。(p236)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Baḷavā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic vaḍavā] a mare, only in cpd. °mukha the mare’s mouth, i. e. an entrance to Niraya (cp. Vedic vaḍavâgni & vaḍavāmukha) Th.1, 1104 (trsl. “abyss-discharged mouth,” cp. Brethren, p. 418). (Page 484)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Baḷīyakkha: {'def': '[etym.?] a species of birds J.VI,539. (Page 484)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bella: {'def': '(m. & nt.) [=beluva, q. v.] the fruit of the Vilva tree (a kind of citron?) J.III,77 (C. beluva); VI,578. Also in doubtful passage at J.III,319 (v. l. mella, phella). (Page 490)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Beluva: {'def': '【阳】孟加拉苹果树（参考 Billa）。 ~pakka, 【中】成熟的孟加拉苹果。 ~laṭṭhi，【阴】小的孟加拉苹果树。 ~salāṭuka, 【中】未成熟的孟加拉苹果。(p238)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】孟加拉苹果树((= Bengal quince, golden apple，Bel(女子名)Arabel(la), Isabel(la)的昵称)。参考 Billa)。beluvapakka,【中】成熟的孟加拉苹果。beluvalaṭṭhi，【阴】小的孟加拉苹果树。beluvasalāṭuka,【中】未成熟的孟加拉苹果。beluva-paṇḍuvīṇā,黄色的橡木琴；古译：琉璃琴、瑠璃宝装箜篌。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& Beḷuva [the guṇa-form of billa, in like meaning. It is the diæretic form of Sk. *bailva or *vailva, of which the contracted form is P. bella] 1. the Vilva tree, Aegle marmelos M.I,108; II,6; J.IV,363, 368; VI,525, 560. -- 2. wood of the Vilva tree S.I,22; D.II,264; Mhbv 31. --pakka ripe fruit of the Vilva J.V,74. --paṇḍu(-vīṇā) a yellow flute made of Vilva wood, representing a kind of magic flute which according to SnA 393 first belonged to Māra, and was then given to Pañcasikha, one of the Heavenly Musicians, by Sakka. See Vism.392 (attributed to Pañcasikha); DhA.I,433 (of Māra; v. l. veḷuvadaṇḍa-vīṇā); III,225 (of P.); SnA 393 (v. l. veluva°). --laṭṭhi a young sprout of the Vilva tree KhA 118. --salāṭuka the unripe fruit of the Vilva, next in size to the smaller kola, surpassed in size by the ripe billa or billi S.I,150=A.IV,170=Sn.p. 125. (Page 490)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bh: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第二十四个辅音字母。发音是送气带音的 b，汉语没有这个辅音，请参考英语或马来语的发音。(p239)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第二十四个辅音字母。发音是送气带音的 b，汉语没有这个辅音，请参考英语或马来语的发音。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bha: {'def': '(indecl.) the letter or sound (syllable) bh; figuring in Bdhgh’s exegesis of the N. Bhagavā as representing bhava, whereas ga stands for gamana, va for vanta KhA 109. -- Like ba° we often find bha° mixed up with pa°; -- see e. g. bhaṇḍa bhaṇḍati; bh represents b. in bhasta=Sk. basta, bhisa=Sk. bisa, bhusa=Sk. buśa. --bha-kāra the sound (or ending) °bha, which at Vin.IV,7 is given as implying contempt or abuse, among other low terms (hīnā akkosā). This refers also to the sound (ending) °ya (see ya-kāra). The explⁿ for this probably is that °bha is abstracted from words ending thus, where the word itself meant something inferior or contemptible, and this shade of meaning was regarded as inhering in the ending, not in the root of the word, as e. g. in ibbha (menial). (Page 495)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhabba: {'def': '【形】能干的，有能力的，适宜的。 ~tā, 【阴】能力，适当。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(grd of bhū, Sk. bhavya),【形】1.能干的，有能力的，适宜的(able, capable, fit for)。2.可能的(possible；kammaṁ bhabbābhāsa apparently possible)。bhabbatā,【阴】能力，适当。abhabba﹐不适宜的(unfit, incapable)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [grd of bhū, Sk. bhavya] 1. able, capable, fit for (--° or with Dat. or inf.); abhabba unfit, incapable; Vin.I,17; S.III,27 (dukkha-kkhayāya); IV,89 (id.); Pug.12, 13; Vism.116 (bhikkhu), neg. It.106 (antakiriyāya), 117 (phuṭṭhuṁ sambodhiṁ); J.I,106 (°puggala a person unfit for the higher truths & salvation). bhabbâbhabba nt & unfit people Nd² 235³=Vism.205, expl^d at Vbh.341, 342 by “bhabbā niyāmaṁ okkamituṁ kusalesu dhammesu sammattaṁ.” -- 2. possible (& abhabba impossible) M.III,215 (kammaṁ bhabbaābhāsa apparently possible). -- See also abhabba. (Page 498)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhabbatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. bhabba] possibility; neg. a° impossibility Sn.232; KhA 191; VvA.208. Bhamati [bhram; on etym. see K.Z. IV.443; VI,152. Expl^d at Dhtp 219 by “anavaṭṭhāne,” i. e. unsettledness] to spin (of a wheel), to whirl about, to roam Dh.371 (mā te kāmaguṇe bhamassu cittaṁ); J.I,414; III,206= IV.4 (cakkaṁ matthake); IV,6 (kumbha-kāra-cakkaṁ iva bh.); V,478. -- pp. bhanta. -- Caus. bhameti to make whirl Vism.142 (cakkaṁ). (Page 498)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhacca: {'def': '【阳】仆人，侍从。【形】被滋养的，被培养的。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】仆人，侍从。【形】被滋养的，被培养的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [grd. fr. bhṛ, cp. Sk. bhṛtya] to be carried, kept or sustained A.III,46 (=a dependant) J.IV,301 (C. bharitabba). As Kern. Toev. s. v. bhacca points out this gāthā “bhaccā mātā pitā bandhū, yena jāto sa yeva so” is a distortion of MBh I.74, 110, where it runs “bhastrā mātā, pituḥ putro, yena jāto sa eva saḥ” (or is it bhrastā?). (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhadanta: {'def': '(Bhaddanta) [a secondary adj. formation from address bhaddaṁ (=bhadraṁ) te “hail to thee,” cp. “bhaddaṁ vo” under bhadda 1] venerable, reverend. mostly in Voc. as address “Sir, holy father” etc., to men of the Order. Voc. sg. bhadante S.I,216 (v. l. bhaddante); Voc. pl. bhadantā DhA.III,414. -- A contracted form of bhadante is bhante (q. v.). Note. In case of bhadanta being the corresp. of Sk. *bhavanta (for bhavān) we would suppose the change v›d and account for dd on grounds of pop. analogy after bhadda. See bhante. The pl. Nom. from bhadantā is formed after bhadante, which was felt as a Voc. of an a --stem with --e for --a as in Prk. Māgadhī. (Page 497)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'bhaddanta(a secondary adj. formation from address bhaddaṁ (=bhadraṁ) te “hail to thee,” cp. “bhaddaṁ vo” under bhadda),【形】德高望重的、可尊敬的(venerable, reverend)。【阳】祥善者，德高望重。bhadante﹐【阳.单.呼】祥善者！bhadantā﹐【阳.复.呼】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'bhaddanta, 【形】德高望重的，可尊敬的。【阳】德高望重的人。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhadantika: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. bhadanta] only in cpd. ehi°, lit. “one belonging to the (greeting) “come hail to thee,” “ i. e. one who accepts an invitation D.III,40, M.II,161; A.I,295; II,206; Pug.55. See also under ehi. (Page 498)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhadara: {'def': 'in Bhadarapaṇḍu at A.I,181 is to be read as badara°. (Page 498)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhadda: {'def': 'bhaddikā,【阴】贤女，行为端正的女人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】威严的，吉兆的，幸运的，善的。 ~ka, 【中】幸运的事，好事物。【形】好质量的，幸运的。 ~kaccanā, 【阴】跋陀迦旃延（罗睺罗 (Rāhula) 的母亲耶输陀罗 (Yasodharā) 的另外一个名字）。 ~kumbha,【阳】满的大水罐（被认为是吉兆的）。 ~ghaṭa, 【阳】抽签桶。 ~dāru,【阳】喜马拉雅杉（见 Devadāru）。 ~padā,【阴】二十七星宿之二（室宿 (Pubbabhaddapadā)，壁宿 (Uttarabhaddapadā)）。 ~pīṭha, 【中】藤椅。 ~mukha, 【形】有英俊的脸的，补充的致辞（即：致辞时开端的称呼）。 ~yuga, 【中】最好的一双。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '^(a) & Bhadra^(b) (adj.) [cp. Vedic bhadra, on diff. forms see Geiger, P.Gr. § 53². Dhtp 143, 589 expl^s bhadd by “kalyāṇe”; whereas Dhtm 205 & 823 gives bhad (bhadd) with explⁿ “kalyāṇa kammāni”] 1. auspicious, lucky, high, lofty, august, of good omen, reverend (in address to people of esteem), good, happy, fortunate D.II,95^(a); S.I,117^(b); Dh.143 sq.^(b) (of a good, well-trained horse), 380^(b) (id.); J.VI,281^(b) (24 bhadrā pāsakā or lucky throws of the dice); DhA.I,33^(a) (Voc. bhadde=ayye). --bhadraṁ (nt.) something bringing luck, a good state, welfare; a good deed (=kalyāṇaṁ) Dh.120 (=bhadra-kamma, viz. kāyasucarita etc. DhA.III,14); PvA.116 (=iṭṭhaṁ). Also as form of address “hail to thee,” bhaddaṁ vo J.V,260. -- 2. a kind of arrow (cp. Sk. bhalla) J.II,275 (v. l. bhadra; so Kern, Toev. s. v.; but C. takes it as bhadda lucky, in neg. sense “unlucky, sinister,” & expl^s by bībhaccha=awful). -- 3. bull (cp. Sk. bhadra, Halāyudha 5, 21) Th.1, 16, 173, 659.

--mukha one whose face brings blessings, a complimentary address, like “my noble &c friend!” [cp. BSk. bhadramukha; Divy frequent: see Index], M.II,53; S.I,74 (cp. K.S. I.100ⁿ) J.II,261 (v. l. bhadda°); Vism.92 (v. l. SS bhadda°). --muttaka [cp. Sk. bhadramusta] a kind of fragrant grass (Cyperus rotundus) DA.I,81; Abhp 599. --yuga a noble pair DhA.I,95 (Kolita & Upatissa), --vāhana the auspicious (royal) vehicle (or carriage) Miln.4. (Page 498)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'bhaddikā, 【阴】贤女，行为端正的女人。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Bhadra, (cp. Vedic bhadra),【形】威严的，吉兆的，幸运的，善的。bhaddaka,【中】幸运的事，好事物。【形】好特质的，幸运的。Bhaddakaccanā,【阴】跋陀迦旃延(罗睺罗 (Rāhula) 的母亲耶输陀罗 (Yasodharā) 的另外一个名字)。bhadda-kappa﹐【阳】贤劫，又作善劫，现在的劫。bhaddakumbha,【阳】满的大水罐(被认为是吉兆的)。bhaddaghaṭa,【阳】抽签桶。bhaddadāru,【阳】喜马拉雅杉(见 Devadāru)。bhaddapadā,【阴】二十七星宿之二(室宿 (Pubbabhaddapadā)，壁宿 (Uttarabhaddapadā))。bhaddapīṭha,【中】藤椅。bhaddamukha,【形】有英俊的脸的，补充的致辞(即：致辞时开端的称呼)。bhaddamuttaka(cp. Sk. bhadramusta), 香附子、土香。bhaddayuga,【中】最好的一双。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhaddaka: {'def': '﹐bhadraka, (‹bhadda) 1.好的、贤善的(good, of good quality ;opp. pāpaka)。2.荣誉的(honoured, of high repute(=sambhāvita ))。3.【阳】【中】好东西(a good thing)，吉祥物(lucky or auspicious possession)。bhaddekaratta,贤善一夜( (日日)夜夜全然贤善生活之人)，音译：跋地罗帝。M.131./III,189.Bhaddekarattasuttaṁ(一夜贤者经)“Atītaṁ nānvāgameyya(na勿+ an不+āgameyya应回), nappaṭikaṅkhe(na勿+paṭikaṅkhe渴望) anāgataṁ;勿追想过去，勿向望未来。Yadatītaṁ pahīnaṁ taṁ, appattañca anāgataṁ(a未+patta‹pp. of pāpuṇāti到达).过去已了断，未来还未来。“Paccuppannañca yodhammaṁ, tattha tattha vipassati(vi+passati‹paw看);当下任何法，此时此地观。Asaṁhīraṁ(a不+saṁ共+hīraṁ碎片) asaṁkuppaṁ(a不+saṁ共+kuppaṁ动摇),taṁ vidvā(=viddasu智者) m’anubrūhaye(me+opt. of anubrūheti, 使…随增益).不碎不动摇，知者随增益。 “Ajjeva kiccamātappaṁ(kicca应作+m+ātappaṁ热心), ko jaññā maraṇaṁ suve;今日应热心，谁知明日死？Na hi no saṅgaraṁ ((‹saṁ+gā 唱﹑声明)承诺) tena, mahāsenena maccunā.与死亡大军，绝对无承诺。 “Evaṁ vihāriṁ ātāpiṁ, ahorattamatanditaṁ;热心如是住，日夜不倦怠(aho日+ratta夜+m+a不+tanditaṁ倦怠)。Taṁ ve bhaddekarattoti(bhadda贤者+eka一+ratto夜), santo ācikkhate muni”.圣者牟尼说：他是一贤者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '^(a) & Bhadraka^(b) [fr. bhadda] 1. good, of good quality (opp. pāpaka) A.IV,169^(a). -- 2. honoured, of high repute J.III,269^(a) (=sambhāvita C.). -- 3. (m. nt.) a good thing, lucky or auspicious possession, a valuable. Appl^d to the 8 requisites (parikkhārā) of a Samaṇa at J.V,254^(b). -- On upari-bhaddaka (N. of a tree J.VI,269; C.=bhagini-mālā) see upari. -- At A.IV,255 bhaddaka is given as one of the eight ingredients of the sun & moon; it may be gold (? cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie 190), or simply a term for a very valuable quality. (Page 498)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhaddamuttaka: {'def': '(cp. Sk. bhadramusta) ,【中】香附子、土香、香头草、臭头香、有头土香、雀头香、三棱草、水香陵、续根草(a kind of fragrant grass, Cyperus rotundus)，多年生草本，约20~50公分高。匍匐根茎细长，先端形成椭圆形球茎，於地下蔓延，新的球茎白色，老的球茎则呈深褐色。秆三棱形。叶由茎基部长出，线形，先端尖。苞片2-3枚，叶状。聚繖花序，具3-10个辐射枝，小穗紫红或红棕色。小坚果倒卵形，有三棱，黑褐色。为世界性的植物，生命力之强盛，似乎没有其他植物能出其右。不耐遮荫，在重密的叶片遮盖下，香附子会黄化或停止生长。具疏肝理气，调经止痛，除热消痞之功效。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhaddayānika: {'def': 'Bhadrayānika m. [BSk. Bhadrayānika] 賢乗部, 賢冑部.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Bhadde: {'def': '大德！', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhadra: {'def': '相同于 Bhadda。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '相同於 Bhadda。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhaga: {'def': '[Vedic bhaga, bhaj, see bhagavant etc.] luck, lot, fortune, only in cpd. dub° (adj.) unhappy, unpleasant, uncomfortable It.90; DA.I,96 (°karaṇa). --bhaga (in verse “bhagehi ca vibhattavā” in exegesis of word “Bhagava”) at DA.I,34 read bhava, as read at id. p. Vism.210. (Page 495)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹bhaj(梵bhaj)分开),【中】幸福，运气，财富，女人性器官。bhagandalā 【阴】〔医〕瘻，瘻管。bhagavantu,【形】幸运的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】运气，财富，女性的器官。 ~ndalā 【阴】〔医〕瘘，瘘管。~vantu 【形】幸运的。【阳】佛陀。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhagalavant: {'def': '[of uncertain origin] N. of a mountain SnA 197 (Loc. Bhagalavati pabbate). Occurs also as an assembly-hall under the N. of Bhagalavatī at D.III,201. Cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie 196. (Page 495)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhagandala: {'def': '(& ā) [cp. late Sk. bhagandara] an ulcer, fistula Vin.I,216, 272; Nd¹ 370. Has explⁿ at Dhtm 204 “bhaganda secane hoti” (“comes from sprinkling”) anything to do with our word? (Page 495)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhagavant: {'def': '(adj. n.) [cp. Vedic bhagavant, fr. bhaga] fortunate, illustrious, sublime, as Ep. and title “Lord.” Thus applied to the Buddha (amhākaṁ Bh.) and his predecessors. Occurs with extreme frequency; of fanciful exegetic expl^ns of the term & its meaning we mention e. g. those at Nd¹ 142=Nd² 466; Vism.210 sq.; DA.I,33 sq. Usual trs. Blessed One, Exalted One. (Page 495)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bhaga幸福的+vant具有),【阳】具有幸福的人(佛陀，古译：众佑)，音译︰音译︰薄伽梵、婆伽婆、婆加伴。Bhagavā jānaṁ jānāti passaṁ passati cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto dhammabhūto brahmabhūto vattā pavattā atthassa ninnetā amatassa dātā dhammasāmī Tathāgato(世尊是知所应知者，见所应见者，具眼者，具智者，具法者，具梵者，说者，宣说者，义之指导者，与不死者，法主，如来。) Nd1.142, 466.﹑Sp.pārā.I,123.﹑Vism.210.︰“1Bhāgyavā 2bhaggavā yutto, 3bhagehi ca 4vibhattavā; 5bhattavā 6vantagamano bhavesu Bhagavā tato”ti.(1.具足祥瑞(具有生起世间出世间之乐而得达彼岸的施戒等的吉祥之德)；2.具足破坏(贪瞋痴、一切恶法)；3.吉祥相应(成就百福特相的色身)；4.以分别(诸法)；5.具足亲近(天住、梵住、圣住，身、心与执著的远离，空、无愿、无相三解脱，及其他一切世间出世间的上人法)；6.以已除去诸有(bhavesu vantagamano’ti)故为世尊。) Nd1.144﹑Sp.pārā.I,125.﹑Vism.212.︰bhavesu vantagamanoti vattabbe bhavasaddato bhakāraṁ, gamanasaddato gakāraṁ, vantasaddato vakārañca dīghaṁ katvā ādāya Bhagavāti vuccati.(「有中舍离旅行者」（bhavesuvantagamana），但现在取有（bhava）的婆（bha）字，取旅行（gamana）的伽（ga）字，取舍离（vanta）的梵（va）字，再将阿（a）变成长音的阿（ā），故称「世尊」（Bhagavā）。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhagga: {'def': '² (nt.) [fr. bhaga; cp. Sk. & P. bhāgya] fortune, good luck, welfare, happiness Vism.210 (akāsi °ṁ ti garū ti Bhāgyavā etc.). (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bhañjati 的【过分】), 已打破。bhaggava(bhaggavā), 具足破坏(贪瞋痴、一切恶法)(cf. Vism.212.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(bhañjati 的【过分】), 已打破。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of bhañj, Sk. bhagna] broken, in phrases “sabbā te phāsukā bhaggā” J.I,493, which is applied metaphorically at Dh.154 (phāsukā=pāpakā?), expl^d DhA.III,128 (artificially) by “avasesa-kilesa-phāsukā bhaggā”; further “bhaggā pāpakā dhammā” Vism.211; bhaggā kilesā Miln.44; and bhagga-rāga, °dosa etc. (in def. of Bhagavā) at Nd¹ 142=Nd² 466 B, quoted at Vism.211. (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhaggava: {'def': '[cp. Sk. *bhārgava, a der. fr. bhṛgu, & bhargaḥ, of same root as Lat. fulgur lightning; Gr. flόc light; Ger. blitzen, blank; Ags. blanca white horse, all of the idea of “shining, bright, radiant.” -- How the meaning “potter” is connected with this meaning, is still a problem, perhaps we have to take the word merely as an Epithet at the one passage where it occurs, which happens to be in the Kumbhakāra-jātaka, v. 6, 7. i. e. the “Jātaka of the potter”] potter (?) J.III,381, 382, in Voc. bhaggava (m.) & bhaggavī (f.). The terms are not expl^d in C., evidently because somewhat obscure. According to Kern, Toev. s. v. the Sk. form in this meaning occurs at MBh. I.190, 47; Saddhp. 191 sq., MVastu III,347. (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhaggavant: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. bhagga², cp. Sk. & P. bhāgyavant] having good luck or auspices, fortunate; in def. of “Bhagavā” at Vism.210=DA.I,34 (“bhāgyavā bhaggavā yutto”); with ref. to the 4 qualities implied in the word “bhagavā,” which passage is alluded to at VvA.231 by remark “bhāgyavantat’ādīhi catūhi kāraṇehi Bhagavā.” (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhaginī: {'def': '【阴】姊妹。【反】bhātar，兄弟(但不用於称呼，称呼用āvuso(朋友，大德)，复数āvusā)。【主格】bhagini, bhaginī。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Epic Sk. bhaginī] a sister J.VI,32. The popular etym. of bh. as given at VbhA.108 is the same as that for bhātar, viz. “bhagatī ti bh.” -- Cpd. bhagini-māla a “sister garland” (?) N. of a tree J.VI,270 (=upari-bhaddaka). (Page 495)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】姊妹。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhajana: {'def': '【中】协会，联合，结交。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】协会，联合，结交。bhajana-loka(梵bhājana-loka)﹐器世间。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhajanā: {'def': '(f.) [fer. bhaj] resorting to, familiarity with Pug.20=Dhs.1326, cp. sam° & Dhs.trsl. 345. (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fer. Bhaj),【阴】结交(resorting to, familiarity with)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhajati: {'def': '(bhaj + a), 结交，陪伴。【过】 bhaji。【过分】 bhajita。【现分】bhajamāna。【独】 bhajitvā。【潜】 ~jitabba。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[bhaj to divide, partake etc.: see Caus. bhājeti & cp. vi°] to associate with (Acc.), keep companionship with, follow, resort to; to be attached to (Acc.), to love. Freq. syn. of sevati. The Dhtp & Dhtm mark the fig. meaning (bhaj²) by sevāyaṁ (Dhtp 61), sevāputhakkare (Dhtm 523) & saṁsevane (ib. 76), whilst the lit. (bhaj¹) is expressed by vibhājane. -- Sn.958 (bhajato rittaṁ āsanaṁ; Gen. sq. ppr.=sevato etc. Nd¹ 466); Dh.76, 303; Pug.26, 33; J.I,216=III,510 (disā bh.) VI,358; Sdhp.275. -- Pot. bhaje Dh.76, 78, and bhajetha Dh.78 (=payirupāsetha), 208 in sense of imper.; hence 2^nd sg. formed like Caus. as bhajehi J.III,148 (C. bhajeyyāsi; cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 139²). ‹-› -- grd. bhajitabba Nd² s. v. kāmaguṇā B (sevitabba, bh., bhāvetabba). (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bhaj+a), 结交，陪伴。【过】bhaji。【过分】bhajita。【现分】bhajamāna。【独】bhajitvā。【义】bhajitabba。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhajin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhajati] loving, attached to, worshipping Nd¹ 142 (in explⁿ of “Bhagavā”). (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhajjati: {'def': '(bhaj + a), 烤。【过】 bhajji。【过分】 bhajjita。【现分】 ~jamāna。【独】 ~jitvā。【被】 bhajjīyati。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(bhaj +a), 烤，炒。【过】bhajji。【过分】bhajjita。【现分】bhajjamāna。【独】bhajitvā。【被】bhajjīyati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic bhṛjjati, cp. Gr. fru/gw to roast, fru/ganon dry wood; Lat. frīgo to make dry] to roast, toast Vin.IV,264; Dhtp 79 & Dhtm 94, expl^d by “pāke.” ‹-› Caus. bhajjāpeti to have, or get roasted Vin.IV,264; DhA.I,224 (v. l. K. paccāpeti). (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhakkha: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. bhakṣ] 1. eating, feeding on D.III,41 (sāka° etc.); S.I,69 (pahūta° voracious, of fire), 238 (kodha°); Pv.I,9¹ (lohita-pubba°); Pug.55 (tiṇa°); Sdhp.388 (tiṇa°). -- 2. eatable, to be eaten; nt. °ṁ food, prey, in cpd. appa-bhakkha offering no food Vv 84³ (appodaka+). -- pl. also bhakkhā (eatables) J.II,14; IV,241 (similar context; =bhojana C.); Pv.II,9⁴¹ (=āhārā PvA.129). It is to be pointed out that bhakkhā occurs in poetry, in stock phrase “dibbā bhakkhā pātubhavanti”; cp. Vedic bhakṣa (m) feeding, partaking of food, esp. drink (of Soma), thus something extraordinary. (Page 495)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】适合被吃的，可以吃的。【中】食物，掠食。(在【合】中), 以…为食。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】适合被吃的，可以吃的。【中】食物，掠食。 (在【合】中), 以…为食。(p239)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhakkhaka: {'def': '【阳】吃的人。(p239)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】吃的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhakkhana: {'def': '【中】吃。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】吃。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhakkhati: {'def': '[bhakṣ fr. bhaj, cp. Sk. bhakṣati & bhakṣayati; Dhtp 17 & 537 expl^ns by “adana”] to eat, to feed upon Pv.II,2⁵ (pubba-lohitaṁ); DhA.II,57 (vātaṁ). ‹-› inf. bhakkhituṁ J.II,14. -- Caus. bhakkheti in same meaning J.IV,349 (aor. bhakkhesuṁ); cp. BSk. bhakṣayati Divy 276. (Page 495)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bhakkh+a), 吃，食。【过】bhakkhi。【过分】bhakkhita。【不】bhakkhituṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(bhakkh + a), 吃，食。【过】 ~kkhi。【过分】 ~khita。【不】~khituŋ。(p239)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhakkheti: {'def': '(bhakkh狼吞虎咽地吃+e), 吃，食。参考 Bhakkhati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(bhakkh + e), 参考 Bhakkhati。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhakuṭi: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. bhrakuṭi from older bhṛkuti, bhrukuṭi or bhrūkuṭi] superciliousness Sn.485. J.III,99; Vism.26 (°karaṇa); SnA 412. Der. bhākuṭika (q. v.). See also bhūkuṭi. (Page 495)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhallaka: {'def': '[lit. from the Bhalla people] a kind of copper, enum^d under the eight pisāca-lohāni, or copper coming from the Piśāca country VbhA.63 (is reading correct?). It is doubtful whether we should not read mallaka, cp. malla. (Page 499)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhallātaka: {'def': '【阳】肉托果（东印度的一种乔木 (Semecarpus anacardium)）。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】肉托果(东印度的一种乔木(marking-nut；Semecarpus anacardium))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhallāṭaka: {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. bhallātaka] the marking nut plant Semicarpus anacardium J.VI,578. (Page 499)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhama: {'def': '【阳】漩涡，转向，辘轳(窑工在拉坯时，拨动辘轳朝逆时针或顺时针方向旋转)。bhamakāra,【阳】转辘轳者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】旋转的事物，漩涡，转向。 ~kāra。【阳】车床工。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhamara: {'def': '【阳】黄蜂。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Sk. bhramara),【阳】蜂(a bee)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhramara; either to bhram (semantically quick, unsteady motion=confused noise), cp. Gr. fόrmigc zither; or perhaps for *bramara to Ohg. bremo=Ger. bremse gadfly, bremen=brummen to hum; Gr. brόmos thunder, Lat. fremo to growl, roar: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fremo] 1. a bee J.V,205 (°vaṇṇa bee-coloured, i. e. of black colour, in explⁿ of kaṇha); Th.2, 252. Usually in similes, e. g. at Dh.49 (cp. DhA.I,374 sq.); Vism.142, 152; SnA 139. -- 2. in bhamara-tanti “the string that sounds,” one of the seven strings of the lute J.II,253, cp. VvA.140. (Page 498)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhamarikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. bhamara] a humming top J.V,478. (Page 498)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】嗡嗡叫的顶端。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】嗡嗡叫的顶端。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhamati: {'def': '(bham + a), 使旋转，漫游。【过】 bhami。【过分】 bhanta。【现分】 bhamanta。【独】 ~mitva。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(bham+a), 使旋转，漫游。【过】bhami。【过分】bhanta。【现分】bhamanta。【独】bhamitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhamu: {'def': 'bhamuka, 【阴】眉毛。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'bhamuka,【阴】眉毛。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [secondary formation after bhamuka] eyebrow J.VI,476 (ṭhita°), 482 (nīla°). Bhamuka (& Bhamukha) (f.) [cp. Vedic bhrū; the Pali word is possibly a compⁿ of bhrū+mukha with dissimilation of first u to a] eyebrow Th.11, 232=S.I,132 pamukh-; J.IV,18 (in explⁿ of su-bbhū=su-bhamukhā in C., Fausböll puts “bhamuka”? Kern on this passage quotes BSk. bhrūmukha, see Toev. s. v.); VI,503 (aḷāra° for pamukha); DhA.III,102; IV,90, 197=J.V,434; SnA 285. (Page 498)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhanta: {'def': '(bhamati 的【过分】), 已摇摆，已改变方向(swerving, swaying, staggering, deviating; always used of an uncontrolled car (ratha or yāna) )。bhantatta,【中】混乱，骚动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of bham] swerving, swaying, staggering, deviating; always used of an uncontrolled car (ratha or yāna) Dh.222 (ratha=ativegena dhāvanta DhA.III,301); (yāna=adanta akārita aviṇīta Nd¹ 145); DhsA.260 (°yāna). Cp. vi°. (Page 498)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bhamati 的【过分】), 已摇摆，已改变方向。 ~tta,【中】混乱，骚动。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhantatta: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. bhanta] turmoil, confusion Dhs.429 (=vibhanti-bhāva DhsA.260, so read for vibhatti°); cp. Dhs.trsl. 120. (Page 498)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhante: {'def': '(bhadanta 的【呼】), 尊者！大德！(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '大德啊！尊者啊！', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '(would correspond either to Sk. *bhavantah (Māgadhism for bhantah)(bhadanta 的【呼】), 尊者！大德！尊师！(Venerable sir, 在家人对比丘，或下座比丘对上座比丘的一种尊称。相当於汉地对出家众之尊称--法师，师父)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '尊者,尊师(相当於汉地对出家众之尊称--法师,师父)', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '[would correspond either to Sk. *bhavantaḥ (with ending °e as Māgadhism for °aḥ)=bhavān, or to P. bhadanta. In both cases we have a contraction. The explⁿ bhante=bhadante (bhadantaḥ) is advocated by Pischel, Prk. Gr. §§ 165, 366^b, intimated also by Weber, Bhagavatī 156 n. 3 (unable to explain --e); the explⁿ bhante=bhavantah (see bhavaṁ) by Geiger, P.Gr. 98³; hinted at by Weber Loc. cit. (bhavantaḥ=bhagavantaḥ)] Voc. of polite address: Sir, venerable Sir, used like bhadante. Either abs. as Voc.: Vin.I,76; D.II,154, 283; J.II,111; III,46; Miln.19; or with another Voc.: Miln.25; or with other oblique cases, as with Nom. D.I,179; DhA.I,62. with Gen. D.I,179. (Page 498)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhara: {'def': '【形】(在【合】中) 支援。mātāpettībhara = 孝养父母的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 支援。 Mātāpettībhara = 奉养父母的人。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. bhṛ] “bearing” in act. & pass. meaning, i. e. supporting or being supported; only in cpd. dubbhara hard to support A.V,159, 161 (v. l. dubhara), and subhara easy to support Th.1, 926 (trsl. “of frugal ways”). (Page 499)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bharati: {'def': '(bhar+a), 忍受，支援，维持，养育。【过】bhari。【过分】bhata。【独】bharitvā。【未.1.单】bharissāmi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[bhṛ, cp. Lat. fero, Gr. fέrw, Av. baraiti, Oir. berim, Goth. bairan=to bear, Ger. gebāren. Dhtm expl^s simply by “bharena”] to bear, support, feed, maintain J.V,260 (mama bharatha, ahaṁ bhattā bhavāmi vo; C. expl^ns as “maṁ icchatha”). -- pp. bhata. See also bhaṭa, bhara, bharita, and Der. fr. bhār°. A curious Passive form is anu-bhīramāna (ppr.) M.III,123 (chatta: a parasol being spread out), on which see Geiger, P.Gr. § 52, 5; 175 n. 3, 191. (Page 499)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bhar + a), 忍受，支援，维持。【过】 bhari。【过分】 bhata。【独】 bharitvā。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bharatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. bhara] only in cpd. dub° difficulty to support, state of being hard to maintain, synonymous with kosajja at A.IV,280, and kuhanā at A.V,159, 161. -- opp. subharatā A.IV,280. (Page 499)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bharaṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. bhṛ, Epic Sk. bharaṇa] bearing, supporting, maintenance Dhtm 346 (in explⁿ of bhṛ); Abhp 1053. (Page 499)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】维护，承受。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】维护，承受。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bharaṇī: {'def': '【阴】胃宿(二十七星宿之一)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】胃宿（二十七星宿之一）。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bharita: {'def': '【过分】已装满，已充满，已维护。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [lit. made to bear, i. e. heavy with etc. Cp. formations bhār°, fr. bharati] filled with (-°) J.I,2 (suvaṇṇa-rajata° gabbha); IV,489 (udaka°); V,275 (kimi°); SnA 494 (vāta°); ThA.283 (kuṇapa°). (Page 499)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已装满，已充满，已维护。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhariyā: {'def': '(‹bhr, Vedic bhāryā),【阴】妻子(a wife；lit. one who is supported)。十种妻子(dasa bhariyāyo)即：(1)买得妻(dhanakkītā)：已用财物买而令住；(2)乐住妻(chandavāsinī)：两情相悦而令住；(3)雇住妻(bhogavāsinī)：赠物而令住；(4)衣物住妻(paṭavāsinī)：赠衣物而令住者；(5)水得妻(odapattakinī)：触水钵而令住。共取钵水灌手，共誓言：「愿此水和合不离」，结为夫妇，为最正当的结婚仪式；(6)取下(头)垫妇(obhaṭacumbaṭā)：取下(头上布)垫子(cumbaṭaṁ oropetvā)而令住。(7)婢妻(dāsī)：既是家妻兼作婢；(8)作务妻(kammakārī)：既是家妻兼作务者；(9)俘虏妻(dhajāhaṭā)：俘虏(karamarānītā)捉来者；(10) 短暂妻(muhuttikā)：暂时(taṅkhaṇikā)之妻(行邪淫)。《律藏．经分别》(Vin.III,139-140.；CS:p.202-3) A.7.59./IV,92.：“Satta kho imā, Sujāte, purisassa bhariyāyo. Katamā satta? Vadhakasamā, corīsamā, ayyasamā, mātāsamā, bhaginīsamā, sakhīsamā, dāsīsamā.”「善生！这七种是男子的妻子。哪七(种)？有似杀手，有似贼，有似主宰，有似母，有似妹，有似友，有似婢。」《佛说玉耶女经》(大2.864上)作：「作妇之法，当有五等。…一如母妇，二如臣妇，三如妹妇，四者婢妇，五者夫妇。」《玉耶女经》(大2.865上)作：「世间下有七辈妇。…一者母妇，二者妹妇，三者知识妇，四者妇妇，五者婢妇，六者怨家妇，七者夺命妇。」', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】妻子。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. bhṛ, Vedic bhāryā] a wife (lit. one who is supported) D.III,190; It.36; J.III,511; DhA.I,329. (Page 499)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bharu: {'def': '[a dial. (inscription) word, cp. Kern, Toev. s. v.] sea, in two names for a town and a kingdom viz. Bharukaccha Nd¹ 155; J.II,188; IV,137, and Bharu-raṭṭha J.II,169 sq., a kingdom which is said to have been swallowed up by the sea. -- Also in N. of the King of that country Bharu-rājā J.II,171 (v. l. Kuru°). -- Der. Bhārukacchaka an inhabitant of Bharukaccha DhsA.305 (so read at Expos. II.401). (Page 499)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhasati: {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. bhaṣate] to bark (of dogs) J.IV,182 (aor. bhasi; so read for T. bhusi). -- pp. bhasitaṁ (as n.) bark ibid. (mahā-bhasitaṁ bhasi, read for bhusita). See also bhusati. (Page 500)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhasita: {'def': '1. see bhasati. -- 2. pp. of bhas “crumbled to ashes” see bhasma. (Page 500)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhasma: {'def': '(n) (nt.) [cp. Vedic bhasman (adj.); Sk. bhasman (n.), originally ppr. of bhas to chew & thus n-stem. It has passed into the a-decl. in Pali, except in the Loc. bhasmani (S.I,169). Etymologically & semantically bhasman is either “chewing” or “anything chewed (small),” thus meaning particle, dust, sand, etc.; and bhas is another form of psā (cp. Sk. psā morsel of food, psāta hungry=P. chāta). Idg. *bhsā & *bhsam, represented in Gr. yw/xw to grind, yάmmos & yώxos sand; Lat. sabulum sand. The Dhtp 326 & Dhtm 452 explain bhas by bhasmīkaraṇa “reduce to ashes,” a pp. of it is bhasita; it also occurs in Sk. Loc. bhasi] ashes S.I,169=Nd² 576 (Loc. bhasmani); Vv 84⁴⁴; J.III,426; Vism.469 (in comparison).

--antāhuti (bhasm’ant’āhuti) “whose sacrifice ends in ashes” D.I,55 (so read for bhassant°, according to DA.I,166, & cp. Franke, Dīgha Nikāya p. 60); M.I,515; S.III,207. --âcchanna covered by ashes Dh.71 (=chārikāya paṭichanna DhA.II,68); J.VI,236 (. . . va pāvaka). --puṭa a sack for ashes DA.I,267 (as explⁿ for assa-puṭa of D. I.98; fanciful; see assa¹). --bhāva “ashy” state, state of being crumbled to dust VvA.348. (Page 500)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】灰烬。 ~cchanna, 【形】被灰烬复盖的。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Bhasman),【中】灰烬，涂灰。bhasmacchanna,【形】被灰烬复盖的。bhasmā vasalī hohi,贱民！变成灰吧！(咀咒人死)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhassa: {'def': '【中】废话。 ~ārāmatā, 【阴】执着于废话。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】废话。bhassārāmatā,【阴】执著於废话。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. bhāṣya, of bhāṣ] speech, conversation, way of talking, disputation Sn.328 (v. l. for hassa); It.71; Miln.90; Vism.127 (grouped into fit talk, as the 10 kathā-vatthus, and unfit talk or gossip, as the 32 tiracchāna-kathā).

--kāraka one who makes talk, i. e. invites disputation, or one who gossips Vin.I,1; Nd¹ 142; f. °kārikā Vin.IV,230. --pavādaka one who proposes disputation, one who is fond of debate & discussions M.I,161, 227 (°ika); Miln.4. --pavedin one experienced in debating Miln.90. --samācāra (good) conduct in speech, proficiency in disputation D.III,106. --samussaya grandiloquence, proud talk Sn.245 (cp. SnA 288=att’ukkaṁsanatā ti vuttaṁ hoti). (Page 500)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhassara: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. bhās] 1. (adj.) shining, resplendent J.V,169 (C. pabhassara). -- 2. N. of a bird J.VI,538 (=sata-haṁsa C.). -- Cp. ā°, pa°. (Page 500)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】明亮的，光亮的，辉煌的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】明亮的，光亮的，辉煌的。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhassati: {'def': '(bhas下来+ya), 跌倒，落下，下降。【过】bhassi。【过分】bhaṭṭha。【现分】bhassanta, bhassamāna。【独】bhassitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[bhranś, Sk. bhraśyate] to fall down, drop, to droop (Dhtp 455 & Dhtm 695: adho-patane & adhopāte) J.IV,223; VI,530. ppr. bhassamāna Miln.82; pret. 3^rd sg. bhassittha J.II,274 (cp. pabhassittha Vin.II,135), & abhassittha S.I,122 (so read for abhassatha). -- pp. bhaṭṭha¹. (Page 500)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bhas + ya), 跌倒，落下，下降。【过】 bhassi。【过分】 bhaṭṭha。【现分】 ~santa, ~samāna。【独】 ~sitvā。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhasta: {'def': '[cp. Vedic basta] a he-goat J.III,278. (Page 500)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhastā: {'def': '(f.) & bhasta (nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. bhastrā (also one MBh. passage), orig. n. ag. fr. bhas (to bark?), lit. bellower, blower] 1. a bellows Th.1, 1134; J.VI,12 (vāta-puṇṇa-bhasta-camma, skin of bellows full of wind); SnA 171 (vāta-pūrita-bhastrā viya), 494 (vātabharita°); DhA.I,442 (bhastaṁ dhamāpeti); Vism.287. -- 2. a sack Th.1, 1151; 2, 466 (T. reads gatta, but ThA.283 reads bhasta & expl^s as “camma-pasibbaka”); J.III,346 (sattu°=sattu pasibbaka flour sack); V,45; ThA.212 (udaka°). biḷāra-bhastā a bag of catskin M.I,128 (=biḷāra-camma-pasibbaka Bdhgh); Th.1, 1138. (Page 500)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】风箱，皮袋。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】bhasta【中】风箱，皮袋。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhata: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. bhṛta] 1. supported, fed, reared, maintained A.III,46 (bhatā bhaccā “maintained are my dependents”); J.V,330 (kicchā bh.), given by Kern, Toev. s. v. in meaning “full” with wrong ref. J.VI,14. Cp. bharita. (Page 497)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bharati‘维持’的【过分】), 已培养，已维护，已养育。【阳】仆人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(bharati 的【过分】), 已培养，已维护，已养育。【阳】仆人。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhataka: {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. bhṛtaka] a hired servant, hireling, servant Th.1, 606, 685, 1003; J.III,446; Miln.379; DhA I,119, 233 (°vīthi servant street). See also Fick. Sociale Gliederung 158, 195, 196. (Page 497)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】被雇用的仆人。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】被雇用的仆人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhati: {'def': '【阴】薪水，费用。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic bhṛti, fr. bhṛ] wages, fee, pay J.I,475; III,325, 446; DhA.I,21, 70; Dhtp 94 (in explⁿ of root bhaṭ, see bhaṭa). (Page 497)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】薪水，费用。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhatikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. bhati] fee J.IV,184. (Page 497)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhatta: {'def': '【中】饭，食物，餐。 ~kicca, 【中】用餐。 ~kāraka, 【阳】厨子。~kilamatha, ~sammada, 【阳】餐后的睡意。 ~gāma, 【阳】给贡物或服务的村庄。 ~agga, 【中】餐厅。 ~puṭa, 【中】食物的包裹。 ~vissagga,【阳】服侍他人用餐。 ~vetana, 【中】食物和费用。 ~velā, 【阴】用餐时间。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhakta, orig. pp. of bhajati] feeding, food, nourishment, meal Dh.185; Pug.28, 55; J.II,15; V,170 (bhatta-manuñña-rūpaṁ for bhattaṁ-); Vism.66 (where 14 kinds enum^d, i. e. saṅgha°, uddesa° etc.); Sdhp.118. --ucchiṭṭha° food thrown away PvA.173; uddesa° special food Vin.I,58=96, cp. II.175; devasika° daily food (as fee or wages) DA.I,296 (=bhatta-vetana); dhura° a meal to which a bhikkhu is invited as leader of others, i. e. a responsible meal J.I,449; III,97 (v. l. dhuva°); dhuva° constant supply of food Vin.I,25, 243.

--agga [cp. BSk. bhaktāgra Divy 335; MVastu II.478] a refectory Vin.I,44; M.I,28; J.V,334. --ammaṇa food trough J.VI,381. --âbhihāra gift of food S.I,82. --uddesaka (thera) (an elder) who supervises the distribution of food, a superintendent of meals Vism.388, DhA.I,244. --kāraka one who prepares the meal or food, a cook, butler J.I,150 sq.; V,296; VI,349; DA.I,157. --kicca “meal-performance,” meal (cp. BSk. bhaktakṛtya Divy 185) J.I,87; Miln.9; Vism.278 (kata° after the meal, cp. kata II.1. a); PvA.76. --kilamatha fatigue after eating SnA 58 (cp. °sammada). --gāma a village giving tribute or service DhA.I,398. --dāna gift of a meal PvA.54. --puṭa a bag with food J.II,82, 203; III,200; DA.I,270. Cp. puṭabhatta. --puṭaka same KhA 44; VbhA.234; Vism.251. --bhoga enjoyment of food S.I,92. --randhaka a cook J.IV,431. --vissagga serving a meal, meal-function, participation at a meal Vin.IV,263; Pv III,2⁹ (so read for vissatta; expl^d at PvA.184 by bhattakicca & bhuñjana); Miln.9; SnA 19, 140. --vetana service for food, food as wages (cp. bhaktā-dāsa a slave working for food Manu VIII,415, see Fick. Sociale Gliederung p. 197), in general “hire, wages,” also “professional fee” D.III,191; Vin.III,222 (rañño bh-v.-āhāro “in the King’s pay”); J.IV,132 sq., Miln.379; DhA.I,25 (to a physician); VvA.305. --velā meal-time SnA 111. --sammada drowsiness after a meal S.I,7; J.VI,57; Vbh.352; Vism.278, 295. --sālā hall for meals, refectory Vism.72. (Page 497)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵bhakta),【中】饭，食物，餐。bhattakicca,【中】用餐。bhattakāraka,【阳】厨子。bhattakilamatha, bhattasammada,【阳】饭后的睡意。bhattagāma,【阳】给贡物或服务的村庄。bhattagga,【中】斋堂，餐厅。bhattapuṭa,【中】食物的包裹。bhattavissagga,【阳】服侍他人用餐。bhattavetana,【中】食物和费用。bhattavelā,【阴】用餐时间。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhattar: {'def': '[Vedic bhartṛ to bhṛ] a husband; Nom. sg. bhattā Th.2, 413; J.V,104, 260 (here in meaning “supporter”); VI,492; Gen. bhattu J.V,169, 170; Acc. bhattāraṁ Th.2, 412. (Page 497)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhattavant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. *bhakta, pp. of bhajati] possessing reverence or worship(pers), worshipful, adored; in a (late) verse analysing fancifully the word “Bhagavant,” at DA.I,34=Vism.210 sq. Expl^d at Vism.212 by “bhaji-sevi-bahulaṁ karoti.” (Page 497)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhatti: {'def': '(cp. Vedic & Class. Sk. bhakti, fr. bhaj: see bhajati),【阴】1.热爱，信念，执著(devotion, attachment, fondness)。2.服务(in bhatti-kata Th 2, 413 it means “service,” thus “doing service” (or “rendered a servant”?))。3.of uncertain meaning in bhatti-kamma, probably “making lines, decoration, ornamentation” Vin II.113 (°kamma-kata decorated), I.51. The reading is uncertain, may be bhati° (? Kern, Toev. s. v. trsls “patchwork”?).。J V.340 (=sineha C.)。drḍhabhaktitā(梵)﹐坚固的诚信。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic & Class. Sk. bhakti, fr. bhaj: see bhajati] 1. devotion, attachment, fondness Pug.20= Dhs.1326 (cp. Dhs.trsl. 345); Pug.65; J.V,340 (=sineha C.); VI,349; VvA.353, 354. -- 2. in bhatti-kata Th.2, 413 it means “service,” thus “doing service” (or “rendered a servant”?). -- 3. of uncertain meaning in bhatti-kamma, probably “making lines, decoration, ornamentation” Vin.II,113 (°kamma-kata decorated), I.51. The reading is uncertain, may be bhati° (? Kern, Toev. s. v. trsl^s “patchwork”?). Cp. vi°. (Page 497)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】热爱，信念，执着。 ~ka, ~mantu, 【形】投入的，信任的。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhattika: {'def': '(‹bhatta),【形】供给食物(in dhuvabhattika being in constant supply of food, being a regular attendant (servant) or adviser)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. bhatta] in dhuva° being in constant supply of food, being a regular attendant (servant) or adviser Vin.II,15. Also at ThA.267 in meaning “being a servant, working for food” in explⁿ of bhattikatā (=kata-sāmi-bhattikā), said of a toiling housewife. (Page 497)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhattimant: {'def': '(adj.) [from bhatti] 1. devoted? 2. discerning, analytical, perspicacious? Th.1, 370; Com. has: yathānusiṭṭhaṁ paṭipattiyā tattha bhattimā nāma. (Page 497)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhattimantu: {'def': '(from bhatti) ,【形】1.信任的(devoted?)。2.分析的(discerning, analytical, perspicacious? Th 1, 370)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhattu: {'def': '【阳】丈夫，支援者，培养者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】丈夫，支援者，培养者。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhava: {'def': '(‹bhavati ‹bhū), imper. 2nd sg.令你变成，令你存在。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. bhava, as philosophical term late, but as N. of a deity Vedic; of bhū, see bhavati] “becoming,” (form of) rebirth, (state of) existence, a “life.” There are 3 states of existence conventionally enum^d as kāma°, rūpa°, arūpa° or sensual existence, deva-corporeal, & formless existence (cp. rūpa) D.II,57; III,216; S.II,3; IV,258; A.II,223; III,444; Nd¹ 48; Nd² s. v. dhātu B.; Vism.210=DA.I,34; Vism.529; VbhA.204. -- Another view is represented by the division of bhava into kamma° and upapatti° (uppatti°), or the active functioning of a life in relation to the fruitional, or resultant way of the next life (cp. Cpd. 43) Vbh.137; Vism.571; VbhA.183; also in def. of bhava at Nd² 471 (kamma° and paṭisandhika punabbhava). -- In the “causal chain” (Paṭicca-samuppāda, q. v.) bhava is represented as condition of birth (jāti), or resultant force for new birth. -- See Sn.361, 514, 742, 839, 923, 1055, 1133; Dh.348; Nd¹ 274; Vbh.294, 358; Vism.556 sq.; DhA.IV,221; Sdhp.33, 333, 335. -- On itibhav’‹-› âbhava see iti, and add ref. Vbh.375. -- A remarkable use of bhava as nt. (obstr.) to bhū (in cpd.) is to be noted in the def. given by Bdhgh. of divya=divi bhavaṁ (for divi-bhū) KhA 227; SnA 199; and mānasaṁ=manasi bhavaṁ (for manasi-bhū) KhA 248, cp. Pāṇini IV.3, 53. Similarly āroga bhava health DhA.I,328 for °bhava. -- Cp. anu°, vi°, sam°.

--agga the best (state of) existence, the highest point of existence (among the gods) J.III,84; Vbh.426; Miln.132; KhA 179, 249; SnA 17, 41, 507; often as highest “heaven” as opposed to Avīci, the lowest hell; thus at J.IV,182; VI,354; Miln.336. --aṅga constituent of becoming, function of being, functional state of subconsciousness, i. e. subliminal consciousness or subconscious life-continuum, the vital continuum in the absence of any process [of mind, or attention] (thus Mrs. Rh. D. in Expos. 185 n.), subconscious individual life. See on term Cpd. 26 sq., 265--267; & cp. Dhs.trsl. 134. -- J.VI,82; Miln.299 sq.; Vism.164, 676; DhsA.72, 140, 269; DhA.I,23; VbhA.81, 156 sq., 406. --antaga “gone to the ends of existence,” past existence, Ep. of the Bhagavan Buddha Vism.210. --antara an existence interval, i. e. transition fr. one life to another, a previous or subsequent life Vism.553 sq. --âbhava this or that life, any form of existence some sort of existence Sn.1060, 1068; Nd¹ 48, 109, 284; Nd² 472, 664 A; Th.1, 784 (ThA.mahantāmahanta bh.) ThA.71 (Ap. v. 30); VbhA.501. --āsava the intoxicant of existence D.III,216; Vbh.364, 373. --uppatti coming into (a new) ex. -- Four such bh.-uppattis lead to rebirth among the foll. gods: the paritt’--ābhā devā, the appamāṇ’ābhā d., the saṁkiliṭṭh’--ābhā d., the parisuddh’--ābhā d. M.III,147. --esanā longing for rebirth D.III,216, 270. --ogha the flood of rebirth (see ogha) Nd¹ 57, 159; Vism.480. --cakka the wheel or round of rebirth, equivalent to the Paṭicca-samuppāda Vism.529, 576 sq.; in the same context at VbhA.138, 194 sq. --carimakā the last rebirth Vism.291. --taṇhā craving for rebirth D.III,212, 216, 274; S.V,432; Sn.746; Vbh.101, 358, 365; Th.2, 458; ThA.282; VbhA.III,133. --netti [cp. BSk. bhava-netrī M. Vastu II.307; °netrika III,337] leader to renewed ex., guide to ex. Vin.I,231; It.38; Dhs.1059≈ (cp. DhsA.364=bhava-rajju). --saṁyojana the fetter of rebirth: see arahant II. C. --salla the sting or dart of rebirth Dh.351 (=sabbāni bhavagāmīni sallāni DhA.IV,70). --sāta (pl. sātāni) the pleasures of ex., variously enum^d in sets of from one to six at Nd¹ 30. --ssita at J.V,371 read with v. l. as ghaṭa-ssita. (Page 499)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】生存的状态。 ~gga, 【阳】最高的生存，宇宙的最高点。 ~ṅga,【中】潜意识。 ~cakka, 【中】转世的轮子。 ~taṇhā, ~netti, 【阴】再生的欲求。 ~ntaga, ~ntagū, 【形】达到存在的边缘，来到世界的尾端。~ntara, 【中】另一个生存。 ~saŋyojana, 【中】再生的桎梏。 ~vābhava,【阳】这个或那个生存。 ~vesanā, 【阴】渴望再生。 ~vogha, 【阳】再生的洪水。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】生存的状态。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhavagga: {'def': '【阳】最高的生存(culminating point of existence有顶天。Bhavaggāti akaniṭṭhabhavanato--Buddhavaṁsa-aṭṭhakathā(有顶天：色究竟天)﹐CS:p.201)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhavana: {'def': '【中】存在，仍然存在，居住的地方。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】仍然存在，居住的地方。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. bhū] dwelling, sphere, world, realm S.I,206, Sn.810 (see explⁿ Nd¹ 132: nerayikānaṁ nirayo bh. etc. & SnA 534: niray’ādi-bhede bhavane); Nd¹ 448 (Inda° the realm of Indra); J.III,275 (nāga° the world of the Nāgas). (Page 500)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhavanidānā: {'def': 'bhavasamudayā bhavajātikā bhavapabhavā﹐从「有」为因缘，从「有」集起，从「有」而生，从「有」为根源。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhavant: {'def': '[cp. Sk. (& Vedic) bhavant, used as pron. of the 2^nd; but constructed with 3^rd person of the verb. Probably a contraction fr. bhagavant, see Whitney, Altind. Gr. 456] pron. of polite address “Sir, Lord,” or “venerable, honourable,” or simply “you.” Cases as follows (after Geiger, P.Gr. § 98³): sg. Nom. bhavaṁ Sn.486; D.I,249; M.I,484. nt. bhavaṁ M.III,172. Acc. bhavantaṁ Sn.597; D.II,231; Instr. bhotā D.I,93, 110; S.IV,120. Gen. bhoto Sn.565; M.I,486; Voc. bhavaṁ D.I,93 & bho D.I,93; M.I,484; J.II,26. See bho also sep. -- pl. Nom. bhavanto Sn.p. 107 (only as v. l.; T. bhagavanto), & bhonto ibid.; M.II,2; Miln.25; Acc. bhavante M.II,3; Instr. bhavantehi M.III,13; Gen. bhavataṁ M.II,3; Voc. bhonto Th.1, 832; M.II,2; -- f. bhotī: sg. Nom. bhotī Sn.988; J.III,95; Acc. bhotiṁ J.VI,523; Loc. bhotiyā ibid. Voc. bhoti ibid.; D.II,249. -- On form bhante see this. (Page 500)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. (& Vedic) bhavant, used as pron. of the 2nd; but constructed with 3rd person of the verb. Probably a contraction fr. bhagavant, see Whitney, Altind. Gr. 456] 尊者(pron. of polite address “Sir, Lord,” or “venerable, honourable,” or simply “you.” Cases as follows (after Geiger, P.Gr. § 983): sg. Nom. bhavaṁ Sn 486; D I.249; M I.484. nt. bhavaṁ M III.172. Acc. bhavantaṁ Sn 597; D II.231; Instr. bhotā D I.93, 110; S IV.120. Gen. bhoto Sn 565; M I.486; Voc. bhavaṁ D I.93 & bho D I.93; M I.484; J II.26. See bho also sep. -- pl. Nom. bhavanto Sn p. 107 (only as v. l.; T. bhagavanto), & bhonto ibid.; M II.2; Miln 25; Acc. bhavante M II.3; Instr. bhavantehi M.III,13; Gen. bhavataṁ M.II,3; Voc. bhonto Th 1, 832; M II.2; -- f. bhotī: sg. Nom. bhotī Sn 988; J III.95; Acc. bhotiṁ J VI.523; Loc. bhotiyā ibid. Voc. bhoti ibid.; D II.249. -- On form bhante see this.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(bhavati的【现分】)﹐尊，尊师，尊者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhavanta: {'def': '【形】繁荣的，阁下(敬辞，称对方)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】繁荣的，阁下（敬辞，称对方）。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhavantu: {'def': '(‹bhavati)【3复.命】，愿他们，希望他们是。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhavati: {'def': '(bhavant的【阴】),【阴】尊尼，尊姐。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(bhū+a；cp. Sk. bhūmi earth), 变成，是，存在。【过】bhavi, abhavi﹐-bhavi, -abhavi。【过分】bhūta﹐-bhūta。【现分】bhavanta, bhavamāna。【义】bhavitabba。【独】bhavitvā, bhūtvā。【不】bhavituṁ。Acintitampi bhavati, %9Cintitampi vinassati.不想念的，却会出现；所想念的，却会消失。1. Pres. ind. Bhavāmi & homi; 2nd bhavasi & hosī; 3rd bhavati freq.; (other reads bhavanti); & hoti freq.; 1st pl. homa; 2nd hotha; 3rd bhavanti & honti freq. -- imper. 2nd sg. bhava; Th 2, 8; bhavāhi; hohi; 3rd sg. hotu; Miln 18. pl. 1st med. bhavāmase Th 1, 1128; Sn 32; 2nd pl. bhavatha, bhavātha; hotha; 3rd pl. bhavantu; hontu. Pot. 1st sg. bhaveyyaṁ; 2nd bhaveyyāsi ; 3rd bhave, bhaveyya; & hupeyya(for bhavaṁ Sn 92, & bhavanto; f. hontī. -- fut. 1st sg. bhavissāmi, hessāmi (ThA 283 reads bhavissāmi), & hessaṁ; 2nd bhavissasi PvA 16, hohisi; 3rd bhavissati, hessati , & med. hessate, hehitī; & hossati (in pahossati fr. pahoti DhA III.254); 1st pl. bhavissāma; 2nd hessatha; 3rd bhavissanti freq. -- Cond. 1st sg. abhavissaṁ; 2nd abhavissa; 3rd abhavissa(na bhavissa=nābhavissa?); 3rd pl. abhavissaṁsu Vin I.13. 1st aor. (orig. pret. of *huvati, cp. hupeyya Pot.): 1st sg. ahuvā, with by-form (see aor.) ahuvāsiṁ Vv 826; 2nd ahuvā ibid., 3rd ahuvā;1st pl. ahuvāma & ahuvamha ibid.; 2nd ahuvattha. ‹-› 2nd aor. (simple aor., with pret. endings): 1st sg. ahuṁ Pv II.32 (v. l. BB ahu) (=ahosiṁ PvA 83); 2nd ahu (sk. abhūh) Pv II.35; 3rd ahū (Sk. abhūt) and passim & ahu & bhavi (pātubhavi); 1st pl. ahumhā (Sk. abhūma) & ahumha. -- 3rd aor. (s aor.) 1st sg. ahosiṁ(=āsiṁ); 2nd ahosi; 3rd ahosi; Vin I.23; 1st pl. ahesumha; 3rd ahesuṁ & bhaviṁsu (Sk. abhāvisuh). -- Of medial forms we mention the 1st pl. pres. bhavāmahe, and the 3rd sg, pret. ahuvattha. -- Inf. bhavituṁ & hetuye -- ger. bhavitvā Sn 56, hutvā Sn 43, & hutvāna. -- grd. bhavitabba; hotabba; bhabba (Sk. bhavya); see sep.; bhuyya see cpd. abhibhuyya. -- Caus. bhāveti see sep. -- pp. bhūta. Note. In compn with nouns or adjectives the final vowel of these is changed into ī, as in combn of the same with the root kr, e. g. bhasmībhavati to be reduced to ashes, cp. bhasmī-karaṇa s. v. bhasma, etc. -- II. Meanings. In general the meaning “to become, to get” prevails, but many shades of it are possible according to context & combinations. It is impossible & unnecessary to enumerate all shades of meaning, only a few idiomatic uses may be pointed out. -- 1. to happen, to occur, to befall J VI.368. -- 2. The fut. bhavissati “is certainly,” “must be” DhA III.171 (sātthikā desanā bh.); Miln 40 (mātā ti pi na bh.). ‹-› 3. Imper. hotu as adv. “very well” Miln 18 (hotu bhante very well, sir). -- 4. aor. in meaning and as substitute of āsiṁ, pret. of as to be; etad ahosi this occurred to him DhA I.399 (assā etad ahosi “this thought struck her”).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[bhū to become, cp. Sk. bhūmi earth; Gr. fuζis nature (physical), fu/omai to grow; Lat. fui I have been, futurus=future; Oir. buith to be; Ags. būan=Goth. bauan to live, Ger. bauen, also Ags. bȳldan=to build; Lith. búti to be, būtas house Dhtp 1: bhū sattāyaṁ] to become, to be, exist, behave etc. (cp. Nd² 474= sambhavati jāyati nibbattati pātu-bhavati). -- I. Forms. There are two bases used side by side, viz. bhav° and (contracted) ho°, the latter especially in the (later) Gāthā style and poetry in general, also as archaic in prose, whereas bhav° forms are older. On compounds with prepositions, as regards inflection, see Geiger, P.Gr. §§ 131², 151³; and cp. anubhavati, abhibhavati, abhisaṁ°, pa° (also pahoti, pahūta), pari°, vi°, saṁ°. -- 1. Pres. ind. bhavāmi Sn.511 & homi J.III,260; 2^nd bhavasi & hosī M.III,140; Vv 84²⁰; 3^rd bhavati freq.; Sn.36 (where Nd² 474 with v. l. BB of Sn.reads bhavanti; Divy p. 294 also reads bhavanti snehāḥ as conjecture of Cowell’s for MSS. bhavati); Dh.249, 375; & hoti freq.; 1^st pl. homa Pv.I,11⁸; 2^nd hotha J.I,307; 3^rd bhavanti & honti freq. -- imper. 2^nd sg. bhava Sn.337, 340, 701; Dh.236; Th.2, 8; bhavāhi Sn.510; hohi Sn.31; M.III,134; J.I,32; PvA.89. 3^rd sg. hotu Sn.224; J.III,150; PvA.13; Miln.18. pl. 1^st med. bhavāmase Th.1, 1128; Sn.32; 2^nd pl. bhavatha J.II,218, bhavātha Sn.692; Dh.144; hotha Dh.243; Dh.II,141; J.II,302; DhA.I,57; 3^rd pl. bhavantu Sn.145; hontu J.II,4. Pot. 1^st sg. bhaveyyaṁ J.VI,364; 2^nd bhaveyyāsi Ud.91; PvA.11; 3^rd bhave Sn.716, bhaveyya J.II,159; DhA.I,329, & hupeyya Vin.I,8 (for huveyya: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 39⁶ & 131²); pl. 1^st bhaveyyāma; 2^nd bhavetha Sn.1073, 3^rd bhaveyyuṁ Sn.906. -- ppr. bhavaṁ Sn.92, & bhavanto Sn.968; f. hontī PvA.79. -- fut. 1^st sg. bhavissāmi PvA.49, hessāmi Th.2, 460 (ThA.283 reads bhavissāmi), & hessaṁ Th.1, 1100; J.III,224; Pv.I,10⁵; 2^nd bhavissasi PvA.16, hohisi Pv.I,3³; 3^rd bhavissati Dh.228, 264; DhA.II,82, hessati J.III,279 & med. hessate Mhvs 25, 97, hehitī Bu II.10=A.I,4; Vv 63³²; & hossati (in pahossati fr. pahoti DhA.III,254); 1^st pl. bhavissāma Dh.200; 2^nd hessatha S.IV,179; 3^rd bhavissanti freq. -- Cond. 1^st sg. abhavissaṁ J.I,470; 2^nd abhavissa J.II,11; III,30; 3^rd abhavissa It.37; Vin.I,13; D.II,57; M.III,163; J.I,267; II,112 (na bhavissa=nābhavissa?); 3^rd pl. abhavissaṁsu Vin.I,13. 1^st aor. (orig. pret. of *huvati, cp. hupeyya Pot.; see Geiger P.Gr. 131², 162²): 1^st sg. ahuvā S.I,36, with by-form (see aor.) ahuvāsiṁ Vv 82⁶; 2^nd ahuvā ibid., 3^rd ahuvā Vv 81²⁴; J.II,106; III,131; 1^st pl. ahuvāma M.I,93; II,214, & ahuvamha ibid.; 2^nd ahuvattha S.IV,112; M.I,445; DhA.I,57. ‹-› 2^nd aor. (simple aor., with pret. endings): 1^st sg. ahuṁ Pv.II,3² (v. l. BB ahu) (=ahosiṁ PvA.83); 2^nd ahu (sk. abhūḥ) Pv.II,3⁵; 3^rd ahū (Sk. abhūt) Sn.139, 312, 504 and passim; Pv.I,2³, & ahu Pv.I,9³; I,11³; & bhavi DhA.I,329 (pātubhavi); 1^st pl. ahumhā (Sk. abhūma) Pv.I,11⁶, & ahumha J.I,362; DhA.I,57. -- 3^rd aor. (s aor.) 1^st sg. ahosiṁ Th.1, 620; J.I,106; VvA.321: PvA.10 (=āsiṁ); 2^nd ahosi J.I,107; 3^rd ahosi Sn.835; Vin.I,23; 1^st pl. ahesumha M.I,265; 3^rd ahesuṁ D.II,5; Vv 74⁴; J.I,149; DhA.I,327; & bhaviṁsu (Sk. abhāviṣuḥ) DhA.IV,15. -- Of medial forms we mention the 1^st pl. pres. bhavāmahe Mhvs.I,65, and the 3^rd sg, pret. ahuvattha VvA.103. -- Inf. bhavituṁ Sn.552, & hetuye Bu II.10. -- ger. bhavitvā Sn.56, hutvā Sn.43, & hutvāna Sn.281. -- grd. bhavitabba J.I,440; VI,368; hotabba Vin.I,46; bhabba (Sk. bhavya); see sep.; bhuyya see cpd. abhibhuyya. -- Caus. bhāveti see sep. -- pp. bhūta. Note. In compⁿ with nouns or adjectives the final vowel of these is changed into ī, as in combⁿ of the same with the root kṛ, e. g. bhasmībhavati to be reduced to ashes, cp. bhasmī-karaṇa s. v. bhasma, etc. -- II. Meanings. In general the meaning “to become, to get” prevails, but many shades of it are possible according to context & combinations. It is impossible & unnecessary to enumerate all shades of meaning, only a few idiomatic uses may be pointed out. -- 1. to happen, to occur, to befall J.VI,368. -- 2. The fut. bhavissati “is certainly,” “must be” DhA.III,171 (sātthikā desanā bh.); Miln.40 (mātā ti pi na bh.). ‹-› 3. Imper. hotu as adv. “very well” Miln.18 (hotu bhante very well, sir). -- 4. aor. in meaning and as substitute of āsiṁ, pret. of as to be; etad ahosi this occurred to him DhA.I,399 (assā etad ahosi “this thought struck her”). (Page 499)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bhu + a), 变成，是，存在。【过】 bhavi, abhavi。【过分】 bhūta。【现分】 bhavanta, bhavamāna。【潜】 bhavitabba。【独】 bhavitvā,bhūtvā。【不】 bhavituŋ。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhavatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. bhū] the fact of being, state, condition KhA 227. (Page 500)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhavaṁ: {'def': '(bhavant的单.主格)﹐尊，尊师，尊者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhavaṅga: {'def': '(梵bhavaṅgavijñana),【中】有分识、有分心(unconsciousness无意识并不能准确表达有分心)。bhavaṅga(有分心) 之词，并没有出现在经中，早期佛教尚未普遍使用它之前，使用bhava、bhavasota (S.1.28./I,15.)、viññāṇasota(D.28./III,105.)…，作为沟通或教学，但是难以细致的分解。在《发趣论》(Paṭṭhāna)及经、论的注及疏中才对bhavaṅga作精密的探讨。「有分心」可能在佛音论师(公元五世纪中叶人)注解巴利三藏之后，才在上座部佛教界或阿毘达摩领域中成为显学。「有分心」是心识之流的一个环节，它的属性与定位，解决或厘清许多高深心识理论的问题。āgantuka-bhavaṅga,【中】客串的有分。Vibhv.PTS:p.109︰Bhavaṅgasotanti bhavaṅgappavāhaṁ.(有分流︰有分连续的流动。) Vibhv.PTS:p.109.︰bhavaṅgasantatiṁ cālentaṁ viya uppajjatīti bhavaṅgacalanaṁ.(此连续的有分动摇生起，称为‘有分波动’。) Vibhv.PTS:p.109.︰tassa occhijjanākārena uppajjanato bhavaṅgupacchedoti voharanti.(使有分中断生起，则称为‘有分断’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(梵bhavaṅgavijñana),【中】有分识(有分心)(the constituents or the condition of becoming)，意思是「生命」(bhava有)的成份(aṅga)，即是生命不可或缺的条件。有分心的作用是：保持在一世当中，从投生至死亡之间的生命流不会中断。在结生心(paṭisandhicitta)灭后，有分心紧接著生起；每当没有心路过程(cittavīthi)发生时，有分心即会於每一刹那中生灭。《阿毘达摩义广释》(Vibhv.PTS:p.96)：Avicchedappavattihetubhāvena bhavassa aṅgabhāvo bhavaṅgakiccaṁ.(令存在之因转起而不中断的存在的成分，为‘有分作用’。) 有分心、结生心、死心(cuticitta)是同一种果报心(vipākacitta)，但执行不同的作用。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhavaṅga-calana: {'def': '﹐【中】【形】有分波动，心识刹那发生，有分心於此「波动」了一个心识刹那。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhavaṅga-sotā: {'def': '(-citta), These 2 compound terms belong exclusively to the exegetical literature, while the term bhavaṅga is several times, briefly and unexplained, mentioned in the Patth. of the Abh. Canon, as though already known at that time.', 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

Bhavaṅga-upaccheda: {'def': '﹐【阳】有分断，继「有分波动」而来的心识刹那，有分心之流於此被截断。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhaveyya: {'def': '[cp. Class. Sk. bhavya] a sort of tree, perhaps Averrhoa carambola J.VI,529. (Page 500)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhavo: {'def': '富裕。Dṭ.31.CS:p.3.137：Bhavanaṁ sampattivaḍḍhanaṁ bhavoti attho, tappaṭikkhepena abhavoti āha “abhavena avuḍḍhiyā”ti.(富裕：保存增进财富之意；在它的反向‘不富裕’，他已被说是‘不富裕、不昌隆’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhaya: {'def': '【中】害怕，惊骇。 ~ṅkara, 【形】可怕的，恐怖的。~dassavī, ~dassī, 【形】觉悟到危险的。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】害怕，惊骇。bhayaṅkara,【形】可怕的，恐怖的。bhayadassavī, bhayadassī,【形】觉悟到危险的。A.3.1./I,101.︰“Yāni kānici, bhikkhave, bhayāni uppajjanti sabbāni tāni bālato uppajjanti, no paṇḍitato. Ye keci upaddavā uppajjanti sabbe te bālato uppajjanti, no paṇḍitato. Ye keci upasaggā uppajjanti sabbe te bālato uppajjanti, no paṇḍitato. (诸比丘！诸怖生起，皆由愚人引起，非由智人。诸灾患生起，皆由愚人引起，非由智人。诸灾横生起，皆由愚人引起，非由智人。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. bhī, cp. Vedic bhaya, P. bhāyati] fear, fright, dread A.II,15 (jāti-maraṇa°); D.III,148, 182; Dh.39, 123, 212 sq., 283; Nd¹ 371, 409; Pug.56; Vism.512; KhA 108; SnA 155; DhA.III,23. There are some lengthy enum^ns of objects causing fear (sometimes under term mahabbhaya, mahā-bhaya), e. g. one of 17 at Miln.196, one of 16 (four times four) at A.II,121 sq., the same in essence, but in different order at Nd² 470, and at VbhA.502; one of 16 (with remark “ādi,” and so on) at Vism.645. Shorter comb^ns are to be found at Sn.964 (5, viz. ḍaṁsā, adhipātā, siriṁsapā, manussaphassā, catuppādā); Vbh.379 (5, viz. ājīvika°, asiloka°, parisa-sārajja°, maraṇa°, duggati°, expl^d at VbhA.505 sq.), 376 (4: jāti°, jarā°, vyādhi°, maraṇa°) 367 (3: jāti°, jarā°, maraṇ°); Nd¹ 402 (2: diṭṭha-dhammikaṁ & samparāyikaṁ bh.). --abhaya absence of fear, safety Vin.I,75 (abhay-ûvara for abhaya-vara?); Dh.317; J.I,150; DhA.III,491.

--ñāṇa insight into what is to be feared: see Cpd. 66. --dassāvin seeing or realising an object of fear, i. e. danger Vbh.244, 247 and passim. --dassin id. Dh.31, 317. --bherava fear & dismay M.I,17 (=citt’uttrasassa ca bhayānak’ārammaṇassa adhivacanaṁ MA 113), N. of Suttanta No. 4 in Majjhima (pp. 16 sq.), quoted at Vism.202; SnA 206. (Page 498)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhayānaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhaya, cp. Epic Sk. bhayānaka] frightful, horrible J.III,428; MA 113; PvA.24 (as °ika); Sdhp.7, 208. -- nt. °ṁ something awful Nd² 470 (in def. of bhaya). Bhara-bhara, a word imitating a confused sound M.I,128; otherwise contracted to babbhara (q. v.). (Page 499)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'bhayāvaha,【形】可怕的，恐怖的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'bhayāvaha, 【形】可怕的，恐怖的。(p241)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhañjaka: {'def': '【形】打破者，破坏者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhañjati] breaking, spoiling, destroying (attha°-visaṁvāda; cp. bhañjanaka) J.III,499. (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】打破者，破坏者。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhañjana: {'def': '¹ (nt.) [fr. bhañjati] breakage, breaking down, break, only in cpd. akkha° break of the axle Vism.32, 45; DhA.I,375; PvA.277. (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】破坏，毁灭。bhañjanaka,【形】打破的，破坏的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】破坏，毁灭。 ~ka, 【形】打破的，破坏的。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (nt.) [for byañjana, in composition; maybe graphical mistake] anointing, smearing, oiling, in gatta° and pāda°-bbhañjana-tela oil for rubbing the body and the feet Vism.100; VvA.295. (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhañjanaka: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. bhañjana¹] destroying, hurting, spoiling, in phrase attha° destroying the welfare (with ref. to the telling of lies) DhA.III,356; VvA.72; cp. bhañjaka. (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhañjanin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhañj] breaking, destroying, in cakka° breaking the wheel, fig. breaking the state of harmony J.V,112. (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhañjati: {'def': '(bhañj + a), 打破，破坏。【过】 bhāñji。【过分】 bhagga, bhañjita。【现分】 ~janta, ~jamāna。【独】 ~jitvā。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(bhañj崩溃+a), 打破，破坏。【过】bhāñji。【过分】bhagga, bhañjita。【现分】bhañjanta, bhañjamāna。【独】bhañjitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': ' [bhañj, cp. Vedic bhañjati & bhanakti, roots with & without r, as Lat. frango=Goth. brikan=Ohg. brehhan, E. break, Sk. giri-bhraj breaking forth from the mountain; and Sk. bhaṅga, bhañji wave. -- The Dhtp. 68 paraphrases by “omaddana,” Dhtm 73 by “avamaddana”] 1. (trs. & intrs.) to break Vin.I,74 (phāsukā bhañjitabbā ribs to be broken); Dh.337 (mā bhañji=mā bhañjatu C.). Pv.II,9³ (sākhaṁ bhañjeyya =chindeyya PvA.114); PvA.277 (akkho bhañji the axle broke, intrs.). -- 2. to fold or furl (the lip): oṭṭhaṁ bh. J.II,264. -- 3. (fig.) to break up, spoil, destroy, in atthaṁ bh. to destroy the good S.IV,347 (cp. bhañjanaka). -- pp. bhagga¹ (q. v.). (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhaññam: {'def': '(J.V,317) see bhā. (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhaññamāne: {'def': '(ppr. of bhaññati‹pass. of bhaṇati‹bhaṇ说), 正被说(时)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhaṅga: {'def': '² (nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. bhaṅga, fr. bhañj: see bhañjati] 1. (lit.) breaking, breaking off, in sākhā° a layer of broken-off branches J.III,407. -- 2. (fig.) breaking up, dissolution, disruption (see on form Cpd. 25, 66) Ps.I,57 sq. (°ânupassanā insight into disruption), quoted & expl^d at Vism.640 sq.; VbhA.27 (°khaṇa); Sdhp.48, 78 (āsā°). Cp. vi°. (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】瓦解，分解，解散。【中】麻布料。 ~kkhaṇa, 【阳】分解的片刻。 ~gānupassanā, 【阴】对破坏的洞察。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】瓦解，分解，解散。【中】麻布料。bhaṅgakkhaṇa,【阳】分解的片刻。bhaṅgānupassanā,【阴】对破坏的洞察(坏灭随观)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [cp. Sk. bhaṅga, which occurs already Atharva-veda XI. 6. 15 (see Zimmer. Altind. Leben 68), also Av. baṁha, Polish pienka hemp. On its possible etym. connection with Vedic śaṇa (Ath. Veda II. 4. 5) =P. saṇa & sāṇa hemp (=Gr. kάnnabis, Ger. hanf, E. hemp) see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. cannabis] hemp; coarse hempen cloth Vin.I,58 (where comb^d with sāṇa). (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhaṅgana: {'def': '& Bhaṅgaloka [to bhaṅga¹?] are vv. ll. of Npl. at Nd¹ 155 for Gaṅgaṇa & Aṅgaṇeka respectively. With misspelling bh›g, cp. bheṇḍaka›geṇḍaka. (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhaṇana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. bhaṇati] telling, speaking DhA.IV,93 (°sīla, adj. wont to speak); Dhtp 111. (Page 497)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhaṇati: {'def': '(bhaṇ + a), 说，告诉，传道。【过】 bhaṇi。【过分】 bhaṇita。【现分】 ~ṇanta。【潜】 ~ṇitabba。【独】 bhaṇitvā。【不】 bhaṇituŋ。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(bhaṇ告诉+a), 说，诉说，告诉，传道。【过】bhaṇi。【过分】bhaṇita。【现分】bhaṇanta。【义】bhaṇitabba。【独】bhaṇitvā, bhaṇamāna。【不】bhaṇituṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[bhaṇ; cp. Sk. bhaṇati; Ohg. ban=E. ban etc. “proclamation.” See connections in Walde, Lat. Wtb. under fabula. -- Expl^d by Dhtp 111 as “bhaṇana.” by Dhtm 162 as “bhāsana”] to speak, tell, proclaim (the nearest synonym is katheti: see Nd² s. v. katheti) Dh.264; Pug.33, 56; DhA.II,95. -- ppr. bhaṇanto Sn.397. Pot. bhaṇe Sn.1131 (=bhaṇeyya Nd² 469); Dh.224 (saccaṁ; =dīpeyya vohareyya DhA.III,316). Also bhaṇeyya Sn.397. An old subjunctive form is bhaṇā- mase S.I,209 (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 126). Prohib. mā bhāṇi. A Caus. form is bhāṇaye (Pot.) Sn.397. (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhaṇe: {'def': '(indecl.) [orig. 1^st sg. pres. Med. of bhaṇati] “I say,” used as an interjection of emphasis, like “to be sure,” “look here.” It is a familiar term of address, often used by a king to his subjects Vin.I,240 (amhākaṁ kira bhaṇe vijite Bhaddiya-nagare), 241 (gaccha bhaṇe jānāhi . . .) Miln.21 (atthi bhaṇe añño koci paṇḍito . . .). (Page 497)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】对下属的称呼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】对下属的称呼。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhaṇita: {'def': '【中】话。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】说话。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhaṇḍa: {'def': 'bhaṇḍaka, 【中】货物，制品，工具，文章。 ~ḍāgāra, 【中】仓库，国库。 ~ḍāgārika, 【阳】守库者，司库。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'bhaṇḍaka,【中】货物，制品，工具，文章。bhaṇḍāgāra,【中】仓库，国库。bhaḍāgārika,【阳】守库者，司库。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. bhāṇḍa] 1. stock in trade; collectively goods, wares, property, possessions, also “object” S.I,43 (itthi bhaṇḍānaṁ uttamaṁ woman is the highest property), Nd² 38; J.III,353 (yācita° object asked,=yāca); ThA.288 (id.); Vism.22. --bhaṇḍaṁ kiṇāti to buy goods VbhA.165. --bhaṇḍaṁ vikkiṇati to sell goods J.I,377 (+paṭibhaṇḍaṁ dāpeti to receive goods in return); vikkiṇiya-bh. goods for sale DhA.I,390. --assāmika° ownerless goods, unclaimed property J.VI,348; ābharaṇa° trinkets, jewelry J.III,221; piya° best goods, treasure J.III,279; bahu° having many goods, rich in possessions Vin.III,138; KhA 241 (of a bhikkhu); vara° best property or belongings Vin.IV,225. -- 2. implement, article, instrument Vin.II,142, 143 (where 3 kinds are distinguished: of wood, copper, & of earthenware), 170 (id.); Dāvs.IV,50 (turiya°). -- In assa(hatthi°)--bhaṇḍa Vin.I,85 sq., the meaning “horse (elephant-) trader (or owner)” does not seem clear; should we read paṇḍaka? Cp. bhaṇḍa=paṇḍa under bhaṇḍati.

--âgāra store house, warehouse, only in der. --âgārika keeper of stores Vin.I,284; II,176; surveyor of the (royal) warehouses, royal treasurer (a higher court office: cp. Fick. Sociale Gliederung 101 sq.) J.III,293; IV,43; V,117; Miln.37; DA.I,21; PvA.2, 20. --āhāraka (trader) taking up goods DhA.IV,60. (Page 497)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhaṇḍaka: {'def': '(adj. in sense of collect. nt.) [fr. bhaṇḍa] 1. article, implement; kīḷā° toys J.VI,6. -- 2. belongings, property Vin.IV,225. -- 3. trappings, in assa° horsetrappings J.II,113. (Page 497)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhaṇḍana: {'def': '【中】吵架，争论。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】吵架，争论。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. bhaṇḍ, cp. BSk. bhāṇḍana Divy 164] quarrel, quarrelling, strife It.11; J III,149; Nd¹ 196; DhA.I,55, 64. (Page 497)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhaṇḍati: {'def': '[bhaṇḍ, cp. “paṇḍa bhaṇḍa paribhāse” Dhtp 568; Dhtm 798] to quarrel, abuse Vin.I,76 (saddhiṁ); IV,277; Th.1, 933; SnA 357 (aññamaññaṁ). (Page 497)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bhaṇḍ + a), bhaṇḍeti (bhaṇḍ + e), 吵架。【过】 bhandi, ~esi。【独】 ~ḍetvā。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(bhaṇḍ吵架+a), bhaṇḍeti (bhaṇḍ吵架+e), 吵架。【过】bhaṇḍi, bhaṇḍesi。【独】bhaṇḍetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhaṇḍi: {'def': '[?] a certain plant or flower J.V,420. Reading uncertain. (Page 497)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhaṇḍikā: {'def': '【阴】捆，包裹。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】捆，包裹。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. bhaṇḍaka, in collect. sense] collection of goods, heap, bundle; bhaṇḍikaṁ karoti to make into a heap J.III,221, 437; or bhaṇḍikaṁ bandhati to tie into a bundle DhA.II,254; VvA.187. sahassa° a heap of 1,000 kahāpaṇas J.II,424; III,60; IV,2. -- Note. bhaṇḍika is v. l. at J.III,41 for gaṇḍikā. (Page 497)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhaṇḍu: {'def': '(adj.) [etym. uncertain, dialectical or=paṇḍu?] bald-headed, close shaven Vin.I,71 (°kamma shaving), 76 (kammāra°); J.III,22; VI,538 (+tittira); Miln.11, 128. (Page 497)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】剃光头的人。 ~kamma, 【中】剃头发。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】剃光头的人。bhaṇḍukamma,【中】剃头发。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhaṭa: {'def': '【阳】军人，警察，雇工。bhaṭasenā, 步兵。lambacūlake bhaṭe﹐垂髻之佣人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhaṭa, fr, dial. bhaṭ to hire; originally the same as bhṛtya fr. bhṛta & bhṛti of bhṛ Dhtp 94, Dhtm 114. --bhaṭa=bhatyaṁ i. e. bhṛtyaṁ] servant, hireling, soldier Miln.240; VvA.305 (bhattavetana°). As to suggestion of bhaṭa occurring in phrase yathā-bhaṭaṁ (Kern. Toev. s. v. yathābhaṭaṁ) see discussion under yathā bhataṁ.

--patha service, employment, salary Vin.IV,265; SnA 542. (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】军人，警察，雇工。 ~senā, 步兵。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhaṭṭha: {'def': '(bhajjati 的【过分】), 已烤，已跌倒，已降低。(p240)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '³ (?) [perhaps for bhatta?] wages, tip, donation J.IV,261 (by C. expl^d as kathita, thus same as bhattha²). v. l. bhatta. Cp. Sk. bhāṭa & BSk. bhāṭaka MVastu III,37. (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bhajjati‘烤’的【过分】), 已烤，已跌倒，已降低。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [pp. of bhaṇ, for bhaṇita] spoken, said Vv 63¹⁹ (su°=subhāsita VvA.265). See also paccā° & pari°; cp. also next. (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of bhraṁś, see bhassati] dropped, fallen down J.I,482; IV,222, 382; V,444. Cp. pari°. (Page 496)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhecchati: {'def': 'is fut. of bhindati (q. v.). (Page 508)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bheda: {'def': '[fr. bhid, cp. Ved. & Class. Sk. bheda in same meanings] 1. breaking, rending, breach, disunion, dissension Vism.64 sq. (contrasted with ānisaṁsa), 572 sq. (with ref. to upādāna & bhava); VbhA.185 (id.); Sdhp.66, 457, 463. --mithu° breaking of alliance D.II,76; J.IV,184; Kvu 314. --vacī° breaking of [the rule as to] speech Miln.231. --saṅgha° disunion in the Saṅgha Vin.II,203. --sīla° breach of morality J.V,163. -- Abl. bhedā after the destruction or dissolution in phrase kāyassa bhedā param maraṇā, i. e. after the breaking up of the body & after death: see kāya I. e. & cp. D.III,52, 146 sq., 258; Dh.140; Pug.51. -- 2. (-°) sort, kind, as adj. consisting of, like J.II,438; VI,3 (kaṭuk’ādi°); DhA.III,14 (kāya-sucarit’--ādi°-bhadra-kammāni); SnA 290 (Avīci-ādi-° niraya).

--kara causing division or dissension Vin.II,7; III,173; V,93 (cp. Vin.I,354 & Vin. Texts III,266 for the 18 errors in which the Saṅgha is brought into division by bhikkhus who are in the wrong); DhsA.29 (aṭṭhārasa bheda-kara-vatthūni the 18 causes of dissension). (Page 509)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】分裂，分离，意见不合。 ~ka, 【形】分化者，分离者。 ~kara,【形】带来区分，带来分离。(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】迸裂，分裂，分离，意见不合。bhedaka,【形】分化者，分离者。bhedakara,【形】带来区分，带来分离。bhedābheda,【阳】破和未破。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhedaka: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. bheda] breaking, dividing, causing disunion; (m.) divider Vin.II,205; J.VI,382. -- nt. adv. bhedakaṁ, as in °nakha in such a way as to break a nail DA.I,37. (Page 509)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhedana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. bhid, as in Caus. bhedeti] 1. breaking (open), in puṭa° breaking of the seed-boxes (of the Pāṭali plant), idiomatic for “merchandise” Miln.1. See under puṭa. -- 2. (fig.) breach, division, destruction A.IV,247; Dh.138; Bu II.7; J.I,467 (mittabhāva°).

--dhamma subject to destruction, fragile, perishable A.IV,386; J.I,146, 392; ThA.254. --saṁvattanika leading to division or dissension Vin.III,173. (Page 509)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】分裂，分化，分离。 ~ka, 【形】值得打破的。 ~dhamma,【形】容易腐烂的。(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】迸裂，分裂，分化，分离。bhedanaka,【形】值得打破的。bhedanadhamma,【形】容易腐烂的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhedeti: {'def': '(bhid打破+e), 使分裂，使分开，使分离。【过】bhedesi。【过分】bhedita。【独】bhedetvā。caus. bhedāpeti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(bhid + e), 使分裂，使分开，使分离。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~dita。【独】 ~detvā。(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhedita: {'def': '(Bhedeti的【过分】) 使分裂，使分开。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhedāpeti: {'def': '& Bhedeti are Causatives of bhindati (q. v.). (Page 509)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhejja: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of bhindati] to be split, only in neg. form abhejja not to be split or sundered Sn.255; J.I,263; III,318; Pug.30; Miln.160, 199. (Page 508)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】易碎的，会破的。【中】打破，切断。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】易碎的，会破的。【中】打破，切断。(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhejjanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhejja] breakable; like bhejja only in neg. form abhejjanaka indestructible J.I,393. (Page 508)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bheka: {'def': '(cp. Vedic bheka),【阳】青蛙(a frog)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】青蛙。(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic bheka, onomat.] a frog Th.1, 310; J.III,430; IV,247; VI,208. (Page 508)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bherava: {'def': '【形】可怕的。(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhīru, cp. Epic Sk. bhairava] fearful, terrible, frightful Th.1, 189; Sn.959, 965, 984; Nd¹ 370, 467; J.VI,520; Dpvs 17, 100; Pgdp 26, 31. --bahu° very terrible A.III,52; stricken with terror J.VI,587. -- (n) terror, comb^d with bhaya fear & dismay M.I,17; A.IV,291; V,132; Th.1, 367, 1059. --pahīna-bhayabherava having left behind (i. e. free from) fear & terror S.III,83.

--rāva cry of terror Miln.254. (Page 509)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】可怕的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bheraṇḍa: {'def': '【阳】野干、豺(jackal)。bheraṇḍaka,【中】豺的嗥叫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】野干，豺。 ~ka, 【中】豺的嗥叫。(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bheraṇḍaka: {'def': '[cp. *Sk. bheruṇḍa] a jackal J.V,270; the Nom. probably formed after the Acc. in phrase bheraṇḍakaṁ nadati to cry after the fashion of, or like a jackal A.I,187. (Page 509)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bheri: {'def': '【阴】鼓。bhericāraṇa,【中】打鼓声明。bheritala,【中】鼓面。bherivādaka,【阳】鼓手。bherivādana,【中】打鼓。bherisadda,【阳】鼓声。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】鼓。 ~cāraṇa, 【中】打鼓声明。 ~tala, 【中】鼓面。 ~vādaka,【阳】鼓手。 ~vādana, 【中】打鼓。 ~sadda, 【阳】鼓声。(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. bherī] a kettle-drum (of large size; DhsA.319 distinguishes 2 kinds: mahā° & paṭaha°) D.I,79; A.II,185; Vv 81¹⁰; J.VI,465; DhA.I,396; Sdhp.429. --issara° the drum of the ruler or lord J.I,283; paṭaha° kettle-drum Dpvs 16, 14; DhsA.319; PvA.4; yāma° (--velāya) (at the time) when the drum sounds the watch J.V,459. --bheriṁ vādeti to sound the drum J.I,283. --bheriyo vādentā (pl.) beating (lit. making sound) the drums J.II,110. bheriñ carāpeti to make the drum go round, i. e. to proclaim by beat of drum J.V,41; VI,10.

--caraṇa the carrying round of the drum (in proclamations), in cpds. °magga the proclamation road DhA.II,43; & °vīthi id. DhA.II,45. --tala the head of the drum Vism.489 (in comparison); VbhA.80 (id.). --paṇava drum & tabor (in battle) A.II,117. --vāda drum-sound, fig. for a loud voice PvA.89 (bherivādena akkosati rails like drum). --vādaka a drummer J.I,283. --saññā sign of the drum DhA.I,396. --sadda sound of the drum J.I,283. (Page 509)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhesajja: {'def': '【中】药。《南海寄归内法传》卷第三：「梵云晡堤木底鞞杀杜(pūti-mukta-bhaisajya﹐pūti-mūtraṃ bhaisajyānām)。晡堤是陈。木底是弃。鞞杀社译之为药(即是陈弃药也)律开大便小便。乃是犊粪牛尿。」(T54.225.1)。《律藏．大品．药犍度》(Mv.I,201.以下；cf. Pāci.IV,35.) 终生药分为六类，即：一、mūlāni bhesajjāni (根药)︰haliddiṁ, 姜黄(turmeric)。siṅgiveraṁ, 生姜(ginger)。vacaṁ, 菖蒲(sweet flag)。vacatthaṁ, 白菖蒲(a sedge or flag with fragant leaves )。ativisaṁ, 麦冬(pig-lily)。kaṭukarohiṇiṁ, 辛胡莲(galanga or galingale)。usīraṁ, 嗢尸罗(狼尾草(象草elephant grass)。bhaddamuttakaṁ﹐香附(藕土香，香荫草，臭荫香，有荫土香pig’s root or nut grass)，及其它根药。二、涩药 (kasāvabhesajja)：a.荏婆涩(nimbakasāvo ；decoction of the neem)；b.根药的一种( ku?ajakasāvo；decoction of Wrightia tomentaso) ；c.婆迦瓦涩(pa?olakasāvo；decoction of Gymnopetalum cochinchinense)；d.苦味的植物(pakkavakasāvo；… of Tinosporacordifolia)；e.其它涩药。三、叶药(paṇṇabhesajja)：a.荏婆叶(nimbapaṇṇaṁ ；neem-leaves)。b.具达奢叶( ku?ajapaṇṇaṁ；leave of Wrigthia spp.)。c.拔陀罗叶 (pa?olapaṇṇaṁ；Gymnopetalum cochinchinense)。d.苏罗尸叶( gulasipaṇṇaṁ；tulsi or ordinary basil)。e.迦婆尸迦叶(kappāsikapaṇṇaṁ；cotton plant)。及f.其它叶药。四、phalāni bhesajjāni (果药)︰bilaṅgaṁ(vilaṅgaṁ), 伊兰迦(Ardisia littoralis)。pippaliṁ, 荜拨(荜茇、长胡椒long pepper；piper longuml)。maricaṁ, 胡椒(chili pepper)。harītakaṁ, 诃子(yellow myrobalan)。vibhītakaṁ, 川练(川练子、金铃子、楝实、练实、仁枣、苦楝子；苦，寒。肝，小肠，膀胱。行气止痛，清热，杀虫。Szechwan Chinaberry)。āmalakaṁ, 余甘子(emblic myrobalan)。goṭṭhaphalaṁ(goṭhaphalaṁ),五达婆罗(wormwood)。及其它果药。五、脂药(jatubhesajja )：a.树脂；b.药脂树(hiṇgu；Ferula spp.)；c.叶和茎以火提炼出的脂 (hiṅgujatu)；d. 叶和茎以火提炼出的脂与其他东西混合 (hiṅgusipā?hikā)；e. 达迦婆提 (takkapatti)；f.达迦胖离 (takkapaṇṇi)；g. 萨周拉沙 (sajjulasaṁ；gum benjamin) ；i.其它树脂药。六、盐药(loṇabhesajja)：a.海盐(sāmuddikaṁ)；b.黑盐(kalalonāṁ)；c.岩盐(sindhavaṁ)；d.食盐 (vilaṁ)；e.於其他化合物混合之盐。sattahakalika,七日药(比丘被允许在七日内食用的药物，指︰a.酥油 (navanita；ghee水牛的奶所制成的奶油)；b.奶油(sappi; butter乳牛的奶所制成的奶油)；c.油(tela；oil 植物油及动物油)；d.蜂蜜 (madhu)；e.糖(phāṇita糖蜜、石蜜、砂糖、冰糖、棕榈糖jaggery)。Bhojanīyaṁ nāma pañca bhojanāni--odano, kummāso, sattu, maccho, maṁsaṁ.谷肉食(另译：软食)：饭﹑粥﹑麦﹑鱼﹑肉。yāmakālika,【形】时分药，非时药(比丘被允许在午后和夜晚食用的药物)。yāvajīvikaṁ，尽形寿药(比丘被允许终身可以保存的药物)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Vedic bhaiṣajya=bheṣaja, fr. bhiṣaj; see also P. bhisakka] a remedy, medicament, medicine Vin.I,278; D.II,266; M.I,30; SnA 154, 446; Sdhp.393. --bhesajjaṁ karoti to treat with a medicine DhA.I,25; mūla-bhesajjāni the principal medicines Miln.43; pañca bhesajjāni the 5 remedies (allowed to bhikkhus) DhA.I,5.

--kapālaka medicine bowl VbhA.361. --sikkhāpada the medicine precepts VbhA.69. (Page 509)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】药。 ~kapāla, 【中】药钵。(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhesajjakapāla: {'def': '【中】药钵。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhesma: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Vedic bhīṣma of which the regular P. form is bhiṁsa, of bhī; bhesma would correspond to a form *bhaiṣma] terrible, awful Vin.II,203=It.86 (“bhesmā hi udadhī mahā,” so read for Vin. bhasmā, with v. l. bhesmā, and for It tasmā, with v. l. BB bhesmā, misunderstood by ed. -- Bdhgh Vin.II,325 on Vin. passage expl^s by bhayānaka); J.V,266; VI,133 (v. l. bhasma). (Page 509)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhettar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. bhid] a breaker, divider A.V,283. (Page 509)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhettu: {'def': '【阳】打破者。(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】打破者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bheṇḍi: {'def': '[perhaps identical with & only wrong spelling for bheṇḍu=kaṇḍu²] a kind of missile used as a weapon, arrow Vin.III,77 (where enum^d with asi, satti & laguḷa in explⁿ of upanikkhipana). (Page 508)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bheṇḍivāla: {'def': '【阳】一种发射物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】一种发射物。(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bheṇḍu: {'def': '[with v. l. geṇḍu, of uncertain reading & meaning. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 107 gives giṇḍu & remarks that this cannot be derived fr. kaṇḍuka (although kaṇḍu may be considered as gloss of bheṇḍu at Th.1, 164: see kaṇḍu²), but belongs with Prk. geṇḍui play & P. geṇḍuka and the originally Sk. words genduka, ginduka, geṇḍu, geṇḍuka to a root gid, giḍ, Prk. giṇḍai to play. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 90 says: “I am inclined to read geṇḍu in all cases & to compare it with geḍuka & geṇḍuka a ball”] a ball, bead; also a ball-shaped ornament or turret, cupola Th.1, 164 (see kaṇḍu²) J.I,386 (also °maya ball-shaped); III,184 (v. l. geṇḍu). (Page 509)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'bheṇḍuka,【阳】球，球形的顶端，圆屋顶。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'bheṇḍuka, 【阳】球，球形的顶端，圆屋顶。(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bheṇḍuka: {'def': '¹ [in all probability misreading for geṇḍuka. The v. l. is found at all passages. Besides this occur the vv. ll. keṇḍuka (=kaṇḍuka?) & kuṇḍika] a ball for playing J.IV,30, 256; V,196; VI,471; DhsA.116. See also geṇḍuka. (Page 509)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [fr. bheṇḍu, identical with bheṇḍuka¹] a knob, cupola, round tower J.I,2 (mahā-bh°-pamāṇa). (Page 509)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhidura: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhid] fragile, perishable, transitory Th.2, 35 (=bhijjana-sabhāva ThA.43). (Page 505)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhijjana: {'def': '【中】自己破。 ~dhamma, 【形】易碎的，掉入毁灭。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】自己破。bhijjanadhamma,【形】易碎的，掉入毁灭。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. bhijjati] breaking up, splitting, perishing; destruction J.I,392; V,284; VI,11; DhA.I,257 (kaṇṇā bhijjan’ākāra-pattā); ThA.43 (bhijjana-sabhāva of perishable nature; explⁿ of bhidura Th.2, 35); PvA.41 (°dhammā destructible, of saṅkhārā). -- Der. abhijjanaka see sep. (Page 505)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhijjati: {'def': '(bhid + ya), 被打破，被破坏。【过】 ~jji。【过分】 bhinna。【现分】 ~jamāna。【独】 ~jitvā。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(bhid破坏+ya), 被打破，被破坏。【过】bhijji。【过分】bhinna。【现分】bhijjamāna。【独】bhijjitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Pass. of bhindati, cp. Sk. bhidyate] to be broken, to be destroyed; to break (Instr.); pres. bhijjati Dh.148, ppr. bhijjamāna: see phrase abhijjamāne udake under abhijj°, with which cp. phrase abhejjantyā pathavyā J.VI,508, which is difficult to explain (not breaking? for abhijjantī after abhejja & abhedi, and *abhijjanto for abhijjamāna, intrs.?). imper. bhijjatu Th.1, 312. -- praet. 2^nd pl. bhijjittha J.I,468; aor. abhedi Ud.93 (abhedi kāyo). -- fut. bhijjhissati DA.I,266; grd. bhijjitabba J.III,56; on grd. °bhijja see pabhindati; grd. bhejja in abhejja not to be broken (q. v.). (Page 504)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhikkhaka: {'def': '(‹bhikkhu, Cp. Epic Sk. bhiksuka & f. bhiksukī),【阳】乞丐，托钵僧(a beggar, mendicant)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】乞丐，托钵僧，化缘和尚。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. bhikkhu, Cp. Epic Sk. bhikṣuka & f. bhikṣukī] a beggar, mendicant S.I,182 (bh. brāhmaṇa); J.VI,59 (v. l. BB. °uka); VbhA.327. (Page 504)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhikkhana: {'def': '【中】求，讨。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】求，讨。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhikkhati: {'def': '(bhikkh+a；cp. Vedic bhiksate, old desid. to bhaj), 乞求，托钵，要求(to beg alms, to beg, to ask for)。【过】bhikkhi。【现分】bhikkhanta, bhikkhamāna。【独】bhikkhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(bhikkh + a), 乞求，托钵，要求。【过】 ~kkhi。【现分】 ~khanta,~khamāna。【独】 ~khitvā。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic bhikṣate, old desid. to bhaj; def. Dhtp 13 “yācane”] to beg alms, to beg, to ask for S.I,176, 182 (so read for T. bhikkhavo); Dh.266; VbhA.327. -- ppr. med. bhikkhamāna Th.2, 123. (Page 504)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhikkhu: {'def': '[cp. later Sk. bhikṣu, fr. bhikṣ] an almsman, a mendicant, a Buddhist monk or priest, a bhikkhu. ‹-› Nom. sg. bhikkhu freq. passim; Vin.III,40 (vuḍḍhapabbajita); A.I,78 (thera bh., an elder bh.; and nava bh. a young bh.); III,299 (id.); IV,25 (id.); Sn.276, 360, 411 sq., 915 sq., 1041, 1104; Dh.31, 266 sq., 364 sq., 378; Vv 80¹; Acc. bhikkhuṁ Vin.III,174; Dh.362, & bhikkhunaṁ Sn.87, 88, 513; Gen. Dat. bhikkhuno A.I,274; Sn.221, 810, 961; Dh.373; Pv.I,10¹⁰; & bhikkhussa A.I,230; Vin.III,175; Instr. bhikkhunā Sn.389. pl. Nom. bhikkhū Vin.II,150; III,175; D.III,123; Vism.152 (in sim.); VbhA.305 (compared with amaccaputtā) & bhikkhavo Sn.384, 573; Dh.243, 283; Acc. bhikkhu Sn.p. 78; M.I,84; Vv 22¹⁰; & bhikkhavo Sn.384, 573; Gen. Dat. bhikkhūnaṁ Vin.III,285; D.III,264; Sn.1015; Pv.II,1⁷; & bhikkhunaṁ S.I,190; Th.1, 1231; Instr. bhikkhūhi Vin.III,175; Loc. bhikkhūsu A.IV,25, & bhikkhusu Th.1, 241, 1207; Dh.73; Voc. bhikkhave (a Māgadhī form of Nom. bhikkhavaḥ) Vin.III,175; Sn.p. 78; VvA.127; PvA.8, 39, 166; & bhikkhavo Sn.280, 385.

There are several allegorical etymologies (definitions) of the word bhikkhu, which occur frequently in the commentaries. All are fanciful interpretations of the idea of what a bhikkhu is or should be, and these qualities were sought and found in the word itself. Thus we mention here the foll. (a) bhikkhu=bhinnakilesa (“one who has broken the stains” i. e. of bad character) VbhA.328; VvA.29, 114, 310; PvA.51. ‹-› (b) Another more explicit explⁿ is “sattannaṁ dhammānaṁ bhinnattā bhikkhu” (because of the breaking or destroying of 7 things, viz. the 7 bad qualities, leading to rebirth, consisting of sakkāyadiṭṭhi, vicikicchā, sīlabbata-parāmāsa, rāga, dosa, moha, māna). This def. at Nd¹ 70=Nd² 477^a. -- (c) Whereas in a & b the first syllable bhi(-kkhu) is referred to bhid, in this def. it is referred to bhī (to fear), with the further reference of (bh-) ikkh(u) to īkṣ (to see), and bhikkhu defined as “saṁsāre bhayaṁ ikkhati ti bh.” Vism.3, 16 (saṁsāre bhayaṁ ikkhaṇatāya vā bhinna-paṭa-dharaditāya vā). -- A very comprehensive def. of the term is found at Vbh.245--246, where bhikkhu-ship is established on the ground of 18 qualities (beginning with samaññāya bhikkhu, paṭiññāya bh., bhikkhatī ti bh., bhikkhako ti bh., bhikkhācariyaṁ ajjhupagato ti bh., bhinna-paṭa-dharo ti bh., bhindati pāpake dhamme ti bh., bhinnattā pāpakānaṁ dhammānan ti bh. etc. etc.). -- This passage is expl^d in detail at VbhA.327, 328. -- Two kinds of bhikkhus are distinguished at Ps.I,176; Nd¹ 465=Nd² 477^b, viz. kalyāṇa[--ka-]puthujjana (a layman of good character) and sekkha (one in training), for which latter the term paṭilīnacara (one who lives in elimination, i. e. in keeping away from the dangers of worldly life) is given at Nd¹ 130 (on Sn.810).

--gatika a person who associates with the bhikkhus (in the Vihāra) Vin.I,148. --bhāva state of being a monk, monkhood, bhikkhuship D.I,176; Sn.p. 102; --saṅgha the community of bhikkhus, the Order of friars D.III,208; Sn.403, 1015; Sn.p. 101, 102; Miln.209; PvA.19 sq. & passim. (Page 504)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】比丘。 ~ṇī, 【阴】比丘尼。 ~bhāva, 【阳】僧侣。 ~saṅgha,【阳】比丘僧团。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Sk. bhiksu, ‹bhiks乞讨),【阳】比丘(比丘必须遵守227条波罗提木叉戒及许多微细戒)，苾蒭。bhikkhuṇī,【阴】比丘尼。bhikkhubhāva,【阳】僧侣。bhikkhusaṅgha,【阳】比丘僧团。Pārā.III,24.︰Bhikkhūti (1)bhikkhakoti bhikkhu, (2)bhikkhācariyaṁ ajjhupagatoti bhikkhu, (3)bhinnapaṭadharoti bhikkhu, (4)samaññāya bhikkhu, (5)paṭiññāya bhikkhu, (6)ehi bhikkhūti bhikkhu, (7)tīhi saraṇagamanehi upasampannoti bhikkhu, (8)bhadro bhikkhu, (9)sāro bhikkhu, (10)sekho bhikkhu, (11)asekho bhikkhu, (12)samaggena saṅghena ñatticatutthena kammena akuppena ṭhānārahena upasampannoti bhikkhu. Tatra yvāyaṁ bhikkhu samaggena saṅghena ñatticatutthena kammena akuppena ṭhānārahena upasampanno, ayaṁ imasmiṁ atthe adhippeto bhikkhūti.(比丘︰(1)乞求比丘、(2)从事乞食比丘、(3)穿割截衣比丘、(4)沙弥(充当)比丘、(5)自称比丘、(6)善来比丘、(7)由三归依受具比丘、(8)贤善比丘、(9)真实比丘、(10)有学比丘、(11)无学比丘、(12)由和合僧依白四羯摩之无过失、应理受具比丘。此中比丘，依和合僧，白四羯摩，无异议通过受具，即此处所谓的比丘。)Vism.16.︰ Bhikkhūti saṁsāre bhayaṁ ikkhaṇatāya vā bhinnapaṭadharāditāya vā evaṁ laddhavohāro saddhāpabbajito kulaputto.(比丘︰以应见到轮回的怖畏(saṁsāre bhayaṁ ikkhaṇatāya)，或应持割截衣等(bhinnapaṭadharāditāya)，获得信心出家的良家子这样的名称。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '比丘', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '比丘、乞士。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}

Bhikkhuka: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. bhikkhu] belonging to a Buddhist mendicant, a bhikkhu-, a monk’s, or of monks, in sa° with monks, inhabited by bhikkhus Vin.IV,307, 308; opp. a° without bhikkhus, ibid. (Page 504)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhikkhunovādaka: {'def': '【阳】教诫比丘尼。世尊说，选派比丘去教导比丘尼的八个标准：Pāci.IV,51.(=A.8.52./IV,279.)︰(1)sīlavā hoti, (2)pātimokkhasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati ācāragocarasampanno aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī, samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu, (3)bahussuto hoti sutadharo sutasannicayo, (4)ye te dhammā ādikalyāṇā majjhekalyāṇā pariyosānakalyāṇā sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ abhivadanti, (5)tathārūpāssa dhammā bahussutā honti dhātā vacasā paricitā manasānupekkhitā, (6)diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā; (7)ubhayāni kho panassa pātimokkhāni vitthārena svāgatāni honti suvibhattāni suppavattīni suvinicchitāni suttaso anubyañjanaso; (8)kalyāṇavāco hoti kalyāṇavākkaraṇo, poriyā vācāya samannāgato vissaṭṭhāya anelagaḷāya atthassa viññāpaniyā; paṭibalo hoti bhikkhunisaṅghassa dhammiyā kathāya sandassetuṁ samādapetuṁ samuttejetuṁ sampahaṁsetuṁ; yebhuyyena bhikkhunīnaṁ piyo hoti manāpo; na kho panetaṁ Bhagavantaṁ uddissa pabbajitāya kāsāyavatthanivasanāya garudhammaṁ ajjhāpannapubbo hoti; vīsativasso vā hoti atirekavīsativasso vā.( (1)持戒。(2)防护波提木叉律仪，具足戒行而住，於微小罪见怖畏，受持学处而学。(3)多闻而持所闻、积集所闻。(4)若宣说诸法，初善、中善、后善，义具、文具、纯一圆满清净梵行。(5)像这样多闻受持诸法，语言流利，通达人性。(6)於见善通达。(7)详知二部波提木叉，善分别、善通晓、善决定经义。(8)言语优美、音声优美，以具有礼貌的语言，发出无瑕疵的、有义理的表达。为比丘尼僧伽说法教示，堪能於劝导、赞励，庆慰，为多数的比丘尼所爱、所中意。依此世尊而出家，在著袈裟衣之前无犯重罪法，且(戒腊)达二十岁或超过二十岁。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhikkhunī: {'def': '(f.) [fr. bhikkhu, cp. BSk. bhiksuṇī, but classical Sk. bhikṣukī] an almswoman, a female mendicant, a Buddhist nun D.III,123 sq., 148, 168 sq., 264; Vin.IV,224 sq., 258 sq. (°saṅgha); S.I,128; II,215 sq., IV.159 sq.; A.I,88, 113, 279; II,132 (°parisā), 144; III,109; IV,75; Miln.28; VbhA.498 (dahara°, story of); VvA.77. (Page 504)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhikkhunī-vibhaṅga: {'def': 'm. 比丘尼分別 [律蔵経分別の一, 比丘尼戒の解説].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Bhikkhuṇī: {'def': '【阴】比丘尼(在上座部佛教中比丘尼的传承已断)，苾蒭尼。Pāci.IV,214(CS:Pāci.pg.275)︰Tatra yāyaṁ bhikkhunī samaggena ubhatosaṅghena ñatticatutthena kammena akuppena ṭhānārahena upasampannā, ayaṁ imasmiṁ atthe adhippetā bhikkhunīti.(此中，依和合的二部僧，白四羯摩，无异议通过受具之比丘尼，即此处所谓的比丘尼之意。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhikkhā: {'def': '(cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhaiksa of bhiks, adj. & nt),【阴】捐献，食物(begged food, alms, alms-begging; food)。bhikkhācariyā,【阴】bhikkhācāra(=bhikkhāya carati；Sk. bhaiksaṁ carati),【阳】行乞，托钵。bhikkhāhāra,【阳】乞到的食物。bhikkhāpaññatti,声明供僧，打斋(declaration of alms, announcement that food is to be given to the Saṅgha, a dedication of food Vin I.309.)。ekāhā bhikkhā, 一日的食物(food for one day)。subhikkha,【中】食物丰富(abundance of food)。dubbhikkha,【中】食物缺乏(dubbhikkhā f.；scantiness of alms, famine, scarcity of food, adj. famine-stricken (cp. Sk. durbhiksaṁ)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhaikṣa of bhikṣ, adj. & nt.] begged food, alms, alms-begging; food Vin.IV,94; Cp I.1⁴; Vv 70⁴ (ekāhā bh. food for one day); Miln.16; PvA.3, 75, 131 (kaṭacchu°); bhikkhāya carati to go out begging food [cp. Sk. bhaikṣaṁ carati] J.III,82; V,75; PvA.51 & passim. --subhikkha (nt.) abundance of food D.I,11. dubbhikkha (nt.) (& °ā f.) scantiness of alms, famine, scarcity of food, adj. famine-stricken (cp. Sk. durbhikṣaṁ) Vin.II,175; III,87 (adj.); IV,23 (adj.); S.IV,323, 324 (dvīhitikaṁ); A.I,160; III,41; J.II,149, 367; V,193; VI,487; Cp I.3³ (adj.); Vism.415 (°pīḷita), 512 (f. in simile); KhA 218; DhA.I,169; II,153 (f.); III,437 (°bhaya).

--āhāra food received by a mendicant J.I,237 (=bhikkhu-āhāra?). --cariyā going about for alms, begging round Sn.700; PvA.146. --cāra=°cariyā Mhbv 28. --paññatti declaration of alms, announcement that food is to be given to the Saṅgha, a dedication of food Vin.I,309. (Page 504)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】捐献，食物。 ~cariyā, 【阴】 ~cāra, 【阳】行乞，托钵。~āhāra, 【阳】乞到的食物。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhindana: {'def': '【中】瓦解。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhindati] breaking up, brittle, falling into ruin S.I,131 (kāya). (Page 505)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】瓦解。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhindati: {'def': '[bhid, Sk. bhinatti; cp. Lat. findo to split, Goth. beitan=Ger. beissen. Def. at Dhtp 381, 405 by “vidāraṇe” i. e. splitting] to split, break, sever, destroy, ruin. In two bases: *bhid (with der. *bhed) & *bhind. -- (a) *bhid: aor. 3^rd sg. abhida (=Sk. abhidat) D.II,107; J.III,29 (see also under abhida); abbhidā J.I,247; II,163, 164. -- fut. bhecchati (Sk. bhetsyati) A.I,8. -- ger. bhetvā (Sk. bhittvā) Th.1, 753; Sn.62 (v. l. BB bhitvā). -- grd. bhejja: only neg. abhejja (q. v.). See also der. bheda, bhedana. -- pp. bhinna & Pass. bhijjati. -- (b) *bhind: pres. bhindati Nd¹ 503; DhA.I,125 (kathaṁ bh. to break a promise); Sdhp.47. -- ppr. bhindanto Mhvs 5, 185. -- Pot. bhinde Vism.36 (sīlasaṁvaran). -- fut. bhindissati Vin.II,198. -- aor. bhindi J.I,467 (mitta-bhāvaṁ), & abhindi A.IV,312 (atta-sambhavaṁ). -- ger. bhinditvā J.I,425, 490; PvA.12; also in phrase indriyāni bhinditvā breaking in one’s senses, i. e. mastering, controlling them J.II,274; IV,104, 114, 190. -- Caus. I. bhedeti: see vi°. Caus. II. bhindāpeti to cause to be broken J.I,290 (sīlaṁ); VI,345 (pokkharaṇiṁ) and bhedāpeti Vin.III,42. -- See also bhindana. (Page 505)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bhid破碎+ṁ-a), 打破，劈开，切断。【过】bhindi。【过分】bhindita, bhinna。【现分】bhindanta。【独】bhinditvā。【不】bhindituṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(bhid + ŋ-a), 打破，劈开，切断。【过】 bhindi。【过分】 bhindita,bhinna。【现分】 ~danta。【独】 ~ditvā。【不】 ~dituŋ。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhindivāla: {'def': '[Non-Aryan; Epic Sk. bhindipāla spear, but cp Prk bhiṇḍi-māla & °vāla, Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 248; see also Geiger, P.Gr. § 38] a sort of spear J.VI,105, 248; Abhp 394. (Page 505)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhinna: {'def': '[pp. of bhindati] 1. broken, broken up (lit. & fig.) Sn.770 (nāvā); J.I,98 (abhinna magga an unbroken path); III,167 (uda-kumbha); PvA.72 (°sarīra-cchavi). -- 2. (fig.) split, fallen into dissension, not agreeing D.III,117=210, 171. -- Usually in cpds., & often to be translated by prep. “without,” e.g. bhinnahirottappa without shame. -- Cp. sam°.

--ājīva without subsistence, one who has little means to live on, one who leads a poor mode of living Miln.229 sq. (opp. Parisuddh’ājīva); Vism.306. --nāva ship-wreeked J.IV,159. --paṭa a torn cloth, in cpd. °dhara “wearing a patchwork cloth,” i. e. a bhikkhu (see also s. v. bhikkhu) Th.1, 1092. --plava ship-wrecked J.III,158. --manta disobeying (i. e. breaking) a counsel J.VI,437. --sira with a broken head J.IV,251. --sīmā (f.) one who has broken the bounds (of decency) Miln.122. --sīla one who has broken the norm of good conduct Vism.56. --hirottappa without shame, shameless J.I,207. (Page 505)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Bhindana的【过分】) 瓦解。bhinnatta,【中】bhinnabhāva,【阳】被打破的情况，各式个样。bhinnāva,【形】遇海难的。bhinnapaṭa,【中】破衣。bhinnamariyāda,【形】超过极限的。bhinnasīla 【形】破戒者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhinnatta: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. bhinna] state of being broken or destroyed, destruction A.IV,144. (Page 505)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhisa: {'def': '【中】莲藕。bhisapuppha,【中】莲花。bhisamuḷāla,【中】睡莲的球茎和须根。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Vedic bisa, with bh for b: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 40 1a] the sprout (fr. the root) of a lotus, the lotus fibres, lotus plant S.I,204; II,268; J.I,100; IV,308.

--puppha the lotus flower Sn.2 (=paduma-puppha SnA 16). --muḷāla fibres & stalk of the lotus J.V,39; Vism.361. (Page 505)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】莲藕。 ~puppha, 【中】莲花。 ~muḷāla, 【中】睡莲的球茎和须根。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhisakka: {'def': '[cp. Vedic bhiṣaj physician, P. bhesajja medicine & see Geiger, P.Gr. § 63¹] a physician M.I,429; A.III,238; IV,340; It.101; Miln.169, 215, 229, 247 sq., 302; Vism.598 (in simile); DA.I,67, 255. (Page 505)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Vedic bhisaj physician, P. bhesajja medicine),【阳】医师(a physician)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】医师。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhisi: {'def': '² [etym.?] a raft Sn.21. -- Andersen, Pali Reader, Glossary s. v. identifies it with bhisi¹ and asks: “Could it also mean a sort of cushion, made of twisted grass, used instead of a swimming girdle?” (Page 505)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1,【阴】垫子、垫(a bolster, cushion, pad)。bhisibimbohana,【中】垫被(bolster)，枕头(pillow)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】垫子，垫。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2,【阴】木筏(a raft)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. bṛṣī & bṛsī, with bh for b, as in Prk. bhisī, cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 209] a bolster, cushion, pad, roll Vin.I,287 sq. (cīvara° a robe rolled up); II,150, 170; III,90; IV,279. Five kinds are allowed in a Vihāra, viz. uṇṇa-bhisi, cola°, vāka°, tiṇu°, paṇṇa°, i. e. bolsters stuffed with wool, cotton-cloth, bark, grass, or talipot leaves, Vin.II,150=VbhA.365 (tiṇa°).

--bimbohana bolster & pillow Vin.I,47; II,208; DhA.I,416; VbhA.365. (Page 505)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhisikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. bhisi¹] a small bolster Vin.II,148 (vātapāna° a roll to keep out draughts); KhA 50 (tāpasa°, v. l. K^k kapala-bhitti, see Appendix to Indexes on Sutta Nipāta & Pj.). (Page 505)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhismā: {'def': '(f.) [=bhiṁsā] terror, fright D.II,261 (°kāya adj. terrific). (Page 505)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(=bhiṁsā) ,【阴】吓惊(terror, fright)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhitti: {'def': '(f.) [fr. bhid, cp. *Sk. bhitta fragment, & Class. Sk. bhitti wall] a wall Vin.I,48; D.II,85; S.II,103; IV,183; V,218; J.I,491; Vism.354=VbhA.58 (in comparison); ThA.258; VvA.42, 160, 271, 302; PvA.24.

--khīla a pin (peg) in the wall Vin.II,114, 152. --pāda the support or lower part of a wall J.IV,318. (Page 505)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】墙壁。 ~pāda, 【阳】墙壁的脚或基础。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】墙壁。bhittipāda,【阳】墙壁的脚或基础。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhittika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhitti] having a wall or walls J.IV,318 (naḷa °ā paṇṇasālā); VI,10 (catu° with 4 walls). (Page 505)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhiyya: {'def': 'bhīya, bhiyyosa,【无】非常地，更多，在较高的程度中，重复地。bhiyyoso mattāya, 非常地，超过能力的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhiyyo: {'def': '(Bhīyo, Bhīyyo) [Vedic bhūyas, compar. form fr. bhū, functioning as compar. to bhūri. On relation Sk. bhūyaḥ: P. bhiyyo cp. Sk. jugupsate: P. jigucchati] 1. (adj.) more Sn.61 (dukkham ettha bhiyyo), 584 (id.), 306 (bh. taṇhā pavaḍḍhatha); Dh.313 (bh. rajan ākirate), 349 (bh. taṇhā pavaḍḍhati). -- 2. (adv.) in a higher degree, more, repeatedly, further S.I,108 (appaṁ vā bhīyo less or more); Sn.434 (bh. cittaṁ pasīdati); Dh.18 (bh. nandati=ativiya n. C.); Miln.40. -- See also bhiyyoso, yebhuyyena.

--kamyatā desire for more, greed Vin.II,214. --bhāva getting more, increase, multiplication D.III,221; Vin.III,45; S.V,9, 198, 244; A.I,98; V,70; VbhA.289. (Page 505)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Bhīyo, Bhīyyo) (Vedic bhūyas, compar. form fr. bhū, functioning as compar. to bhūri. On relation Sk. bhūyah: P. bhiyyo cp. Sk. jugupsate: P. jigucchati),1.(adj.)更多的(more Sn.61 (dukkham ettha bhiyyo), 584 (id.), 306 (bh. taṇhā pavaḍḍhatha); Dh.313 (bh. rajan ākirate), 349 (bh. taṇhā pavaḍḍhati))。2.(adv.) 更，多的(in a higher degree, more, repeatedly, further S.I,108 (appaṁ vā bhīyo less or more); Sn.434 (bh. cittaṁ pasīdati); Dh.18 (bh. nandati=ativiya n. C.)。-- bhiyyokamyatā desire for more, greed Vin.II,214. -- bhiyyobhāva, (getting more, increase, multiplication )。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'bhiyyoso, 【无】非常地，更多，在较高的程度中，重复地。 ~yosomattāya, 非常地，超过能力的。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhiyyoso: {'def': '(adv.)(Abl. formation fr. bhiyyo 1) 更多地(still more, more and more, only in cpd. bhiyyosomattāya [cp. BSk. bhūyasyā mātrāya MVastu II.345; Divy 263 & passim] 丰富地(exceedingly, abundantly)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adv.) [Abl. formation fr. bhiyyo 1] still more, more and more, only in cpd. °mattāya [cp. BSk. bhūyasyā mātrāya MVastu II.345; Divy 263 & passim] exceedingly, abundantly A.I,124=Pug.30 (expl^d at PugA 212 by “bhiyyoso-mattāya uddhumāyana-bhāvo daṭṭhabbo”); J.I,61; PvA.50. (Page 505)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhiŋsana: {'def': '~naka, 【形】恐怖的，可怕的，令人敬畏的。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhiṁsa: {'def': '(adj.) [=Vedic bhīṣma, of which there are 4 P. forms, viz. the metathetic bhiṁsa, the shortened bhisma, the lengthened bhesma, and the contracted bhīsa (see bhīsana). Cp. also Sk.-P. bhīma; all of bhī] terrible; only in cpd. °rūpa (nt. & adj.) an awful sight; (of) terrific appearance, terrible, awful J.III,242, 339; IV,271, 494. (Page 504)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhiṁsana: {'def': '& Bhiṁsanaka (adj.) [the form with °ka is the canonic form, whereas bhiṁsana is younger. See bhiṁsa on connections] horrible, dreadful, awe-inspiring, causing fear. (a) bhiṁsanaka (usually comb^d with lomahaṁsa) D.II,106=A.IV,311; D.II,157; Vin.III,8; PvA.22; ThA.242 (°sabhāva=bhīmarūpa); J.V,43. -- (b) bhiṁsana Pv IV.3⁵ (+lomahaṁsa). (Page 504)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'bhiṁsanaka,【形】恐怖的，可怕的，令人敬畏的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhiṁsikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. bhiṁsa] frightful thing, terror, terrifying omen Mhvs 12, 12 (vividhā bhiṁsikā kari he brought divers terrors to pass). (Page 504)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹bhiṁsa),【阴】吓惊之事(frightful thing, terror, terrifying omen)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhiṁsā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. bhiṁsa] terror, fright; mahā-bhiṁsa (adj.) inspiring great terror D.II,259. Cp. bhismā. (Page 504)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹bhiṁsa) ,【阴】吓惊(terror, fright)。mahābhiṁsa,【形】受到大惊(inspiring great terror)。Cp. Bhismā(吓惊)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhiṅgāra: {'def': '﹐【阳】金瓶、金澡罐。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhiṅka: {'def': '【阳】小象。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic bhṛnga large bee] the young of an animal, esp. of an elephant, in its property of being dirty (cp. pigs) Vin.II,201=S.II,269 (bhiṅka-cchāpa); J.V,418 (with ref. to young cats: “mahā-biḷārā nelamaṇḍalaṁ vuccati taruṇā bhiṅka-cchāpa-maṇḍalaṁ,” T. °cchāca°, vv. ll. bhiñjaka-cchāca; taruṇa-bhiga --cchāpa; bhinga-cchāja). (Page 504)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】小象。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhiṅkāra: {'def': '¹ (& °gāra) [cp. late Sk. bhṛngāra] a water jar, a (nearly always golden) vase, ceremonial vessel (in donations) Vin.I,39 (sovaṇṇa-maya); D.II,172; A.IV,210=214 (T. °gāra, v. l. °kāra); Cp. I.3⁵; J.I,85, 93; II,371; III,10 (suvaṇṇa°); Dpvs XI.32; PvA.75; KhA 175 (suvaṇṇa°; v. l. BB °gāra), Sdhp.513 (soṇṇa°). (Page 504)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ [cp. Sk. bhṛnga bee, bhṛngaka & bhṛnga-rājā] a bird: Lanius caerulescens J.V,416. (Page 504)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [?] cheers, cries of delight (?) Bu I.35 (+sādhu kāra). (Page 504)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】水壶。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】水壶。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bho: {'def': '(bhavant 的呼格),【无】(对平辈或下辈的亲密的称呼)亲爱的！朋友！', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】（亲密的称呼）亲爱的！朋友！(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [Voc. of bhavant, cp. Sk. bhoḥ which is the shortened Voc. bhagoḥ of Vedic bhagavant; cp. as to form P. āvuso›Sk. āyuṣmaḥ of āyuṣmant] a familiar term of address (in speaking to equals or inferiors): sir, friend, you, my dear; pl. sirs D.I,88, 90, 93, 111; M.I,484; Sn.427, 457, 487; with Voc. of noun: bho purisa my dear man J.I,423; bho brahmaṇā oh ye brahmans J.II,369. Double bho bho DhA.IV,158.

--vādika=°vādin Nd¹ 249. --vādin a brahman, i. e. one who addresses others with the word “bho,” implying some superiority of the speaker; name given to the brahman, as proud of his birth, in contrast to brāhmaṇa, the true brahman Sn.620; Dh.396; J.VI,211, 214; DhA.IV,158. (Page 509)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhobhukka: {'def': '[intens-redupl. of bhukk=bukk, to bark: see bhukka & cp. Sk. bukkati, bukkana] one making a barking sound, barker, i. e. dog J.VI,345 (=bhuṅkaraṇa C.). (Page 511)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhoga: {'def': '² [fr. bhuj to bend, cp. bhuja³ & Sk. bhoga id. Hālayudha 3, 20] the coil of a snake J.III,58. See also nib°. (Page 510)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [fr. bhuñj: see bhuñjati] 1. enjoyment A.IV,392 (kāmaguṇesu bh.). -- 2. possession, wealth D.III,77; Sn.301, 421; Dh.139, 355; Pug.30, 57; Sdhp.86, 228, 264. --appa° little or no possession Sn.114.

--khandha a mass of wealth, great possessions D.II,86 (one of the 5 profits accruing from virtue). --gāma “village of revenue,” a tributary village, i. e. a village which has to pay tribute or contributions (in food etc.) to the owner of its ground. The latter is called gāmabhojaka or gāmapati “landlord” J.II,135. Cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 71, 112. --cāgin giving riches, liberal A.III,128.. --pārijuñña loss of property or possessions VvA.101. --mada pride or conceit of wealth VbhA.466. --vāsin, as f. vāsinī “living in property,” i. e. to be enjoyed or made use of occasionally, one of the 10 kinds of wives: a kept woman Vin.III,139, 140; cp. M.I,286. (Page 509)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】所有物，财富，享乐，蛇的盘绕。 ~kkhandha, 【阳】财蕴（大量的财富）。 ~gāma, 【阳】纳贡的村庄。 ~mada, 【阳】财富的自傲。~vantu, 【形】富有的。(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】所有物，财富，工资，享乐，蛇的盘绕。bhogakkhandha,【阳】财蕴(大量的财富)。bhogagāma,【阳】纳贡的村庄。bhogamada,【阳】财富的自傲。bhogavantu,【形】富有的。cha bhogānaṁ apāya-mukhāni(毁灭财物的六原因)；《长部31经》尸伽罗经说失财的六种原因，是：一、耽溺谷酒、迷罗耶酒、烈酒放逸处 (surā-meraya-majja-ppamāda-ṭṭhānānuyogo)。二、耽溺非时游街(vikāla-visikhācariyānuyogo)。三、涉足剧场(samajjābhicaraṇaṁ)。四、耽溺赌博(jūtappamādaṭṭhānānuyogo, 台语︰跋缴)。五、耽溺恶友(pāpamittānuyogo)。六、耽溺懒惰(ālasyānuyogo)。《长阿含16经》善生经(大1.71.2)：「六损财业者，一者耽湎於酒，二者博戏，三者放荡，四者迷於伎乐，五者恶友相得，六者懈堕，是为六损财业。」', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhogatā: {'def': '(-°) (f.) [abstr. fr. bhoga] condition of prosperity, having wealth or riches, in uḷāra° being very rich, M.III,38. (Page 510)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhogavant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhoga] one who has possessions or supplies, wealthy J.V,399; Mhvs 10, 20; Sdhp.511. (Page 510)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhogga: {'def': '【形】可以享受的，可以拥有的。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (adj.) [grd. of bhuñj to enjoy, thus=Sk. bhogya] 1. to be enjoyed or possessed, n. property, possession, in cpd. rāja° (of an elephant) to be possessed by a king, serviceable to a king, royal D.I,87; A.I,244, 284; II,113, 170; J.II,370; DhA.I,313 (royal possessions in general); DA.I,245. Cp. BSk. rājabhogya MVastu I.287. See in detail under rāja-bhogga. --naggabhogga one who possesses nothing but nakedness, i. e. an ascetic J.IV,160; V,75; VI,225. -- 2. (identical with bhogika & bhogiya & similar in meaning to bhojarājā) royal, of royal power, entitled to the throne, as a designation of “class” at Vin.III,221 in sequence rājā rāja-bhoggā brāhmaṇā, etc., where it takes the place of the usual khattiya “royal noble.” (Page 510)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) [fr. bhuj to bend, pp. corresp. to Sk. bhugna] bent, crooked M.I,88; D.II,22; A.I,138; J.III,395. (Page 510)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】可以享受的，可以拥有的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhogika: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. bhoga] having wealth or power, in antara° an intermediate aristocrat Vin.III,47. (Page 510)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhogin: {'def': '¹ (-°) (adj.-n.) [fr. bhoga] enjoying, owning, abounding in, partaking in or devoted to (e. g. to pleasure, kāma°) D.II,80; III,124; S.I,78; IV,331, 333; A.III,289; V,177. -- m. owner, wealthy man M.I,366. (Page 510)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (adj.) [fr. bhuj, see bhuja³] having coils, of a snake J.III,57; VI,317. (Page 510)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhogiya: {'def': 'is diaeretic form of Sk. bhogya=P. bhogga² with which identical in meaning 2, similar also to bhogika. (Page 510)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhogī: {'def': '【阳】蛇，富人。【形】(在【合】中) 享受的，分享的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】蛇，富人。【形】 (在【合】中) 享受的，分享的。(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhoja: {'def': '[lit. grd. of bhuñjati², to be sorted out, to be raised from slavery; thus also meaning “dependence,” “training,” from bhuj, to which belongs bhujissa] one who is getting trained, dependent, a freed slave, villager, subject. Only in cpds. like bhojisiyaṁ [bhoja+isi+ ya=issariya] mastery over dependence, i. e. independence S.I,44, 45; bhojājānīya a well-trained horse, a thoroughbred J.I,178, 179; bhojaputta son of a villager J.V,165; bhojarājā head of a village (-district) a subordinate king Sn.553=Th.1, 823. -- In the latter phrase however it may mean “wealthy” kings, or “titled” kings (khattiyā bh-r., who are next in power to and serve on a rājā cakkavatti). The phrase is best taken as one, viz. “the nobles, royal kings.” It may be a term for “vice-kings” or substitute-kings, or those who are successors of the king. The explⁿ at SnA 453 takes the three words as three diff. terms and places bhojā= bhogiyā as a designation of a class or rank (=bhogga). Neumann in his trslⁿ of Sn.has “Königstämme, kühn and stolz,” free but according to the sense. The phrase may in bhoja contain a local designation of the Bhoja princes (N. of a tribe), which was then taken as a special name for “king” (cp. Kaiser›Cæsar, or Gr. basileuζ). With the wording “khattiyā bhoja-rājāno anuyuttā bhavanti te” cp. M.III,173: “paṭirājāno te rañño cakkavattissa anuyuttā bhavanti,” and A.V,22: “kuḍḍarājāno” in same phrase. -- Mrs. Rh. D. at Brethren, p. 311, trsl^s “nobles and wealthy lords.” (Page 510)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhojaka: {'def': '[fr. bhuj, bhojeti] 1. one who provides food, attendant at meals J.V,413. -- 2. (is this from bhuñjati² & bhujissa?) one who draws the benefit of something, owner, holder, in gāma° landholder, village headman (see Dial. I.108 n. & Fick, Sociale Gliederung 104 sq.) J.I,199, 354, 483; II,135 (=gāmapati, gāmajeṭṭhaka); V,413; DhA.I,69. Cp. bhojanaka. (Page 510)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】饲养者，收税者。 Gāmabhojaka = 村长。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】饲养者，收税者。Gāmabhojaka = 村长。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhojan: {'def': 'is ppr. of bhojeti, feeding J.VI,207. (Page 510)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhojana: {'def': '【中】食物，餐。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】食物，餐。bhojane amattaññuno﹐食不知量。bhojane mattaññutā﹐饮食知量。M.39./I,273.：‘Bhojane mattaññuno bhavissāma, paṭisaṅkhā yoniso āhāraṁ āharissāma, neva davāya na madāya na maṇḍanāya na vibhūsanāya (对於食物为知量者，正思量摄取食物，非为嬉戏，非为骄荣，非为装饰。)比丘戒「堕罪」(39)︰Yāni kho pana tāni paṇītabhojanāni, seyyathidaṁ--sappi, navanītaṁ, telaṁ, madhu, phāṇitaṁ, maccho, maṁsaṁ, khīraṁ, dadhi. Yo pana bhikkhu evarūpāni paṇītabhojanāni agilāno attano atthāya viññāpetvā bhuñjeyya, pācittiyaṁ.(诸胜妙饮食，这即是：乳酪(熟酥)、奶油(生酥)、(麻)油、蜜、糖蜜、鱼、肉、(牛、羊等)乳、凝乳(酪)。若比丘无病，为己讨美食而食者，犯堕罪。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. bhuñjati] food, meal, nourishment in general J.II,218; IV,103, 173; J.I,178; IV,223; Sn.102, 128, 242, 366, 667; Dh.7, 70; Pug.21, 55; Miln.370; Vism.69, 106; Sdhp.52, 388, 407. Some similes with bhojana see J.P.T.S. 1907, 119. --tika° food allowed for a triad (of reasons) Vin.II,196. dub° having little or bad food J.II,368; DhA.IV,8. paṇīta° choice & plentiful meals Vin.IV,88. sabhojane kule in the family in which a bhikkhu has received food Vin.IV,94. --bhojane mattaññu(tā) knowing proper measure in eating (& abstr.); eating within bounds, one of the 4 restricttions of moral life S.II,218; A.I,113 sq.; Nd¹ 483. ‹-› 5 bhojanāni or meals are given at Vin.IV,75, viz. niccabhatta°, salākabhatta°, pakkhikaṁ, uposathikaṁ, pāṭipadikaṁ. -- As part of the regulations concerning food, hours of eating etc. in the Saṅgha there is a distinction ascribed to the Buddha between gaṇabhojanaṁ, parampara-bhojanaṁ, atirittabhojanaṁ, anatirittabhojanaṁ mentioned at Kvu II.552; see Vin.IV,71, 77. All these ways of taking food are forbidden under ordinary circumstances, but allowed in the case of illness (gilāna-samaye), when robes are given to the Bhikkhus (cīvarasamaye) and several other occasions, as enum^d at Vin.IV,74. -- The distinction is made as follows: gaṇabhojanaṁ said when 4 bhikkhus are invited to partake together of one of the five foods; or food prepared as a joint meal Vin.IV,74; cp. II.196; V,128, 135; paramparabhojanaṁ said when a bhikkhu, invited to partake of one of the 5 foods, first takes one and then another Vin.IV,78; atirittabhojanaṁ is food left over from that provided for a sick person, or too great a quantity offered on one occasion to bhikkhus (in this case permitted to be eaten) Vin.IV,82; anatirittabhojanaṁ is food that is not left over & is accepted & eaten by a bhikkhu without inquiry Vin.IV,84.

--aggadāna gift of the best of food SnA 270. --atthika in need of food, hungry Pv.II,9²⁹. --pariyantika restricting one’s feeding Vism.69. --vikati at J.V,292 is to be read as bhājana° (q. v.). (Page 510)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhojanaka: {'def': '=bhojaka, in °gāma owner or headman of the village J.II,134. (Page 510)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhojaniya: {'def': '【形】可以吃的。【中】软的食物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】可以吃的。【中】软的食物。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Bhojanīya, Bhojaneyya [grd. of bhuj, Caus. bhojeti. Cp. bhuñjitabba] what may be eaten, eatable, food; fit or proper to eat. --bhojaniya: food Vin.IV,92 (five foods: odana rice, kummāsa gruel, sattu meal, flour, maccha fish, maṁsa meat). Soft food, as distinguished from khādaniya hard food J.I,90. See also khādaniya. bhojanīya: eatable S.I,167, cp. pari°. bhojaneyya: fit to eat DA.I,28; a° unfit to be eaten Sn.81; J.V,15. (Page 510)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhojeti: {'def': '(bhuj +e), 喂，养活。【过】bhojesi。【过分】bhojita。【独】bhojetvā。【现分】bhojenta, bhojayamāna。【不】bhojetuṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(bhuj + e), 喂。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 bhojita。【独】~jetvā。【现分】 ~jenta, ~jayamāna。【不】 ~jetuŋ。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of bhuñjati] to cause to eat, to feed, entertain, treat, regale Vin.I,243; IV,71; J.VI,577; DhA.I,101. (Page 510)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhojin: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. bhuj] feeding on, enjoying A.III,43; M.I,343; Sn.47; J.II,150; Pug.55. (Page 510)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhojja: {'def': '【中】食品。【形】可以吃的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of bhuñjati] to be eaten, eatable; khajja° what can be chewed & eaten DA.I,85. °yāgu “eatable rice-gruel,” i. e. soft gruel, prepared in a certain way Vin.I,223, 224. (Page 511)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】食品。【形】可以吃的。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhojjha: {'def': 'a good horse, a Sindh horse J.I,180. (Page 511)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhojāpeti: {'def': '(bhuj + āpe), 喂食，服侍（他人用餐）。【过】~esi。【过分】 ~pita。【独】 ~petvā。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(bhuj +āpe), 喂食，服侍(他人用餐)。【过】bhojāpesi。【过分】bhojāpita。【独】bhojāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhojī: {'def': '【形】以…为食的。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】以…为食的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhokkhaṁ: {'def': 'is fut. of bhuñjati (q. v.). (Page 509)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhokkhi: {'def': 'at VbhA.424, in phrase sucikāmo bh. brāhmaṇo is a kind of Desider, formation fr. bhuj° (bhuñj), appearing as *bhukṣ=bhokkh (cp. bhokkhaṁ), with ending °in; meaning “wishing to eat.” It corresponds to Sk. bhoktu-kāma. Cp. also n. ag. bhoktṛ of *bhukṣ, enjoyer, eater. P. bhokkhi might be Sk. bhoktrī, if it was not for the latter being f. The word is a curiosity. (Page 509)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhonto: {'def': '﹐诸尊者、诸贤(复数主格、复数呼格)。SnA.v.410./II,383.︰bhontoti amacce ālapati.(诸贤︰(国王)对臣之称呼。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhoti: {'def': '【呼、单】亲爱的女士！', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'f. of bhavant (q. v.) DhA.III,194. (Page 511)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【呼、单】亲爱的女士！(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhottabba: {'def': '可以吃的。参考 Bhojja。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& Bhottuṁ are grd. & inf. of bhuñjati (q. v.); bhottabba to be eaten J.V,252, 253; bhottuṁ to eat J.II,14. (Page 511)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '参考 Bhojja。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhottuŋ: {'def': '【不】吃。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhottuṁ: {'def': '【不】吃。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhovādī: {'def': '【阳】婆罗门。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】婆罗门。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhucca: {'def': '(adj.) [ger. of bhū in composition, corresponding to *bhūtya›*bhutya, like pecca (*pretya) fr. pra+i. In function equal to bhūta] only in cpd. yathā-bhuccaṁ (nt. adv.) as it is, that which really is, really (=yathā bhūtaṁ) Th.2, 143. See under yathā. (Page 506)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhuja: {'def': '3(‹bhuj使弯曲to bend),【形】弯曲(bending, crooked)。bhuja-laṭṭhi betel-pepper tree。bhujaga (bhuja-ga)﹐弯曲前进者、蛇(going crooked, i. e. snake)。bhujaginda,眼镜王蛇(king of snakes, the cobra)。bhujaṅga-latā ‘如蛇状的爬藤类(木本具攀缘性)’、蒌叶、荖藤、蒟酱、老叶。(“snakecreeper,” i. e. name of the betel-pepper)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】手。【形】弯曲的。 ~patta, 【阳】垂枝桦（枝无毛、枝条显著下垂的一种桦木属植物 (Betula pendula)）。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '1(Sk. bhuja m. & bhujā),【阳】【中】手、手臂(the arm)。bhujapatta,【阳】垂枝桦(枝无毛、枝条显著下垂的一种桦木属植物 (Bhurja tree；Betula pendula))。subhujo,手臂美。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '³ (adj.) [fr. bhuj to bend] bending, crooked, in bhuja-laṭṭhi betel-pepper tree J.VI,456 (C.: bhujaṅgalatā, perhaps identical with bhujaka?), also in cpd. bhuja-ga going crooked, i. e. snake Miln.420 (bhujaginda king of snakes, the cobra); Dāvs. 2, 17; also as bhujaṅga Dāvs 2, 56, & in der. bhujaṅga-latā “snakecreeper,” i. e. name of the betel-pepper J.VI,457; and bhujaṅgama S.I,69. -- Cp. bhogin². (Page 506)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [fr. bhuñjati²] clean, pure, bright, beautiful J.VI,88 (°dassana beautiful to look at; C. expl^ns by kalyāṇa dassana). (Page 506)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (m. & nt.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhuja m. & bhujā; bhuj, bhujate to bend, lit. “the bender”; the root is expl^d by koṭilya (koṭilla) at Dhtp 470 (Dhtm 521). See also bhuja³. Idg. *bheṅg, fr. which also Lat. fugio to flee=Gr. feu/gw, Lat. fuga flight=Sk. bhoga ring, Ohg. bouc; Goth. biugan to bend=Ger. beugen & biegen; Ohg. bogo=E. bow. Semantically cp. Lat. lacertus the arm, i. e. the bend, fr. *leq to bend, to which P. laguḷa a club (q. v. for etym.), with which cp. Lat. lacerta=lizard, similar in connotation to P. bhujaga snake] the arm Sn.48 (expl^d by Nd² 478 as hattha, hand); 682 (pl. bhujāni); J.V,91, 309; VI,64; Bu I.36; Vv 64¹⁸. (Page 506)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2(‹bhuñjati2), 乾净、纯净、明亮、美丽(clean, pure, bright, beautiful)。bhujadassana, 美观(beautiful to look at)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhujaga: {'def': '(bhuja-ga), bhujaṅga, bhujaṅgarna,【阳】蛇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'bhujaṅga, bhujaṅgarna, 【阳】蛇。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhujaka: {'def': '(‹bhuj, as in bhuñjati2; or does it belong to bhuja3 and equal to bhuja-laṭṭhi?),天界一种芳香的树(a fragrant tree, growing (according to Dhpāla) only in the Gandhamādana grove of the Devaloka)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. bhuj, as in bhuñjati²; or does it belong to bhuja³ and equal to bhuja-laṭṭhi?] a fragrant tree, growing (according to Dhpāla) only in the Gandhamādana grove of the Devaloka Vv 35⁵; VvA.162. (Page 506)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhujissa: {'def': '(cp. BSk. bhujisya),【阳】自由民(非奴隶，a freed slave, freeman; a servant as distinguished from a slave)。bhujissaṁ karoti,赋予自由民(to grant freedom to a slave)。【阴】bhujissā。【形】由奴隶解放的(freeing from slavery, productive of freedom)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. BSk. bhujiṣya Divy 302, according to Mhvyut § 84 meaning “clean”; thus fr. bhuj (see bhuñjati²) to purify, sort out] 1. (n. m.) a freed slave, freeman; a servant as distinguished from a slave Vin.I,93; J.II,313; PvA.112. --bhujissaṁ karoti to grant freedom to a slave J.V,313; VI,389, 546; DhA.I,19; ThA.200. -- f. bhujissā Vin.II,271 (in same sequence as bhujissa at Vin.I,93). -- 2. (adj.) freeing fr. slavery, productive of freedom D.II,80 (cp. Dial. II.80); III,245; S.II,70; IV,272; A.III,36, 132, 213; Vism.222 (with exegesis). Cp. bhoja & bhojaka.

--bhāva state of being freed fr. slavery, freedom ThA.200. (Page 506)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】自由民。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhukka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. onomat. root *bhukk, dialectical, cp. Prk. bhukkai to bark, bhukkiya barking, bhukkana dog (Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 209); the root bhukk (bukk) is given by Hemacandra 4, 98 in meaning “garjati” (see P. gajjati), cp. also Prk. bukkaṇa crow] barking, n. a barker, i. e. dog; only in redupl. intens. formation bho-bhu-kka (cp. E. bow-wow), lit. bhu-bhu-maker (: kka fr. kṛ?) J.VI,354 (C.: bhun-karaṇa). See also bhussati. (Page 506)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhukkaraṇa: {'def': 'Bhuṅkaraṇa(bhu+kr, see bhukka),【形】【中】bhuṅkāra, bhukkāra,【阳】(狗)吠(making “bhu,” i. e. bow-wow, barking J VI.355 (bhukkaraṇasunakha)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 Bhuṅkāra, bhukkāra, 【阳】（狗）吠。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhumma: {'def': '(‹bhūmi, Vedic bhūmya),【形】【中】1.地居的，地球的，陆栖的，陆地(belonging to the earth, earthly, terrestrial; nt. soil, ground, floor)。2.处格(the locative case)。(在【合】中 ) 有阶段或故事的。bhummaṭṭha,【形】在地球上的。bhummattharaṇa,【中】地铺，地毯。bhummantara,【中】不同的阶段或世界。bhummā devā, 诸地神、诸地居天(a terrestrial deva or fairy六欲天中四王天)。bhummattharaṇa,铺地( “earth-spread,” a ground covering, mat, carpet)。bhummantara,地球。Bhummantalikkha,天地(earthly and celestial, over earth & sky (of portents))。bhummajāla,地网( “terrestrial net (of insight) gift of clear sight extending over the globe.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】陆地，地球的，陆栖的。 (在【合】中 ) 有阶段或故事的。~ṭṭha, 【形】在地球上的。 ~ttharaṇa, 【中】地铺，地毯。 ~ntara, 【中】不同的阶段或世界。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. bhūmi, Vedic bhūmya] 1. belonging to the earth, earthly, terrestrial; nt. soil, ground, floor Sn.222 (bhūtāni bhummāni earthly creatures, contrasted with creatures in the air, antalikkhe), 236 (id.); Sdhp.420 (sabba-bhummā khattiyā). pl. bhummā the earthly ones, i. e. the gods inhabiting the earth, esp. tree gods (Yakkhas) Vv 84² (=bhumma-deva VvA.334). -- nt. ground: Pv.II,10² (yāva bhummā down to the ground); v. l. BB bhūm(i). -- 2. the locative case KhA 106, 111, 224; SnA 140, 210, 321, 433; PvA.33.

--attharaṇa “earth-spread,” a ground covering, mat, carpet Vin.I,48; II,208; IV,279. --antara “earth-occasion,” i. e. (1) sphere of the earth, plane of existence Miln.163; DhsA.296. -- (2) in °pariccheda discussion concerning the earth, i. e. cosmogony DhsA.3. --antalikkha earthly and celestial, over earth & sky (of portents) Miln.178. The form would correspond to Sk. *bhaum-āntarīkṣa. --jāla “terrestrial net (of insight) gift of clear sight extending over the globe (perhaps to find hidden treasures) SnA 353 (term of a vijjā, science or magic art). Cp. bhūrikamma & bhūrivijjā. --ṭṭha (a) put into the earth, being in the earth, found on or in the earth, earthly Vin.III,47. (b) standing on the earth Dh.28. -- (c) resting on the earth Miln.181. Also as °ka living on earth, earthly (of gods) J.III,87. --deva a terrestrial deva or fairy A.IV,118; Ps.II,149; VbhA.12; DhA.I,156; VvA.334; PvA.5, 43, 55, 215, 277. --devatā=°deva J.IV,287 (=yakkha); KhA 120. (Page 506)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhummi: {'def': '¹ (f.) [fr. bhumma] that which belongs to the ground, i. e. a plane (of existence), soil, stage (as t.t. in philosophy) DhsA.277 (°y-āpatti), 339 (id.), 985 (dukkha°), 1368, 1374 sq. (see Dhs.trsl.² 231). (Page 507)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [old Voc. of bhumma] a Voc. of friendly address “my (dear) man” (lit. terrestrial) Vin.II,304 (=piyavacanaṁ Bdhgh). (Page 507)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhusa: {'def': '¹ [cp. Vedic busa (nt.) & buśa (m.)] chaff, husks A.I,241 (°āgāra chaff-house); Dh.252 (opuṇāti bhusaṁ to sift husks); Ud.78; Pv III,4¹; III,10⁷; VvA.47 (tiṇa° litter). (Page 507)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (adj.) [cp. Vedic bhṛśa] strong, mighty, great Dh.339 (taṇhā=balavā DhA.IV,48); J.V,361 (daṇḍa= daḷha, balavā C.). -- nt. bhusaṁ (adv.) much, exceedingly, greatly, vehemently. In cpds. bhusaṁ° & bhusa°. -- S.I,69; J.III,441; IV,11; V,203 (bhusa-dassaneyya); VI,192; Vv 6⁹; Pv 3³⁸; IV,7⁷; Miln.346; SnA 107 (“verbum intensivum”); Sdhp.289. (Page 507)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】谷壳，（玉黍蜀的）外壳。【形】很多，丰富的。 ~saŋ, 【副】非常地，常常，频繁地。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2,【形】大，巨大(strong, mighty, great) 。bhusaṁ,【中】多(adv. much, exceedingly, greatly, vehemently)。In cpds. bhusaṁ° & bhusa°.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1,【中】谷壳，(玉黍蜀的)外壳(chaff, husks)。【形】很多，丰富的。bhusaṁ,【副】非常地，常常，频繁地。bhusāgāra, 谷壳仓库(chaff-house)。opuṇāti bhusaṁ,去壳(to sift husks)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhusati: {'def': 'Bhussati [perhaps a legitimate form for Sk. bhaṣate (see P. bhasati), with u for a, so that the suggested correction of bhusati to bhasati (see under bhasati) is unfounded] to bark DA.I,317 (bhusati; vv. ll. bhussati & bhūsati); DhA.I,171, 172. -- See also bhasati & bhukka; -- pp. bhusita. (Page 507)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Bhussati(bhus +ya), 吠。【过】bhussi。【现分】bhussanta, bhussamāna。【独】bhussitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhuseti: {'def': '[denom. fr. bhusa²=*bhṛśayati; but not certain, may have to be read bhūseti, to endeavour, cp. Sk. bhūṣati] to make strong, to cause to grow (?) J.V,218 (C. expl^ns by “bhusaṁ karoti, vaḍḍheti” p. 224). (Page 507)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhusikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. bhusa¹] chaff A.I,242; Vin.II,181. (Page 507)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhusita: {'def': '[pp. of bhusati] barking J.IV,182 (°sadda, barking, noise). See also bhasita. (Page 507)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhussati: {'def': '(bhus + ya), 吠。【过】 bhussi。【现分】 ~santa, ~samāna。【独】~sitvā。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhutta: {'def': '[pp. of bhuñjati¹; Sk. bhukta] 1. (Pass.) eaten, being eaten Sn.p. 15; Dh.308; impers. eating Vin.IV,82 (bhuttaṁ hoti). Also °geha eating house J.V,290, and in phrase yathā-bhuttaṁ bhuñjatha “eat according to eating,” i. e. as ought to be eaten, eating in moderation D.II,173 (where Rh. D., Dial. II.203, trsl^s “ye shall eat as ye have eaten”)=III,62, 63 (where Rh. D., Dial. III,64 trsl^s “enjoy your possessions as you have been wont to do”; see note ibid.). We should favour a translation in the first sense. --dubbhuttaṁ, indigestible. --2. (Med. cp. bhuttar) having eaten, one who has eaten Miln.370 (sace bhutto bhaveyy’âhaṁ); also in phrase bhutta-pātar-āsa after having eaten breakfast J.II,273; DhA.IV,226.

--âvasesa the remainder of a meal Vin.II,216. (Page 506)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bhuñjati1 的【过分】；Sk. bhukta), 1.已吃，已享受。bhuttageha, 食堂，餐厅(eating house)。yathā-bhuttaṁ bhuñjatha, 依照吃法吃下(“eat according to eating” i. e. as ought to be eaten, eating in moderation)。bhuttadubbhuttaṁ, 难消化(indigestible)。bhutta-pātar-āsa,已吃过早餐(after having eaten breakfast )。bhuttāvasesa,餐点賸余(the remainder of a meal)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(bhuñjati 的【过分】), 已吃，已享受。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhuttar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. bhuj, cp. Sk. bhoktṛ already Vedic & Epic] one who eats or has eaten, or enjoys (cp. bhutta 2) J.V,465 (ahaṁ bhuttā bhakkhaṁ ras’uttamaṁ). (Page 506)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhuttavant: {'def': '(adj.) [bhutta+vant] having eaten, one who has eaten J.V,170 (=kata-bhatta-kicca); VvA.244. (Page 506)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhuttāvin: {'def': '(adj.) [bhutta+suffix °āvin, corresponding to Vedic °āyin] having eaten, one who has had a meal; Nom. sg. bhuttāvī Vin.IV,82; Miln.15 (+onīta-pattapāṇi); PvA.23 (+pavārita); SnA 58; Instr. bhuttāvinā Vin.IV,82; Gen. Dat. bhuttavissa D.II,195. Acc. bhuttāviṁ Vin.I,213; Sn.p. 111 (+onīta-pattapāṇiṁ); J.V,170; Nom. pl. bhuttāvī Vin.IV,81, & bhuttāvino S.IV,289. (Page 506)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhuttāvī: {'def': '【形】已吃了的人。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Bhuttāvin)(bhutta+suffix °āvin, corresponding to Vedic °āyin),【形】已吃了的人(having eaten, one who has had a meal)。Nom. sg. bhuttāvī; Instr. bhuttāvinā; Gen. Dat. bhuttavissa; Acc. bhuttāviṁ; Nom. pl. bhuttāvī & bhuttāvino。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhuvi: {'def': 'see bhū. (Page 507)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhuyya: {'def': 'the regular P. representative of Sk. bhūyas (compar.); for which usually bhiyya (q. v.). Only in cpd. yebhuyyena (q. v.). (Page 507)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhuñjaka: {'def': 'bhuñjitu, 【阳】吃的人，享受者。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhuñjati¹] eating, one who eats or enjoys, in °sammuti definition of “eater,” speaking of an eater, declaration or statement of eating VbhA.164. (Page 506)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'bhuñjitu(‹bhuñjati1),【阳】吃的人，享受者(eating, one who eats or enjoys, in ‘bhuñjakasammuti’ definition of “eater,” speaking of an eater, declaration or statement of eating)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhuñjana: {'def': '(‹bhuñjati1),【中】食(taking food, act of eating, feasting)。bhuñjanakāla,【阳】用餐时间(meal-time DhA I.346.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. bhuñjati¹] taking food, act of eating, feasting J.IV,371 (°kāraṇa); PvA.184. --kāla meal-time DhA.I,346. (Page 506)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】食。 ~kāla, 【阳】用餐时间。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhuñjati: {'def': '(bhuj吃+ṁ-a), 吃，享受。【过】bhuñji。【过分】bhutta。【现分】bhuñjanta, bhuñjamāna。【义】bhuñjitabba。【独】bhuñjitvā, bhuñjiya, bhutvā(【反】abhutvā)。【不】bhuñjituṁ, bhottuṁ。0', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [bhuj to purify, cleanse, sift, not given in this meaning by the Dhātupāṭha. Cp. Av. buxti purification buj to clean, also Lat. fungor (to get through or rid of, cp. E. function), Goth. us-baugjan to sweep; P. paribhuñjati 2, paribhojaniya & vinibbhujati. See Kern, Toev. p. 104, s. v. bhujissa] to clean, purify, cleanse: see bhuja² and bhujissa, also bhoja & bhojaka. (Page 506)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bhuj + ŋ-a), 吃，享受。【过】 bhuñji。【过分】 bhutta。【现分】~janta, ~jamāna。【潜】 ~jitabba。【独】 ~jitvā, bhuñjiya, bhutvā。【不】 ~jituŋ, bhottuŋ。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [bhuj to Lat. fruor, frūx=E. fruit, frugal etc.; Goth. brūkjan=As. brūkan=Ger. brauchen. The Dhtp 379 (& Dhtm 613) expl^ns bhuj by “pālan’ajjhohāresu,” i. e. eating & drinking for the purpose of living] to eat (in general), to enjoy, make use of, take advantage of, use Sn.102, 240, 259, 619; Dh.324; Pug.55. Pot. bhuñjeyya Sn.400; Dh.308, 2^nd pl. bhuñjetha Dh.70; Mhvs 25, 113. Imper. 2^nd med. bhuñjassa S.V,53; 3^rd act. bhuñjatu S.I,141; Sn.479; bhuñjassu Sn.421; ppr. bhuñjanto J.III,277: bhuñjamāna Th.1, 12; Sn.240. Fut. 1^st sg. bhokkhaṁ [Sk. bhoksyāmi] J.IV,117. Aor. 1^st sg. bhuñjiṁ Miln.47; 3^rd sg. bhuñji J.IV,370; 3^rd pl. abhuñjiṁsu Th.1, 922; abhuñjisuṁ Mhvs 7, 25. Ger. bhutvā J.III,53 (=bhuñjitvā C.); DhA.I,182; bhutvāna Sn.128. Grd. bhuñjitabba Mhvs 5, 127. Inf. bhottuñ: see ava°. ‹-› pp. bhutta. -- Caus. bhojeti (q. v.). Cp. bhoga, bhojana, bhojanīya, bhojja; also Desid. pp. bubbhukkhita; & ābhuñjati. (Page 506)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhuṅkaraṇa: {'def': '(adj.-nt.) [bhu+kṛ, see bhukka] making “bhu,” i. e. bow-wow, barking J.VI,355 (°sunakha); v. l. bhu-bhukka-sadda-karaṇa. (Page 506)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhuṅkaroti: {'def': '(bhuŋ + kar + o), 吠。【过】 ~kari。【过分】 ~kata。【现分】~karonta。【独】 ~katvā, ~karitvā。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(bhuṁ+kar行+o), 吠。【过】bhuṅkari。【过分】bhuṅkata。【现分】bhuṅkaronta。【独】bhuṅkatvā, bhuṅkaritvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic bhā & bhāḥ nt.] light, splendour; given as name of a jewel at an extremely doubtful passage J.V,317, 318, where T. reads “vara taṁ bhaññam icchasi,” & C. expl^s.: “bhā ti ratanass’etaṁ nāmaṁ.” The v. l. for bhaññaṁ is bhuñjaṁ; the passage may be corrupt from “varatu bhavaṁ yam icchasi.” (Page 501)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】光，光彩壮丽。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】光，光彩壮丽。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhāga: {'def': '【阳】部分，部份，派系。 ~vantu, bhāgī, 【形】分享的，带有一点的。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic bhāga, fr. bhaj, bhajati] 1. part, portion, fraction, share Vin.I,285; Sn.427 (sahassa-bhāgo maraṇassa=sahassaṁ bhāgānaṁ assā ti SnA 387; a thousand times a share of death, i. e. very near death, almost quite dead), 702 (v. l. SnA 492 for Sn.samāna-bhāva, evenness, proportionate-ness); Vv 14⁶ (=kummāsa-koṭṭhāsa VvA.62); Pv.I,11⁵ (aḍḍhi° one half); Vin.IV,264. -- Cp. vi°. --bhāgaso (Abl.-adv.) in parts, by parts, by portions, esp. in even portions, i. e. evenly, in proportion S.I,193 (according to each one’s share; cp. Th.1, 1242); M.III,183; Vv 7²; Miln.330, 415 (aneka° hundredfold or more). bhāgaso mita (of cities or dwelling-places etc.) evenly planned, well laid out, i. e. in squares Sn.300, 305 (nivesanāni suvibhattāni bhāgaso); J.V,266 (cp. C. on p. 272)=Nd² 304^{III, D}; Pv.I,10¹³ (=bhāgato mita PvA.52). --bhāgabhatta apportioned food, ration DhA.I,134. -- Cp. dobbhagga “disproportionateness,” i. e. bad luck. -- 2. apportioned share (of money), fee, remuneration, always in term ācariya° (ācariyassa) the teacher’s fee (usually consisting in 1,000 kahāpaṇas) J.I,273; V,457; VI,178; Miln.10; DhA.I,253. -- 3. division of space, quarter, side, place, region: disā° quarter of the compass Vin.II,217; para° outside part KhA 206 =PvA.24 (kuḍḍānaṁ parabhāgā=tiro-kuḍḍā); pacchābhāgaṁ (Acc. adv.) at the back part, behind PvA.114. -- fig. way, respect, in ubhato-bhāga-vimutta “free in both ways” D.II,71; M.I,477 (see Dial II.70; i. e. free both by insight and by the intellectual discipline of the 8 stages of Deliverance, the aṭṭha vimokkhā). -- 4. division of time, time, always --°, e. g. pubba° the past, apara° the future PvA.133; obl. cases adverbially: tena divasa-bhāgena (+ratti bhāgena) at that day (& that very night) Miln.18; apara-bhāge (Loc.) in future J.I,34; PvA.116. (Page 501)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】部分，部份，派系。bhāgavantu, bhāgī,【形】分享的，带有一点的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhāgadheyya: {'def': '~dheya, 【中】财富，命运。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'bhāgadheya,【中】财富，命运。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhāgaso: {'def': '【副】部份地。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【副】部份地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhāgavant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhāga, equal to bhāgin] sharing in, partaking of (Gen.) Dh.19, 20 (sāmaññassa). (Page 501)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāgimant: {'def': '(adj.) [a double adj. formation bhāgin+ mant] partaking in, sharing, possessing (with Gen.) Th.2, 204 (dukkhassa); ThA.171 (=bhāgin). (Page 501)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāgin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhāga. Cp. Vedic bhāgin] sharing in, partaking of (with Gen.), endowed with; getting, receiving A.II,80; III,42 (āyussa vaṇṇassa etc.); J.I,87 (rasānaṁ); Miln.18 (sāmaññassa); Vism.150 (lābhassa); DhA.II,90; VbhA.418 sq. (paññā as hāna-bhāginī, ṭhiti°, visesa° & nibbedha°). -- Also in def. of term Bhagavā at Nd¹ 142=Nd² 466=Vism.210. -- pl. bhāgino Pv III,1¹² (dukkhassa); PvA.18 (dānaphalassa), 175. -- Cp. bhāgavant, bhāgimant, bhāgiya. (Page 501)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāgineyya: {'def': '【阳】外甥(姊妹的儿子)。bhāgineyyā 【阴】外甥女(姊妹的女儿)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. bhaginī, Cp. Epic Sk. bhāgineya] sister’s son, nephew Sn.695; J.I,207; II,237; DhA.I,14; PvA.215. (Page 501)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】外甥（姊妹的儿子）。 ~yyā 【阴】外甥女（姊妹的女儿）。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhāgiya: {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 与…连接，有益于。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. bhāga, cp. bhāgin] connected with, conducive to, procuring; in foll. philos. terms: kusala° A.I,11; hāna°, visesa° D.III,274 sq.; hāna°, ṭhiti°, visesa°, nibbedha° Vism.15 (in verse), 88=Ps.I,35. ‹-› Cp. BSk. mokṣa bhāgīya, nirvedha° Divy 50; mokṣa° ibid. 363. (Page 501)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】(在【合】中) 与…连接，属於，有益於。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhāgya: {'def': '【中】好运气，财富。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhāgya; fr. bhaga, see also contracted form bhagga²] good luck, fortune J.V,484. (Page 501)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】好运气，财富。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhāgyavant: {'def': '(adj.) [same as bhaggavant, only differentiated as being the Sk. form and thus distinguished as sep. word by Commentators] having good luck, auspicious, fortunate, in def. of term “Bhagavā” at DA.I,34=Vism.210; also at VvA.231, where the abstr. bhāgyavantatā is formed as explⁿ of the term. bhāgyavatā (f.) at Vism.211. (Page 501)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāgī: {'def': '【阳】分配者，股东。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】分配者，股东。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhāgīrathī: {'def': '【阴】恒河。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】恒河。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhājaka: {'def': 'bhājetu,【阳】划分者，分配者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. bhajeti] distributing, one who distributes or one charged with the office of distributing clothes, food etc. among the Bhikkhus Vin.I,285 (cīvara°); A.III,275 (cīvara°, phala°, khajjaka°). (Page 501)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'bhājetu, 【阳】划分者，分配者。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhājana: {'def': '² (nt.) [fr. bhāj] division, dividing up, in pada° dividing of words, treating of words separately DhsA.343; similarly bhājaniyaṁ that which should be classed or divided DhsA.2, also in pada° division of a phrase DhsA.54. (Page 501)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. bhājana, fr. bhāj] a bowl, vessel, dish, usually earthenware, but also of other metal, e. g. gold (suvaṇṇa°) DA.I,295; copper (tamba°) DhA.I,395; bronze (kaṁsa°) Vism.142 (in simile). ‹-› Vin.I,46; Sn.577 (pl. mattika-bhājanā); J.II,272 (bhikkhā°); III,366 (id.), 471; V 293 (bhatta°); Miln.107; VvA.40, 292 (v. l. bhojana); PvA.104, 145, 251; Sdhp.571.

--vikati a special bowl J.V,292 (so read for T. bhojana°); Vism.376. (Page 501)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】碗，盘，容器。 ~vikati, 【阴】各种不同类型的盘子或容器。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】1.碗，盘，容器。2.分开，分配。3.分配水果的人(one who distributes fruit, an official term in the vihāra. Vin.IV,38, cp. BSk. phalacāraka)。bhājanantarikā(bhājana容器+antarikā间隔),【阴】厨柜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【动名】分开，分配。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhājanavikati: {'def': '【阴】各种不同类型的盘子或容器。Cv.II,124.︰“Na, bhikkhave, ekabhājane bhuñjitabbaṁ …pe… na ekathālake pātabbaṁ… na ekamañce tuvaṭṭitabbaṁ… na ekattharaṇā tuvaṭṭitabbaṁ… na ekapāvuraṇā tuvaṭṭitabbaṁ… na ekattharaṇapāvuraṇā tuvaṭṭitabbaṁ. Yo tuvaṭṭeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.(诸比丘！不得食同一器，不得饮同一器，不得卧同一床，不得卧同一敷具，不得盖同一被子，卧者犯恶作。」)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhājeti: {'def': '[Caus. of bhajati, but to be taken as root by itself; cp. Dhtm 777 bhāja=puthakkare] to divide, distribute, deal out Vin.IV,223 (ppr. bhājiyamāna); J.I,265; DhsA.4 (fut. bhājessati) grd. bhājetabba Vin.I,285. -- pp. bhājita. (Page 501)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bhāj + e), 分开，分配。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~jita。【现分】 ~jenta。【独】 ~jetvā。【潜】 ~jetabba。【被】 bhājīyati。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(bhāj分开+e), 分开，分配。【过】bhājesi。【过分】bhājjita。【现分】bhājenta。【独】bhājetvā。【义】bhājetabba。【被】bhājīyati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhājita: {'def': '[pp. of bhājeti] divided, distributed; nt. that which has been dealt out or allotted, in cpd. bhājit-âbhājita A.III,275. (Page 501)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhājāpeti: {'def': '(‹bhājeti),【使】使分开，使分配。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhākuṭika: {'def': '【形】眉头一皱的，皱眉头的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhakuṭi] knitting the eyebrows, frowning, only in redupl. cpd. bhākuṭika-bhākuṭiko frowning continually, supercilious Vin.II,11=III,181 (manda-mando+); Nd² 342 (korajika-korajiko+); Vism.26 (id.). -- f. bhākuṭikā a frown, frowning, superciliousness, def. at Vism.26 as “padhāna-parimathitabhāva-dassanena bhākuṭi [read bhakuṭi] --karaṇaṁ mukha-saṅkoco ti vuttaṁ hoti.” It occurs in stock phrase bhākuṭikā bhākuṭiyaṁ kuhanā kuhāyanā in def. of kuhanā at Vbh.352=Vism.23, 25 (cp. Nd¹ 225), and at Nd² 342 D. See also VbhA.482 (bhākuṭikaraṇaṁ sīlam assā ti bhākuṭiko). The form bhākuṭiyaṁ (nt.) is originally the same as bhākuṭikā, only differentiated in C.-style. The def. at Vism.26 is “bhākuṭikassa bhāvo bhākuṭiyaṁ.” The v. l. ibid. is bhākuṭitā. --bhākuṭikaṁ karoti to make a frowning face, to act superciliously Vism.105 (as a quality of one “dosa-carita”). (Page 501)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】眉头一皱的，皱眉头的。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhānu: {'def': 'bhāṇu【阳】1.光。2.太阳。bhānumantu,【形】发光的。【阳】太阳。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 光。 2. 太阳。 ~mantu, 【形】发光的。【阳】太阳。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Vedic bhānu (m.) shine, light, ray; Epic Sk. also “sun”] light, bright red J.III,62 (of the kaṇavera flower); VvA.175 (°raṁsi). (Page 502)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhānumant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhānu, ray of light Vedic bhānumant, Ep. of Agni; also Epic Sk. the sun] luminous, brilliant; mostly of the sun; Nom. bhānumā S.I,196= Th.1, 1252; Vv 64¹⁷, 78⁷ (=ādicca VvA.304); J.I,183. Acc. bhānumaṁ Sn.1016. -- The spelling is sometimes bhāṇumā. (Page 502)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāra: {'def': '[fr. bhṛ, Vedic bhāra; cp. bhara] 1. anything to carry, a load Vin.III,278 (Bdhgh; dāru° a load of wood). bhāraṁ vahati to carry a load A.I,84; VvA.23. --garu° a heavy load, as “adj.” “carrying a heavy load” J.V,439 (of a woman,=pregnant). --bhāratara (adj.‹-› compar.) forming a heavier load Miln.155. -- Cp. ati°, sam°. -- 2. a load, cartload (as measure of quantity) VvA.12 (saṭṭhi-sakaṭa°-parimāṇa); PvA.102 (aneka°parimāṇa). -- 3. (fig.) a difficult thing, a burden or duty, i. e. a charge, business, office, task, affair Vism. 375; J.I,292; II,399; IV,427; VI,413; DhA.I,6, 111. Several bhārā or great tasks are mentioned exemplifying the meaning of “gambhīra” & “duddasa” (saccāni) at VbhA.141, viz. mahā-samuddaṁ manthetvā ojāya nīharaṇaṁ; Sineru-pādato vālikāya uddharaṇaṁ; pabbataṁ pīḷetvā rasassa nīharaṇaṁ. -- 4. (fig.) in metaphors for the burden of (the factors of renewed) existence (the khandhas and similar agents). Esp. in phrase panna-bhāra “one whose load (or burden) has been laid down,” one who has attained Arahantship M.I,139; A.III,84; S.I,233; Dh.402 (=ohita-khandha-bhāra DhA.IV,168); Sn.626 (same explⁿ at SnA 467), 914 (expl^d as patita-bhāra, oropita°, nikkhitta° Nd¹ 334, where 3 bhāras in this sense are distinguished, viz. khandha°, kilesa°, abhisaṅkhāra°); Th.1, 1021. So at Vism.512 with ref. to the ariya-saccāni, viz. bhāro= dukkha-saccaṁ, bhār’ādānaṁ=samuda-saccaṁ, bhāranikkhepanaṁ=nirodha-s., bhāra-nikkhepan’upāya = magga-s. -- On bhāra in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 118.

--ādāna the taking up of a burden S.III,25. --(m)oropana “laying down the load,” i. e. delivery of a pregnant woman Bu II.115. --ṭṭha contained in a load, carried as a burden Vin.III,47. --nikkhepana the laying down or taking off of a burden S.III,25. --mocana delivery (of a pregnant woman) J.I,19. --vāhin “burdenbearer,” one who carries an office or has a responsibility A.IV,24 (said of a bhikkhu). --hāra load-carrier, burdenbearer S.III,25 sq. (Page 502)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】重量，负荷，负担，工作，事件。 ~nikkhepana, 【中】那下负担，放下负荷。 ~mocana, 【中】摆脱负担。 ~vāhī, 【阳】承受负担，带有公职者。 ~hāra, 【阳】负担的承受者，负荷的运送者。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹bhr, Vedic bhāra; cp. bhara),【阳】重量，负荷，负担，工作，事件。bhāranikkhepana,【中】那下负担，放下负荷。bhāramocana,【中】摆脱负担。bhāravāhī,【阳】承受负担，带有公职者。bhārahāra,【阳】负担的承受者，负荷的运送者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhāraka: {'def': '(-°) [fr. bhāra] a load, only in cpd. gadrabha° a donkey-load (of goods) J.II,109; DhA.I,123. (Page 502)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhārataka: {'def': '[fr. bhara] “the petty descendants of Bhārata” or: load-carrier, porter (?) Ś IV.117 (indignantly applied to apprentices and other low class young men who honour the Mahā-Kaccāna). (Page 502)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhārika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhāra] 1. loaded, heavy J.V,84, 477; Miln.261. -- 2. full of, loaded down with (-°) VvA.314 (sineha° hadaya). -- 3. grievous, serious, sorrowful PvA.82 (hadaya). -- 4. important Miln.240, 311. -- See bhāriya. (Page 502)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】装满东西的，重的，充满的。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】装满东西的，重的，充满的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhārin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhṛ, cp. bhāra] carrying, wearing, only in cpd. mālā° (māla°), wearing a garland (of flowers) J.IV,60, 82; V,45; where it interchanges with °dhārin (e. g. Vv.32³; v. l. at PvA.211; cp. BSk. °dhārin MVastu I.124). -- f. °bhārinī J.III,530; VvA.12; and °bhārī Th.1, 459 (as v. l.; T. °dhārī). See also under mālā. (Page 502)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāriya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhāra Vedic bhārya to be nourished or supported; bhāryā wife] 1. heavy, weighty, grave, serious; always fig. with ref. to a serious offence, either as bhāriyaṁ pāpaṁ a terrible sin PvA.195, or bh. kammaṁ a grave deed, a sin DhA.I,298, 329; II,56; III,120; VvA.68; or bhāriyaṁ alone (as nt.), something grave, a sin DhA.I,64. Similarly with ati° as atibhāriyaṁ kammaṁ a very grave deed DhA.I,70, or atibhāriyaṁ id. DhA.I,186. -- 2. bhāriyā (=bhārikā, f. of bhāraka) carrying, fetching, bringing J.VI,563 (phala°). (Page 502)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】重的，严重的。abhāriya,【形】不重的，不严重的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】重的，严重的。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhārukacchaka: {'def': 'see bharu°. (Page 502)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāsa: {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. bhāsa] --sakuṇa a bird of prey, a vulture [Abhp. 645, 1049]; as one of the lucky omens enum^d (under the so-called maṅgala-kathā) at KhA 118 (with v. l. SS. cāta° & vāca°, BB cāba°)=Nd¹ 87 (on Sn.790) (T. reads vāta°; v. l. SS vāpa°, BB chapa°). (Page 503)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāsaka: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. bhāṣ] speaking DA.I,52 (avaṇṇa° uttering words of blame). (Page 503)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāsana: {'def': '【中】演讲，敍述，谈话。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】演讲，叙述，谈话。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. bhāṣ] speaking, speech Dhtm 162; Sdhp.68. (Page 503)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāsantara: {'def': '【中】不同的语言。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】不同的语言。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhāsati: {'def': '(bhās说+a), 说，讲，照耀。【过】bhāsi, abhāsatha。【过分】bhāsita。【现分】bhāsanta。【独】bhāsitvā。【义】bhāsitabba。A.5.198./III,244.：成就五支之语者，是善说(vācā subhāsitā)，不恶说(no dubbhāsitā)；无罪(anavajjā)；不为智者所诃(ananuvajjā viññūnaṁ)。何等为五？即：应时语(Kālena ca bhāsitā)；真实语(saccā ca bhāsitā)；柔软语(saṇhā ca bhāsitā)；引利语(atthasaṁhitā ca bhāsitā)；慈心语(mettacittena ca bhāsitā)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [bhāṣ; Dhtp 317: vacane; Dhtm 467; vācāya] to speak, to say, to speak to, to call M.I,227, Sn.158, 562, 722; Dh.1, 246, 258; also bhāsate Sn.452. --Pot. bhāseyya Vin.II,189; Sn.451, 930; SnA 468 (for udīraye Dh.408); bhāse Dh.102; Sn.400; & bhāsaye A.II,51= J.V,509 (with gloss katheyya for joteyya=bhāseyya). -- Aor. abhāsi Vin.IV,54; PvA.6, 17, 23, 69; 1^st sg. also abhāsissaṁ (Cond.) Pv.I,6⁸ (=abhāsiṁ PvA.34); imper. pres. bhāsa Sn.346; ppr. bhāsamāne A.II,51= J.V,509; Sn.426; Dh.19; J.IV,281 (perhaps better with v. l. as hasamāna); V,63; & bhāsanto Sn.543. -- grd. bhāsitabba A.IV,115; Vism.127. -- Med. ind. pres. 2^nd sg. bhāsase Vv 34²; imper. pres. 2^nd sg. bhāsassu M.II,199. -- An apparent ger. form abhāsiya It.59, 60 (micchā vācaṁ abhāsiya) is problematic. It may be an old misspelling for ca bhāsiya, as a positive form is required by the sense. The vv. ll. however do not suggest anything else but abhāsiya; the editor of It suggests pa°. -- Cp. anu, o°, samanu°. (Page 503)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bhās + a), 说，讲，照耀。【过】 bhāsi。【过分】 bhāsita。【现分】~santa。【独】 ~sitvā。【潜】 ~sitabba。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [bhās Dhtm 467: dittiyaṁ] to shine, shine forth, fill with splendour Sn.719 (2^nd sg. fut. bhāsihi=bhāsissasi pakāsessasi SnA 499). Usually with prep. prefix pa° (so read at Pv.I,10⁹ for ca bh.). Cp. o°, vi°. (Page 503)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāsin: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [cp. Epic Sk. bhāṣin] speaking A.I,102 (dubbhāsita-bhāsin). (Page 504)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāsita: {'def': '【中】敍述。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of bhāsati¹] spoken, said, uttered A.V,194; Miln.28; DhA.IV,93. -- (nt.) speech, word Dh.363; M.I,432. Usually as su° & dub° (both adj. & nt.) well & badly spoken, or good & bad speech Vin.I,172; M.II,250; A.I,102; II,51 (su°; read bhāsita for bāsita); VI,226; Sn.252, 451, 657; J.IV,247, 281 (su°, well spoken or good words); Pv.II,6²⁰ (su°); PvA.83 (dub°). (Page 503)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】叙述。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhāsitar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. bhāṣ] one who speaks, utters; a speaker S.I,156; Pug.56; SnA 549. (Page 503)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāsitu: {'def': 'bhāsī,【阳】说话者，讲话者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'bhāsī, 【阳】说话者，讲话者。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhāsura: {'def': '【形】明亮的，光亮的。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】明亮的，光亮的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. bhāsura fr. bhas] bright, shining, resplendent ThA.139, 212; VvA.12. (Page 504)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāsā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. bhāṣā] speech, language, esp. vernacular, dialect J.IV,279 (manussa° human speech), 392 (caṇḍāla°); KhA 101 (saka-saka°-anurūpa); SnA 397 (Milakkha°); DA.I,176 (Kirātā-Yavanâdi-Millakkhānaṁ bhāsā); MA.I,1 (Sīhaḷa°); VbhA.388 (18 dialects, of which 5 are mentioned; besides the Māgadhabhāsā). (Page 503)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】语言，方言。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】语言，方言。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhātar: {'def': '[cp. Vedic bhrātar=Av. bratar, Gr. frάtwr, Lat. frater, Goth. brōpar=Ohg. bruoder, E. brother] brother, Nom. sg. bhātā Sn.296; J.I,307; PvA.54, 64; Gen. sg. bhātuno ThA.71 (Ap. V,36), & bhātussa Mhvs 8, 9; Instr. bhātarā J.I,308; Acc. bhātaraṁ Sn.125; J.I,307; Loc. bhātari J.III,56. -- Nom. pl. bhātaro J.I,307, & bhātuno Th.2, 408; Acc. bhāte Dpvs VI,21. ‹-› In cpds. both bhāti° (. bhātisadisa like a brother J.V,263), and bhātu° (: bhātu-jāyā brother’s wife, sisterin-law J.V,288; Vism.95). Cp. bhātika & bhātuka. On pop. etym. see bhaginī. Bhāti [bhā Dhtp 367, Dhtm 594: dittiyaṁ; Idg. *bhē, cp. Sk. bhāḥ nt. splendour, radiance, bhāsati to shine forth; Gr. fάos light, fai/nw to show etc.; Ags. bonian to polish=Ger. bohnen; also Sk. bhāla shine, splendour, =Ags. bael funeral pile] to shine (forth), to appear D.II,205; Vv 35²; J.II,313. -- pp. bhāta: see vi°. (Page 502)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāti: {'def': '(bhā +a), 说，讲，照耀。【过】bhāsi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(bhā + a), 照耀。【过】 bhāsi。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhātika: {'def': '(& Bhātiya) [fr. bhātar, cp. Class. Sk. bhrātṛka] lit. brotherly, i. e. a brother, often°-: “brother” -- (a) bhātika: J.I,253 (jeṭṭhaka°); VI,32; DhA.I,14 (°thera my Thera-brother or br.-thera), 101, 245; PvA.75. ‹-› (b) bhātiya: Vism.292 (dve °therā two Th. brothers). -- Cp. bhātuka. (Page 502)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'bhātu,【阳】兄弟。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'bhātu, 【阳】兄弟。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhātuka: {'def': '[=bhātika, fr. Sk. bhrātṛka] brother, usually --°, viz. pati° brother-in-law, husband’s brother J.VI,152; putta° son & brother DhA.I,314; sa° with the brother ThA.71 (Ap. V,36). (Page 502)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāva: {'def': '(‹bhū),【阳】1.成为(being)，变成(becoming)，有(存在)，情况(condition)，自然(nature)，独自地(=attabhāva; by itself)，【哲】仍然存在。bhāvadasakakalāpa(bhāva-dasaka-kalāpa),【阳】性根十法聚。bhāvarūpa﹐性根色，有女根色与男根色两种。【无】bhāvayato﹐结果。atthikabhāva state of need; ūnabhāva depletion; ekībhāva loneliness; sithillbhāva (for sithila° in conn.with kr & bhū) relaxation.-- (b) adverbs.uparibhāva high condition ; pātubhāva appearance; vinābhāva difference.(c) nouns & noun-derivations:attabhāva individual state, life, character (=citta ); asaraṇabhāva state of not remembering ; samaṇabhāva,沙门戒体(condition of a recluse)。(d) forms of verbs：nibbattabhāva fact of being reborn; magg’ārūḷhabhāva the condition of having started on one’s way ; baddha° that he was bound; suhitabhāva that they were well .The translation can give either a full sentence with “that it was” etc.( or a phrase like “the fact or state of,” or use as an English abstract noun ending in --ness (atthikabhāva needfulness, ekibhāva loneliness), --ion (ūnabhāva depletion, pātubhāva manifestation).--hood (attabhāva selfhood), or --ship (samaṇabhāva recluseship). sampayuttabhāvo (m.), for *sampayuttattaṁ (abstr.); bhākuṭikassa bhāvo=bhakuṭiyaṁ; sovacassassa bhāvo= sovacassatā; mittassa bhāva=mettaṁ. Here sometimes bhava for bhāva.-- 2.(in pregnant, specifically Buddhistic sense) cultivation or production by thought, mental condition, esp.a set mental condition (see der.bhāvanā).Sometimes (restricted to Vin & J) in sense “thinking of someone,” i.e.affection, love, sentiment.-- abhāva (late, only in C.style) not being, absence, want ; Abl. abhāvato through not being, in want of。有(存在)有两种：「业有」(kammabhāva)与「生有」(upapattibhāva)。「业有」是指一切能够产生新一世的善与不善业，即29种善与不善思。「生有」则是指32种果报心、它们的相应心所及业生色。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. bhū, cp. Vedic bhāva] 1. being, becoming, condition, nature; very rarely by itself (only in later & C. literature, as e. g. J.I,295 thīnaṁ bhāvo, perhaps best to be translated as “women’s character,” taking bhāva=attabhāva); usually --°, denoting state or condition of, and representing an abstr. der. from the first part of the cpd. e. g. gadrabha° “asininity” J.II,109. Thus in connection with (a) adjectives: atthika° state of need PvA.120; ūna° depletion SnA 463; ekī° loneliness Vism.34; sithill° (for sithila° in conn. with kṛ & bhū) relaxation Vism.502. -- (b) adverbs. upari° high condition M.I,45; pātu° appearance Sn.560; vinā° difference Sn.588. (c) nouns & noun-derivations: atta° individual state, life, character Sn.388 (=citta SnA 374); asaraṇa° state of not remembering DhA.III,121; samaṇa° condition of a recluse Sn.551. -- (d) forms of verbs: nibbatta° fact of being reborn DhA.III,121; magg’ārūḷha° the condition of having started on one’s way VvA.64; baddha° that he was bound; suhita° that they were well J.IV,279. The translation can give either a full sentence with “that it was” etc. (VvA.64: “that he had started on his way”), or a phrase like “the fact or state of,” or use as an English abstract noun ending in --ness (atthika-bhāva needfulness, eki° loneliness), --ion (ūna° depletion, pātu° manifestation). --hood (atta° selfhood), or --ship (samaṇa° recluseship). ‹-› Similarly in Com. style: sampayutta-bhāvo (m.) DhA.III,94, for *sampayuttattaṁ (abstr.); bhākuṭikassa bhāvo=bhakuṭiyaṁ Vism.26; sovacassassa bhāvo= sovacassatā KhA 148; mittassa bh.=mettaṁ KhA 248. Here sometimes bhava for bhāva. -- 2. (in pregnant, specifically Buddhistic sense) cultivation or production by thought, mental condition, esp. a set mental condition (see der. bhāvanā). Sometimes (restricted to Vin & J) in sense “thinking of someone,” i. e. affection, love, sentiment. -- (a) in combⁿ khanti, diṭṭhi, ruci, bhāva at Vin.II,205; III,93; IV,3, 4. -- (b) in Jātaka passages: J.V,237; VI,293 (bhāvaṁ karoti, with Loc., to love). --abhāva (late, only in C. style) not being, absence, want PvA.25; Abl. abhāvato through not being, in want of PvA.9, 17. --sabhāva (sva+bhāva) see sep. (Page 502)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】情况，自然，〖哲〗仍然存在。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhāvanā: {'def': '【阴】增加，经由思考的发展，禅修。 ~nānuyoga, 【阳】应用禅修。 ~maya, 【形】由禅修完成的。 ~vidhāna, 【中】禅修的程序。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. bhāveti, or fr. bhāva in meaning of bhāva 2, cp. Class. Sk. bhāvanā] producing, dwelling on something, putting one’s thoughts to, application, developing by means of thought or meditation, cultivation by mind, culture. -- See on term Dhs.trsl 261 (=² 240); Expos. I.217 (=DhsA.163); Cpd. 207 n. 2. ‹-› Cp. pari°, vi°, sam°. -- Vin.I,294 (indriya°); D.III,219 (three: kāya°, citta°, paññā°), 221, 225, 285, 291; S.I,48; Dh.73, 301; J.I,196 (mettā°); III,45 (id.); Nd¹ 143 (saññā°); Nett 91 (samatha-vipassanaṁ); Vbh.12, 16 sq., 199, 325; Vism.130 (karaṇa, bhāvanā, rakkhaṇa; here bh.=bringing out, keeping in existence), 314 (karuṇā°), 317 (upekkhā°); Miln.25 (°ṁ anuyuñjati); Sdhp.15, 216, 233, 451.

--ânuyoga application to meditation Vbh.244, 249. --ārāma joy of or pleasure in self culture A.II,28. --bala power to increase the effect of meditation, power of self-culture A.I,52; D.III,213. --maya accomplished by culture practice; brought into existence by practice (of cultured thought), cp. Cpd. 207. D.III,218, 219; Nett 8; with dānamaya & sīlamaya at It.19, 51; Vbh.135, 325. --vidhāna arrangement of process of culture DhsA.168=Vism.122. (Page 503)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹bhāveti, or bhava in meaning of bhāva2),【阴】增加，经由思考的发展，禅修(producing, dwelling on something, putting one’s thoughts to, application, developing by means of thought or meditation, cultivation by mind, culture)。bhāvanānuyoga,【阳】应用禅修。bhāvanāmaya,【形】由禅修完成的。bhāvanāvidhāna,【中】禅修的程序。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhāvanīya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. fr. bhāveti, but taken by Bdhgh as grd. formation fr. bhāvanā] “being as ought to be,” to be cultivated, to be respected, in a self-composed state (cp. bhāvitatta) M.I,33 (garu+; expl^d by Bdhgh as “addhā ‘yam āyasmā jānaṁ jānāti passaṁ passatī ti evaṁ sambhāvanīyo” MA 156); S.V,164; A.III,110; Miln.373; PvA.9. See also under manobhāvanīya. (Page 503)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(grd.‹bhāveti, or bhāvanā),【形】应修习的(to be cultivated)，令人尊敬的(to be respected)，镇定自若的(in a self-composed state﹐cp.bhāvitatta)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】被培养的，被尊敬的。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhāveti: {'def': '【使】使修习。3.sg.opt. bhāvaye。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(bhū+e) (Caus. of bhū, bhavati), 修习，增加，培养，发展(to beget, produce, increase, cultivate, develop)。【过】bhāvesi。【过分】bhāvita。【现分】bhāventa, bhāvayamāna。【义】bhāvetabba。【独】bhāvetvā。【不】bhāvetuṁ。Ps.(PTS.II,94.；CS:p.285)︰Bhāvetīti kathaṁ bhāveti? āvajjanto bhāveti, jānanto bhāveti, passanto bhāveti, paccavekkhanto bhāveti, cittaṁ adhiṭṭhahanto bhāveti, saddhāya adhimuccanto bhāveti, vīriyaṁ paggaṇhanto bhāveti, satiṁ upaṭṭhāpento bhāveti, cittaṁ samādahanto bhāveti, paññāya pajānanto bhāveti, abhiññeyyaṁ abhijānanto bhāveti, pariññeyyaṁ parijānanto bhāveti, pahātabbaṁ pajahanto bhāveti, bhāvetabbaṁ bhāvento bhāveti, sacchikātabbaṁ sacchikaronto bhāveti.( ‘修习’，如何而修习？正在倾心而修习，知而修习，见而修习，观察而修习，心决定而修习，信解而修习，提起精进而修习，念近住而修习，集中而修习，慧知而修习，证知应证知而修习，遍知应遍知而修习，断应断而修习，修习应修习而修习，现证应现证而修习。) cf. āsevati(练习)。DA.：Bhāvanāti vaḍḍhanā bruhanā.( ‘修习’︰增长、增加。) DhsA (CS:p.86)：Bhāvanāyāti sesamaggattayena. Sesamaggattayañhi paṭhamamaggena diṭṭhasmiṁyeva dhamme bhāvanāvasena uppajjati, adiṭṭhapubbaṁ kiñci na passati, tasmā bhāvanāti vuccati.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(bhū + e), 增加，培养，发展。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 bhāvita。【现分】 ~venta, ~vayamāna。【潜】 ~vetabba。【独】 ~vetvā。【不】~vetuŋ。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of bhū, bhavati] to beget, produce, increase, cultivate, develop (by means of thought & meditation), The Buddhist equivalent for mind-work as creative in idea, M.I,293; cp. B.Psy p. 132. -- D.II,79; M.II,11 (cattāro sammappadhāne & iddhipāde); S.I,188 (cittaṁ ekaggaṁ), Th.1, 83, 166 (ppr. bhāvayanto); Sn.341 (cittaṁ ekaggaṁ), 507 (ppr. bhāvayaṁ), 558 (grd. bhāvetabba), 1130 (ppr. bhāvento=āsevanto bahulī-karonto Nd² 476); Dh.87, 350, 370; J.I,264 (mettaṁ), 415, II.22; Nd² s. v. kāmaguṇā (p. 121) (where grd. in sequence “sevitabba, bhajitabba, bhāvetabba, bahulī-kātabba”); Pug.15, DhA.III,171; Sdhp.48, 495. -- Pass. ppr. bhāviyamāna A.II,140; KhA 148. -- pp. bhāvita. (Page 503)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāvin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhāva, Epic Sk. bhāvin “imminent”] “having a being,” going to be, as --° in avassa° sure to come to pass, inevitable J.I,19. -- f. bhāvinī future VvA.314 (or is it bhāvanīya? cp. v. l. S bhāvaniyā). (Page 503)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāvita: {'def': '(bhāveti 的【过分】),修习，有生起(uppādita)、增长(vaḍḍhita)的意思。bhāvitatta,【形】训练良好的，镇定的，沉著的。《增支部注》(AA.6.13./III,346~7.)︰Bhāvitāti vaḍḍhitā. Bahulīkatāti punappunaṁ katā. Yānīkatāti yuttayānasadisā katā. Vatthukatāti patiṭṭhā katā. Anuṭṭhitāti adhiṭṭhitā. Paricitāti samantato citā ācitā upacitā. Susamāraddhāti suppaguṇakaraṇena suṭṭhu samāraddhā.(修习︰增长。多作︰一再地作。作乘︰等於车子上轭的作。作基︰作依止处。实行︰摄受。积聚︰整个的堆积、累积、集聚。善确立︰以善熟练的善确立。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(bhāveti 的【过分】), 已发展。 ~tatta, 【形】训练良好的，镇定的，沉着的。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of bhāveti] developed, made to become by means of thought, cultured, well-balanced A.V,299 (cittaṁ parittaṁ abhāvitaṁ; opp. cittaṁ appamāṇaṁ subhāvitaṁ); Sn.516, 558. (Page 503)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāvitatta: {'def': '² (nt.) [abstr. fr. bhāvita=*bhāvitattvaṁ] only neg. a° the fact of not developing or cultivating S.III,153, 475; Pv.II,9⁶⁶. (Page 503)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) [bhāvita+attan] one whose attan (ātman) is bhāvita, i. e. well trained or composed. Attan here=citta (as PvA.139), thus “self-composed, well-balanced” A.IV,26; Sn.277, 322, 1049; Dh.106, 107; Nd² 142; Nd² 475 B (indriyāni bh.); J.II,112 (°bhāvanāya when the training of thought is perfect); Vism.185 (°bhāvana, adj. one of well-trained character), 267, 400 (+bahulī-kata); DhA.I,122 (a°); ThA.164 (indriya°). See foll. (Page 503)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāvī: {'def': '【形】将成为的，不可避免的。(p243)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Bhāvin)(‹bhāva, Epic Sk. bhāvin “imminent”),【形】将成为的( “having a being,” going to be)。avassabhāvī,不可避免的( sure to come to pass, inevitable)。bhāvinī,【阴】未来(future)。evaṁbhāvī, 如此将成为，如此的性质。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhāyati: {'def': '(bhi + a), 害怕，畏惧。【过】 bhāyi。【现分】 bhāyanta。【潜】bhāyitabba。【独】 bhāyitvā。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(bhī(梵bhī / bhīs)害怕+a)(cp. Sk. bhayate, bhī, pres. redupl. bibheti), 害怕，畏惧。【过】bhāyi。【现分】bhāyanta。【义】bhāyitabba。【独】bhāyitvā。to be afraid. pres, ind. 1st sg. bhāyāmi; 2nd sg. bhāyasi; 1st pl. bhāyāma; 3rd pl. bhāyanto; Imper. 2nd pl. bhāyatha; pot. 3rd sg. bhāye & bhāyeyya; 3rd pl. bhāyeyyuṁ. aor. 1st sg. bhāyiṁ; 2nd sg. bhāyi & usually in prohib. mā bhāyi do not be afraid. grd. bhāyitabba. caus. I. bhāyayate to frighten ; caus. II. bhāyāpeti. pp. bhīta。abhāyana﹐不害怕。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. bhayate, bhī, pres. redupl. bibheti; Idg. *bhei, cp. Av. bayente they frighten; Lith. bijotis to be afraid; Ohg. bibēn=Ger. beben. Nearest synonym is tras] to be afraid. Pres, Ind. 1^st sg. bhāyāmi Th.1, 21; Sn.p. 48; 2^nd sg. bhāyasi Th.2, 248; 1^st pl. bhāyāma J.II,21; 3^rd pl. bhāyanto Dh.129; Imper. 2^nd pl. bhāyatha Ud.51; J.III,4; Pot. 3^rd sg. bhāye Sn.964 & bhāyeyya Miln.208; 3^rd pl. bhāyeyyuṁ Miln.208. ‹-› Aor. 1^st sg. bhāyiṁ DhA.III,187; 2^nd sg. bhāyi Th.1, 764; DhA.III,187; & usually in Prohib. mā bhāyi do not be afraid S v.369; J.I,222; DhA.I,253. -- grd. bhāyitabba Nd² s.v. kāmaguṇā B; DhA.III,23. ‹-› Caus. I. bhāyayate to frighten J.III,99 (C.: utraseti); Caus. II. bhāyāpeti J.III,99, 210. -- pp. bhīta. (Page 502)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāyitabbaka: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of bhāyati+ka] to be feared, dreadful, fearful, Sdhp.95. (Page 502)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāyāpeti: {'def': '(bhāyati 的【使】), 惊吓。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。【独】~petvā。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(bhāyati 的【使】), 惊吓。【过】bhāyāpesi。【过分】bhāyāpita。【独】bhāyāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhāṇa: {'def': '[fr. bhaṇati] reciting or preaching, in pada° reciting the verses of the Scriptures DhA.II,95 (v. l. paṭibhāna); III,345; IV,18.

--vāra a section of the Scriptures, divided into such for purposes of recitation, “a recital” Vin.I,14; II,247; DA. 13; MA 2 (concerning the Bh. of Majjhima Nikāya); SnA 2 (of Sutta Nipāta), 608 (id.); DhsA.6 (of Dhammasaṅgaṇī, cp. Expos. 8 n. 3), and frequently in other Commentaries & Expositionary Works. (Page 501)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāṇaka: {'def': '【阳】1.大的广口瓶。2.诵经者。注解书提到的Bhāṇakā(诸诵出者)此系经、律等之诵出者、专家。例如：Dīghabhāṇaka(长者诵部)，Majjhimabhāṇaka(中部诵者)、Saṁyuttabhāṇaka(相应部诵者)、Aṅguttarabhāṇaka(增支部诵者)、Jātakabhāṇaka(本生经诵者)Dhammapadabhāṇaka(法句经诵者)、Ubhato-bhāṇaka(律之大分别、比丘尼分别两者之诵者)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 诵经者。 2. 大的广口瓶。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (adj.-n.) [fr. bhaṇati] speaking; (n.) a reciter, repeater, preacher (of sections of the Scriptures), like Aṅguttara° Vism.74 sq.; Dīgha° DA.I,15, 131; J.I,59; Vism.36, 266; Jātaka° etc. Miln.341 sq.; Majjhima° Vism.95 (Revatthera), 275, 286, 431; Saṁyutta° Vism.313 (Cūḷa-Sivatthera). Unspecified at SnA 70 (Kalyāṇavihāravāsi-bhāṇaka-dahara-bhikkhu; reading doubtful). -- f. bhāṇikā Vin.IV,285 (Thullanandā bahussutā bhāṇikā); also in cpd. mañju-bhāṇikā sweet-voiced, uttering sweet words J.VI,422. (Page 501)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [cp. Sk. bhāṇḍaka a small box: Kathāsarits. 24, 163; & see Müller, P.Gr. p. 48] a jar Vin.II,170 (loha°); III,90. (Page 501)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāṇavāra: {'def': '【阳】一段经，含有 8,000 文字。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】一日诵，指结集经典时，一日诵出之经典份量(约含有 8,000 字)。后世演变为一日课诵经典的份量。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhāṇeti: {'def': 'Caus. of bhaṇati (q. v.) with 3^rd praet. bhāṇi & pot. bhāṇaye. (Page 502)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāṇin: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. bhaṇati] speaking, reciting Sn.850 (manta° a reciter of the Mantras, one who knows the M. and speaks accordingly, i. e. speaking wisely, expl^d by SnA 549 as “mantāya pariggahetvā vācaṁ bhāsitā”); Dh.363 (id.; expl^d as “mantā vuccati paññā, tāya pana bhaṇana-sīlo” DhA.IV,93). --ativela° speaking for an excessively long time, talking in excess J.IV,247, 248. (Page 502)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhāṇī: {'def': '【形】讲话的，背诵的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】讲话的，背诵的。(p242)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhībhaccha: {'def': 'see bībhaccha. (Page 505)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhīma: {'def': 'bhīsana, 【形】可怕的，恐怖的。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhī, cp. Vedic bhīma] dreadful, horrible, cruel, awful J.IV,26; Miln.275.

--kāya of horrible body, terrific J.V,165. --rūpa of terrifying appearance Th.2, 353. --sena having a terrifying army J.IV,26; VI,201. Also Np. of one of the 5 sons of King Paṇḍu J.V,426; Vism.233. (Page 505)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'bhīsana(‹bhī, cp. Vedic bhīma),【形】可怕的，恐怖的(dreadful, horrible, cruel, awful)。bhīmakāya, 恐怖的身体(of horrible body, terrific)。bhīmarūpa, 恐怖的形象(of terrifying appearance)。bhīmasena, 恐怖的军队(having a terrifying army)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhīmala: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhīma] terrifying, horrible, awful J.V,43 (T. bhīmūla, but read bhīmala; C. expl^s by bhiṁsanaka-mahāsadda). (Page 505)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹bhīma,【中】恐怖的(terrifying, horrible, awful)(T. bhīmūla, but read bhīmala; C. expls by bhiṁsanaka-mahāsadda)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhīrati: {'def': 'Pass. to bharati, only in cpd. ppr. anubhīramāna M.III,123 (chatta: being brought up,or carried behind). Neumann, M. trsl.² III,248 translates “über ihm schwebt,” & proposes reading (on p. 563) anu-hīramāna (fr. hṛ). This reading is to be preferred, & is also found at D.II,15. (Page 505)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhīru: {'def': 'bhīrika(‹bhī; cp. Vedic bhīru),【形】【中】胆小的，恐怕的，懦弱的。bhīruttāna,【中】恐怕的庇护。bhīruttāṇa, (refuge for the fearful, adj. one who protects, those who are in fear)。【反】abhīru。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. bhī; cp. Vedic bhīru] 1. fearful, i. e. having fear, timid, afraid, shy, cowardly Sdhp.207 (dukkha°); usually in neg. abhīru not afraid, without fear, comb^d with anutrāsin: see utrāsin. -- 2. fearful, i. e. causing fear, awful, dreadful, terrible Pv.II,4¹ (°dassana terrible to look at). -- 3. (m.) fear, cowardice Sn.437 (=utrāsa SnA 390).

--ttāṇa refuge for the fearful, adj. one who protects, those who are in fear A.II,174; It.25; Sdhp.300. (Page 506)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'bhīrika, 【形】胆小的，恐怕的，懦弱的。 ~ruttāna,【中】恐怕的庇护。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhīruka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhīru] afraid, shy, cowardly, shunning (-°) Vism.7 (pāpa°), 645 (jīvitu-kāma bhīruka-purisa). (Page 506)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹bhīru),【形】恐怕，害臊(afraid, shy, cowardly, shunning)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhīsana: {'def': '(adj.) =bhiṁsana (q. v.) Pv IV.3⁵ (v. l. in PvA.251), expl^d by bhayajanana PvA.251, where C. reading also bhīsana. (Page 506)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhīta: {'def': '(bhāyati‘惊恐’的【过分】), 已颤怖，已惊恐(frightened, terrified, afraid)。niraya-bhayabhīta, 地狱的恐惧。maraṇa-bhaya bhīta, 死亡的恐惧。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of bhāyati] frightened, terrified, afraid Dh.310; J.I,168 (niraya-bhaya°); II,110 (maraṇa-bhaya°), 129; IV,141 (+tasita); PvA.154, 280 (+tasita). Cp. sam°. (Page 505)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bhāyati 的【过分】), 已惊恐。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhīti: {'def': '【阴】害怕。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】害怕。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhū: {'def': '2 (‹bhū, otherwise bhūmi),【阴】地球(the earth; Loc. bhuvi according to Kaccāyana; otherwise bhuvi is aor. 3rd sg.。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (f.) [fr. bhū, otherwise bhūmi] the earth; Loc. bhuvi according to Kaccāyana; otherwise bhuvi is aor. 3^rd sg.; of bhū: see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 516; Geiger, Pali Gr. § 86⁵. (Page 507)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】地球。(p244)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [fr. bhū] (adj.) being, (n.) creature, living being in pāṇa-bhū a living being (a breathing being) J.V,79 (=pāṇa-bhūta C.). (Page 507)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1 (‹bhū) ,【形】生物(being)。【中】生物，有呼吸的生物(creature, living being in pāṇa-bhū a living being (a breathing being)=pāṇa-bhūta)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhūja: {'def': '[cp. late Sk. bhūrja, with which related Lat. fraxinus ash, Ags. beorc=E. birch, Ger. birke] the Bhūrja tree, i. e. a kind of willow J.V,195, 405 (in both places=ābhujī), 420. (Page 507)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhūkuṭi: {'def': '(f.) [a different spelling of bhakuṭi, q. v. -- Cp. Sk. bhṛkuti & bhrukuṭi] frown, anger, superciliousness M.I,125 (v. l. bhakuṭi & bhā°); J.V,296. (Page 507)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(a different spelling of bhakuṭi,cp. Sk. bhrkuti & bhrukuṭi),【阴】皱眉(表示不满)，生气，轻蔑的(frown, anger, superciliousness)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhūma: {'def': '(-°) [=bhūmi] 1. (lit.) ground, country, district S.III,5 (pacchā° the western district). -- 2. (fig.) ground, reason for, occasion; stage, step Sn.896 (avivāda° ground of harmony; according to SnA 557 Ep. of Nibbāna). (Page 508)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'bhūmaka,【形】(在【合】中) 有楼层的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'bhūmaka, 【形】 (在【合】中) 有楼层的。(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhūmaka: {'def': '(& °ika) (adj.) (only --°) [from bhūma, or bhūmi] 1. having floors or stories (of buildings) as dve° pāsāda DhA.I,414; pañca° pāsāda a palace with 5 stories J.I,58, 89; satta° with 7 stories (pāsāda) DhA.II,1, 260. The form °ika at DhA.I,182 (dve° geha). ‹-› 2. belonging to a place or district, as jāti° from the land of (their) birth M.I,147; pacchā° from the western country S.IV,312 (brāhmaṇā). -- 3. being on a certain plane or in a certain state, as paritta° & mahā° Vbh.340 te° in 3 planes SnA 4 (of the 5 Khandhas), 510 (°vaṭṭa); DhA.I,36 (kusala), 305 (°vaṭṭa); IV,69 (tebhūmaka-vaṭṭa-saṅkhātaṁ Māra-bandhanaṁ), 72 (dhammā); catu° in 4 planes DhsA.296 (kusala); DhA.I,35 (citta). The form °ika at DhA.I,288 (with ref. to citta). (Page 508)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhūmi: {'def': '【阴】土地，地面，地球，区域，阶段，平面(陆地或世界)。bhūmikampā,【阴】地震。bhūmicāla,【阳】地震。bhūmigata,【形】在地面上的，储存在地下的。bhūmitala,【中】地面。bhūmippadesa, bhūmibhāga,【阳】土地。bhūmi-pappaṭaka﹐地饼(地肥)。《增支部》A.8.70. Bhumicāla(八种)地震：地动有八因缘：(一)大地住於水上，水住於风上，风依空而住。若大风起，则水摇；若水摇，则地摇。(二) 有神通之沙门、婆罗门、大威力之天人，彼若修习地想少量、修习水想无量，则此令地动。(三)菩萨自兜率天隐没，以正念正知降入母胎。(四)菩萨以正念正知自母胎出生。(五)如来现等觉、无上正自觉时。(六)如来转无上法轮时。(七)如来以正念正知而舍寿行时。(八)如来於无余涅盘界般涅盘时。(《长部》D.16./II,106-109.(三章10-20节)，自说经(Ud.6.1)，《长阿含》第二经游行经，《增壹阿含42.5经》，《中阿含36经》地动经(T1.477b)。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】土地，地面，地球，区域，阶段，平面（陆地或世界）。 ~kampā,【阴】地震。 ~gata, 【形】在地面上的，储存在地下的。 ~tala, 【中】地面。 ~ppadesa, ~bhāga, 【阳】土地。(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic bhūmi, Av. būmiš soil, ground, to bhū, as in bhavati, cp. Gr. fuζis etc. See bhavati] 1. (lit.) ground, soil, earth Vin.II,175; Sn.418 (yāna° carriage road); Pv.I,10¹⁴≈; SnA 353 (heṭṭhā-bhūmiyaṁ under the earth); DhA.I,414 (id., opp. upari-bhūmiyaṁ). -- 2. place, quarter, district, region M.I,145 (jāti° district of one’s birth); Sn.830 (vighāta°); Nd² 475 (danta°); DhA.I,213 (āpāna°); PvA.80 (susāna°). --uyyāna° garden (-place or locality) Vv 64¹⁹; Pv.II,12⁹; J.I,58. -- 3. (fig.) ground, plane, stage, level; state of consciousness, Vin. I.17; Vbh.322 sq.; Vism.126, 442 (with ref. to the 4 Paṭisambhidā, as sekha-bhūmi & asekha-bhūmi), 517 (paññā°-niddesa). Usually --°: indriya° Nett 192; dassana° plane of insight Nett 8, 14, 50; sukha° ground for happiness Dhs.984 (cp. DhsA.214). --bhūmi-ttaya the 3 stages, viz. kāmâvacara, rūpâvacara, lokuttara Vism.493. -- pl. bhūmiyo Ps.II,205=Vism.384 (appl^d to the 4 jhānas); purisa° (aṭṭha p. bh. eight stages of the individual; viz. manda-bhūmi, khiḍḍā°, vīmaṁsana°, ujugata°, sekha°, samaṇa°, jina°, panna°, or as trsl^d by Rh. D. in Dial. I.72, under “eight stages of a prophet’s existence”; babyhood, playtime, trial time, erect time, learning time, ascetic time, prophet time & prostrate time. Cp. the 10 decades of man’s life, as given by Bdhgh at Vism.619). -- Bdhgh, when defining the 2 meanings of bhūmi as “mahā-paṭhavī” and as “cittuppāda” (rise of thought) had in view the distinction between its literal & figurative meaning. But this def. (at DhsA.214) is vague & only popular. -- An old Loc. of bhūmi is bhumyā, e. g. J.I,507; V,84. Another form of bhūmi at end of cpds. is bhūma (q. v.).

--kampa shaking of the ground, earthquake Miln.178. --gata “gone into the soil,” i. e. hiding, stored away J.I,375. --ghana thick soil SnA 149, cp. paṭhavi-ghana ibid. 146. --tala ground (-surface) PvA.186. --padesa place or region upon the earth J.VI,95. --pappaṭaka outgrowths in the soil D.III,87=Vism.418. --pothana beating the ground DhA.I,171. --bhāga division of the earth, district J.I,109; V,200; VvA.125; PvA.29, 154. –laddh’(uppanna) acquired on a certain stage of existence SnA 4. --saya lying or sleeping on the ground DhA.II,61. (Page 508)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhūnaha: {'def': '[difficult to explⁿ; is it an old misspelling for bhūta+gha? The latter of han?] a destroyer of beings Sn.664 (Voc. bhūnahu, expl^d by SnA 479 as “bhūti-hanaka vuddhi-nāsaka”; vv. ll. bhūnahaṭa, bhūnahoṭa, bhūhata, all showing the difficulty of the archaic word); J.V,266 (pl. bhūnahuno, expl^d by C. 272 as “isīnaṁ ativattāro attano vaḍḍhiyā hatattā bh.”). Cp. M.I,502 (“puritanical” suggested by Lord Chalmers). (Page 508)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhūri: {'def': '【阴】智能。【形】广泛的，丰富的。 ~pañña, ~medha, 【形】广泛的智能。(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (f.) [cp. late Sk. bhūr] the earth; given as name for the earth (paṭhavi) at Ps.II,197; see also def. at DhsA.147. Besides these only in 2 doubtful cpds., both resting on demonology, viz. bhūrikamma D.I,12, expl^d as “practices to be observed by one living in a bhūrighara or earth-house” (?) DA.I,97, but cp. Vedic bhūri-karman “much effecting”; and bhūrivijjā D.I,9, expl^d as “knowledge of charms to be pronounced by one living in an earth-house” (?) DA.I,93. See Dial. I.18, 25. The meaning of the terms is obscure; there may have been (as Kern rightly suggests: see Toev. s. v.) quite a diff. popular practice behind them, which was unknown to the later Commentator. Kern suggests that bhūri-vijjā might be a secret science to find gold (digging for it: science of hidden treasures), and °kamma might be “making gold” (alchemistic science). Perhaps the term bhumma-jāla is to be connected with these two. (Page 508)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (adj.) [cp. Vedic bhūri] wide, extensive, much, abundant, DhsA.147 (in def. of the term bhūri¹, i. e. earth); otherwise only in cpds.: °pañña (adj.) of extensive wisdom, very wise S.IV,205; Sn.346, 792, 1097, 1143; Pv III,5⁵; Ps.II,197 (“paṭhavī-samāya vitthatāya vipulāya paññāya samannāgato ti bhūripañño,” with other definitions); Nd¹ 95 (same explⁿ as under Ps.II,197); Nd² 415 C. (id.). °paññāṇa (adj.) same as °pañña Sn.1136 ≈ (cp. Nd² 480). °medhasa (adj.) very intelligent S.I,42, 174; III,143; A.IV,449; Sn.1131, 1136; Th.1, 1266; Pv III,7⁷. (Page 508)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】智慧。【形】广泛的，丰富的。bhūripañña, bhūrimedha,【形】广泛的智慧(广智)。SA.1.75.：Bhūripaññāti bahupañña ussannapañña.(广慧：多慧，丰富的智慧) SA.22.95.：Bhūripaññenāti saṇhapaññena ceva vipulavitthatapaññena ca. (广慧：细腻的智慧，广大的智慧)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhūrī: {'def': '(f.) [is it original? Cp. BSk. bhūri in same sense at Lal. V, 444, 541; MVastu III,332] knowledge, understanding, intelligence Dh.282, quoted at DhsA.76 (expl^d as termed so because it is as widespread as the earth; Dhs.16; DhA.III,421; same explⁿ at DhsA.148); J.VI,415. (Page 508)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhūsana: {'def': '【中】 Bhūsā, 【阴】装饰物，装饰品。(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. bhūṣ] ornament, decoration Vism.10 (yatino-sīla-bhūsana-bhūsitā contrasted to rājāno muttāmaṇi-vibhūsitā). (Page 508)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】bhūsā,【阴】装饰物，装饰品。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhūseti: {'def': '[Caus. of bhūṣ, to be busy; in meaning “to adorn” etc. Expl^d at Dhtp. 315, 623 by “alaṅkāra”] to adorn, embellish, beautify. Only in pp. bhūsita adorned with (-°) Pv.II,9⁵², 12⁷; III,3⁵; J.VI,53. Cp. vi°. (Page 508)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bhūs+e), 化妆，装饰，美化。【过】bhūsesi。【过分】bhūsita。【现分】bhūsenta。【独】bhūsetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(bhūs + e), 化妆，装饰，美化。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 bhūsita。【现分】 bhūsenta。【独】 ~setvā。(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhūsā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. bhūṣ] ornament, decoration, only in cpd. bhūsa- (read bhūsā-)dassaneyya beautiful as an ornament Pv III,3². (Page 508)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhūsāpeti: {'def': '(Bhūseti的【使】), 使装饰，使化妆。【过】bhūsāpesi。【过分】bhūsāpita。【独】bhūsāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bhūta: {'def': '(bhavati 的【过分】), 已变成，已出生，已生产。【中】元素，鬼，衆生，事实，是，已经发生的事物。bhūtakāya,【阳】身体，元素所生产的东西。bhūtagāma,【阳】植物，草木。bhūtagāha,【阳】著魔。bhūtappasāda﹐净色。bhūtavādī,【形】诚实的。bhūtavejja,【阳】驱魔的人，召魂者。bhūta-vijjā﹐鬼咒(呼鬼唤神的咒术)。abhūta,【阳】非生物(或译作︰不成材。指愚人、说谎者falsehood, lie falsehood, lie)。M.A.1./I,31~2.(Sn.A.222；CSCD:224)︰bhūtasaddo pañcakkhandha-amanussa-dhātu-vijjamāna-khīṇāsava -satta-rukkhādīsu dissati.(生物︰(具)五蕴、非人(鬼神、天人)、(具有四大)界、存在、漏尽者、有情(satta)、树(、草木)等。) “Bhūtamidanti, bhikkhave, samanupassathā”ti-ādīsu (M.38./I,260.) hi ayaṁ pañcakkhandhesu dissati. “Yānīdha bhūtāni samāgatānī”ti (Sn.PTS:222；CS:224) ettha amanussesu. “Cattāro kho, bhikkhu, mahābhūtā hetū”ti (M.109./III,17.) ettha dhātūsu. “Bhūtasmiṁ pācittiyan”ti-ādīsu (Pāci.IV,25.) vijjamāne. “Yo ca kālaghaso bhūto”ti (J.245.；JA.II,260.) ettha khīṇāsave. “Sabbeva nikkhipissanti bhūtā loke samussayan”ti (D.16./II,157.) ettha sattesu. (M.1./I,32.) “Bhūtagāmapātabyatāyā”ti (Pāci.IV,34.) ettha rukkhādīsu.M.A.I,31.︰(1) animate Nature as principle, or the vital aggregates (the 5 Khandhas), with ref. M I.260; (2) ghosts (amanussā) Sn 222; (3) inanimate Nature as principle, or the Elements (the 4 dhātus) S III.101 (mahābhūtā); (4) all that exists, physical existence in general (vijjamānaṁ) Vin IV.25 (bhūtaṁ); (5) what we should call a simple predicative use, is exemplified by a typical dogmatic example, viz. “kālaghaso bhūto,” where bhūta is given as meaning khīṇāsava (Arahant) J II.260; (6) all beings or specified existence, animal kingdom (sattā) D II.157; (7) the vegetable kingdom, plants, vegetation (rukkh’ādayo)( 《中部注》(M.A.1./I,31~2.)︰「生物之义︰1(具)五蕴(pañcakkhandha)、2非人(amanussa鬼神、天人)、3(具有四大)界(dhātu)、4正存在者(vijjamāna)、5漏尽者(khīṇāsava)、6有情(satta)、7树(、草木)(rukkhā)等。」巴利文有时也用「非生物」(abhūta，或作︰不成材)指愚人、骗子，事实上他们也是「生物」。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(bhavati 的【过分】), 已变成，已出生，已生产。【中】元素，鬼，众生，事实，是，已经发生的事物。 ~kāya, 【阳】身体，元素所生产的东西。 ~gāma, 【阳】植物，草木。 ~gāha, 【阳】着魔。 ~vādī, 【形】诚实的。 ~vejja, 【阳】驱魔的人，召魂者。(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of bhavati, Vedic etc. bhūta] grown, become; born, produced; nature as the result of becoming. ‹-› The (exegetical) definition by Bdhgh of the word bhūta is interesting. He (at MA.I,31) distinguishes the foll. 7 meanings of the term: (1) animate Nature as principle, or the vital aggregates (the 5 Khandhas), with ref. M.I,260; (2) ghosts (amanussā) Sn.222; (3) inanimate Nature as principle, or the Elements (the 4 dhātus) S.III,101 (mahābhūtā); (4) all that exists, physical existence in general (vijjamānaṁ) Vin.IV,25 (bhūtaṁ); (5) what we should call a simple predicative use, is exemplified by a typical dogmatic example, viz. “kālaghaso bhūto,” where bhūta is given as meaning khīṇāsava (Arahant) J.II,260; (6) all beings or specified existence, animal kingdom (sattā) D.II,157; (7) the vegetable kingdom, plants, vegetation (rukkh’ādayo) Vin.IV,34 (as bhūta-gāma). -- Meanings: 1. bhūtā & bhūtāni (pl.) beings, living beings, animate Nature Sn.35 (expl^d at Nd² 479 as 2 kinds, viz. tasā & thāvarā, movable & immovable; S. II.47 (K.S. II.36) mind and body as come-to-be; Dh.131 (bhūtāni), 405; M.I,2 sq. (paṭhavī, āpo etc., bhūtā, devā, Pajāpatī etc.), 4; MA.I,32. The pl. nt. bhūtāni is used as pl. to meaning 2; viz. inanimate Nature, elements, usually enum^d under term mahā-bhūtāni. -- 2. (nt.) nature, creation, world M.I,2 (bhūte bhūtato sañjānāti recognises the beings from nature, i. e. from the fact of being nature); DhsA.312 (°pasāda-lakkhaṇa, see Expos. 409). See cpds. °gāma, °pubba (?). -- 3. (nt. adj.) that which is, i. e. natural, genuine, true; nt. truth; neg. abhūta falsehood, lie Sn.397; PvA.34. See cpds. °bhāva, °vacana, °vāda. -- 4. a supernatural being, ghost, demon, Yakkha; pl. bhūtā guardian genii (of a city) J.IV,245. See cpds. °vijja, °vejja. -- 5. (-°) pp. in predicative use (cp. on this meaning Bdhgh’s meaning No. 5, above): (a) what has been or happened; viz. mātu-bhūtā having been his mother PvA.78; abhūtapubbaṁ bhūtaṁ what has never happened before happened (now) DA.I,43 (in explⁿ of abbhuta); -- (b) having become such & such, being like, acting as, being, quâsi (as it were), consisting of, e. g. andha° blind, as it were J.VI,139; aru° consisting of wounds DhA.III,109; udapāna° being a well, a well so to speak PvA.78; opāna° acting as a spring A.IV,185; hetu° as reason, being the reason PvA.58; cp. cakkhu° having become an eye of wisdom. Sometimes bhūta in this use hardly needs to be translated at all.

--kāya body of truth DhA.I,11. --gāma vegetation, as trees, plants, grass, etc. Under bhūtagāma Bdhgh understands the 5 bīja-jātāni (5 groups of plants springing from a germinative power: see bīja), viz. mūla-bījaṁ, khandha°, phala°, agga°, bīja°. Thus in C. on Vin.IV,34 (the so-called bhūtagāma-sikkhāpada, quoted at DhA.III,302 & SnA 3); cp. M.III,34; J.V,46; Miln.3, 244. --gāha possession by a demon Miln.168 (cp. Divy 235). --ṭṭhāna place of a ghost KhA 170. --pati (a) lord of beings J.V,113 (of Inda); VI,362 (id.); Vv 64¹ (id.). (b) lord of ghosts, or Yakkhas J.VI,269 (of Kuvera). --pubba (a) as adj. (-°) having formerly been so & so, as mātā bhūtapubbo satto, pitā etc., in untraced quotation at Vism.305; also at SnA 359 (Bhagavā kuṇāla-rājā bhūtapubbo). -- (b) as adv. (bhūtapubbaṁ) meaning: before all happening, before creation, at a very remote stage of the world, in old times, formerly Vin.II,201; D.I,92; II,167, 285, 337; M.I,253; III,176; S.I,216, 222, 227; IV,201; V,447; A.IV,136=Vism.237; A.IV,432; J.I,394; DhA.I,56. --bhavya past and future D.I,18. --bhāva truthful character, neg. a° PvA.14. --vacana statement of reality or of the truth SnA 336. --vādin truthful, speaking the truth M.I,180; D.III,175; Pug.58; a° untruthful Dh.306; J.II,416. --vikāra a natural blemish, fault of growth, deformity SnA 189 (opp. nibbikāra). --vijjā knowledge of demons, exorcism D.I,9; Dh.I,93, cp. Dial. I.17). --vejja a healer of harm caused by demons, an exorcist Vin.IV,84; J.II,215; III,511; Miln.23. (Page 507)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhūtanaka: {'def': '[cp. *Sk. bhūtṛna] a fragrant grass; Andropogon schœnanthus J.VI,36 (=phanijjaka); Vism.543 (so v. l. for T. bhūtinaka). (Page 508)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bhūtatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. bhūta] the fact of having grown, become or being created (i. e. being creatures or part of creation) Vism.310 (in def. of bhūtā); MA.I,32 (id.). (Page 508)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】已成为的事实。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】已成为的事实。(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bhūtika: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) in cpd. cātummahā° belongs to the whole expression, viz. composed of the 4 great elements M.I,515. (Page 508)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】元素所组成的。(p245)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】元素所组成的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bidala: {'def': '【中】分裂的豌豆，劈开的竹子，木板条，条板。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】分裂的豌豆，劈开的竹子，木板条，条板。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj. n.) [cp. Sk. vidala in same meaning, fr. vi+dal] 1. a kind of pulse, split pea J.IV,353 (=mugga), in °sūpa haricot soup J.IV,352. -- 2. a split bamboo cane, in °mañcaka a bedstead made of laths of split bamboo, the use of which is given as one of the characteristic features of the ascetic life Vin.II,149; J.I,9; DhA.I,135. (Page 487)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bila: {'def': '² (nt.) [identical with bila1] a part, bit J.VI,153 (°sataṁ 100 pieces); Abl. bilaso (adv.) bit by bit M.I,58=III,91 (v. l. vilaso). At J.V,90 in cpd. migābilaṁ (maṁsaṁ) it is doubtful whether we should read mig’ābilaṁ (thus, as we have done, taking ābila=āvila), or migā-bilaṁ with a lengthened metri causâ, as the C. seems to take it (migehi khādita-maṁsato atirittaṁ koṭṭhāsaṁ). --kata cut into pieces, made into bits J.V,266 (read macchā bilakatā yathā for macchābhīlā katā y.). The C. here (p. 272) expls as koṭṭhāsa-kata; at J.VI,111 however the same phrase is interpreted as puñja-kata, i. e. thrown into a heap (like fish caught by a fisherman in nets). Both passages are applied to fish and refer to tortures in Niraya. (Page 487)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2,【中】部分(a part, bit J.VI.153 (bilasataṁ 100 pieces)。Abl. bilaso(adv.), 一片一片地(bit by bit)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '³ [cp. Sk. viḍa] a kind of salt Vin.I,202; M.II,178, 181. (Page 487)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '3(cp. Sk. viḍa),【中】一种盐(a kind of salt Vin.I,202; M.II,178, 181.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [Vedic bila, perhaps fr. bhid to break, cp. K.Z. 12, 123. Thus already expld by Dhtp 489: bila bhedane] a hole, den, cave A.II,33=S.III,85; Th.1, 189; Nd1 362; J.I,480; II,53; VI,574 (=guhā C.); Miln.151; Sdhp.23. --kaṇṇa° orifice of the ear Vism.195; vammīka° ant’s nest J.IV,30; sota°=kaṇṇa° DhsA.310. --āsaya (adj.) living in holes, a cave-dweller, one of the four classes of animals (bil°, dak°, van°, rukkh°) S.III,85=A.II,33; Nd1 362; Bu II.97; J.I,18. (Page 487)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】兽穴，洞，部分。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '1 (Vedic bila, perhaps fr. bhid to break),【中】兽穴，洞(a hole, den, cave)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bilaso: {'def': '【副】一片一片地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【副】在部分中，成堆。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bilaṅga: {'def': '【阳】醋。 ~thālikā，【阴】酸粥锅刑。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[etym. doubtful; one compares both Sk. viḍaṅga the plant Embelia ribes, and vilaṅga the plant Erycibe paniculata] sour gruel J.VI,365 (=kañjiya); usually in stock phrase kaṇājaka bilaṅga-dutiya (seed-cake?) accompanied by sour gruel Vin.II,77, 78; S.I,90; A.I,145; IV,392; J.I,228; III,299; SnA 94; DhA.III,10 (v. l. pilaṅka-°akaṁ); IV,77; VvA.222, 298 (bilaṅka°). --thālika a certain torture, called “gruel-pot” (should there be any relation to bila-kata under bila2?) A.I,47; II,122; Nd2 604 (v. l. khil°); Miln.197, 290, 358 (all passages in standard setting). (Page 487)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Sk. viḍaṅga the plant Embelia ribes(白花酸藤子，紫金牛科，强壮补血，治胃酸缺乏，食欲不振，鲜酸藤果二至三钱。水煎服), and vilaṅga the plant Erycibe paniculata(Convolvulaceae旋花科)),【阳】白花酸藤子。bilaṅgathālikā，【阴】酸粥锅刑。劣质白花酸藤子的碎米粥(kaṇājaka bilaṅgadutiya；sour gruel酸粥)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bilaṅgika: {'def': '(adj.) living on sour gruel; N. of a class of brāhmaṇas at Rājagaha S.I,164. (Page 487)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Billa: {'def': '【阳】孟加拉苹果（印度的一种有刺的乔木 (Aegle marmelos)）。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】孟加拉苹果、频婆果(印度的一种有刺的乔木 (marmelos tree；Aegle marmelos；wood apple)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Ved. bilva] fruit of the Bilva tree, Aegle marmelos or Bengal quince, only in one stock phrase where its size is compared with sizes of smaller fruits, and where it is preceded by āmalaka S.I,150=A.IV,170 (vv. ll. villa, bila, beḷu, bilāla)=Sn.p. 125 (vv. ll. pillā billā, billa; T. reading after SS billi). Cp. derivations bella & beluva. (Page 487)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bimba: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. bimba] 1. shape, image (=paṭimā VvA.168) S.I,134 (trsl. “puppet”); V,217 (vimba); J.V,452. In phrase cittakataṁ bimbaṁ it refers to the human body (“the tricked-out puppet-shape” Brethren 303): M.II,64 = Th.1, 769 = Dh.147=VvA.47, cp. DhA.III,109 (=attabhāva). -- 2. the red fruit of Momordica monadelpha, a species of Amaranth [cp. Sk. bimba & bimbī, a kind of gourd] J.III,478; VI,457, 591; Vv 366 (kañcana°-vaṇṇa of the colour of the golden Bimba Dhp. at VvA.168 takes it as bimba1=paṭimā; DhA.I,387 (°phala, with ref. to red lips). bimboṭṭha (f. °ī) (having) red lips J.III,477; VI,590 (nigrodhapatta-bimb’oṭṭhī) ThA.133 (Ap. V,57). The Sk. vimbī according to Halāyudha 2, 48 is equal to oṣṭhī, a plant (Bryonia grandis?). --oṭṭhi see above 2. --ohana [second part either= *ūhana vāhana “carrying,” or contracted form of odahana fr. ava+dhā, i. e. *odhana *ohana “putting down,” or still more likely for ūhana as seen in ūhanati2 2 fr. ud+hṛ raising, lifting up] a pillow Vin.I,47 (bhisi°); II,76, 150, 208, 200, 218; III,90, 119 (bhisi°); IV,279; S.II,268; A.III,240; VbhA.365; Vism.79. See also bhisi1. --jāla [BR. bimbajā?] the Bimba tree, Momordica monadelpha (lit. net of b. fruits) J.I,39; VI,497 (cp. p. 498 ratt’aṅkura-rukkhaṁ probably with v. l. to be read ratta-kuravaka°, see bimbi-jāla); Bu XVI,19. (Page 487)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Class. Sk. bimba),【中】1.图像，图形，(太阳或月亮的)圆平面(shape, image)。2.葫芦科苦瓜属(the red fruit of Momordica monadelpha, a species of Amaranth [cp. Sk. bimba & bimbī, a kind of gourd])。bimboṭṭha(f. bimboṭṭhī) ,【阳】红唇((having) red lips )。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】图像，图形，（太阳或月亮的）圆平面。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bimbaka: {'def': '=bimba²; VvA.168. (Page 487)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bimbi: {'def': '(or bimbī) [=Sk. bimbī, see bimba] gold, of golden colour DA.I,280=SnA 448 (in Bdhgh’s fanciful etym. of king Bimbisāra, viz. bimbī ti suvaṇṇaṁ, sārasuvaṇṇa-sadisa-vaṇṇatāya B.). --jāla the red amaranth tree, the Bodhi tree of the former Buddha Dhammadassin J.I,39; V,155. At J.VI,497, 498 the form is bimbajāla. The C. expln gives ratta-kuravaka as a synonym. (Page 487)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Bimbī(=Sk. bimbī),黄金，黄金色(gold, of golden colour DA I.280=SnA 448 (in Bdhgh’s fanciful etym. of king Bimbisāra, viz. bimbī ti suvaṇṇaṁ, sārasuvaṇṇa-sadisa-vaṇṇatāya B.))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bimbikā: {'def': 'bimbī, 【阴】苦瓜（指葫芦科的二种小的东印度观赏藤本植物胶苦瓜 (Momordica balsamina) 和苦瓜 (Momordica charantia) 的任何一种，具红色或橙色、长圆形、瘤突的果实，广泛地驯化在西印度，有时用作泥敷剂和涂敷药），职业者首领红色的椭圆形的水果。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bimbisāra: {'def': 'm. [BSk. 〃] 頻毘娑羅, 影勝 [マガダ国王].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '（国王名）宾比萨拉，（古音译：）频婆娑罗，瓶沙王', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Bimbohana: {'def': '【中】枕头(pillow)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bimbā: {'def': '【阴】频婆(悉达多王子 (Siddhartha) 的妻子的名字)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】频婆（悉达多王子 (Siddhartha) 的妻子的名字）。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bindu: {'def': '【中】点滴，点，琐事。 ~matta, 【形】一滴的分量。~mattaŋ,【副】只有一滴。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic bindu & vindu] 1. a drop, usually a drop of water Sn.392, 812 (uda°); J.I,100; Vism.531 (madhu°); ThA.281; PvA.98 (udaka°). -- 2. a spot (cp. SBE XVII.155) Vism.222 (°vicitvā gāvī a spotted cow). ‹-› 3. (as adj.) one of the eight qualities of perfect sound (brahma-ssara, with ref. to the voice of Brahmā and of Buddha, cp. aṭṭhaṅga), which are given at D.II,211= 227 as (saro hoti) vissaṭṭho ca viññeyyo ca mañjū ca savanīyo ca bindu [vv. ll. bandu & bhindu] ca avisārī ca gambhīro ca ninnādī ca. We may translate by “full, close, compact” (Dial. II.245 “continuous”). See also below °ssara. --tthanī having breasts round as a bubble J.V,215. --bindu(ṁ) drop by drop DA.I,218. --matī (f.) Np. of a courtesan of Pāṭaliputta in the time of Asoka Miln.121 sq. --matta measuring a drop, even a drop PvA.100, 104 (eka °ṁ). --sāra Np. of king of India, father of Asoka Dpvs.V,101; VI,15; Mhvs.V,18, 19. --ssara a full rounded voice Sn.350 (referred by SnA to a Mahāpurisa); adj. having a full voice (see above bindu 3) Pv III,34 (T. vindu°, BB bindu°; PvA.explns by avissaṭṭha-ssara sampiṇḍita-ssara, i. e. “continuous”); J.II,439 (=bindhunā avisaṭena piṇḍitena sarena samannāgata C.); V,204, 299 (=sampiṇḍita-ghana-ssara); VI,518=581 (=piṇḍita-ssara C.). (Page 487)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】点滴，点，琐事。bindumatta,【形】一滴的分量。bindumattaṁ,【副】只有一滴。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Biḷibiḷikā: {'def': '(f.) [onomat. cp. E. babble] tittle-tattle S.I,200= Th.1, 119. Mrs. Rh. D. (Brethren 106 n.) trsl “finglefangle,” noting the commentator’s paraphrase “vilivilikriyā” (lit. sticky-sticky-action?). (Page 488)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Biḷāla: {'def': '² [see bila3] a kind of salt Abhp 461. (Page 488)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [see biḷāra] a cat J.I,110; II,244; VI,593. pakkha a flying fox J.VI,538. (Page 488)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Biḷālī: {'def': '(f.) [f. of biḷāla=biḷāra, cp. Sk. biḍālī, also N. of a plant, see on Prk. chira-birālī=Sk. kṣīra-biḍālī Pischel Gr. § 241] a bulbous plant, a tuber J.IV,46 (=°vallīkanda, cp. gloss latātanta on kalamba), 371 (=°kanda Com. p. 373); VI,578. Cp. takkaḷa. (Page 488)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】母猫，一种块茎植物。(p238)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】母猫，一种块茎植物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Biḷāra: {'def': '【阳】猫。biḷārabhastā,【阴】风箱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】猫。 ~bhastā, 【阴】风箱。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[etym. uncertain, prob. a loan-word; cp. late Sk. biḍāla & see also P. biḷāla. The Prk. forms are birāla & virāla, f. birālī] a cat D.II,83; M.I,128, 334; S.II,270; A.III,122 (viḷāra); V,202, 289; Th.1, 1138; J.I,461 (as representing deceit), 480; V,406, 416, 418; Miln.118; DhA.II,152; PugA 225. On biḷāra in similes cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 116. --nissakkana (-matta) (large enough) for a cat to creep through A.V,195. --bhastā (a bag of) catskin M.I,128 (expld by Bdhgh as “biḷāra-camma-pasibbako”); Th.1, 1138. At both passages in similes. (Page 488)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Biḷārikā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. biḍālikā] a she-cat J.III,265. (Page 488)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bodha: {'def': '【阳】 bodhana, 【中】觉悟，知识。 ~nīya, ~neyya, 【形】有能力觉悟的。(p238)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】bodhana,【中】觉悟，知识。bodhanīya, bodhaneyya,【形】有能力觉悟的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² see pali°. (Page 491)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [fr. budh; the usual] form is sambodha=bodhi, viz. knowledge, wisdom, enlightenment, Buddhaship D.III,54 (v. l. sam°); DhsA.217; in phrase bodhāya maggo J.I,67; Miln.244, 289; and in bodha-pakkhiyadhammā (for which usually bodhi°) SnA 164 (where given as 37); complementary to santi (arousing, soothing) Th.1, 342. bodhaṅgama leading to enlightenment (dhammā) Nett 31, 83 (v. l. bojjh°). (Page 491)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bodhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. bodheti] 1. knowing Miln.168 (cp. S.V,83). -- 2. (adj.) enlightening, teaching Bu 26, 22 (pacchima-jana°). (Page 491)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bodhaneyya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bodheti, see bodhanīya] capable of being enlightened, to be taught the truth Bu 2, 195 (jana); Miln.169 (yena yogena bodhaneyyā sattā bujjhanti tena y. bodheti); otherwise in combn bodhaneyya-bandhavo the (Buddha’s) relations (or fellowmen) who are able to be enlightened J.I,345=DhA.I,367; J.V,335. (Page 491)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bodhanīya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. fr. bodheti] capable of being enlightened, worthy to be taught Bu 5, 31. See also bodhaneyya. (Page 491)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bodhetar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. bodheti] awakener, enlightener Nd1 457; Ps.I,174; Vism.209. (Page 491)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bodheti: {'def': '[Caus. of bujjhati] 1. to awaken to the truth, to enlighten S.I,170; Bu II.195. aor. bodhesi Vism.209, abodhayi Bu II.196 & bodhayi Bu V,31; XXV.6 inf. bodhuṁ: see bujjhati, & bodhetuṁ J.IV,393. grd. bodhabba D.II,246; A.IV,136. -- 2. to make aware (of), to make known J.VI,412; SnA 444. (Page 491)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(budh+e), 醒来，觉悟。【过】bodhesi。【过分】bodhita。【现分】bodhenta。【独】bodhetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(budh + e), 醒来，觉悟。【过】 ~esi。【过分】bodhita。【现分】 ~dhenta。【独】 ~etvā。(p239)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bodhetu: {'def': '【阳】醒来者，觉悟者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】醒来者，觉悟者。(p239)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bodhi: {'def': '【阴】菩提，觉悟，至高知识，菩提树。 ~aṅgaṇa, 【中】种有菩提树的庭院。 ~pakkhika, ~pakkhiya, 【形】菩提分（属于觉悟的部分）。~pādapa, ~rukkha, 【阳】菩提树（参考 Assattha）。 ~pūjā, 【阴】 ~maha,【阳】对菩提树的供奉。 ~maṇḍa, 【阳】佛陀觉悟时坐在菩提树下的地方。 ~mūla, 【中】菩提树根。(p238)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹budh, 参见[bujjhati觉],【阴】菩提，觉悟，至高知识，菩提树。【阳】菩提树，觉。bodhiaṅgaṇa,【中】种有菩提树的庭院。bodhipakkhika, bodhipakkhiya,【形】菩提分(道品，觉悟的成分)。bodhipādapa, bodhirukkha,【阳】菩提树(参考 Assattha)。bodhipūjā,【阴】bodhimaha,【阳】对菩提树的供奉。bodhimaṇḍa,【阳】菩提场，佛陀觉悟时坐在菩提树下的地方。bodhimūla,【中】菩提树根(树下)。bodhisatta,菩萨(“the great being”发愿成佛的人，属於凡夫)，在他证悟之前已经於四大阿僧祇劫十万大劫中修习菩萨行；证悟之后则成为佛陀。(Bodhisatta，梵文Bodhisattva。巴利文satta(已执著的)，转成梵文应作sakta(系者﹑爱著)，不是 sattva。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹(f.) [fr. budh, cp. Vedic bodhin-manas having an attentive mind; RV V,75, 5; VIII,82, 18] (supreme) knowledge, enlightenment, the knowledge possessed by a Buddha (see also sambodhi & sammā-sambodhi) M.I,356; II,95=D.III,237 (saddho hoti, saddahati Tathāgatassa bodhiṁ); D.III,159 (anuttaraṁ pappoti bodhiṁ), 165 (id.); S.I,103, 196; V,197 sq.; A.II,66; VbhA.310 (def.). Bodhi consists of 7 elements called bojjhaṅgā or sambojjhaṅgā, and is attained by the accomplishment of the perfections called bodhi-pācanā dhammā (see under cpds. & cp. bodhi-pakkhiya-dhammā). The Buddha is said to have found the Path followed by former Buddhas, who “catusu satipaṭṭhānesu supatiṭṭhitacittā satta-bojjhaṅge yathābhūtaṁ bhāvetvā anuttaraṁ sammā-sambodhiṁ abhisambujjhiṁsu” S.V,160. The moment of supreme enlightenment is the moment when the Four Truths (ariya-saccāni) are grasped S.V,423. Bodhi is used to express the lofty knowledge of an ascetic (Bodhi-paribbājaka Np. J.V,229 sq.), and the stage of enlightenment of the Paccekabuddha (paccekabodhi J.III,348; pacceka-bodhi-ñāṇa J.IV,114; paccekasambodhi SnA 73), as distinguished from sammāsambodhi. --ṭṭhāna the state of Bodhi, state of enlightenment. Dpvs 2.61. --pakkhika=pakkhiya (& pakkhika, e. g. A.III,70=300; Th.1, 900; cp. bodha°) belonging to enlightenment, usually referred to as the 37 bodhipakkhiyā dhammā qualities or items constituting or contributing to Bodhi, which are the same as enumd under bojjhaṅga (q. v.). They are enumd & discussed at Vism.678 sq. and mentioned at many other passages of the Abhidhamma, e. g. Vbh.244, 249; Nett 31, 197, 240, 261; and in the Commentaries, e. g. J.I,275; III,290; V,483; DhA.I,230. When they are increased to 43 they include the above with the addition of aniccasaññā; dukkha°, anatta°, pahāna°, virāga°, nirodhasaññā, thus at Nett 112, 237. In the older texts we do not find any numbered lists of the b.-p.-dhammā. At A.III,70 only indriyesu guttadvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā and jāgariy’ânuyoga are mentioned in connection with bodhipakkhikā dhammā in general. At S.V,227, 239 sq. (so read in Vbh.preface XIV. for 327, 337!) the term is applied to the 5 indriyas: saddh’indriyaṁ, viriy°, sati°, samādhi°, paññ°. A more detailed discussion of the bodhi-p-dhammā and their mention in the Piṭakas is found in Mrs. Rh. D.’s preface to the Vbh.edition, pp. xiv.-xvi. Of BSk. passage may be mentioned Divy 350 (saptatriṁśad-bodhi-pakṣān dharmān amukhī -- kṛtya pratyekāṁ bodhiṁ sākṣātkṛtavantah) & 616 (bodhipakṣāṁs tān dharmān Bhagavān saṁprakāśayati sma). --paripāka the maturing of enlightenment Vism.116. --pācana ripening of knowledge (of a Buddha); adj. leading to enlightenment Bu II. 121 sq.; Cp I.11 (cp. J.I,22). It is a late term. The b. dhammā are the 10 perfections (pāramiyo), i. e. dāna°, sīla°, nekkhamma°, paññā°, viriya°, khanti°, sacca°, adhiṭṭhāna°, mettā°, upekhā°. --satta (1) a “bodhi-being,” i. e. a being destined to attain fullest enlightenment or Buddhaship. A Bodhisatta passes through many existences & many stages of progress before the last birth in which he fulfils his great destiny. The “amhākaṁ Bodhisatto,” or “our Bodhisatta” of the Buddhist Texts (e. g. Vism.419 (imasmiṁ kappe ayam eva Bhagavā Bodhisatta-bhūto); DA.I,259) refers to Gotama, whose previous existences are related in the Jātaka collection. These tales illustrate the wisdom & goodness of the future Buddha, whether as an animal, a god, or a human being. In his last existence before attaining Buddhahood he is a man. Reference is made to a Bodhisatta or the B. at very many places throughout the Canon. See e. g. M.I,17, 163, 240; S.II,5; III,27; IV,233; V,263, 281, 317; A.II,130; III,240; IV,302, 439; Vism.15, 116, 499; SnA 52 (pacceka°), 67, 72. -- (2) N. of the author of a Pali grammar, used by Kaccāyana (not extant): see Windisch, Proceedings of XIVth Or. Congress, Vol. I.290. --sambhāra (pl.) conditions (lit. materials) necessary for the attainment of bodhi J.I,1; VI,595; Mbvs 12. (Page 491)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [=bodhi1] the tree of wisdom, the sacred Bo tree, the fig tree (Assattha, Ficus religiosa) under which Gotama Buddha arrived at perfect knowledge. The tree is near the spot where Buddhagāya is now, about 60 miles fr. Patna. It is regarded by pilgrims as the centre of the world (cp. pathavī-nābhi mahā-bodhimaṇḍo Mbvs 79). It is also spoken of as Mahābodhi (e. g. J.IV,228; Vism.403). -- Vism.72, 299, 342; DhA.I,105; ThA.62; VbhA.473. --aṅgaṇa the courtyard in which the Bo tree stands DA.I,191; Vism.188 (°vatta); VbhA.349. --tala “Bodhifoundation,” i. e. the place or ground of the B. tree, otherwise bodhi-maṇḍa J.I,105; Mhbv 9; DhA.I,117. --pakka fruit of the Bo tree J.IV,229. --pādapa the Bodhi tree Mbhv 1. --pūjā veneration of, or offerings to the Bo tree Mhbv 81. --maṇḍa (for °maṇḍala) the ground under the Bodhi tree, hence the spot (or “throne”), on which the Buddha was seated at the time of attaining highest enlightenment. The term is only found in very late canonical and post-canonical literature. Bu II.65, 183; Vism.203; J.IV,228, 232; Mhbv 79; SnA 2, 30, 225, 258, 281, 340, 391, 441; DhA.I,86; II,69; IV,72; ThA.2. Cp. BSk. bodhimaṇḍa Divy 392. --maha feast in honour of the Bo tree J.IV,229. --mūla the root or foot of the Bo tree SnA 32, 391; cp. Bodhiyā mūle Nd1 172, 458=Ps.I,174. --rukkha the Bodhi tree Vin.I,1. (Page 491)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bodhisatta: {'def': '菩萨, 觉行者', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': "'Enlightenment Being', is a being destined to Buddhahood, a future Buddha. According to the traditional belief a Bodhisatta, before reaching his last birth as a Buddha on this earth, is living in the Tusita-heaven (s. deva), the heaven of bliss. Cf. A. IV, 127; VIII, 70.

In the Pāḷi Canon and commentaries, the designation 'Bodhisatta' is given only to Prince Siddhattha before his enlightenment and to his former existences. The Buddha himself uses this term when speaking of his life prior to enlightenment (e.g. M. 4, M. 26). Bodhisattahood is neither mentioned nor recommended as an ideal higher than or alternative to Arahatship; nor is there any record in the Pāḷi scriptures of a disciple declaring it as his aspiration. - See bodhi.", 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

Bojjha: {'def': '(nt.) [orig. grd. of bujjhati or bodheti] a matter to be known or understood, subject of knowledge or understanding Nett 20. (Page 490)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bojjhaṅga: {'def': '[bodhi+aṅga; cp. BSk. bodhyaṅga, e. g. Lal. Vist. 37, where the 7 are given at Divy 208] a factor or constituent of knowledge or wisdom. There are 7 bojjhaṅgas usually referred to or understood from the context. There are enumd at several places, e. g. at D.III,106, where they are mentioned in a list of qualities (dhammā) which contribute to the greatest happiness of gods and man, viz. the 4 satipaṭṭhānā, 4 sammapadhānā, 4 iddhipādā, 5 indriyāni, 5 balāni & the 7 bojjhaṅgas and ariya aṭṭhaṅgika magga, 37 in all. The same list we find at Divy 208. -- The 7 b. (frequently also called sambojjhaṅgā) are sati, dhamma-vicaya, viriya, pīti, passaddhi, samādhi, upekhā or mindfulness, investigation of the Law, energy, rapture, repose, concentration and equanimity (DhsA.217, cp. Expositor II.294). -- D.II,79, 83, 120, 303; III,101, 128, 284; M.I,11, 61; II,12; III,85, 275; S.I,54; V,82, 110; A.I,14; IV,23; Nd1 14, 45, 171 (°kusala), 341; Kvu I.158; Dhs.358, 528, 1354; Vbh.199 sq., 227 sq.; Vism.160; Miln.340; DhA.I,230; VbhA.120, 310; ThA.27, 50, 160. They are counted among the 37 constituents of Arahantship, viz. the 30 above-mentioned qualities (counting magga as one), with addition of sīlesu paripūrikāritā, indriyesu gutta-dvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā, jāgariy’ânuyoga, sati-sampajaññaṁ (see e. g. Nd1 14; Nd2 s. v. satipaṭṭhāna & sīla); cp. Th.1, 161, 162; Th.2, 21 (maggā nibbāna-pattiyā); DhsA.217 (bodhāya saṁvattantī ti bojjhaṅgā etc.; also def. as “bodhissa aṅgo ti pi bojjhaṅgo sen’aṅgarath’aṅg’ādayo viya). They are also called the paribhoga-bhaṇḍāni or “insignia” of the Buddha Miln.330. --kosalla proficiency in the constituents of wisdom Vism.248. (Page 490)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '觉支，智慧的因素。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '(梵bodhyaṅga),【阳】菩提分(觉悟的成份)、觉支(资益觉悟，为‘菩提分’；Pṭs.II,115.︰Bodhāya saṁvattantīti bojjhaṅgā.))。cf. saṁbodhyaṅga((完全)觉支)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】觉支。(p238)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bondi: {'def': '[etym. doubtful, one proposed by Morris, J.P.T.S. 1889, 207 derives it fr. bandh=bundh to bind, which is an erroneous comparison; on his hint “probably cognate with E. body” cp. Walde, Lat. Wtb. under fidelia. The orig. meaning may have been, as Morris suggests, “trunk.” It certainly is a dial. word] body Pv IV.332; J.I,503; II,160; III,117; PvA.254. (Page 491)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】身体。(p239)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】身体。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Brahant: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Vedic bṛhant, of bṛh2 to increase, to be great or strong; paribṛdha solid (cp. brūha, paribrahaṇa & paribrūhana), Av. b∂r∂ƶat high; Arm. barjr high; Oir. brī, Cymr. bre mountain; Goth. baurgs “borough,” Ohg. etc. burg “burgh,” i. e. fortress; Ger. berg mountain. -- The fundamental notion is that of an increase above normal or the ordinary: vuddhi (of vṛdh) is used in explns of the term; thus Dhtp 344 (Dhtm 506) baha braha brūha=vuddhiyaṁ; VvA.278 brahā=vuddhā. Its use is almost entirely restricted to poetry] very great, vast, high, lofty, gigantic; Nom. sg. brahā Sn.410, 550; Th.1, 31; J.III,117 (=dīgha C.); IV,111 (su°); 647; Pv IV.310 (of a huge tree), Acc. sg. brahantaṁ A.III,346; VvA.182; Nom. pl. also brahantā Vv 524 (=mahantā VvA.224; of the Yama-dūtā or Death’s giant messengers). -- f. brahatl J.V,215 (=uḷārā C.); also given as N. of a plant Abhp 588. -- Superl. brahaṭṭha (=Sk. barhiṣṭha; on inversion bar›bra cp. Sk. paribarhanā›P. paribrahaṇa) in °puppha a large or fully developed blossom J.V,416. --arañña woodlands, vast forest A.I,187. --vana the wild wood, immense forest A.I,152; III,44; Vv 633; J.V,215. --sukha (-vihāra-jjhāna-jhāyin) (a thinker enjoying his meditations in) immense happiness Miln.226 (in characterisation of the term “brāhmaṇa”). (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Brahanta: {'def': '【形】巨大的，高高的，巨人般的，极广大的。 (在【合】中的词形 brahā, 相似于 mahanta 的 mahā)。(p239)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】巨大的，高高的，巨人般的，极广大的。(在【合】中的词形 brahā, 相似於 mahanta 的 mahā)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Brahma: {'def': '& Brahmā [fr. bṛh, see brahant. Perhaps less with regard to the greatness of the divine principle, than with ref. to the greatness or power of prayer or the ecstatic mind (i. e. holy enthusiasm). On etym. see Osthoff, “Bezzenberger’s Beiträge” XXIV.142 sq. (=Mir. bricht charm, spell: Oicel. bragr poetry)] -- I. Brahman (nt.) [cp. Vedic bráhman nt. prayer; Nom. sg. bráhma] 1. the supreme good; as a buddhistic term used in a sense different from the brahmanic (save in controversy with Brahmans); a state like that of Brahmā (or Brahman) A.II,184 (brahmappatta). In cpds. brahma°. -- 2. Vedic text, mystic formula, prayer DA.I,244 (brahmaṁ aṇatī ti brāhmaṇo). II. Brahmā [cp. Vedic brahmán, m., one who prays or chants hymns, Nom. sg. Brahmā] 1. the god Brahmā chief of the gods, often represented as the creator of the Universe (vasavattī issaro kattā nimmātā) D.I,18; III,30, also called Mahābrahmā (D.I,235 sq., 244 sq.; III,30; It.15; Vism.578; DhA.II,60); and Sahampati (Vin.I,5; D.II,157; S.I,136 sq.; Vism.201; KhA 171; SnA 56) and Sanaṁkumāra (D.II,226; III,97). The duration of his life is given as being 1 kalpa (see Kvu 207, 208). -- Nom. Brahmā Vin.I,5; D.II,46; J.VI,486; Miln.224; Vism.2 (brahmānaṁ atibrahmā, Ep. of Buddha Bhagavā); SnA 229 (B. mahānubhāvo); Gen. Abl. Brahmano D.II,209; Vism.205; SnA 177; Instr. Brahmanā D.I,252; II,239; Dh.105, 230; Vism.48, 405; DhA.II,60; Acc. Brahmānaṁ D.II,37; Voc. Brahme S.I,138. -- 2. a brahma god, a happy & blameless celestial being, an inhabitant of the higher heavens (brahma-loka; in which to be reborn is a reward of great merit); Nom. sg. brahmā S.I,142 (Baka br.); M.I,327 (id.); A.IV,83; PvA.138 (°devatā for brahma°?); Gen. Abl. brahmuno S.I,142, 155; Instr. brahmunā D.III,147, 150 & brahmanā PvA.98; Voc. sg. brahme M.I,328. pl. Nom. brahmāno Miln.13, 18 (where J.VI,486 has Mahā-brahmā in id. p.); DhsA.195; Gen. brahmānaṁ Vism.2; Mhbv 151. --paccekabrahmā a br. by himself S.I,149 (of the name of Tudu; cp. paccekabuddha). --sabrahmaka (adj.) including the brahma gods D.I,62; A.II,70; Vin.I,11; DA.I,174.

III, brahma (adj.-n.) [cp. brahmā II. 2; Vedic brahma° & Sk. brāhma] 1. holy, pious, brahmanic; (m.) a holy person, a brahmin -- (adj.) J.II,14 (br. vaṇṇa=seṭṭha vaṇṇa C.); KhA 151 (brahma-cariyaṁ= brahmaṁ cariyaṁ). -- (m.) Acc. brahmaṁ Sn.285; Voc. brahme (frequent) Sn.1065 (=brahmā ti seṭṭhavacanaṁ SnA 592); J.II,346; IV,288; VI,524, 532; Pv.I,12⁹ (=brāhmaṇa PvA.66). -- 2. divine, as incorporating the highest & best qualities, sublime, ideal, best, very great (see esp. in cpds.), A.I,132 (brahmā ti mātāpitaro etc.), 182; IV,76. -- 3. holy, sacred, divinely inspired (of the rites, charms, hymns etc.) D.I,96 (brahme mante adhiyitvā); Pv.II,6¹³ (mantaṁ brahmacintitaṁ) =brāhmaṇānaṁ atthāya brahmaṇā cintitaṁ) PvA.97, 98). -- Note. The compⁿ form of all specified bases (I. II. III,) is brahma°, and with regard to meaning it is often not to be decided to which of the 3 categories the cpd. in question belongs.

--attabhāva existence as a brahma god DhA.III,210. --ujjugatta having the most divinely straight limbs (one of the 32 marks of a Great Man) D.II,18; III,144, 155. --uttama sublime DhsA.192. --uppatti birth in the brahma heaven S.I,143. --ûposatha the highest religious observance with meditation on the Buddha & practice of the uposatha abstinence A.I,207. --kappa like Brahmā Th.1, 909. --kāya divine body D.III,84; J.I,95. --kāyika belonging to the company of Brahmā, N of a high order of Devas in the retinue of Br. (cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie pp. 191, 193, 197) D.I,220; II,69; A.III,287, 314; IV,40, 76, 240, 401; Th.1, 1082; Vism.225, 559; KhA 86. --kutta a work of Brahmā D.III,28, 30 (cp. similarly yaṁ mama, pitrā kṛtaṁ devakṛtaṁ na tu brahmakṛtaṁ tat Divy 22). See also under kutta. --giriya (pl.) name of a certain class of beings, possibly those seated on Brahmagiri (or is it a certain class of performers, actors or dancers?) Miln.191. --ghaṭa (=ghaṭa²) company or assembly of Brahmans J.VI,99. --cakka the excellent wheel, i. e. the doctrine of the Buddha M.I,69; A.II,9, 24; III,417; V,33; It.123; Ps.II,174; VbhA.399 (in detail); --cariya see separate article. --cārin leading a holy or pure life, chaste, pious Vin.II,236; III,44; S.I,5, 60; II,210; III,13; IV,93, A.II,44; M.III,117; Sn.695, 973; J.V,107, 382; Vv 34¹¹ (Acc. pl. brahmacāraye for °cārino); Dh.142; Miln.75; DA.I,72 (brahmaṁ seṭṭhaṁ ācāraṁ caratī ti br. c.); DhA.III,83; a° S.IV,181; Pug.27, 36. --cintita divinely inspired PVI I.6¹³=Vv 63¹⁶ (of manta); explⁿ at PvA.97, as given above III,3, differs from that at VvA.265, where it runs: brahmehi Aṭṭhak’ādīhi cintitaṁ paññācakkhunā diṭṭhaṁ, i. e. thought out by the divine (seer) Aṭṭhaka and the others (viz. composers of the Vedic hymns: v. s. brāhmaṇa¹, seen with insight). --ja sprung from Brahmā (said of the Brāhmaṇas) D.III,81, 83; M.II,148. Cp. dhammaja. --jacca belonging to a brahman family Th.1, 689. --jāla divine, excellent net, N. of a Suttanta (D No. 1) Vism.30; VbhA.432, 516; KhA 12, 36, 97; SnA 362, 434. --daṇḍa “the highest penalty,” a kind of severe punishment (temporary deathsentence? ) Vin.II,290; D.II,154; DhA.II,112; cp. Kern, Manual p. 87. --dāyāda kinsman or heir of Brahmā D.III,81, 83. --deyya a most excellent gift, a royal gift, a gift given with full powers (said of land granted by the King) D.I,87 (=seṭṭha-deyyaṁ DA.I,246; cp. Dial. I.108 note: the first part of the cpd. (brahma) has always been interpreted by Brahmans as referring to themselves. But brahma as the first part of a cpd. never has that meaning in Pali; and the word in our passage means literally “a full gift.” -- Cp. id. p. Divy 620, where it does not need to mean “gift to brahmans,” as Index suggests); D.I,114; J.II,166=DhA.III,125 (here a gift to a br., it is true, but not with that meaning); J.VI,486 (sudinnaṁ+); Mhbv 123. We think that both Kern (who at Toev. s. v. unjustly remarks of Bdhgh’s explⁿ as “unjust”) and Fick (who at “Sociale Gliederung” p. 126 trsl^s it as “gift to a Brahman”) are wrong, at least their (and others’) interpretation is doubtful. --devatā a deity of the Brahmaloka PvA.138 (so read for brahmā°). --nimantanika “addressing an invitation to a brahma-god,” title of a Suttanta M.I,326 sq., quoted at Vism.393. --nimmita created by Brahmā D.III,81, 83. --patta arrived at the highest state, above the devas, a state like the Br. gods M.I,386; A.II,184. --patti attainment of the highest good S.I,169, 181; IV,118. --patha the way to the Br. world or the way to the highest good S.I,141; A.III,346; Th.1, 689. Cp. Geiger, Dhamma 77. --parāyana devoted to Brahmā Miln.234. --parisā an assembly of the Brahma gods D.III,260; M.I,330; S.I,155; A.IV,307. --pārisajja belonging to the retinue of Br., N. of the gods of the lowest Rūpa-brahmaloka S.I,145, 155; M.I,330; Kvu 207; cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie 191, 194. --purohita minister or priest to Mahābrahmā; °deva gods inhabiting the next heaven above the Br.-pārisajjā devā (cp. Kirfel Loc. cit.) Kvu 207 (read °purohita for °parohita!). --pphoṭana [a-pphoṭana; ā+ph.] a Brahmaapplause, divine or greatest applause DhA.III,210 (cp. Miln.13; J.VI,486). --bandhu “brahma-kinsman,” a brāhmaṇa in descent, or by name; but in reality an unworthy brahman, Th.2, 251; J.VI,532; ThA.206; cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 140. --bhakkha ideal or divine food S.I,141. --bhatta a worshipper of Br. J.IV,377 sq. --bhavana Br.-world or abode of Br. Nd¹ 448. --bhūta divine being, most excellent being, said of the Buddha D.III,84; M.I,111; III,195, 224; S.IV,94; A.V,226; It.57; said of Arahants A.II,206; S.III,83. --yāna way of the highest good, path of goodness (cp. brahma-patha) S.V,5; J.VI,57 (C. ariyabhūmi: so read for arāya°). --yāniya leading to Brahmā D.I,220. --loka the Br. world, the highest world, the world of the Celestials (which is like all other creation subject to change & destruction: see e. g. Vism.415=KhA 121), the abode of the Br. devas; Heaven. -- It consists of 20 heavens, sixteen being worlds of form (rūpa-brahmaloka) and four, inhabited by devas who are incorporeal (arūpa°). The devas of the Br. l. are free from kāma or sensual desires. Rebirth in this heaven is the reward of great virtue accompanied with meditation (jhāna) A.I,227 sq.; V,59 (as included in the sphere called sahassī cūḷanikā lokadhātu). -- The brahmās like other gods are not necessarily sotāpannā or on the way to full knowledge (sambodhi-parāyaṇā); their attainments depend on the degree of their faith in the Buddha, Dhamma, & Saṅgha, and their observance of the precepts. -- See e. g. D.III,112; S.I,141, 155, 282; A.III,332; IV,75, 103; Sn.508, 1117; J.II,61; Ps.I,84; Pv.II,13¹⁷; Dhs.1282; Vbh.421; Vism.199, 314, 367, 372, 390, 401, 405, 408, 415 sq., 421, 557; Mhbv 54, 83, 103 sq., 160; VbA 68; PvA.76; VbhA.167, 433, 437, 510. See also Cpd. 57, 141 sq.; Kirfel, Kosmographie 26, 191, 197, 207, and cp. in BSk. literature Lal. Vist. 171. The Br.-l. is said to be the one place where there are no women: DhA.I,270. --yāva Brahmalokā pi even unto Br.’s heaven, expression like “as far as the end of the world” M.I,34; S.V,265, 288. --°ûpaga attaining to the highest heaven D.II,196; A.V,342; Sn.139; J.II,61; Kvu 114. --°ûpapatti rebirth in Heaven Sn.139. --°parāyana the Br.-loka as ultimate goal J.II,61; III,396. --°sahavyatā the company of the Br. gods A.IV,135 sq. --yāna the best vehicle S.V,5 (+dhammayāna). --vaccasin with a body like that of Mahābrahmā, comb^d with --vaṇṇin of most excellent complexion, in ster. passage at D.I,114, 115; M.II,167, cp. DA.I,282: °vaccasī ti Mahābrahmuṇo sarīra-sadisena sarīrena samannāgato; °vaṇṇī ti seṭṭhavaṇṇī. --vāda most excellent speech Vin.I,3. --vimāna a palace of Brahmā in the highest heaven D.III,28, 29; It.15; Vism.108. --vihāra sublime or divine state of mind, blissful meditation (exercises on a, altruistic concepts; b, equanimity; see on these meditations Dial I.298). There are 4 such “divine states,” viz. mettā, karuṇā, muditā, upekkhā (see Vism.111; DhsA.192; and cp. Expositor 258; Dhs.trsl. 65; BSk. same, e. g. Divy 224); D.II,196; III,220 (one of the 3 vihāra’s: dibba°, brahma°, ariya°); Th.1, 649; J.I,139 (°vihāre bhāvetvā . . . brahmalok’ûpaga), II.61; Dhs.262; Vism.295 sq. (°niddesa), 319. --veṭhana the head-dress of a brahmin SnA 138 (one of the rare passages where brahma°=brahma III, 1). --sama like Brahmā Sn.508; SnA 318, 325; DhsA.195. --ssara “heavenly sound,” a divine voice, a beautiful and deep voice (with 8 fine qualities: see enum^d under bindu) D.II,211=227; J.I,96; V,336. (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹brah﹐梵brh),【阳】梵天王，造物主。Brahmakāyika,【形】梵衆，梵天王的伴侣)。brahmaghosa,【形】梵音。brahmacariyā(梵brahmacāryā),【阴】梵行，完成纯洁。brahmacārī, 过梵行的生活。brahmajacca,【形】婆罗门(印度的世袭)阶级。brahmañña,【中】brahmaññatā,【阴】婆罗门团体，纯粹的生活。brahmadaṇḍa,【阳】默摈(以冷落为处罚)。【形】brahmadeyya,【中】净施，忠诚的施与。brahmappatta,【形】到达最高的境界。brahmabandhu,【阳】梵天王的亲戚，即：婆罗门。brahmabhūta,【形】最优良的。brahmaloka,【阳】梵的世界。brahmavimāna,【中】梵宫。brahmavihāra,【阳】梵居，梵住，即：慈 mettā, 悲 karuṇā, 喜 muditā, 舍 upekkhā 的总称。brahmasahabyatāya(brahmānaṁ sahabyatāya)﹐与梵天合一。eso hi bhikkhu brahmā mahā-brahmā abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthudaso vasavattī issaro kattā nimmātā seṭṭho sañjitā vasī pitā bhūtabhabyānaṁ.(比丘！他是梵天、大梵天、征服者、非被征服者、一切见者、权威者、主自在者、造作者、化作者、最尊最胜者、主宰者、有力者、为既生、当生一切之父。) iminā mayaṁ bhotā Brahmunā nimmitā(我们是由此可尊敬的梵天所化生的)。brahma-vaṇṇī brahma- vaccasī(具有像梵天一般的美貌及光辉)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】梵天王，造物主。 ~kāyika, 【形】梵众（属于梵天王的伴侣）。 ~ghosa, 【形】梵音。 ~cariyā, 【阴】梵行，完成纯洁。 ~cārī,过梵行的生活。 ~jacca, 【形】属于婆罗门（印度的世袭）阶级。 ~ñña,【中】 ~ññatā, 【阴】婆罗门团体，纯粹的生活。 ~daṇḍa, 【阳】梵罚（以冷落为处罚）。【形】 ~deyya, 【中】净施，忠诚的施与。 ~ppatta,【形】到达最高的境界。 ~bandhu, 【阳】梵天王的亲戚，即：婆罗门。~bhūta, 【形】最优良的。 ~loka, 【阳】梵的世界。 ~vimāna, 【中】梵宫。 ~vihāra, 【阳】梵居，即：慈 mettā, 悲 karuṇā, 喜 muditā, 舍 upekkhā的总称。(p239)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Brahmacariya: {'def': '(nt.) [brahma+cariya] a term (not in the strictly Buddhist sense) for observance of vows of holiness, particularly of chastity: good & moral living (brahmaṁ cariyaṁ brahmāṇaṁ vā cariyaṁ=brahmacariyaṁ KhA 151); esp. in Buddh. sense the moral life, holy life, religious life, as way to end suffering, Vin.I,12, 19, renouncing the world, study of the Dhamma D.I,84, 155; II,106; III,122 sq., 211; M.I,77, 147, 193, 205, 426, 463, 492, 514; II,38; III,36, 116; S.I,38, 43, 87, 105, 154, 209; II,24, 29, 120, 219, 278, 284 (°pariyosāna); III,83, 189; IV,51, 104, 110, 126, 136 sq., 163, 253, V,7 sq., 15 sq., 26 sq., 54 sq., 233, 262, 272, 352; A.I,50, 168, 225; II,26, 44, 185; III,250, 346; IV,311; V,18, 71, 136; Sn.267, 274 (vas-uttama), 566, 655, 1128; Th.1, 1027, 1079; It.28, 48, 78, 111; Dh.155, 156, 312; J.III,396; IV,52; Pv.II,9¹³; DhA.IV,42 (vasuttamaṁ); VbhA.504. --brahmacariyaṁ vussati to live the religious life A.I,115 (cp. °ṁ vusitaṁ in formula under Arahant II. A); °assa kevalin wholly given up to a good life A.I,162; °ṁ santānetuṁ to continue the good life A.III,90; DhA.I,119; komāra° the religious training of a well-bred youth A.III,224; Sn.289. --abrahmacariya unchastity, an immoral life, sinful living M.I,514; D.I,4; Sn.396; KhA 26.

--antarāya raping DhA.II,52. --ânuggaha a help to purity A.I,167; IV,167; Dhs.1348. --ûpaddava a disaster to religious life, succumbing to worldly desires M.III,116. --vāsa state of chastity, holy & pure life; adj. living a pure life A.I,253; J.III,393; Kvu 93; DhA.I,225. (Page 494)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Brahmacariyaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. brahmacariya] only in phrase ādi° leading to the highest purity of life D.I,189, 191; III,284; A.IV,166. (Page 494)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Brahmacariyavant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. brahmacariya] leading the religious life, pure, chaste S.I,182; Dh.267. (Page 494)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Brahmacariyogadha: {'def': '(Brahma+cariya+ogadha (‹gāh))﹐【形】沉浸於梵行(=涅盘)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Brahmacariyā: {'def': '(梵brahmacāryā),【阴】梵行，完成纯洁。KhA.151.︰Brahmaṁ cariyaṁ, brahmānaṁ vā cariyaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, seṭṭhacariyanti vuttaṁ hoti.(梵天的行为，诸梵天的行为，称为‘梵行’，优良的行为之称。)。离淫慾，或离贪.瞋.痴的行为。KhA.152.︰Brahmacariyaṁ nāma methunaviratisamaṇadhammasāsanamaggānamadhivacanaṁ.(梵行(brahmacariyaṁ)：没有(男女)淫欲(methunavirati)，及具足沙门法。)KhA.34.︰Abrahmacariyā veramaṇiyā vigatapaccatthikatā sabbajanapiyatā annapānavatthasayanādīnaṁ lābhitā sukhasayanatā sukhappaṭibujjhanatā apāyabhayavinimuttatā itthibhāvappaṭilābhassa vā napuṁsakabhāvappaṭilābhassa vā abhabbatā akkodhanatā paccakkhakāritā apatitakkhandhatā anadhomukhatā itthipurisānaṁ aññamaññapiyatā paripuṇṇindriyatā paripuṇṇalakkhaṇatā nirāsaṅkatā appossukkatā sukhavihāritā akutobhayatā piyavippayogābhāvatāti evamādīni.(离非梵行：没有仇敌，一切人所喜爱，获得食物、饮料、衣服、住处，躺卧快乐，醒觉快乐，解脱苦界的怖畏，不会生为女性或不能男，不忿怒、不掩饰、不惊慌、脸不下向(丢脸)，女人男人互相喜爱，诸根圆满，特相圆满，无疑惑、生活悠闲、乐住，无怖畏处，无离别喜爱，如此等(果)。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Brahmaka: {'def': '(adj.) only in cpd. sa° with Brahmā (or the Br. world). q. v. (Page 494)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Brahmakāyika: {'def': 'm. [〃] 梵身天, 梵衆天.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Brahmapurohita: {'def': 'm. [〃] 梵輔天.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Brahmapārisajja: {'def': 'm. [BSk. Brahmapāriṣadya] 梵衆天.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Brahmatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. brahma] state of a Brahma god, existence in the Br. world Vbh.337; Vism.301; VbhA.437; DhA.I,110. brahmattabhāva is to be read as brahm’attabhāva (see under brahma). (Page 494)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Brahmattara: {'def': 'at J.III,207 (of a castle) is probably to be read brahmuttara “even higher than Brahmā,” i. e. unsurpassed, magnificent. C. expl^ns by suvaṇṇa- pāsāda. (Page 494)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Brahmavant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. brahma] “having Brahmā,” possessed or full of Brahmā; f. brahmavatī Np. Vism.434. (Page 494)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Brahmañña: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. brāhmaṇa] brahman, of the brahman rank; brahmanhood, of higher conduct, leading a pure life D.I,115 (at which passage DA.I,286 includes Sāriputta, Moggallāna & Mahākassapa in this rank); M.II,167; A.I,143. -- abstr. der. brāhmaññā (nt.) higher or holy state, excellency of a virtuous life D.I,166; Vin.III,44; J.IV,362 (=brāhmaṇa dhamma C.); brahmañña (nt.) D.II,248; brahmaññā (f.) D.III,72, 74; A.I,142; & brahmaññattha (nt.) S.III,192; V,25 sq., 195; A.I,260 (brāhmaññattha). (Page 494)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Brahmaññattha: {'def': 'see brahmañña. (Page 494)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Brahmaññatā: {'def': '(& brāh°) [fr. brahma or brāhmaṇa] state of a brahman D.III,145, 169; Dh.332, cp. DhA.IV,33. -- Neg. a° D.III,70, 71. (Page 494)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Brahmā: {'def': '梵天', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Brahmā Sahampati: {'def': 'm. 娑婆主梵天.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Brahmā-vihāra: {'def': '梵住(慈悲喜舍)', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Brāhmana: {'def': '【阳】婆罗门（印度的世袭阶级的）男人。 ~kañña, 【阴】未婚的婆罗门少女。 ~vācanaka, 【中】婆罗门诵吠陀经。 ~vāṭaka, 【阳】婆罗门集合的地方。(p239)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Brāhmaṇa: {'def': '² (nt.) [for brahmañña] state of a true brahman, “holiness supreme” Th.1, 631. (Page 495)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹brah﹐梵brh),【阳】男婆罗门(梵志，印度的世袭阶级的)，印度四姓中，最上位之阶级，以习吠陀、司祭祀为业，为古印度一切知识、祭祀之垄断者。brāhmaṇakaññā,【阴】未婚的婆罗门少女。brāhmaṇavācanaka,【中】婆罗门诵吠陀经。brāhmaṇavāṭaka,【阳】婆罗门集合的地方。brāhmaṇā va Brahmuno puttā orasā mukhato jātā, brahmajā brahmanimmitā brahmadāyādā.(婆罗门正是梵天之子，从(梵天)自己之口生，是梵天所生，梵天所化，梵天之嗣续者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '婆罗门', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '¹ [fr. brahma; cp. Vedic brāhmaṇa, der. fr. brahmán] a member of the Brahman caste; a Br. teacher. In the Buddhist terminology also used for a man leading a pure, sinless & ascetic life, often even syn. with arahant. -- On brāhmaṇas as a caste & their representation in the Jātaka collection see Fick, Sociale Gliederung; esp. ch. 8, pp. 117--162. -- Var. fanciful etymologies, consisting of a word-play, in P. definitions are e. g. “sattannaṁ dhammānaṁ bāhitattā br.” (like def. of bhikkhu) Nd¹ 86=Nd² 464^a (cp. Sn.519); ye keci bho-vādikā Nd¹ 249=Nd² 464^b; brahā -- sukhavihāra -- jhāna -- jhāyin Miln.226; pāpaṁ bāhesuṁ D.III,94; bāhita-pāpattā br. DhA.III,84; ariyā bāhita-pāpattā br. DA.I,244. -- pl. brāhmaṇāse Sn.1079 sq. -- Var. ref^Q in the Canon to all meanings of the term: D.I,90, 94, 104, 119 sq., 136 (mahāsālā), 150 (°dūta), 247; III,44 sq., 61, 83 sq., 94 sq. (origin of), 147, 170, 258 (°mahāsālā), 270; M.I,271 (°karaṇā dhammā), 280; II,84, 148, 177; III,60, 270 (a bhikkhu addressed as br.); S.I,47, 54, 94 sq., 99 (°kumāra), 117, 125, 160 sq.; II,77, 259; IV,157; V,194; A.I,66, 110, 163 (tevijjā); 166; II,176; III,221 sq. (brāhmaṇa-vagga); It.57 sq., 60, 98, 101; J.III,194; IV,9; VI,521 sq.; Vbh.393 sq. For br. with the meaning “arahant” see also: Vin.I,3; II,156 (br. parinibbuta); Th.1, 140, 221 (brahma-bandhu pure āsiṁ, idāni kho’mhi brāhmaṇo); Dh.383 sq.; Sn.passim (e.g. v. 142 kammanā hoti brāhmaṇo; 284 sq.); J.IV,302 sq.; Miln.225. Ten kinds of Br. are pronounced to be apetā brahmaññā degraded fr. brahmanship J.IV,361 sq. Diff. schools of br. teachers are enum^d at D.I,237 sq. (Tevijja Sutta). --brāhmaṇānaṁ pubbakā isayo mantānaṁ kattāro “the ten inspired Seers of old times, who composed the Vedic hymns”; their names are Aṭṭhaka, Vāmaka, Vāmadeva, Vessāmitta, Yamataggi, Aṅgirasa, Bhāradvāja, Vāseṭṭha, Kassapa, Bhagu Vin.I,245; D.I,104; A.III,224; IV,61; cp. VvA.265. -- f. brāhmaṇī (n. or adj.) the wife of a brāhmaṇa D.I,193; J.V,127 (of a purohita or high priest); DhA.I,33; IV,176; PvA.55, 61, 64. Freq. in combⁿ brāhmaṇī pajā this generation of brāhmaṇas, e. g. D.I,249; A.I,260; II,23 (see pajā). --ibbhā Brahmins & Vaiśyas J.VI,228 sq. --kumārikā a brahmin young girl J.III,93. --kula a br. clan or family J.II,85, 394, 411; III,147, 352; PvA.21, 61. --gahapatikā priests & laymen (“clerk & yeoman” Rh. D. in S.B.E. XI.258) D.II,178; III,148, 153, 170 sq.; S.I,59, 184; A.I,110; Vin.I,35; J.I,83. --gāma a br. village Vin.I,197; D.I,87, 127; S.I,111; J.II,368; III,293; IV,276. --dhamma duty of a br.; see on contrast between Brahmaṇic & Buddhist view J.IV,301 sq., cp. also SnA 312--325 (br.-dhammika-suta) & Fick, l. c. 124. --putta son of a br. PvA.62. --bhojana giving food (alms) to brahmans Vin.I,44. --māṇava a young brahmin J.IV,391. --rūpa (in) form of a br. PvA.63. --vaḍḍhakī a br. carpenter J.IV,207. --vaṇṇin having the appearance of a brahmin Cp. X.10. --vācanaka a br. disputation, some sort of elocution show J.I,318; IV,391. --vāṭaka circle of brahmins DhA.IV,177 (v. l. °vādaka). --vāṇija a br. merchant PvA.113. --sacca a brahmanic (i. e. standard, holy) truth A.II,176 (where the Buddha sets forth 4 such br. --saccāni, diff. from the usual 4 ariyasaccāni). (Page 494)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Brāhmaṇī: {'def': '【阴】女婆罗门。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Brūhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. brūheti] expansion, increasing, spreading; cultivation, development (trs. & intrs.) Miln.313 (Kern, Toev. s. v. “amusement”); DhsA.332; VvA.20 (sukha°). Cp. upa°. (Page 495)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】发展，增加。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】发展，在creme 【中】(p239)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Brūhetar: {'def': '[n. ag. of brūheti] increaser; one who practises, is devoted to; in phrase brūhetā suññâgārānaṁ frequenter of solitary places; given up to solitary meditation M.I,33, 213. (Page 495)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Brūheti: {'def': '[cp. Sk. bṛṁhayati; fr. brh² to increase; Dhtp 346 & Dhtm 505: vuddhiyaṁ. Cp. brahant] to cause to grow, increase; hence: to promote, develop, practise, to put or devote oneself to; to look after, to foster, make enjoy; practically syn. with sevati; S.I,198 (saddhaṁ); Sn.324 (kammāni); Dh.285 (imper. brūhaya=vaḍḍhaya DhA.III,429); Ud.72; J.I,289; Miln.313 (saddena sotaṁ br.); PvA.168 (vaḍḍheti+, for ābhāveti). -- Cp. anu°, pari°. (Page 495)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bruh+e), 增加，发展。【过】brūhesi。【过分】brūhita。【现分】brūhenta。【独】brūhetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(bruh + e), 增加，发展。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 brūhita。【现分】~henta。【独】 ~hetvā。(p239)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Brūhetu: {'def': '【阳】增加的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】增加的人。(p239)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Brūmeti: {'def': '[possible Caus. fr. brūti, but as Geiger, P.Gr. 141², rightly remarks “not critically sound”] to say D.I,95 (expl^d as “brūmetū ti vadatu” DA.I,265). (Page 495)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Brūti: {'def': '[brū, Sk. bravīti, Med. brūte; cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 141². Expl^d by Dhtp 366 as “vacane,” by Dhtm 593 as “vācāyaṁ, viyattiyaṁ”] to say, tell, call; show, explain D.I,95; Sn.308 sq.; Dh.383 sq.; Cp. VI,8; Miln.314, 327. -- Constructed with double Acc. or with Dat. of person & Acc. of thing said (cp. Miln.233). -- Forms: Pres. 1^st sg. brūmi It.33, 40; S 1033, 1042 sq. (expl^d as ācikkhāmi desemi paññāpemi etc. by Nd.); Pv.I,2³ (=kathemi PvA.11); Th.1, 214; 2^nd sg. brūsi Sn.457, 1032, 1081; J.II,48; Th.2, 58; 3^rd sg. brūti Sn.122; imper. brūhi Th.1, 1266; Sn.1018, 1034, 1043; Miln.318. -- pret. abravi Sn.981; Th.1, 1275; J.VI,269; Pv.II,9⁶⁴ (v. l. abruvi); PvA.264; abruvi J.III,62, and bravi J.V,204; 3^rd sg. med. bravittha Vv 53¹⁰ (=kathesi VvA.240); 1^st sg. also abraviṁ Cp. II.6⁸; 3^rd pl. abravuṁ J.V,112. (Page 495)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(brū + a), 说，谈话。【过】 abravi。【现分】 bruvanta。【独】 bruvitvā。(p239)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(brū+a), 说，谈话。【过】abravi。【现分】bruvanta。【独】bruvitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bubbula: {'def': 'bubbulaka,【中】泡沬。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'bubbulaka, 【中】泡沫。(p238)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bubbuḷa: {'def': '(& Bubbula) [cp. Epic Sk. budbuda] a bubble. On similes cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 117. -- Usually of a waterbubble udaka° S.III,141; A.IV,137; J.V,216; Miln.117; Vism.109; DhA.III,209; VbhA.33 (as unsubstantial to which vedanā are likened). In other connection at J.I,68 (of cooking gruel). Bubbuḷaka =bubbuḷa, viz. 1. a bubble DhA.III,166; Miln.118. -- 2. the iris of the eye Th.2, 395 (cp. Morris, in J.P.T.S. 1884, 89, but according to ThA.259 the reading pubbaḷhaka is to be preferred.) (Page 490)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bubhukkhati: {'def': '(bhuj+kha掘, bhu 重叠，首 bh 改为 b, 而 j 改成 k), 想吃。【过】bubhukhi。【过分】bubhukhita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(bhuj + kha, bhu 重叠，首 bh 改为 b, 而 j 改成 k), 想吃。【过】~khi。【过分】 khita。(p238)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bubhukkhita: {'def': '[pp. of bubhukkhati, Desid. of bhuñjati] wishing to eat, hungry J.II,14; V,70; Miln.66; Dāvs III,32. (Page 490)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Buddha: {'def': '² [=buddha1] A. one who has attained enlightenment; a man superior to all other beings, human & divine, by his knowledge of the truth, a Buddha. At A.II,38 the Buddha declares himself to be neither a god (deva) nor a Gandharva, nor a Yakṣa nor a man. ‹-› The word Buddha is an appellative, not a proper name (na mātarā kataṁ etc., vimokkh’antikaṁ etaṁ bud‹-› dhānaṁ Bhagavantānaṁ bodhiyā mūle . . . paññatti) Nd¹ 458 & Ps.I,174. -- There are 2 sorts of B’s, viz. Pacceka-buddhas or Buddhas who attain to complete enlightenment, but do not preach the way of deliverance to the world, and Sammāsambuddhas, who are omniscient and endowed with the 10 powers (see bala), and whose mission is to proclaim the saving truth to all beings (cp. Miln.106). In this function the B’s are Satthāro or teachers, Masters. In his rôle of a preeminent man a Buddha is styled Bhagavā or Lord: Buddho so Bhagavā M.I,235; Pv.II,9⁶⁰=DhA.III,219. -- Besides the 18 dhammā and the 10 balāni they are gifted with the 4 vesārajjāni (A.II,9, cp. Miln.106). These teachers appear upon the earth from time to time; the approach of the birth of a B. (buddh’--uppāda) is hailed by the acclamation of the worlds, they live the houseless life and found an Order (Buddha-pamukha bhikkhu-saṅgha Sn.p. 111; Sn.81, 386; Miln.212; DA.I,242; PvA.19). The news that a B. has appeared upon earth is a cause of the greatest rejoicing: opportunity to see him is eagerly sought (Vin.II,155; S.I,210; DA.I,248). The B. is always born in a brāhmaṇa or khattiya family. It is impossible here to give all the references for the Buddhas or Buddhahood in general; see e. g. Vin.III,24 sq.; Dh.182 sq., 194, 195 (=sammā sambuddhā DhA.III,252), 387; J.I,51; III,128; Vism.442 (pubba-buddhā); PvA.20. -- The remembrance of former births a B. shares with other classes of privileged beings, only in a different (higher) degree. This faculty (in an ascending scale) is possessed by the foll. 6 classes: titthiyā, pakati-sāvakā, mahā-sāvaka, agga-sāvakā, pacceka-buddhā, buddhā (see Vism.411). -- B. The word Buddha is specially applied to the Buddha of the present world-age, Gotama by family-name. He is said to be the 25^th of the series of former Buddhas (pubbā buddhā) S.I,109, 140; IV,52. -- Seven Buddhas are mentioned in the earlier texts & frequently referred to (cp. the 7 Rishis of the Vedic period, see also under satta, No. 7). They are Vipassī, Sikhī, Vessabhū, Kakusandha, Konāgamana, Kassapa and Gotama (D.II,5--7; S.II,5--11; cp. Th.1, 491; J.II,147). They are also mentioned in an old formula against snake-bites (Vin.II,110). The (allegorical) names of the predecessors of these in former ages are Dīpaṅkara, Kondañña, Maṅgala, Sumana, Revata, Sobhita, Anomadassī, Paduma, Narada, Padumuttara, Sumedha, Sujāta, Piyadassī, Atthadassī, Dhammadassī, Siddhattha, Tissa, Phussa. -- The typical career of a Buddha is illustrated in the life of Gotama and the legends connected with his birth, as they appear in later tradition. Before his last existence he practised the 10 perfections (pāramitā, q. v.) for many ages, & finally descended from the Tusita Heaven (see Buddhavaṁsa). He was born in a khattiya family and was distinguished by the 32 signs of a great man (Mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇāni see D.II,17 sq. and similar passages; cp. Ud.48). His mother Māyā bore him painlessly and died seven days after his birth M.III,118 sq. -- The story of each of the 25 Buddhas is given in the Buddhavaṁsa, quoted in the introductory chapters of the Jātak’aṭṭhakathā. -- Convinced that asceticism was not the way to enlightenment, he renounced austerities. He became enlightened when seated in meditation under an Assattha tree (Ficus religiosa, hence called Bodhi or Bo tree). At the supreme moment he was tempted by Māra, but vanquished the evil one. He was then ready to depart, but resolved to remain in the world and preach the truth (M.I,169; Vin.I,6; a rather diff. account A.II,20). That day he knew and proclaimed himself to be the Buddha and his career as a teacher began (M.I,171; Vin.I,9; Sn.558). -- Like all the other Sammā-sambuddhas he founded an Order, converting and gladdening men by his discourses. After a long life of teaching he attained Nibbāna (nibbānaṁ adhigacchi), and passed utterly away: S.I,210; D.II,156; Sn.83, 513, 1133 sq.; Miln.96. -- The Epithets attributed to all the Buddhas are naturally assigned also to Gotama Buddha. Out of the almost endless series of these we only give a few. He is adored as the highest and holiest of men (S.I,47; III,84; loke anuttaro, lokassa aggo; Miln.70). He is the supremely wise, the conqueror of the powers of darkness, the teacher of gods (devas and yakkhas) and men S.I,50, 132, 206. 301; A.I,142; II,33; III,65; Sn.157 sq. He is the ādicca-bandhu kinsman of the sun S.I,186; and compared to a universal monarch (rājā cakkavattī) A.I,76; III,150 and to the lion (sīha), the king of the animals A.III,122. He is buddha-vīra Th.1, 47; the refuge of all beings M.II,305; DA.I,233; Miln.95; further appaṭipuggala S.I,134; his teaching leads to enlightenment, to self-conquest, to security & deliverance M.I,235; Sn.454, 993; DA.I,230. He himself is not to be reborn (antima-sarīro with his last body) S.I,210; he is vimutto, freed & has come to the end of sorrow A.IV,258; S.III,65; full of compassion for all beings S.I,25, 51; M.II,100; he is bhisakko the physician A.IV,340; magga-ññu, magga-vidū, maggakovido S.III,66. -- Under Buddh’anussati (Vism.198 sq.) we find the famous formula Bhagavā Arahaṁ Sammāsambuddho vijjā-caraṇa-sampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisa-damma-sārathi Satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho Bhagavā (D.I,49≈), analysed & exegetically discussed. Here (p. 209) “Buddha” is expl^d with the formula as found at Ps.I,174; Nd¹ 457. More explicitly with var. epithets at the latter passage. This formula is one of the highest & most comprehensive characterisations of a Buddha, & occurs frequently in the Canon, e. g. M.I,179; S.II,69; V,343. -- A khattiya by birth he is called a brāhmaṇa because he carries on the sacred tradition, and because he excels in wisdom, self-control and virtue Miln.225.

--ânubuddha enlightened after the Enlightened one Th.1, 679, 1246 (trsl^d “who next to our Great Waked one was awoke”). --ânubhāva the majestic power of the B. PvA.38, 171. --ânussati mindfulness of the B., one of the 6 anussatis (B.°, dhamma°, saṅgha°, sīla°, cāga°, devatā°) D.III,250, 280; Vism.132 (where followed by upasamânussati and 4 other qualities making up the pīti-sambojjh’aṅga; see anussati), 197 sq. (the 10, as mentioned under anussati). --aṅkura a nascent (lit. sprouting) Buddha, one who is destined to be a B. DhA.I,83. --antara a Buddha-interval, the period between the appearance of one Buddha & the next Miln.3; DhA.I,201 (the 4 last ones); IV,201; PvA.10, 14, 21, 47, 191. --ārammaṇa having its foundation or cause in the B., in °pīti joy, caused by contemplation of a B. J.III,405; Vism.143 (here as ubbegā-pīti). --ûpaṭṭhāna B.-worship DhA.I,101; PvA.93. --uppāda the coming into existence of a Buddha, time or age in which a B. was born (opp. Buddh’antara), a Buddha-period J.I,59; Mhbv 12; VbhA.50; ThA.28. --kara making a B., bringing about Buddhahood J.I,20. --kāraka=°kara Mhbv 9. --kāla the time of a B. Vism.91 (Buddhakālo viya pavattati it is like the time of the B.) --kula Buddha-clan SnA 532 (B.-pitā, °mātā ibid.). --kolāhala the announcement of a Buddha, one of the 5 kolāhalas (q. v.) KhA 121, cp. J.I,48. --khetta field or region of (or for the existence of) a Buddha Vism.414 (divided into 3 spheres: jātikkhetta, āṇākkhetta, visayakkhetta, see khetta). --gata directed or referring to the B. S.I,211 (sati); Dh.296. --guṇa quality of a B., virtue, character of a Buddha J.I,27; II,147; Bu II.177; Mbhv 80; KhA 121 (cp. App.). --cakkhu the eye of a Buddha, i. e. an eye (or the faculty) of complete intuition Vin.I,6; ThA.2; see discussed in detail at Nd¹ 359=Nd² 235⁴; cp. cakkhu. --ñāṇa knowledge of a B., which is boundless (cp. Saddh. 73, J.P.T.S. 1887, 40) Bu I.64 (appameyya); X.5 (cuddasa). --dhamma Buddhahood Miln.276; pl. condition or attributes of a B. J.I,20; referred to as 6 at Nd¹ 143= Nd² 466 (bhāgī channaṁ °ānan ti Bhagavā), as 18 at Miln.105, 285. Kern (Manual & Grundriss III,8, p. 63) gives (after Lal. Vist. 183, 343) the foll. 18 āveṇikadharmas (“extraordinary qualities”) as such: (1) seeing all things past, (2) present, (3) future, (4) propriety of actions of the body, (5) of speech, (6) of thought, (7) firmness of intuition, (8) of memory, (9) of samādhi, (10) of energy, (11) of emancipation, (12) of wisdom, (13) freedom from fickleness, (14) noisiness, (15) confusedness, (16) hastiness, (17) heedlessness, (18) inconsiderateness. --pañha the name given to one question asked by Sāriputta, which the paribbājikā Kuṇḍalakesī was unable to answer DhA.II,225. --pasanna finding one’s happiness, or believing in the B. Vin.IV,39. --putta son of the B. said of bhikkhus or arahants Miln.143, cp. S.III,83: puttā Buddhassa orasā. --bala the force of a B. (iddibala & paññā°) Bu I.3. --bījaṅkura a future B. Bu II.71. --bhāva condition of a B. enlightenment J.I,14, 147 (abuddhabhāva un-buddhahood, of Devadatta); DA.I,1. --bhūmi the ground of Buddhahood Bu II.175. --manta mystic verses of a B. DA.I,248. --māmaka devotedly attached to the B. DhA.I,206 (+Dhamma°, Saṅgha°). --rakkhita saved by the B. (Np.) SnA 534 (+Dhamma°). --rasmi (pl. °iyo) rays shining forth from the person of the Buddha; they are of 6 colours J.I,501; SnA 132; Mhbv 6, 15, 38; VvA.207; DhsA.13. --rūpa form or figure of the B. Vism.228 (Mārena nimmita, cp. Divy 162, 166; Buddha-nirmāṇa the magic figure of the B.). --līḷha (& °līḷhā) deportment, ease, grace of a Buddha J.I,54; Mhbv 39; DhA.I,33; II,41. --vacana the word (teaching) of the Buddha Miln.17; KhA 13; SnA 274, 331. --visaya the sphere (of wonder), the range, scope or power of a Buddha (cp. buddha-khetta) DhA.I,33; II,199; SnA 154, 228. --veneyya one able to be led to enlightenment, accessible to Buddha’s teaching SnA 15, 331. --sāsana the teaching (instructions) of the B. Dh.368, 381. --sukumāla delicate, sensitive (to fatigue), as Buddhas are DhA.I,5. Buddhaka (-°) (adj.) [fr. buddha] in cpd. dvaṅgula-buddhikā (f.) possessing insight as much as 2 finger-breadths VvA.96. -- The °ka belongs to the whole cpd. (Page 488)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹(adj.) [med.-pass. pp. of bujjhati, cp. Epic Sk. buddha] (a) understood S.I,35=60 (su-dub-buddha very difficult to understand). -- (b) having attained enlightenment, wise A.IV,449; PvA.16 (buddh’ādayo), 60 (=ariya). Usually appld to the Bhagavant (Gotama) M.I,386 (one of the adj. describing Gotama to Nigaṇṭha Nāthaputta); Sn.993. The true brāhmaṇa is buddha, e. g. Sn.622, 643, 646. (Page 488)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 's. sammā-sambodhi.', 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}; {'def': '【阳】觉悟者，佛陀。 ~kāraka-dhamma, 【阳】成佛之法。 ~kāla, 【阳】佛住世时。 ~kolāhala, 【阳】佛陀到来的公告。 ~kkhetta, 【中】佛田（佛力的范围）。 ~guṇa, 【阳】佛陀的德行。 ~ṅkura, 【阳】未来佛。 ~cakkhu, 【中】佛眼。 ~ñāṇa, 【中】佛智。 ~antara, 【中】佛与佛之间的间隔时期。 ~putta, 【阳】佛陀的弟子。 ~bala, 【中】佛力。~bhāva, 【阳】成为佛陀的状态。 ~bhūmi, 【阴】成为佛陀的状态之地。~māmaka, 【形】执着佛陀，献身佛陀。 ~rasmi, ~raŋsi, 【阴】佛光。~līḷhā, 【阴】佛陀的优雅。 ~vacana, 【中】佛陀的言教。 ~visaya, 【阳】佛陀的范围。 ~veneyya, 【形】被佛陀改变信仰的。 ~sāsana, 【中】佛教。 ~ānubhāva, 【阳】佛陀的宏伟力量。 ~anussati, 【阴】佛随念。~ārammaṇa, ~ālambana, 【形】以佛为缘的。 ~upaṭṭhāka, 【形】服侍佛陀的。 ~uppāda, 【阳】佛陀出世。(p238)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '佛陀', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '(fr. budh醒),【阳】觉悟者，佛陀，佛(亻+弗,不是人，A.4.36./II,38.：na…manusso﹐cf. 《杂阿含101经》)，浮屠(音译)、浮图、佛驮、浮陀、浮头、没驮、步他、馞陀、复豆、浮屠。季羡林在1989年又写了《再论浮屠与佛》，进一步论证汉文音译「浮屠」源自大夏语。单.主.buddho﹑buddhe；复.主buddhā﹑buddhāse﹑buddho(罕)；单.呼.buddha﹑buddhā﹑buddhe(罕)﹑buddho(罕)；复.呼buddhā；单.宾.buddhaṁ；复.宾.buddhe﹑buddhān(罕)；单.具.buddhena﹑buddhā(罕)﹑buddhasā(罕)；复.具.buddhehi﹑buddhebhi﹑buddhe(罕)；单.离.buddhā﹑buddhamhā﹑buddhasmā﹑buddhato；复.离.buddhehi﹑buddhebhi﹑buddhato；单.与.﹑属.buddhassa﹑buddhāya(罕)﹑buddhā(罕)；复.与.﹑属.buddhānaṁ；单.处.buddhe﹑buddhamhi﹑buddhasmiṁ﹑buddhasi(罕)；复.处.buddhesu。另译作：佛驮、休屠、浮陀、浮屠、浮图、浮头、没驮、勃陀、馞陀、步他、或一切知者、一切见者、知道者、开道者、说道者，或世尊、世雄(断世间一切烦恼之雄猛、雄健者)、世眼(世间之引导者)、世英(世间优秀者)、大觉世尊(简称大觉尊)、觉王(觉皇)、法王、大导师、大圣人、大沙门、大仙(大仙，仙人中之最尊者)、大医王(如应病与药之名医，应心病而说法者)、佛日(喻佛为太阳)、两足尊、二足尊、天中天(诸天中之最胜者)、人中牛王(喻佛为牛王)、人雄师子(人中之雄者，如兽王狮子)等种种异名。buddhakāraka-dhamma,【阳】成佛之法。buddhakāla,【阳】佛住世时。buddhakolāhala,【阳】佛陀到来的公告。buddhakkhetta(梵buddha-ksetra),【中】佛刹(一佛所教化之范围)，又作佛土、佛国。buddhaguṇa,【阳】佛陀的德行。buddhaṅkura,【阳】未来佛。buddhacakkhu,【中】佛眼。buddhāṇa,【中】佛智。buddhantara,【中】佛与佛之间的间隔时期。buddhaputta,【阳】佛陀的弟子。buddhabala,【中】佛力。buddhabhāva,【阳】成为佛陀的状态。buddhabhūmi,【阴】成为佛陀的状态之地。buddhamāmaka,【形】执著佛陀，献身佛陀。buddharasmi, buddharaṁsi,【阴】佛光。buddhalīḷhā,【阴】佛陀的优雅。buddhavacana,【中】佛陀的言教。buddhavisaya,【阳】佛陀的范围。buddhaveneyya,【形】被佛陀改变信仰的。buddhasāsana,【中】佛教。buddhānubhāva,【阳】佛陀的宏伟力量。buddhānussati,【阴】佛随念(recollection of Buddha)。buddhārammaṇa, buddhālambana,【形】以佛为缘的。buddhupaṭṭhāka,【形】服侍佛陀的。Buddhuppāda,【阳】佛陀出世。在《佛种姓经》记载过去二十五佛：1.Dīpaṅkarabuddha(燃灯佛)(四阿僧祇劫十万大劫前)。2.Koṇḍaññabuddha(乔陈如佛)(无量劫前)。3.Maṅgalabuddha(吉祥佛)(无量劫前)。4.Sumanabuddha(善心佛)(无量劫前)。5.Revatabuddha(离瓦多佛)(无量劫前)。6.Sobhitabuddha(须毘陀佛)(无量劫前)。7.Anomadassībuddha(完美见佛)(无量劫前)。8.Padumabuddha(莲华佛)(无量劫前)。9.Nāradabuddha(那罗陀佛)(无量劫前)。10.Padumuttarabuddha (最上莲华佛)(十万劫前)。11.Sumedhabuddha(善慧佛)(八万劫前)。12.Sujātabuddha(善生佛)(三千劫前)。13.Piyadassībuddha(毘耶达西佛)(一千八百劫前)。14.Atthadassībuddha(见义佛)(一千八百劫前)。15.Dhammadassībuddha(见法佛)(一千八百劫前)。16.Siddhatthabuddha(悉达多佛)(九十四劫前)。17.Tissabuddha(提沙佛)(九十二劫前)。18.Phussabuddha(普沙佛)(九十二劫前)。19.Vipassībuddha(梵 Vipāsyi﹐毘婆尸佛)(庄严劫，九十一劫前)。20.Sikhībuddha(梵Wikhī﹐尸弃佛)(庄严劫，三十一劫前)。21.Vessabhūbuddha(梵Viwvabhū﹐毘舍浮佛)(庄严劫，三十一劫前)。22.Kakusandhabuddha(梵Krakucchanda﹐拘留孙佛)(这个贤劫)。23.Koṇāgamanabuddha(梵Kanakamuni﹐拘那含佛)(这个贤劫)。24.Kassapabuddha(梵Kāywāpa﹐迦叶佛)(这个贤劫)。25.Gotamabuddha(乔达摩佛)( 梵Wakyamuni﹐巴Sakyamuni这个贤劫)。传说弥勒佛将出世於人寿八万岁时出世。(19.~25.为过去共有七佛)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Buddha-sāsana: {'def': '佛教。sāsana，意为教导、教说、教法。Buddha-sāsana即佛陀的教导、佛陀的教法。
佛陀的教法可以分为三个层面：
教理之教（pariyatti-sāsana） ——律、经、论三藏等应当学习的教法义理。
行道之教（paṭipatti-sāsana） ——戒、定、慧三学等能导向证悟出世间法的禅修实践。
通达之教（paṭivedha-sāsana） ——证悟四种圣道、四种圣果以及涅槃九种出世间法。
唯有教理之教的住立，才有行道之教的存在，因为修行不能偏离三藏，不能违背佛陀的教导。唯有行道之教的住立，才有通达之教的存在，因为如果不依照戒定慧禅修，脱离了行道实践，就不可能证悟任何的出世间法。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': 's.sāsana.

', 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

Buddhadatta: {'def': 'm. 仏授[パーリ仏教における五世紀の学者, 論師].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Buddhagayā: {'def': '（城市名）布德嘎亚，（古音译：）菩提伽耶，佛陀伽耶', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Buddhaghosa: {'def': 'm. 仏音, 覚音[パーリ仏教における三藏の大註釈家].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '(梵Buddhaghosa),【阳】佛音，觉音(约4世纪末～5世纪)\xa0，皈依佛教后改名「佛音」(Mahāvaṁsa (CS:p.243)#224.犹如佛陀甚深的声音一样优美，因其音声而称为「佛音」)。约在公元 4世纪末出生於北天竺菩提伽耶附近的一个婆罗门种姓家庭。据《小史》载﹐他曾受过良好的婆罗门传统教育﹐精通三吠陀和其他典籍﹐有辩才。游学印度时﹐遇一佛教长老梨婆多﹐后者在辩论中折服他﹐遂改信佛教。在梨婆多的指导下﹐修习经论﹐日益精进﹐并写出了《发智论》和《殊胜义论》。梨婆多发现他有志於从事佛教教理的著述﹐派他前往当时保存原始佛教资料较多的锡兰(今斯里兰卡)。他约於 422年到达锡兰﹐住进了大寺的大精进堂﹐在僧护长老的指导下﹐研读僧伽罗文疏释和上座部佛教教义。经过一段时间的学习﹐写出了阐述佛教主要教理的纲要作品──《清净道论》。研究上座部佛教思想和教理的重要论书，被誉为三藏典籍和义疏的精要。(http://db2.library.ntpu.edu.tw/cpedia/Content.asp?ID=56403)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Buddhati: {'def': 'to obstruct, withhold etc.: see pali°. (Page 490)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Buddhatta: {'def': '【中】佛陀的境界。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. buddha] state of (perfect) enlightenment, (attainment of) Buddhahood J III 363 (sabbadhammānaṁ b.); Vism.209 (buddhattā Buddho); Mhbv 12. Cp. buddhatā and abhisambuddhatta. (Page 490)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】佛陀的境界。(p238)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Buddhatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. buddha] enlightenment, wisdom DhA.IV,228; ThA.4 (Buddha-subuddhatā). -- Cp. buddhatta. (Page 490)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Buddhavacana: {'def': '【中】佛陀的言教。《法句经注》(DhA.)说是佛陀最初(成道)时所说的话(paṭhamabuddhavacanaṁ)：Anekajātisaṁsāraṁ\u3000sandhāvissaṁ anibbisaṁ,\u3000gahakārakaṁ gavesanto,\u3000dukkhā jāti punappunaṁ. Gahakāraka diṭṭho si,\u3000puna gehaṁ na kāhasi; sabbā te phāsukā bhaggā, gahakūṭaṁ visaṅkhitaṁ; visaṅkhāragataṁ cittaṁ,\u3000taṇhānaṁ khayam ajjhagā.(我经多生的轮回流转，寻求造屋者而未发现，一再的生是痛苦的。造屋者！你已见被发现，你不再造屋。你的一切的肋已被(我)破坏，(你的)屋顶已被(我)破坏；已去到无为心，获得诸渴爱的灭尽。)(《法句经》Dhp.vv.153.~154.)「屋顶已被破坏」：DhA.作：椽桷ㄔㄨㄢˊㄐㄩㄝˊ(kaṇṇika-maṇḍala支撑屋顶的木条)已被我破坏。佛陀的最后遗教(pacchimabuddhavacanaṁ)：‘Yo vo, ānanda, mayā dhammo ca vinayo ca desito paññatto so vo mamaccayena satthā’ti(阿难！若我消逝后，以我为你们所说的法与律为师。)(D.16./II,154.；CS:p.2.126-7)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Buddhavaṁsa: {'def': '﹐佛种姓。Buddhattaṁ patthentassa：「成佛」(遇佛授记的条件)“Manussattaṁ liṅgasampatti, hetu satthāradassanaṁ pabbajjā guṇasampatti adhikāro ca chandatā.”1.Manussattabhāvasmiṁyeva 必须是「人类」。2.Purisaliṅge ṭhitasseva 男性特徵。3.Arahattappattiyā hetusampannasseva 此生具有证得罗汉的潜力。4.Vīvamānabuddhasseva santike patthentasseva 曾生在佛活著时。5.Pabbajjāliṅge ṭhitasseva 出家。6.Pañcābhiññaṭṭhasamāpattilābhinoyeva成就五神通和八禅定(除漏尽通外)。7.āttano jīvitaṁ buddhānaṁ pariccataṁ hoti tasseva iminā adhikārena adhikārasampannassa.舍命的力量－整个生命奉献给诸佛。8.Buddhakārakadhammānaṁ atthāya mahanto chando ca ussāho ca tasseva patthanā samijjhati. 强烈意欲修十波罗蜜。āṭṭhadhammasamodhānā, abhinīhāro samijjhati.发显成佛的志向，集合八个基本条件完全具备。(《Buddhavaṁsa-aṭṭhakathā 佛种性注释》) (CS:p.115)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Buddhavaṃsa: {'def': 'm. 仏種姓経[小部経の一, Khuddaka 14].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Buddhavisaya: {'def': '【阳】佛境界。A.4.77./II,80.︰“Buddhānaṁ, bhikkhave, Buddhavisayo acinteyyo, na cintetabbo; yaṁ cintento ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assa. Jhāyissa, bhikkhave, jhānavisayo acinteyyo, na cintetabbo; yaṁ cintento ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assa. Kammavipāko, bhikkhave, acinteyyo, na cintetabbo; yaṁ cintento ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assa. Lokacintā, bhikkhave, acinteyyā, na cintetabbā; yaṁ cintento ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assa. Imāni kho, bhikkhave, cattāri acinteyyāni, na cintetabbāni; yāni cintento ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assā”ti.「诸比丘！诸佛的佛境界(Buddhavisayo)不能被思(acinteyyo)，不应被思(na cintetabbo)；若思者，会带点狂乱与错乱。诸比丘！禅那者的禅那境界，不能被思，不应被思；若思者，会带点狂乱与错乱。诸比丘！业报不能被思，不应被思；若思者，会带点狂乱与错乱。诸比丘！思世间(世界的成败等)不能被思，不应被思；若思者，会带点狂乱与错乱。」', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Buddhi: {'def': '【阴】智慧，智力。 ~mantu, ~sampanna, 【形】明智的，聪明的。(p238)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】智慧，智力。buddhimantu, buddhisampanna,【形】明智的，聪明的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. budh; cp. Class. Sk. buddhi] wisdom, intelligence D.III,165 (in sequence saddhā sīla suta b. cāga etc.); J.III,369; V,257; Miln.349; Sdhp.263. The ref. Vism.439 should be read vuddhi for b°. --carita one whose behaviour or character is wisdom Vism.104 (=paññavā). --sampanna endowed with (highest) wisdom PvA.39. (Page 490)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Buddhika: {'def': '(adj.) [--°) [fr. buddhi] intelligent, in cpds a° unintelligent & sa° possessed of wisdom Miln.76. (Page 490)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Buddhimant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. buddhi] possessing insight, full of right knowledge Vin.II,195; J.V,257; Miln.21, 294; PvA.131 (paṇḍita, b., sappañña-jātika). (Page 490)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Buddho: {'def': '佛陀', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Buddhānussati: {'def': "'recollection of the Enlightened One'; s. anussati.", 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}; {'def': '【阴】佛随念。忆念佛陀的九个名号，Iti’pi so Bhagavā 1Arahaṁ 2Sammāsambuddho 3Vijjācaraṇasampanno 4Sugato 5Lokavidū 6Anuttaro purisadamma-sārathī 7Satthā Devamanussānaṁ 8Buddho 9Bhagavā’ti.(如此，他成为世尊是：1阿罗汉、2正自觉者、3明行足、4善逝、5世间解、6无上士调御丈夫、7天人师、8佛、9世尊。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Budha: {'def': '【阳】明智的人，水星 (☿)。 ~vāra, 【阳】星期三。(p238)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】明智的人，水星(Mercury辰星、部陀)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Budhavāro: {'def': '﹐【阳】星期三(日语：水曜日)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bujjhaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. budh] intelligent, prudent, judicicus, in a° Dpvs IX.17, foolish, imprudent, unmindful of their own interest (trsln suggested by E. Hardy as preferable to Oldenberg’s “unnoticed”). Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 69 suggests “not fighting,” thus making abujjhaka= avujjh°=ayujjh° (of yudh). (Page 488)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bujjhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. budh] awakening, attaining to knowledge, recognition Ps.I,18; Miln.194; DA.I,51. (Page 488)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】觉悟，醒来。 ~ka, 【形】聪明的，谨慎的。(p238)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】觉悟，醒来。bujjhanaka,【形】聪明的，谨慎的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bujjhanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bujjhana] endowed with knowledge, having the elements of bodhi, being enlightened DhsA.217. (Page 488)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bujjhati: {'def': '(budh + ya), 知道，懂，感知，醒觉。【过】 bujjhi。【过分】 buddha。【现分】 ~jhanta。【独】 ~jhitvā。(p238)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[budh, y-formation, corresp. to Sk. budhyate for the usual bodhate. The sense is that of a Med., but is also used as Act. with Acc. of object, e. g. saccāni bujjhi he recognised the truths Vism.209. -- The Dhtp (414) and Dhtm (652) explain budh by “avagamane” (understanding, see ogamana), Dhtm (242) also by “bodhane” (awakening). Bdhgh’s expln of the meaning is “kilesa-santāna-niddāya uṭṭhahati cattāri vā ariyasaccāni paṭivijjhati Nibbānam eva vā sacchikaroti” DhsA.217, cp. trsln at Expos. 294 “to rise from the slumber of the continuum of the lower nature, or a penetrating the Ariyan Truths, or a realizing Nibbāna”] to be awake, to be enlightened in (Acc.), to perceive, to know, recognise, understand D.II,249; S.I,74, 198; Dh.136, 286; Th.1, 146; J.III,331; IV,49, 425; Miln.165, 348 (pot. bujjheyya); Dpvs.I,14 (with Gen.) KhA 219 (so attho sukhaṁ b.). 3rd pl. bujjhare Th.2, 453; Bu II.183. imper. bujjhassu Bu II.183. ‹-› fut. bujjhissati Bu II.65; aor. abujjhi Bu II.211, and bujjhi J.IV,425; Vism.209; pret. 3rd sg. abujjhatha Bu VII.22. -- ppr. bujjhamāna Sn.395; Bu VII.22; DhA.I,93. -- pp. buddha (q. v.). -- Caus. I. bodheti (q. v.). -- Caus. II. bujjhāpeti to lead to knowledge or recognition J.I,407. Two infinitives formed fr. bodh, but belonging to budh are bodhuṁ J.V,341, and boddhuṁ Th.1, 167. (Page 488)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(budh醒+ya), 知道，懂，感知，醒觉。【过】bujjhi。【过分】buddha。【现分】bujjhanta。【独】bujjhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bujjhitar: {'def': '[n. ag. of bujjhati] one who becomes enlightened or recognises Nd1 457=Ps.I,174=Vism.209 (bujjhitā saccāni, of the Buddha). (Page 488)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bujjhitu: {'def': '【阳】醒来者，觉悟者。(p238)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】醒来者，觉悟者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bunda: {'def': '[Vedic budhna] the root of a tree Abhp 549. (Page 490)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bundika: {'def': 'in cpd. °ābaddha is of uncertain origin; the whole means a sort of seat or bedstead (fixed up or tied together with slats?) Vin.II,149; IV,40, 357. (Page 490)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Buḍḍha: {'def': '【形】年老的，老的。 ~tara, 【形】更老的。(p238)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】年老的，老的。buḍḍhatara,【形】更老的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[for vuḍḍha, pp. of vṛdh, see vaḍḍhati] aged, old D.II,162; J.I,164 (°pabbajita one who has become an ascetic in his old age). Compar. buḍḍhatara DhA.II,239 (v. l. K.B.S. vuḍḍhatara). (Page 488)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bya-: {'def': '﹐= vya-(母音之前的vi- → vy﹐by﹐viy﹐veyy)=vi-﹐viya﹐veyya-。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Byaggha: {'def': '(=vyaggha, veyaggha),【阳】老虎。byagghacamma﹐老虎皮。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】老虎。(p239)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Byagā: {'def': '3rd sg. aor. of vi+gam, to depart, to be lost, perish Th.1, 170. Byaggha [cp. Sk. vyāghra] a tiger J.II,110; Sdhp.388. f. byagghinī Miln.67. (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Byamha: {'def': '[cp. vyamha] a celestial mansion, a Vimāna Vv 523. As vyamha at J.IV,464. (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Byanti°: {'def': 'in °bhavati, bhāva etc. see vyanti°. (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Byantīkaroti: {'def': 'vyantīkaroti, 废止，除去，免除。【过】byantīkari。【过分】byantīkata。【独】byantīkaritvā, byantīkatvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Byapagata: {'def': '[=vy-apa-gata] departed, dispelled Miln.225. (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Byappanā: {'def': '(=vyappanā‹vi+appanā)﹐入定。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Byappatha: {'def': '[so for byappattha; according to Kern, Toev. s. v. the word is a distortion fr. *vyāpṛta (for which usually P. vyāvaṭa) of vy+ā+pṛ3, pṛṇoti to be busy or active] busy, active. Thus Kern, but the trsln is not satisfactory. It occurs only at 2 passages; Vin.IV,2, where combd with vācā, girā, vacībheda, and meaning “mode of speech,” and at Sn.961, where it has the same meaning & is referred by Nd1 472 to a mode of speech & expld by SnA 572 by vacana. Thus the derivation fr. pṛ with vyā° can hardly be claimed to be correct for Bdhgh’s conception of the word; to him it sounded more likely like vy+ā+patha (cp. cpds. vacana-patha & vāda-patha), thus “way of speaking.” (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Byasana: {'def': 'see vyasana. (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐Vyasana﹐【中】不幸，毁灭，破坏。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Byatta: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. P. vyatta; Sk. vyakta] experienced, learned Miln.21. (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Byattatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. byatta] experience, learning Miln.349. See also pari°. (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bya°: {'def': 'etc. (byā°, byu°) words not found under these initials are to be looked up under vya° etc. (Page 491)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Byañjana: {'def': '【中】音节，辅音，告示，标志，咖哩饭菜。(p239)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】音节，辅音，告示，标志，咖哩饭菜。sūpabyañjana, 【中】菜肴，咖哩饭菜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. vyañjana] 1. sign, mark: see vyañjana. -- 2. the letter, as compared with attha, the spirit or meaning; thus in phrase atthato byañjanato ca according to the meaning & the letter Miln.18, 345; Nett 23. As vyañjana is the more usual (& classical) form, other refs. will be found under vyañjana. (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Byā: {'def': '(indecl.) [distorted fr. iva=eva, with metathesis & diaeresis *veyya›*veyyā›*vyā›byā] intensive particle: “just so, certainly, indeed” only in phrase “evaṁ byā kho” Vin.II,26; IV,134=DA.I,27; M.I,130 (evaṁ vyā kho ti evaṁ viya kho C.), 257. (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Byābhaṅgī: {'def': '(f.) [vy+ā+bhañj] 1. a pole for carrying burdens Th.1, 623. -- 2. a flail S.IV,201. (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Byābādha: {'def': '[vy+ā+bādh] evil, wrong, hurt; usually referred to as 3 fold: atta°, para°, ubhaya°, or against oneself, against others, & both -- M.I,416; S.IV,159 (vyā°), 339. (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Byābādheti: {'def': '[denom. fr. byābādha] to injure, hurt, oppress S.V,393 (na kiñci byābādhemi tasaṁ vā thāvaraṁ vā). (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Byādhayissasi: {'def': '﹐vyādheti的【未.2.单】', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Byādheti: {'def': '[Caus. fr. byādhi] to cause to waver, unsettle, agitate, trouble S.I,120; Th.1, 46, 1211. Pass. byādhiyati Kvu II.457 (aor. byādhiyiṁsu). -- pp. byādhita. (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Byādhi: {'def': '[cp. Sk. vyādhi; lit. “upset” fr. vy+ā+dhā] sickness, disease A.I,146; Kvu II.457; Miln.351. (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Byādhita: {'def': '[pp. fr. byādheti] afflicted with disease Th.1, 73; Miln.168. (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Byāma: {'def': '【阳】英寻（测量水深的单位，= 6 英尺）。 ~ppabhā,【阴】佛陀的光环。(p239)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic & P. vyāma cp. Śatap. Br. I.2, 5, 14 a fathom, measured by both hands being extended to their full length, only in phrase °ppabhā a halo extending for a fathom around the Buddha J.I,12, 90; Bu I.45; Miln.75; VvA.213. (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Vyāma,【阳】一寻(身高的长度)。M.91./II,137.：yāvatakvassa kāyo tāvatakvassa byāmo, yāvatakvassa byāmo tāvatakvassa kāyo.(身长为一寻(两手扩展之长)，一寻为身长)。byāmapabhā,【阴】佛陀的光环(身光一寻)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Byāpajjha: {'def': '(‹vy-ā-pad)( =byāpajja)1.麻烦( trouble)。2.恶意(malevolence)。【反】abyāpajjha﹐abyāpajjā﹐无恶意。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. vy-ā-pad] 1. trouble, opp. a° relief M.I,10. -- 2. malevolence; neg. a° benevolence Vin.I,3; M.I,38; cp. avyāpajjha S.IV,296, 371. (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Byāpanna: {'def': '﹐Vyāpanna, (‹vyāpajjati),【形】恶意的(malevolent)。断瞋(逆向行)的方法：1.修慈心(mettānimittassa uggaho)，2.慈心禅(mettābhāvanānuyogo)，3.省察自业之智(kammassakatāpaccavekkhaṇā)，4.多辨别(善恶)(paṭisaṅkhānabahutā)，5.亲近善友(kalyāṇamittatā)，6.适当的谈话(sappāyakathā)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. vyāpajjati] malevolent Sdhp.70; otherwise vy°, e. g. S.II,168 (°citta). (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Byāpāda: {'def': '[fr. vy+ā+pad] ill-will, malevolence, one of the 5 “obstructions” (āvaraṇāni, see e. g. S.V,94; Nd2 379); and of the 4 “bonds” (kāya-ganthā see e. g. Nd1 98). -- M.I,434; S.I,99; It.119; Ps.I,31; II,12; Nd1 149, 207, 386. --vitakka a malevolent or angry thought M.I,11; S.I,203; II,151; III,93; V,417; Nd1 501; Kvu 113. (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(=vyāpāda‹vi(强调)+ā向+pad去﹑走),【阳】瞋(直译：拂逆﹑逆向行)。Byāpajjati cittaṁ etenāti byāpādo, doso.(A-ṭīkā CS:p.2.199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】恶意。(p239)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Byāruddha: {'def': '[pp. of vy+ā+rundh; reading by° in Nd1; vy° in Sn.& SnA; v. l. BB] obstructed, opposed, hindered Sn.936 (aññam-aññehi b. in enmity with each other; =paṭiviruddha Nd1 408), 938 (412 id.; SnA 566=āhata-citta). (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Byāsatta: {'def': '[pp. of vy+ā+sañj, cp.āsatta1] 已执著(clinging or attached to)。byāsattamānasa﹐已执著的心(possessed with longing)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of vy+ā+sañj, cp. āsatta1] attached to, clinging to, in cpd. °mānasa possessed with longing Dh.47 (=sampatte vā asampatte vā lagga-mānasa DhA.I,361), 287 (cp. DhA.III,433; lagganatāya sattamānasa). (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Byāvaṭa: {'def': '[vy+ā+vṛ] covered, adorned with VvA.213 (rūpakāya byāvaṭa jana; v. l. byāgata). the meaning (wrongly given as “adorned”) is to be deleted. The reading at VvA.213 is doubtful. It may be kāyavyāvaṭa, but dassana-vyāvaṭa is to be preferred (see under vyāvaṭa). (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Byūha: {'def': '(cp. Sk. & P. vyūha fr. vi+vah),【阳】1.军队的排列，群衆。2.堆，聚集(a heap, collection)。3.死巷，死路( a (blind) alley, cul-de-sac)。senābyūha,【阳】布署。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】军队的排列，群众，聚集。(p239)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. & P. vyūha fr. vi+vah] 1. the array or arrangement of troops in particular positions, order of parade or battle DA.I,85. Three formations of troops are mentioned at J.II,404 & 406, viz. paduma-vyūha (lotus formation), cakka° (wheel formn), sakaṭa° (cart formn). -- 2. a heap, collection, in byūhaṁ karoti to put into a (well-arranged) heap Miln.2 (kacavaraṁ). ‹-› 3. a (blind) alley, cul-de-sac Vin.IV,271 (byūhan nāma yen’eva pavisanti ten’eva nikkhamanti). (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Byūhati: {'def': '[denom. fr. byūha] to stand in array (like a troop) VvA.104 (byūhanto, v. l. brahmanto). (Page 492)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bādha: {'def': '【阴】妨害，预防。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】妨害，预防。(p236)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. bādh] lit. pressing (together), oppression, hindrance, annoyance J.VI,224. Cp. sam°. (Page 485)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bādhaka: {'def': '【形】避免的，不断袭击的，阻隔的。bādhakatta,【中】妨害的事实。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】避免的，不断袭击的，阻隔的。 ~tta, 【中】妨害的事实。(p236)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bādh] oppressing, harassing, injurious Vism.496 (dukkhā aññaṁ na °ṁ); VvA.214; PvA.175. (Page 485)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bādhakatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. bādhaka] the fact of being oppressive or injurious Vism.496. (Page 485)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bādhana: {'def': '【中】妨害，痛苦，陷阱，捕捉。(p236)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. bādh] 1. snaring, catching (of animals etc.) S.V,148; J.I,211. -- 2. hindrance DA.I,132. ‹-› 3. affliction, injury, hurting Vism.495; PvA.116. (Page 485)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】妨害，痛苦，陷阱，捕捉。A.1.14.：Appābādhānaṁ yadidaṁ Bākulo.(无病者(appābādhānaṁ)，是薄俱罗(Bākulo))。appābādho appātaṅko, 无病者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bādhati: {'def': '(bādh + a), 阻碍，阻隔，使痛苦，诱捕。【过】 bādhi。【过分】bādhita。【独】 bādhitva。(p236)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic bādhate, bādh; Idg. *bheidh to force, cp. Goth. baidjan, Ohg. beitten. See Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fido. In Pali there seems to have taken place a confusion of roots bādh and bandh, see bādheti & other derivations] to press, weigh on; oppress, hinder, afflict, harm D.II,19; J.I,211; IV,124; Vism.400; DhA.I,24. grd. bādhitabba ThA.65; Pass. bādhiyati to be afflicted, to become sore, to suffer SnA 481; ThA.282; ppr. bādhiyamāna PvA.33 (so read for °ayamāna), 69. -- Caus. bādheti; pp. bādhita (q. v.). Cp. vi°. (Page 485)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bādh骚扰+a), 阻碍，阻隔，使痛苦，诱捕。【过】bādhi。【过分】bādhita。【独】bādhitva。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bādheti: {'def': '[Caus. of bādhati; the confusion with bandhati is even more pronounced in the Caus. According to Kern, Toev. s. v. we find bādhayati for bandhayati in Sk. as well] 1. to oppress, afflict, hurt, injure J.VI,224; PvA.198 (bādheyya=heṭhayeyya). grd. bādhanīya PvA.175. Cp. paribādheti in same sense. -- 2. to bind, catch, snare Th.1, 454; 2, 299; J.II,51 (aor. bādhayiṁsu); IV,342; V,295, 445 (pot. bādhaye= bādheyya C. on p. 447; vv. ll. baddh°, bandh°). grd. bādhetabba S.IV,298. (Page 485)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(bādh骚扰+e), 压迫，使痛苦，骚扰，诱捕，避免。【过】bādhesi。【现分】bādhenta。【独】bādhetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(bādh + e), 压迫，使痛苦，骚扰，诱捕，避免。【过】 ~esi。【现分】 bādhenta。【独】 bādhetvā。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bādhin: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. bādh] (lit. oppressing), snaring; as n. a trainer Vin.II,26 (Ariṭṭha gaddha°-pubba); IV,218 (id.). (Page 485)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bādhita: {'def': '(Bādheti的【过分】) 压迫，使痛苦，骚扰。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of bādhati] oppressed, pressed hard, harassed Dh.342 (but taken by C. as “trapped, snared,” baddha DhA.IV,49); ThA.65. (Page 485)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bāhati: {'def': 'see bāheti. (Page 486)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bāheti: {'def': '¹ [Caus. of bahati3 or denom. fr. bahi] to keep away, to keep outside, to ward off; only with ref. to pāpa (pāpaka) to keep away (from) sin S.I,141 (bāhetvā pāpāni); Sn.519=Nd2 464a (bāhetvā pāpakāni); Dh.267; a popular etymology of brāhmaṇa (pāpaṁ bahenti) D.III,94 (bāhitvā, better bāhetvā, expld by panuditvā DhA.III,393; v. l. K vāh°). -- pp. bāhita (q. v.). See also nib°, pari°. (Page 487)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vah+e), 防范，防止，除去。【过】bāhesi。【过分】bāhita。【独】bāhetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vah + e), 防范，防止，除去。【过】 bāhesi。【过分】 bāhita。【独】 bāhetvā。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [Caus. of bahati4, cp. Sk. vāhayati] to carry, see sam° (sambāhana, meaning rubbing, stroking). Whether atibāheti belongs here, is doubtful. (Page 487)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bāhika: {'def': '(adj.) [=bāhiya] foreign in °raṭṭha-vāsin living in a foreign country J.III,432 (or is it N.? Cp. J.VII.p. 94). (Page 486)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bāhira: {'def': '【形】外部，外部的，外国的。【中】外面。bāhiraka,【形】外道的，局外人。bāhirakapabbajjā,【阴】外道出家人(佛教以外的出家人)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】外部，外部的，外国的。【中】外面。 ~ka, 【形】外道的，局外人。 ~kapabbajjā, 【阴】外道出家人（佛教以外的出家人）。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bahi, as Sk. bāhya fr. bahis, cp. also bāhiya] 1. external, outside (opp. abbhantara inside), outer, foreign D.II,75; A.IV,16; Dh.394 (fig. in meaning of 2); J.I,125 (antara° inside & outside); 337 (out of office, out of favour, of ministers); VI,384 (bāhiraṁ karoti to turn out, turn inside out); Pv IV.11 (nagarassa b.); Miln.281 (°abbhantara dhana); VvA.68 (°kittibhāva fact of becoming known outside). --santara° (adj.) [=sa-antara] including the inward & outward parts D.I,74; A.III,25; Th.1, 172; J.I,125. -- 2. external to the individual, objective (opp. ajjhattika subjective) M.III,274 (cha āyatanā); J.IV,402 (°vatthuṁ ayācitvā ajjhattikassa nāmaṁ gaṇhāti); Dhs.674 (cp. trsl. p. 207); Vbh.13; Miln.215; Vism.450. -- 3. heretical, outsider in religious sense, non-Buddhist, freq. applied to the Brahmanic religion & their practice (samaya) Kvu 251 (+puthujjana-pakkhe ṭhita); DhA.III,378 (=mana, i. e. Bhagavato sāsanato bahiddhā). -- Cases as adv. bāhirato from outside, from a foreign country J.I,121; bāhire outside (the Buddhist order) Dh.254. --assāda finding his enjoyment in outward things A.I,280 (Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests “inclined towards heretic views”). --āsa one whose wishes are directed outwards, whose desires are turned to things external Th.1, 634. --kathā non-religious discourse, profane story Miln.24 (applied to the introductory chapter, thus “outside story” may be translated). --tittha doctrine of outsiders J.III,473. --dāna gift of externals, gift of property as opposed to gift of the person J.IV,401; VI,486; Dāvs III,33. --pabbajjā the ascetic life outside the community of the Buddha; Brahmanic saintly life (thus equal to isi-pabbajjā. cp. bāhiraka°). J.III,352; IV,305. --bhaṇḍa property, material things, objects J.IV,401. --mantā ritualistic texts (or charms) of religions other than the Buddha’s J.III,27. --rakkhā protection of external means S.I,73. --lomi with the fleece outside (of a rug) Vin.II,108. --samaya doctrine of the outsiders, i. e. Brahmins DhA.III,392. (Page 486)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bāhiraka: {'def': '(adj.) [=bāhira, but specialised in meaning bāhira 3] outsider, non-religious, non-Buddhist, heretic, profane S.II,267; A.I,73; III,107; Kvu 172 (isayo); VvA.67 (itthi). --kathā unreligious discussion, profane story KhA 118 (cp. bāhirakathā). --tapa=foll. J.I,390. --pabbajjā the ascetic life as led by disciples of other teachers than the Buddha, esp. Brahmanic (cp. bāhira° and BSk. bāhirako mārgaḥ, e. g. MVastu I.284; II,210; II,223) J.III,364; DhA.I,311. (Page 486)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bāhiratta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. bāhira] being outside (of the individual), externality Vism.450. (Page 486)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】外在性。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】外在性。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

【經文資訊】
【原始資料】原始资料皆来自网络
【其他事項】本資料庫可自由免費流通，詳細內容請參閱【中華電子佛典協會資料庫版權宣告】